IMAGE  EVALUATIO*^; 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


If  1^  in 
I  ^  a 

ill  1.8 


1.25      1.4 

1.6 

^ 6"     - 

► 

V 


<^ 


/; 


oS»    ■  :> 


>  ■> 

7    .V 


.%..^' 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


33  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  NY.  14580 

(716)  873-4503 


^ 


V 


iV 


qjj 


:\ 


\ 


% 


.V 


^ 


«? 


TV 


6^ 


^ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  IVEicroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notaa/Notea  tachniquaa  at  bibliographiquaa 


The  Inatituta  haa  attamptad  to  obtain  tha  beat 
original  copy  availabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibliographically  uniqua. 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  imagaa  in  tha 
raproduction,  or  which  may  aignificantly  changa 
tha  uaual  mathod  of  filming,  ara  chackad  below. 


□    Coloured  covera/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


r~1   Covera  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommagAe 


□   Covera  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurAe  et/ou  pelliculAe 


D 


Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


I      I   Coloured  maps/ 


Cartes  giographiquas  en  couleur 
Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 


I      I    Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

□   Coloured  pletes  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 


n 


Bound  with  other  material/ 
ReliA  avec  d'autres  documents 


[~71    Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 


D 


D 


along  interior  margin/ 

La  reliure  serrde  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 

distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  intAriaure 

Blank  ieaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
'  eve  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pagea  blanches  ajoutAes 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissant  dans  le  texte, 
mals,  lorsque  cela  Atait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  AtA  filmAes. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commantaires  supplAmantairas; 


L'Institut  a  microfilm*  le  meilleur  exempiaira 
qu'il  lui  a  At*  poaaibia  de  ae  procurer.  Lea  ditaila 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  aont  paut-Atre  uniquea  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mAthode  normale  de  f ilmage 
aont  indiqu6s  ci-dassous. 

□   Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

□   Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagAes 

□   Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaurAes  et/ou  peiliculAea 

I — I    Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 


D 


Pages  dAcolorAes,  tachatAes  ou  piquAes 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  dAtachAes 


j~n    Showthrough/ 


Transparence 


□    Quality  of  print  varies/ 
QuaiitA  inAgala  de  I'impreasion 

I — I    Includes  supplementary  material/ 


Comprend  du  materiel  supplAmentaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seute  Edition  disponibie 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscur9d  by  errata 
slips,  tisoues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  imagV 
Las  pages  totalement  ou  partiallement 
obscurcies  par  un  feui'iet  d'errata,  une  pelure. 
etc.,  ont  At*  filmAes  A  nouveau  de  fapon  A 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  oossibie. 


T 
t( 


T 

P 
o 
fi 


G 
b 

tl 

SI 

o 

fi 

si 
o 


T 

8 

T 

d 

b 

ri 
ri 
n 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  latio  chocked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film*  au  taux  de  rAduction  indiquA  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


26X 


30X 


y 


12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


Th«  copy  filmed  h«r«  hat  b««n  raproducad  thanks 
to  tha  ganarosity  of: 

Library  Division 

Provincial  Archives  of  British  Columbia 


L'axamplaira  film4  fut  raproduit  grAca  A  la 
gAnArositi  da: 

Library  Division 

Provincial  Archives  of  B'itish  Columbia 


Tha  imagas  appaaring  hara  ara  tha  bast  quality 
possibia  consSdaring  tha  condition  and  lagibility 
of  tha  original  copy  and  in  kaaping  with  tha 
filming  contract  cpacifications. 


Las  imagas  suivantas  ont  AtA  raproduitas  avac  la 
plus  grand  soin,  compta  tanu  da  la  condition  at 
da  la  nettatA  da  l'axamplaira  filmA.  at  an 
conformity  avac  las  conditions  du  contrat  da 
filmaga. 


Original  copias  in  printad  papar  covars  ara  filmad 
beginning  with  tha  front  covar  and  anding  on 
tha  last  paga  with  a  printad  or  illustratad  impras- 
sion.  or  tha  back  covar  whan  appropriata.  All 
othar  original  copias  ara  filmad  beginning  on  tha 
first  paga  with  a  printad  or  illustratad  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimia  sont  filmAs  an  commenpant 
par  la  premier  plat  at  an  tarminant  soit  par  la 
darniAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration.  soit  par  la  second 
plat,  selon  le  cas.  Tous  las  autras  axemplaires 
originaux  sont  filmAs  en  commen^ant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  derniAre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 


The  last  recorded  ftame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — ^  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED "),  or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END  "), 
whichever  applies. 


Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
derniAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  le  symbole  ^^>  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  le 
symbols  V  signifie  "FIN". 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
filmAs  A  des  taux  de  reduction  diff Arents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  dtre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clichA,  il  est  filmA  A  partir 
de  Tangle  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  A  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'imagas  nAcessaira.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mAthoda. 


1 

2 

3 

32X 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

T] 


BAi 


THE  COAST  INDIANS  OF  SOUTHERN  ALASKA  AND 
NORTHERN  BRITISH  COLUMBIA. 


By  Enngn  ALBERT  P.  NIBLACK,  U.  S.  Txvj. 


BASED  ON  THE  COLLECTIONS  IN  THE  U.  S.  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  AND  ON 
THE  PERSONAL  OBSERVATION  OF  THE  WRITER  IN  CONNEC- 
TION WITH  THE  SURVEY  OF  ALASKA  IN  THE  SEASONS* 
OF  1885,  1886  AND  1887. 


H,  Mis.  142,  pt.  2 15 


'jsia 


Jl 


9896 


11 


V 

I 

/ 

( 


SYNOPSIS  OF  CONTENTS. 

0 


1.  Chorooraphy  of  Soothkrn  Alaska  and  Northern  British  Columbia  ; 
Progress  of  Ethnological  work  in  tliis  region, — Scope  of  this  paper,— ClaM- 
sification  of  Indian  stocks, — History. 
n.  Environment:  Organic  and  inorganic     Ciiaracterihtics   ok    Indians: 
Physical,  emotional,  intellectual,  moral,  and  icsthetic  characteristics. 

III.  Rboulative  Organization  :  Consaugiiineal,_Poliiical,  and  Industrial.     Ori- 

gin of  "mother-rule"  and  "father-rule" — Toteraisni  and  Tribal  organ- 
ization :  Tliugit,  Kaigani,  Haida,  and  Tsiinsliian  Totems — Origin  of 
Totemiam— Chiefs  and  petty  chiefs,  freemen,  and  slaves — Division  of 
labor — Inheritance  and  rightii  of  property. 

IV.  MCTiLATIONs:  Lip,  ear,  and  nose  ornaments;  tattooing;  painting  the  body. 

Ornaments:  Necklaces,  pendants,  and  bracelets.  Primitive  clothind  : 
M>ceremonial  blankets  and  head-dresses ;  the  art  of  weaving ;  modern  dress ; 
rain  cloaks;  armor;  helmets  and  head-dresses ;  masks;  batons;  blank- 
ets; coats;  leggings;  slave-killers;  ceremonial  paraphernalia  in  general. 
V.  Food:  Its  preparation  and  procurement.  Implements  and  Weapons:  In- 
dustrial implements  and  tools ;  hammers  and  mauls ;  n  izes ;  knives ; 
scrapers;  mortars  and  pestles;  wedges;  chisels;  drills;  paint-brushes; 
weapons  of  war  and  of  the  chase;  clubs;  daggers;  bows  and  arrows; 
■pears;  fur-seal  spears;  aalmon  spears;  fishhooks;  fish-rakes;  tish-bas- 
kets;  lines;  lloats;  drag-nets;  dip-nets;  weirs ;  bird  and  other  laud  traps ; 
canoes;  canoe  outfits;  canoe-making.  Hunting  and  kisuinu:  Salmon; 
halibut;  herring  and  eulactaon ;  spawn ;  sea  otter;  seals ;  deer;  mountain 
goats  and  sheep ;  bears. 

VI.  LandwORKs:  fortifications.  Temporary  dwellings:  Tents  and  snmnier 
honses.  Houses  :  Details  of  honse  constrnction.  Villages  :  Names  of 
villages;  groups  of  villages;  residence. 
VII.  Arts  astd  Industries  :  Raw  'materials ;  ropes  and  cords ;  mats ;  baskets ; 
dishes ;  spoons ;  liousehold  boxes  and  chests ;  zradlos ;  bototehold  uten- 
sils; paints ;  metal  working;  lumber  and  wood-work.  Paintings,  draw- 
INOS,  AND  carvings;  TotCDiic  and  commoniorative  coluiunH.  Music: 
Singing;  drums,  rattles  and  whistles. 
VIII.  Productions:  Rearing  and  cultivation.  Loco.motion  :  Cauoo  travel. 
Wealth:  Currency;  property  in  land;  coppers;  slaves.  Trade:  Ex- 
change of  commodities. 

IX.  War  AND  Peace:  War  customs:  scalping;  duels.     Peace  cnstonis :  treatiesof 
peaoe. 
X.  Vices  and  Demoralisation  dk  the  Indians  :  (iiinibling ;  run* ;   Iioochi- 
noo;  tobacco;  immorality. 

XI.  8HAMANISM  :  AVitofauraft  trial :  superstition;  sickness  and  death  ;  medicines; 


treatment  of  the  siok. 


sei7 


228 


SYNOPSIS   OF   CONTENTS. 


XII.  Mortuary  Customs:  Ancient  sepulture;  depositorieH  of  Mhea;  mortnary 
colnmns ;  ouatoms  of  the  Tlingit,  Haida,  and  Tttimsbittu ;  modern  «;uh- 
toins ;  Christian  burial ;  Shaman  burial. 

XIII.  Frasts.    Dakcbs.   Ceremonies.    Potlacubs.    Theatricals.    Initiatory 

ceremonies:  Marriage;  childbirth;  naming;  piercing  the  ears  and 
nose;  tattooing;  paberty;  bringing  out ;  Helf-namiug ;  chief tainoy ;  glo- 
rification of  the  dead.  Festive  Cerbmoniks :  Welcome;  trade;  honse- 
bnilding;  potlaches;  ceremonial  dances ;  "cultua"  dances;  theatricals. 

XIV.  Ornbral  Character  of  the  Traditions.    Myths  and  Folk-lorc— Bin- 

LIOGRAPHY. 

XV.  Obneral  Notes:  Relations  and  affiniticH  of  the  Tliugit,  Haida,  Tsimshian, 
and  Kwakiutl— the  Haida — Roiiiark^  on  the  Maori  of  New  Zealand — the 
Kaigani — Ethnological  work  to  be  done.* 


*  To  complete,  in  a  measure,  the  study  of  the  ethnology  of  this  region,  there  should 
be  added  neveral  other  chapters.    The  data  nt  hand  does  not,  however.  Just  yet 
warrant  this  undertaking.    Chapter  xiv,  and  others  of  the  above,  are  very  incom- 
plete.   In  itself  Chapter  xiv  would  take  several  volumes  to  cover  the  ground  satis- 
factorily.   A  synopsis  of  the  chapters  needed  is  appended  to  indicate  their  scope. 
XVI.  Creed  and  Cult:  Superstitions;  religious  beliefs  and  practices;  religious 
organization:  regulative,  Shamanism;  operative,  fetichism.     Shaman- 
istic priestcraft ;  paraphernalia;  religious  rites  of  the  Shaman.    Secret 
and  religious  organisations  in  the  cribo;  the  relations  of  the  ceremonies 
to  the  religious  beliefs. 
XVIF.  Language  OF  the  VARIOUS  Indian  stocks  :  grammatical  structure ;  vocab- 
ularies; dialects;  linguistic  attinities  of  the  different  stocks. 
XVIII.  Ethnical  affluities  aud  relatiouships'of  the  various  Indian  stocks  of  the  North 
West  Coast  as  far  as  indicated  by  all  the  foregoing. 
The  collection  made  by  Lieut.  George  F.  Emmons,  U.  S.  Navy,  in  south- 
eastern  Alaska,  now  in  the  possession  of  the  American  Museum  of  Natural 
History,  New  York  City,  has  been  drawn  upon  for  twenty  or  more  illustra- 
tions.    His  collection  admirably  supplements  that  in  the  National  Museum, 
and  it  is  to  bo  regretted  that  the  two  collections  have  not  btieu  brought  to- 
gether. 


AUTHORITIES  QUOTED. 


Dixon  (Oeorge).    A  Voyage  Koiiud  the  World.    London,  1789. 

Portlock  (Nathaniel).    A  Voyage  Round  th«  World.    Loudon,  1789. 

Vancouver  (Oeorge).    A  Voyage  of  Dimsovery  to  the  North  Pacific  Ocean  and  round 

the  World.    3  vols.    London,  179H. 
Mackenzie    (Alex,).    Voyages    from    Montreal    through    the   Cuutinciit  of  North 

America  in  1789-'93.    l,ondon,  1801. 
Iiang8dorff(G.  H.  von).    Voyages  and  Travels  (180:V-'07).    2  vols.    Loudon,  1H1;{-'14. 
Lisiansky  (Urey).    A  Voyage  Round  the  World  in  the  Years  1803-'0r).     London,  1814. 
Dnnn  (John).    History  of  the  Oregon  Territory.    London,  1844. 
Simpson  (Sir  George).    Narrative  of  a  Journey  Round  the  World,  1841  and  184'i. 

London,  1847. 
Poole  (Francis).    Queen  Charlotte  Islands.    London,  1872. 
Dall(W.  H.).    Alaska  and  its  Resources.    Boston,  1870. 
Bancroft  (H.  H.).    Native  Races,  vol.  I,  Wild  Tribes.    San  Francisco,  1883. 
Petroff  (Ivan).    Report  on  the  Population,  lud  'stries,  and  Remurcos  of  Alaska. 

Washington,  1884. 
Dawson  (O.  M.).    Report  on  the  Queen  Charlotte  Vdands.     B.  In  Geological  Survey 

of  Canada.    Montreal,  1880. 
Powell  (J.  W.).    Annnal  Reports  of  Bureau  of  Ethnology.     Washington. 
Swan  (J.  O.).    Publications,  Manuscripts,  Notes,  Letters,  and  Collections  in  National 

Maseum.    Port  Townsend,  Washington  Territory. 
Boas  (Dr.  Franz.).    Publications,  Notes,  Letters,  etc.     Worcester,  Mass. 
Frazer  (J.  G.).    Totemisra.    Edinburgh,  1887. 

Other  brief  references  are  made  in  foot  uotes  in  the  text.    Tlie  ,ibove  are  tln>  prin- 
cipal authorities  quoted. 

889 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE    I. 

General  view  of  Kasa-an  Village,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska. 

From  a  photograph  by  the  author. 

Tliis  gciicral  view  is  hIiowii  in  ilctail  in  Plates  II  and  III.  Tlu'  villnge  is  on  the 
iiortli  shoii-  of  Skowl  Arm.  a  hrancli  of  Kasa-an  lijiy,  al)out  four  niik's  from  tlit? 
entranoe.  The  present  rliii'f  is  Satral)-tan.  a  neplii'w  of  tlu'  former  well-known 
Chief  Hkowl.  The  population  is  alNiut  l.")0  souls.  It  is  not  in  the  regular  .steamer 
traek  and  is  seldom  visited,  hut  it  is  esiKHiially  rich  in  ethnological  material.  The 
inhahitants  are  Kaigani  of  the  Haitian  stoc-k,  and  .s])eak  the  Haitian  language  with 
little  motliticatioii.  Their  customs  are  similar  to  the  Haidan,  hut  have  Ih^u  much 
nioditied  hy  the  influence  of  the  TUngit. 


!      I 


T 


Report  of  N»t'on»i  MuMum,  1888  -NiblieW 


Plati  I. 


1^  V 


THE  COAST  INDIANS  OF  SOUTHERN  ALASKA  AND  NORTHERN  BRITISH 

COLUMBIA. 


By  Ensign  Albert  P.  Niblack,  U.  S.  Navy. 


I. 


;'', 

¥ 


"t 


CHOROGBAPHT    OF    SOUTHERN   ALASKA     AND    NORTHERN    BRITISH 

COLUMBIA. 

From  Paget  Sound  in  Washington  Territory  to  Mount  St.  Elias  in 
southern  Alaska,  the  coast  line  is  broken  into  a  continuous  archipelago. 
The  Cascade  Mountains,  running  throughout  this  territory  parallel  to 
the  coast  line,  leaves,  adjacent  to  the  Pacific,  a  strip  of  country  about 
150  miles  broad  and  1,000  miles  long,  called  generally  "The  North  West 
Coast."  Through  the  narrow  channels  of  this  archipelago  winds  the 
steamer  route  to  Sitka,  a  route  unparalleled  for  its  length  and  the  wild 
magnificence  of  its  scenery.  Warmed  by  Asiatic  currents  and  moistened 
by  a  phenomenal  rain  fall,  this  region  is  less  rigorous  in  its  climate 
than  generally  supposed.  Thickly  wooded  with  pine,  fir,  spruce,  and 
hemlock,  the  vogetation  spreads  from  the  water's  edge  to  the  snow  line 
limit  of  the  loftiest  mountains.  The  forests  are  stocked  with  game  and 
the  waters  with  food  fishes.  The  soil,  though  not  deep,  is  fertile,  and 
would  itself  suppor*^  the  native  population  without  the  other  gifts  with 
which  nature  has  so  lavishly  endowed  them.  In  every  crevice  in  the 
rocks,  where  the  soil  is  scantiest,  a  stunted  tree  rears  its  head.  In  the 
spring  the  flrre^ts  are  gay  with  ferns,  shrubs,  and  brightly  colored  wild 
flowfc.3,  and  in  the  summer  a  large  variety  of  edible  roots  and  berries 
are  found  in  profusion. 

Dotted  throughout  this  region  are  the  winter  villages  of  the  Coast 
Indians,  whose  ethnic  variations  are  somewhat  marked  as  we  go  north, 
but  who  differ  as  a  group  quite  materially  from  the  hunting  Indians  of 
the  interior,  and  more  sharply  from  the  Eskimo.  In  contrast  with  the 
fierce,  revengeful  Tinne,  they  are  generally  mild  in  disposition.  In 
physical  characteristics  they  are  shorter,  the  cheek  bones  are  less  prom- 
inent, the  nose  is  straighter,  and  the  face  rounder  and  fuller.    From 


232 


REPORT    OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


the  Columbia  River  to  Mount  St.  Elia«  these  Coast  ludians  have  marked 
ethnic  affiliations,  but  the  linguistic  variations  are  great,  and  in  the 
Houthern  region  are  now  the  subject  of  systematic  iTovcrn mental  investi- 
gation. 

Comparative  philology  and  mythology,  a  study  of  the  primitive  cus- 
toms and  habits  of  the  geographical  and  linguistic  groups,  and  com- 
parisons of  the  ethnological  material  and  collections  from  this  region, 
can  alone  throw  light  upon  the  history  Aud  ethnic  affinities  of  the  various 
Indian  stocks. 

ETHNOLOGICAL  BESEABOH   IN  BBITISH  COLUMBIA. 

In  British  Columbia,  the  philological  and  mythological  part  of  the 
work  has  been  commenced  by  Dr.  W.  F.  Tolmie  and  Prof.  George  M. 
Dawson,  in  connection  with  the  geological  and  natoral  history  survey 
of  Canada,  and  is  now  the  subject  of  special  investigation  by  a  commit- 
tee of  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  under  a 
grant  for  the  purpose.  Dr.  I.anz  Boas  is  conducting  the  work  for  the 
committee  in  the  field,  and  the  result  is  being  from  time  to  time  pub- 
lished. 

For  Washington  Territory  and  Alaska,  this  investigation  is  in  the 
hands  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution. 

SCOPE  OF  THIS  PAPER. 

The  facts  here  published  were  gathered  by  the  writer  in  the  summer 
seasons  (May  to  October  inclusive)  of  1885,  1886,  and  1887,  while  on 
duty  in  the  survey  of  Alaska  now  being  carried  on  by  the  officers  of  the 
Navy,  under  the  direction  of  the  U.  S.  Coast  and  Geodeticj  Survey.  The 
material  presented  has  little  bearing  on  the  philology  and  mythology  of 
the  region  embraced  in  the  survey.  Sucli  work  must  come  later,  be 
undertaken  more  systematically,  and  carried  on  in  the  winter  mouths, 
when  the  Indians  are  located  in  their  permanent  villages.  The  writer 
is  indebted  to  Judge  J.  G.  Swan,  of  PK)rt  Townsend,  Washington  Ter- 
ritory, for  valuable  notes  on  the  Saida  of  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  His 
collections  from  the  North  West  Coast,  under  the  direction  of  the  Smith- 
sonian Institution,  form  the  bulk  of  the  ethnological  material  in  the 
National  Museum  from  the  region  about  Dixon  entrance,  and  have  been 
freely  used  in  the  accompanying  illufstrations. 

CLASSIFICATION. 

A  provisional  classification  of  the  Indians  of  the  North  West  Coast, 
from  Puget  Sound  to  Cape  St.  Ellas,  based  on  philological  considera- 
tions, would,  according  to  Dr.  Franz  Boas,  divide  them  into  three 
groups,  as  follows : 

Group  I.  Salish,  Kwakiutl,  and  Wakashan  (Nutkan). 

Group  II.  Tsimshian. 

Group  HI.  Tlingit  and  Haidii, 


m 


■A 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    NORTHWEST   COAST. 


233 


"  Tt  seems  that  the  languages  eunraerated  above  represent  as  mauy 
different  linguistic  stocks,  so  far  as  our  limited  knowledge  extends."* 

A  classification  based  on  other  than  philological  and  geographical 
groupings  is  out  of  the  question  at  present.  A  comparative  study  of 
the  customs,  habits,  mythology,  and  beliefs  of  all  the  tribes  of  this  re- 
gion can  alone  form  the  basis  of  an  ethnological  classification.  Charts  I 
and  II  show  the  location  of  the  different  Indian  stocks  on  the  North 
West  Coast.  This  paper  deals  principally  with  the  tribes  around 
Dixon  entrance,  and  in  our  own  Territory  of  Alaska,  of  which  Chart  I 
shows  the  geographical  grouping  into  stocks.  The  Kaigani,  on  the 
southern  part  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  are  a  branch  of  the  Haidan 
stock.  On  Annette  Island,  at  Port  Chester,  will  be  seen  the  location 
of  the  Tsimshian  emigrants.  This  is  a  colony  that,  in  1887,  under  the 
leadership  of  the  missionary,  Mr.  Duncan,  abandoned  MetlahKatlah- 
British  Columbia,  owing  to  difficulties  with  tin  civil  and  eclesiastical 
authorities.  The  Indians  seem  very  largely  to  have  sympathised  with 
the  Rev.  Mr.  Duncan,  as  they  voluntarily  followed  him  to  our  own  Ter- 
ritory, where  the  settlement  is  called  Hew  Metlah-Katlah. 

In  Chart  II  no  attempt  is  made  to  enumerate  the  tribes  comprising 
the  different  stocks.  It  is  interesting,  however,  to  observe  that  the 
Bilqula  are  Salishan.  t 

HISTORY. 

European  civilization  has  borne  with  crushing  force  upon  the  Indians 
of  the  Northwest  coast.  Demoralized  and  staggered  by  contact  with 
the  whites,  the  remnant  of  the  former  population  is  just  beginning  to 
rally  from  the  blow.  Nothing  places  the  Northern  tribes  higher  in  the 
scale  of  intelligence  than  the  philosophy  with  which  they  are  adapting 
themselves  to  their  changed  environment,  retaining  their  advantageous 
native  customs  and  accepting  from  us  only  whali  contributes  to  their 
comfort  and  welfare.  The  greatest  curse  to  them  has  been  alcohol, 
and  against  this  temptation  they  seem  absolutely  unable  to  struggle. 

The  early  European  voyagers  to  this  region  have  preserved  in  their 
narratives  rough  accounts  of  the  habits,  customs,  and  actual  condition 
of  the  natives.  Our  earliest  acquaintance  dates  from  the  visit  of  Ber- 
ing in  1741,  coming  from  the  north,  tn  1774-'75  the  Spanish  navigators, 
Juan  Perez  and  La  Bodega  y  Quadra,  coming  from  the  south,  explored 
the  coast  to  the  northward.  In  1778  Captain  Cook,  having  with  him 
Vancouver  as  a  midshipman,  made  his  celebrated  visit  tr  this  region. 
After  that  several  mercantile  companies  sent  ships  thither  to  trade. 


•  Science,  vol.  x  .    No,  299,  p.  194. 

t"Amoug  the  liiiKiiistic  results  of  my  jouruey  the  most  interesting  are  the  dis* 
covery  of  three  unknown  dialects  of  the  Salish  stock  and  the  establishment  of 
the  fact  that  the  Bilqula,  who  are  of  Salish  lineage,  must  have  lived  at  one  time 
wi^h  other  Salish  tribes  near  the  sea."—NoteK  on  Ethnology  of  liritith  Columbia  (Am, 
I'hilolitg.  Soc,  Nov.  18,  1887,  p.  42vM,  by  Dr.  Frnuz  Hoas. 


1 


Hi' 


111 


234 


EEPORT    OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


notably  Captain  Meares  (1786),  of  the  East  India  Company,  and  Cap- 
tains Portlock  and  Dixon  (1787),  of  the  King  George's  Sound  Com- 
pany. In  1788  several  American  ships,  representing  a  Boston  com- 
pany, also  appeared  on  the  coast.  In  1789  in  the  Washington,  Captain 
Oray  explored  the  east  coast  of  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  and,  in  1791, 
Captain  Ingraham  anchored  in  a  harbor  in  the  southeast  part  of  this 
same  archipelago.  In  the  same  year,  Marchand,  representing  a  French 
ctmpany,  also  traded  with  these  islanders. 

In  1792-'94  Captain  Vancouver  made  his  admirable  reconnaissance  of 
the  coast  in  search  of  a  northwest  passage  to  the  Pacific  from  the 
Atlantic. 

In  1793  Mackenzie  descended  the  Salmon  Biver  and  reached  salt 
water  in  latitude  52°  21'  N.,  in  the  country  of  the  Bilqnla. 

With  the  formal  occupation,  by  Bar.4uoff,  of  a  fortified  post  at  Sitka 
in  1800,  the  natives  of  the  Northwest  coast  may  be  said  to  have  entered 
upon  a  new  phase  in  their  civilization,  due  to  contact  with  the  whites. 
A  few  years  later  this  post  was  destroyed  and  the  occupants  massa- 
cred by  the  Tlingit;  but,  in  1805,  Bardnoff  and  Lisiansky  re-established 
it  on  the  site  now  occupied  by  the  town  of  Sitka,  called  by  them  New 
Archangel.  From  this  time  to  the  purchase  of  Alaska  by  the  United 
States  in  1867,  the  history  of  this  region  is  largely  the  history  of  the 
Russian -American  and  the  Hudson  Bay  Comi  .^ny,  the  latter  of  which 
still  continues  to  be  such  a  powerful  commercial  factor  in  British 
America. 


■i  I 


and  Cap- 
and  Com- 
►8 ton  com- 
u,  Captain 
d, in  1791, 
art  of  tliJH 

a  French 

lissance  of 
c  from  the 

iached  salt 

3t  at  Sitka 
ve  entered 
;he  whites, 
uts  massa- 
established 
them  New 
the  United 
ory  of  the 
ir  of  which 
in  British 


n. 

\ENVlltONMENT—OROANlC  AND  INORGANIC;  AND  CHARACTERISTICS  OF 
THE  INDIANS-l'HTSICAL,  EMOTIONAL,  INTELLECTUAL,  MORAL,  AND 
^ESTHETIC. 

ENVIRONMENT. 

The  physical  character  of  the  region  occupied  by  the  Tlingit,  Haida, 
and  Tsimshian  is  similar  in  general  to  that  of  sonthern  British  Colum- 
bia, but  for  local  reasons  this  area  has  a  peculiar  climate.  A  branch  of 
the  warm  Japanese  current  sweeps  along  the  coast,  and,  coming  in  con- 
tact with  the  colder  air  and  water  of  the  north,  gives  rise  to  excessive 
humidity,  producing  in  summer  the  rains  and  fogs,  and  in  winter  the 
snows  and  sleets,  that  are  so  prevalent  in  this  region.  Thermometrical 
observations,  extending  over  a  period  of  fifty  years  in  the  region  about 
Sitka,  give  the  lowest  winter  temperature  as  4P  Fah.  below  zero,  the 
mean  winter  temperature  being  about  33°  Fah.,  the  same  as  in 
[Washington,  District  of  Columbia.  In  the  summer,  on  the  contrary, 
[the  rainy  and  overcast  days  so  predominate,  that  the  temperature  never 
Irises  above  90°  Fah.  The  maximum  recorded  about  Sitka  is  87°  Fah. 
[With  an  annual  rainfall  of  from  60  to  95  inches  and  an  average  of  be- 
tween one  hundred  and  ninety  and  two  hundred  and  eighty-five  days 
in  th"  "<»ar  on  which  rain  has  been  known  to  fall,*  the  climate  may  be 
said  to  have  its  drawbacks.  The  shortest  winter  days  are  from  four  to 
five  hours  louec,  while  the  summer  nights  are  correspondingly  brief.  In 
the  long  summer  days,  when  the  weather  is  fine,  the  atmosphere  is  won- 
derfully clear,  and  the  scenery  fairly  sparkles  with  an  excessive  brilliancy 
due  to  exceptional  hygrometric  conditions. 

The  territory  is  very  broken  and  subdivided.  It  is  densely  wooded 
with  spruce,  hemlock,  white  pine,  fir,  birch,  alder,  and  underbrush,  the 
vegetation  crowding  down  to  the  high -water  line.  It  is  also  very  mount- 
ainous, and  indented  with  bays  and  arms  of  the  sea.  The  waters  are 
deep  and  the  tidal  currents  swift,  the  tides  rising  and  falling  twice  a 
day  through  a  range  of  from  12  to  21  feet,  making  navigation  in  places 
extremely  hazardous.  Travel  is  entirely  by  water,  the  villages  being 
on  the  water  courses,  and  the  canoe  here  reaches  its  highest  develop- 
ment. Huge  landslides  in  the  face  of  the  mountains,  snow  capped 
ranges  with  sparkling  glaciers  in  the  sides  and  valleys,  rtoating  glacier 
ice  in  the  bays  and  straits,  and  the  bright  green  vegetation  everywhere, 
all  these  give  a  characteristic  beputy  to  the  scenery  of  this  region. 


*  Dall,  Aiiiska,  p.  451. 


335 


II 


\    H! 


I ;! 


I.  m 


236 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSKTTM,  1888. 


Tbepriucipal  fur-bearing  animals  are  the  brown  and  black  bear,  wolf, 
the  cross,  red,  and  silver  fox ;  beaver,  mink,  marten,  and  land  otter,  while 
in  the  mountains  of  the  mainland  are  wild  goats  and  sheep.  Cod,  her- 
ring, trout,  and  eulachon  abound  in  certain  localities,  but  the  staple 
supply  is  furnished  by  the  halibut  and  salmon.  To  complete  the  pict- 
ure there  must  be  mentioned  the  innumerable  tiocks  of  wild  ducks  and 
geese  in  season,  the  lonely  herons  and  cranes,  the  omnipresent  gulls, 
eagles,  hawks,  crows,  and  ravens,  the  skimming  surf  birds,  and,  in  the 
woods,  not  generally  seen  from  canoes,  grouse  and  a  variety  of  smaller 
members  of  the  feathered  tribe. 

In  Dixon  Entrance,  Clarence,  Sumner,  and  Chatham  Straits,  and  par- 
ticularly in  Frederick  Sound  and  Stephen's  Passage,  Alaska,  is  the 
breeding  ground  for  whales,  which  may  be  seen  spouting  in  schools  of 
six  or  seven.  Wherever  the  whale  is,  there  also  is  found  the  whale- 
killer  ( Orca  ater).  These  run  also  singly  or  in  schools,  and  are  the  mer- 
ciless enemy  of  the  whale.  The  dorsal  fin,  projecting  so  prominently 
above  the  surface  of  the  water,  gives  them  a  characteristic  readily 
seized  upon  by  the^native  artist,  who  never  omits  this  appendage  from 
his  conventional  drawing  or  carving  of  this  animal. 

The  presence  of  the  bear,  eagle,  raven,  wolf,  orca,  whale,  and  other 
representatives  of  the  animal  kingdom  in  this  region,  and  the  know. 
ledge  of  their  peculiarities  by  the  Indians,  explain  the  prominent  part 
they  play  in  the  mythology  of  the  coast,  as  stated  in  Chapter  vii. 

PHYSICAL  CHARAOTEEISTICS. 

The  Indians  about  Dixon  Entrance  are  unquestionably  superior  in 
physique  to  the  coast  Indians  to  the  southward.  As  among  themselves 
the  physical  superiority  rests  with  the  Haida.  This  may  be  due  to  real 
ethnical  dift'erences,  but  is  probably  accounted  for  in  the  fact  that  natural 
conditions  in  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  and  around  such  an  exposed 
arm  of  the  sea  as  Dixon  Entrance  have  produced  a  finer  and  more  robust 
people  than  those  in  less  exposed  regions.  While  there  is  considerable 
uniformity  in  the  general  physical  characters  of  all  the  stocks  on  the 
northwest  coast,  a  practised  eye  can  detect  the  differences  between  them, 

Langsdorlf  (1805)  says  of  the  Tlingit : 

They  do  not  appear  to  have  the  1 .  ist  affinity  with  the  Mongol  tribes ;  they  have  in 
general  large,  fiery  eyes;  a  small,  flat,  broad  nose;  and  larf^e  cheek-bones;  indeed,  in 
all  respects,  large  and  strongly  marked  features.* 

In  general  amongst  the  Tlingit,  Haida,  and  Tsimshian,  the  hair  is 
thick,  stiff,  coarse,  straight,  and  black.  It  is  worn  short  by  the  men, 
excepting  the  shamans  or  doctors,  and  long  by  the  women.  Instances 
cited  t  of  auburn  tresses  and  golden  curls  are  ascribable  to  intermixt- 
ure with  Europe<iu  and  American  traders.  The  eyebrows  are  small 
and  the  eyes  generally  black  or  brown,  though  gray  eyes  are  to  be  seen. 

•Langsdorflf",  Voyages,  Part  ii,  p.  112.     '    t  Poole,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  :nr<. 


v'tt 


I 


ik  bear,  wolf, 
1  otter,  while 
),  Cod,  her- 
it  the  staple 
iete  the  plct- 
Id  ducks  and 
resent  gulls, 
I,  aud,  in  the 
;y  of  smaller 

bits,  aud  par- 
laska,  is  the 
in  schools  of 
d  the  whale- 
are  the  met- 
prominently 
ristic  readily 
lendage  from 

le,  and  other 
d  the  know, 
ominent  part 
tier  VII. 


r  superior  in 
g  themselves 
)e  due  to  real 
t  that  natural 
h  an  exposed 
1  more  robust 
considerable 
stocks  on  the 
etween  them. 

18 ;  they  have  in 
oneH;  indeed,  in 


n,  the  hair  is 
:  by  the  men, 
ti.  Instances 
to  intermixt- 
»W8  are  small 
ire  to  be  seen. 

Tnlandn,  p.  Slf^ 


•Ili 


'I 


r'     I:  r: 

i! 


EXPLANATION  OF   PLATE   II. 
View  of  the  Eastern  Part  of  Kasa-an  Village,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska. 

From  photographs  by  the  author. 

The  lower  portion  of  the  plate  joins  on  to  the  left  of  the  iipjier,  thecolunin  marked 
A  being  represented  in  eai  h.  The  two  together  give  an  enlarged  view  of  the  east- 
ern portion  (riglit-hand  half)  of  the  village  of  Kasa-an.  Plate  I.  In  the  large  house 
in  the  upper  view,  to  the  left  of  the  canoe  on  the  l)each,  is  the  lx>d.v  of  Chief 
Skowl  lying  in  state  (1887),  as  pictured  in  Plate  LXVII.  The  two  carved  columns 
in  the  lower  right-hand  corner  (Fig.  1)  are  enlarged  views  of  two  i-ommemorative 
mortuary  columns  shown  in  the  general  view.  The  nature  and  object  of  these  are 
explained  in  the  text. 


!      -iht!; 


fi'li 


vj. 


Rtportol  Nationil  Muicum,  1688.— Niblick. 


Plate 


AND,  Alaska. 


)luinn  nmikt'il 
}\v  of  the  east- 
he  hirge  house 
lK)ily  of  Chief 
aived  cohiiiins 
juiiuemorative 
?ct  of  these  are 


Pfc 

''i. 


W; 


:'-1-.- 


s 


:<_ 

•■■y*'.'!',>r;i-f;V 
•'''■:h'^:«'-'.r.':A 

mmm 
mmm 


.-•"•5 


CO 

3 

< 

Q 

Z 


(O 

ul 

-I 
< 

5 


ul 
U 

z 

0. 

uT 
«3 


z 

CO 

< 


I- 

a: 

< 

z 
cc 

Ul 

I- 

co 


UJ 

I 
I- 


ul 


I  ' 


H'li 


k 


EXPLANATION   OF    PLATE   III. 

View  of  the  Western  Part  of  Kasa-an  Village,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska. 

From  photographs  by  the  author. 

Tlie  lower  vu-w  is  tlic  I'Xtieuu'  Ii'lt  dC  I'lati'  I  t'liliUKeil.  and  joins  on  to  the  left  of 
the  upper  view.     Both  to^;etlu'r  re])resent  the  grave-varil  of  the  village  of  Kasa-an. 


Rtport  nf  Natiunil  Muf*urr,  1866. -Nibltek. 


PLATE  III. 


ISLAND,  Alaska. 


on  to  tlic  left  of 
.;e  of  Kasa-an. 


< 

d 

z 
< 


-1 
< 


UJ 

o 

z 


<3 
< 


Z 
< 

< 


< 

a. 

z 
ir 

UJ 

H 
O) 
u 


UJ 

X 


5 

UJ 


THE    INDIANS    OP   THE    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


237 


The  habit  of  plncking  the  hair  from  the  face  and  body  obtains  among 
the  younger  men,  but  the  older  ones  suffer  it  to  grow  and  wear  a  scanty 
beard  and  mustache,  never  however  attaining  any  considerable  length. 
Amongst  the  latter,  also,  long  years  of  service  in  canoes  has  impaired 
their  powers  of  locomotion  and  misshapen  their  legs,  rendering  them 
decidedly  awkward  on  shore.  This,  by  comparison,  gives  the  body  a 
long  and  large  appearauce.  The  head  appears  unusually  large,  dne 
both  to  a  real  disproportion  and  to  the  ciass  of  bushy  hair  and  the  high 
cheekbones  of  the  men.  Their  noses  are  less  flat  and  fleshy  than  those 
of  the  Indians  to  the  south.  The  teeth  are  white  and  fine,  but  in  old 
age  are  much  discolored  and  worn.  The  wraring  down  of  the  teetli 
comes  from  eating  dried  salmon  on  which  sand  and  grit  have  been  blown 
during  the  process  of  drying.  The  hands  and  feet  are  small  and  well 
shaped,  especially  amongst  the  women.  As  they  all  go  barefooted  a 
greater  part  of  the  vear,  their  feet  are  callous,  excoriated,  and  wrinkled 
by  exposure.  The  women  are  comely  and  flne  lookiiif  n  youth  and  in 
early  bloom  usually  have  rosy  cheeks.  In  complexion  both  ?exes  are 
surprisingly  light  colored.  This  is  in  noway  due  to  intermixture  with 
whites.  Dixon  (1787)  says  that  they  were  "  very  little  darker  than  the 
Europeans  in  general.*  Langsdorflf  makes  the  same  statement.!  The 
Haida  are  markedly  fairer  skinned  than  the  others,  but  still  the  dark 
tinge  is  quit*^  apparent,  and  exposure  always  adds  to  it. 

The  habit  of  frequent  bathing  in  botu  winter  and  summer  hardens 
their  physique. ,.  As  soon  as  a  child  is  able  to  leave  its  cradle  it  is  bathed 
in  the  ocean  every  day  without  regard  to  season,  and  this  custom  is  kept 
up  by  both  sexes  through  life.  This,  with  ^cant  wrappings,  kills  off  the 
sickly  children,  and  hardens  the  survivors.f  The  scanty  clothing  worn 
by  the  men,  their  reckless  expoonre  in  all  kinds  of  weather,  and  their 
ignorance  of  hygienic  laws  of  ventilation  and  sanitation  in  their  dwell- 
ings, bring  in  their  train  a  long  series  of  ills. 

They  are  not  particularly  long-lived,  although  grey-haired  people 
are  not  uncommon.  Rheumatism  and  pulmonary  diseases  are  their 
worst  ills.  Small-pox  has  ravaged  the  coast  terribly.  First  intro- 
duced amongst  the  Tlingit  by  the  Spaniards  in  1775,§  it  worked  its 
way  down  the  coast,  breaking  out  from  time  to  time  in  later  years,  de- 
populating villages  and  proving  a  fatal  scourge  to  the  natives  of  this 
region.  No  one  thing  contributed  more  to  dishearten  and  subjugate 
these  Indians  than  the  ravages  made  by  this  fell  disease. 

Weak  eyes  and  blindness  are  aue  to  exposure  and  to  the  smoke  of 
camp  and  household  fires.  Debauchery  by  bad  aloohol,  worse  Whisky, 
and  the  native  "  hoochinoo  "  has  added  its  quota  to  the  physical  misfor- 
tunes of  the  Indians,  while  venereal  diseases  are  extremely  destruc- 
tive. 


'  Dixon,  VoyftgCH,  ji.  ii'iS. 

tliiingmlorff,  VoyiigiM,  Pu,    :i,  |».  U'^, 

I  I.inififldorH",  Voyages,  Part  ii.,  pit.  IW,  U3,  iind  135, 

\^  Portlock,  Voyage  (1787),  p.  271. 


■■■■■■■IPI 


238 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL.    MUSEUM,  1888. 


« 


Their  habits  of  life  are  quite  regular,  aud,  when  undisturbed  by  war, 
they  carry  on  a  definite  routine  throughout  the  different  seasons,  col- 
lecting food,  fars  and  raw  materials  at  one  season  to  serve  them  for 
the  next. 

EMOTIONAL  CHABACTEEISTICS. 

They  are  self-possessed,  diguitied  and  reserved,  although  much  less  tac- 
iturn than  the  hunting  Indians  of  the  western  plains  and  the  interior. 
They  have  the  usual  [udiau  stoicism  under  suffering,  and  bear  extremes 
of  cold,  heat,  hunger,  aud  exposure  with  fortitude.  They  are  quite 
venturesome,  going  well  out  to  sea  in  their  canoes.  The  Kaigani  go 
out  to  Forrester's  Island  for  birds'  eggs  every  spring,  20  miles  off  the 
coast.  Dixon  (1787)  states  that  he  sighted  a  Haida  canoe  8  miles  out 
at  sea,  and,  though  caught  in  a  fog,  it  reached  land  in  safety,  as  he 
afterwards  met  the  same  party  close  in  shore.*  They  often  make  trips 
of  hundreds  of  miles  in  their  canoes  along  the  coast  and  interior  waters, 
although  in  early  days  this  was  not  so  feasible,  owing  to  the  warlike 
relations  of  the  diiferent  tribes.  They  are  fou  of  parade  and  display, 
aud  are  scrupulous  observers  of  ceremony  and  etiquette.  Many  of 
their  deadly  feuds  originate  from  trifling  causes  based  on  breaches  of 
etiquette  or  custom.  Dancing  and  singing  are  a  part  of  their  cere- 
monies of  welcome,  trade,  and  war,  and  to  the  early  voyagers  to  this 
region  the  Indians  seemed  entirely  given  over  to  these  exercises.  Their 
narratives  express  generally  the  impression  that  these  natives  were 
aggravatiugly  and  immoderately  fond  of  dancing,  because  they  could 
not  trade  with  them  until  they  had  finished  singing  and  feasting.  They 
are  equally  fond  of  long  speeches  aud  addresses — it  all  being  intended 
to  impress  the  observer  with  the  rank,  importance,  aud  influence  of  the 
individual  who  provides  the  entertainment.  They  are  also  great  stick- 
lers for  justice  and  for  custom.  When  smarting  ander  the  sense  oi 
a  real  injury  or  imaginary  wrong  they  are  cruelly  and  unreasonably 
revengeful,  although  ordinarily  friendly.  They  impressed  the  early 
voyagers  as  being  somewhat  hospitable  and  generous,  although  this  was 
largely,  as  now,  founded  upon  the  expectation  of  an  equivalent  return. 

Their  bravery  is  relative.  If  stronger  tban  an  opponent,  their  war 
like  demonstrations  are  quite  pronounced,  but  i  i  the  presence  of  a  supe- 
rior force  they  are  inclined  to  be  submissive  .^nd  peaceful,  although 
ready  to  take  an  underhand  advantage.  Ambush,  surprise,  and  supe 
rior  numbers  are  the  favorable  conditions  of  coast  Indian  warfare, 
and  no  mercy  is  shown  to  women  and  children,  except  perhaps  to  make 
slaves  of  them  or  to  hold  them  for  a  ransom.  While  slavery  was  prac 
ticed,  before  its  abolition  by  our  Government  in  1867,  slaves  were 
treated  with  cruelty. 

If,  is  the  universal  testimony,  as  voiced  by  Portlock  (1787),  that "  they 
treiit  their  wives  and  children  with  much  affection  and  tenderness.'" 


Pixon,  Voyage,  p.  311. 


t  portlock,  Voyaj,es,  ji.  liiOO, 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    NORTHWEbT   COAST. 


239 


turbed  by  war, 
it  seasons,  col- 
serve  them  for 


oiuch  less  tac- 
id  the  interior, 
bear  extremeK 
'hey  are  quite 
he  Kaigani  go 
JO  miles  oflF  the 
loe  8  miles  out 
in  safety,  as  he 
ften  make  trips 
interior  waters, 
to  the  warlike 
de  and  display, 
ette.    Many  of 
on  breaches  of 
?t  of  their  cere- 
oyagers  to  this 
sercises.    Their 
se  natives  were 
ause  they  could 
feasting.    They 
being  intended 
influence  of  the 
ilso  great  stick 
er  the  souse  ol 
d  unrcasonabl:^ 
sssed  the  early 
though  this  was 
iiivalent  return, 
lent,  their  war 
seuce  of  a  supe 
iceful,  although 
>rise,  and  supe 
[ndian  warfare, 
•erhaps  to  make 
I  very  wns  prac 
►7,  slaves  were 

r87),  that  "they 
d  tenderness."  i 

,  i».  am). 


In  the  approach  to  i^olitical  and  industrial  equality  of  the  sexes, 
and  in  the  respect  shown  for  the  opinions  of  their  females,  these 
Indians  furnish  another  refutation  of  the  old  misconception  concerning' 
the  systematic  maltreatment  of  the  women  by  savages.  Such  a  thing 
is  incompatible  with  the  laws  of  nature.  Good  treUment  of  the  female 
is  essential  to  the  preservation  of  the  species,  and  it  will  be  found  that 
this  ill-treatmenfis  more  apparent  than  real. 

By  nature  they  are  rather  indolent,  but  their  love  of  the  power  and 
the  display  incident  to  wealth  has  changed  their  disposition  since  1775, 
so  that  they  have  become  more  enterprising.  Originally  the  chiefs 
conducted  the  trade  of  the  tribe,  but  in  time  the  natural  abilities  of 
the  other  sex  in  driving  bargains  has  resulted  in  the  predominance 
of  the  influence  of  the  women  in  such  matters. 

They  endeavor  to  impress  others  with  their  importance,  wealth,  and 
powers,  but  are  guarded  in  their  expressions  of  wonder,  surprise,  or 
enjoyment  at  what  they  see  elsewhere.  They  have  come  now  to  rely 
upon  European  medicines  in  sickness.  When  through  carelessness, 
recklessness,  and  ignorance  of  the  laws  of  health  they  come  to  grief, 
they  incontinently  dose  themselves  with  all  sorts  of  patent  medicines 
which  they  buy  from  the  traders. 

Missionaries  have  been  comparatively  successful  amongst  them,  the 
Greek  and  Presbyterian  Churches  having  made  considerable  progress 
with  them.  The  opportunities  for  long  addresses,  prayers,  experience 
meetings,  and  singing  in  some  of  the  Protestant  forms  of  worship  ap- 
peal strongly  to  native  predilections,  the  influence  of  the  Greek  Church 
being  principally  about  Sitka.  The  missionaries,  however,  discourage 
their  dancing,  and  have  influenced  them  in  many  localities  to  cut  down 
the  totemic  columns  and  abandon  cremation  for  inhumatiou-at-Iength 
as  practiced  by  the  whites. 

INTELLECTUAL  CHARACTERISTICS.  ' 

One  sees  many  strikingly  intelligent  and  attractive  faces  amongst 
the  older  men  and  women,  where  exiierience  has  given  decided  char- 
acter to  their  exjjressions.  The  stolid,  imperturbable  moodiness  attrib- 
uted to  the  Indians  of  the  interior  here  gives  place  to  a  more  alert  ex- 
pression of  countenance.  They  acquire  knowledge  readily,  and  the 
children  at  school  make  fair  progress.  They  are  quite  ingenious,  and 
especially  handy  with  tools,  picking  u[)  a  trade  with  surprising  readi- 
ness, and  turning  their  hands  to  almost  any  sort  of  business.  They 
are  quite  imitative  and  progressive,  but  have  shown  good  sense  and 
conservatism  in  retaining  many  native  implements  and  methods  where 
better  adapted  to  their  needs.  They  have  a  keen  appreciation  of  the 
value  of  money,  work  for  wages,  and  have  considerable  business  judg- 
ment. It  would  seem  that,  with  their  ideas  of  acquiring  wealth,  we 
have  little  to  teach  them  in  habits  of  thrift.  Of  necessity,  they  have  a 
good  kuowledgii  of  the  topography  and  hydrography  of  their  region, 


AV 


k 


w 


w      I 


1! 


240 


RF.POUT    OF    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


aud  of  the  habits  aud  best  modes  of  capture  of  all  sorts  of  inariue  aui- 
luals.  On  shore  they  are  rather  disappoiating  as  hunters,  as  they  are 
not  at  all  cool  headed.  Their  superstitions,  beliefs,  and  practices  of 
witchcraft,  sorcery,  slavery,  and  shamamism  do  not  necessarily  place 
them  on  a  '.ery  degraded  intellectual  plane  when  we  compare  their 
practices  and  beliefs  with  those  of  other  savage  tribes. 

They  possess  a  fair  knowledge  of  human  nature ;  have  good  'oratorical 
powers ;  are  communicative  when  diplomatically  approached ;  have  a 
keen  sense  and  appreciation  of  the  grotesque ;  and  have  a  great  sense  of 
wit  and  humor,  as  they  laugh  immoderately  at  the  antics  of  the  dancers, 
the  witty  remarks  of  the  clowns,  aud  the  grotesque  carvings  erectec*  in 
ridicule  of  the  whites  or  of  their  neighbors.  Placing  implicit  confidence 
in  the  truth  of  their  legends  and  the  reliability  of  their  carved  columns, 
they  have  an  immense  respect  for  graphic  characters.  Anything  writ- 
ten on  paper  or  carved  is  per  se  credible,  and  they  attach  the  greatest 
value  to  a  letter  of  recommendation  written  by  a  white  man,  irrespec- 
tive of  the  sentiments  expressed  by  the  writer.  . 

MORAL    CHARACTERISTICS. 

Judged  by  our  standard,  these  Indians  of  the  north  have  fallen  by  the 
way  side.  Judged  by  their  primitive  ethical  conceptions,  as  compared 
with  those  of  the  surrounding  tribes  when  they  first  came  in  contact 
with  the  whites,  they  may  be  said  to  be  distinguished  by  the  great  prog- 
ress they  had  themselves  made  iu  morals.  When  first  visited  by  the 
early  voyagers  these  Indians,  like  all  others  on  tiie  coast,  were  bold, 
arrant  thieves.  With  them  it  was  not  dishonorable  to  steal,  aud,  if 
caught,  restitution  settled  the  matter.  On  the  other  hand,  they  dis- 
criminated, and  seldom  or  never  stole  from  a  guest,  and  never  robbed 
one  of  their  ow4i  totem.  With  them,  to-day,  an  unwatched  carai)  or  an 
unlocked  house  is  sacredly  respected,  and  the  most  valuable  property 
cached  iu  the  woods,  as  is  the  Indian  custom,  is  as  safe  from  other  In- 
dians as  if  guarded  night  and  day.  Unfortunately,  white  men  have  set 
some  very  bad  examples  in  this  respect,  and  the  Indians  have  been 
more  often  sinned  against  than  sinning. 

They  have  great  respect  for  the  aged,  whose  advice  in  most  matters 
has  great  weight.  Some  of  the  older  women,  even  bond  women  in 
former  times,  attain  great  influence  in  the  tribe  as  soothsayers,  due  as 
much  to  their  venerable  appearance  as  to  any  pretense  they  may  make 
of  working  medicine  charms.  They  are  remarkably  fond  of  and  indul- 
gent to  their  children,  rarely  chastising  them.  As  between  the  sexes, 
the  rights  of  the  women  are  respected  and  the  terms  of  equ£\lity  on 
which  the  men  and  women  live  are  very  striking  to  most  visitors  of  this 
region.  Although  marriage  is  essentially  by  purchase,  and  the  question 
oi  morality  and  immorality  of  the  wife  .solely  one  of  sanction  by  tin- 
husband,  yet  even  this  restriction  is  centuries  in  advance  of  tlieir 
northern  neighbors,  the  Aleuts  aud  Koniagas,  with  whom  promiscuity 


wmmm 


T'iK    INDIANS    Ob'    TUF,    iNOKTHWEST    COA8T. 


241 


t'  nuiriue  aui- 
I,  H8  they  are 
practices  of 
essarily  place 
soDipare  their 

:ood  'oratorical 
«he(l ;  have  a 
great  sense  of 
)f  the  dancers, 
ngs  erectec*  in 
icit  confidence 
»rved  columns, 
Lnything  writ- 
the  greatest 
man,  irrespec- 


e  fallen  by  the 
3,  as  compared 
ame  in  contact 
the  great  prog- 
;  visited  by  the 
ast,  were  bold, 

0  steal,  and,  if 
liand,  they  dis- 

1  never  robbed 
led  camp  or  an 
liable  property 
from  other  lu- 
e  men  have  set 
aus  have  been 

I  most  matters 
)nd  women  in 
isayers,  due  as 
hey  may  make 
I  of  and  indul- 
'een  the  sexes, 
of  equality  on 
visitors  of  this 
id  the  question 
uction  by  tin- 
i^an.ce  of  their 
m  promiscuity 


and  the  most  bestial  practices  obtain.  Early  voyagers  invariably 
mention  the  modest,  reserved,  and  decorous  bearing  of  the  Tlingit, 
Haida,  and  Tsimshian  women.  Unfortunately,  in  recent  years,  the  pur- 
chase of  women  and  the  practice  of  sanctioned  prostitution  have,  under 
the  spur  of  artificial  needs  of  finery  and  luxuries,  had  a  most  demoral- 
izing effect  on  them,  and,  with  the  rum  question,  are  the  serious  problem 
which  confronts  the  friend  of  the  Indian.  In  their  inveterate  addiction 
to  gambling  and  their  craving  for  tobacco  and  alcohol  they  possess 
f  simply  the  vices  inijident  to  savagiam.  In  their  disregard  for  the  lives 
"and  feelings  of  slaves,  and  in  their  practices  of  compounding  murder 
and  other  crimes  by  the  payment  of  indemnity  to  the  relatives  of  the 
injured,  we  see  simply  the  operations  of  custom,  which  with  them  has 
the  force  of  law.  Murder,  seduction,  wounds,  accidental  killing,  loss  of 
articles  belonging  to  another,  refusal  to  marry  a  widow  according  to 
law,  casus  belli  in  general,  any  wrong  may  be  righted  by  payment  of 
an  indemnity  in  the  currency  of  the  region. 

Sir  James  Douglas,  Governor  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  about 
1840,  says : 

If  unmarried  women  prove  frail,  tlie  partner  of  their  guilt,  if  discovered,  is  bound 
to  make  reparation  to  the  parents,  soothing  their  wounded  honor  with  handsome 
presents.  A  failure  to  do  this  would  cause  the  friends  of  the  ott'ending  fair  one  to  u^e 
force  to  back  up  their  demands  and  to  revenge  the  insult.  It  must  not,  however, 
be  supposed  they  would  be  induced  to  act  this  part  from  any  sense  of  reflected  shame, 
or  from  a  desire  of  discouraging  vice  by  making  a  severe  example  of  the  vicious,  or 
that  the  girl  herself  has  any  visitings  of  remorse,  or  that  the  parents  think  her  a  bit 
the  worse  for  the  accident,  or  her  character  in  any  way  blemished.  Such  are  not 
their  feelings,  for  the  offender  is  simply  regarded  as  a  robber  who  has  committed 
depredations  on  their  merchandise,  their  only  anxiety  being  to  make  the  damages 
exacted  ns  heavy  as  possible." 

Petrotf  illustrates  as  follows  the  curious  custom  of  paying  for  in- 
juries: 

Wars  are  frequently  avoided  by  au  indemnity  arrangement,  and  they  go  so  far  in 
this  system  of  corapeusation  that  they  demand  payment  for  losses  from  parties  who 
have  been  in  no  way  instrumental  in  causiug  them.  For  instance,  an  Indian  at  Sitka 
broke  into  the  room  of  two  miners  in  their  absence,  emptied  a  demijohn  of  liquor, 
and  died  in  consequence,  and  the  relatives  of  the  robber  demanded  and  received  pay- 
ment from  the  unfortunate  Caucasians.  If  a  man  be  attacked  by  a  savage  <Iog  aud 
kills  him  in  self-defense,  ho  must  pay  for  the  dog  to  the  Tlingit  owner.  A.  smail 
trading  schooner,  while  running  before  a  furious  gale,  rescued  two  Tlingit  from  a 
sinking  canoe,  which  had  been  carried  to  sea.  The  canoe  was  nearly  as  long  as  the 
schooner  and  could  "ot  be  carried  or  towed,  seeing  which,  the  natives  themselves  cnt 
the  worthless  craft  adrift.  When  the  humane  captain  landed  the  rescued  men  at 
their  village  he  was  astonished  by  a  peremptory  demand  for  payment  for  the  canoe, 
backed  by  threats  of  retaliation  or  vengeance.* 

To  such  an  v^xtent  was  this  question  of  indemnity  carried,  that  when 
the  Russians  at  Sitka  tried  to  interfere  with  the  killing  of  slates  on 
ceremonial  occasions,  they  were  only  successful  in  preventing  it  by  ran- 


"Quoted  in  Petrotrs  Kejiort,  ]>.  17* 

II.  M1.S.  uii,  pt.  L' — k; 


I'etrofl"  Report,  p.  16.5. 


V7\ 


242 


REPORT   OF    NATION>VL    MUSEUM,   1888. 


I  ! 


soming  the  proposed  victims.  A  narration  of  the  exactions  of  the 
Indians  for  damages  on  u  ^ count  of  the  accidental  deaths  of  relatives  in 
the  employ  of  whites  would  fill  a  chapter. 

-^KSTHETIC  CHARACTERS. 

These  Indians  are  exceedingly  fond  of  singiug  and  dancing ;  have 
considerable  iirtistic  taste  in  the  use  of  colors ;  are  advanced  in  the  arts 
of  carving;  and  have  fair  abilities  in  drawing  and  designing — all  of 
which  will  appear  in  subsequent  chapters.  Their  carvings  in  slate 
show  the  height  to  which  their  art  rises,  and  would  seem  to  easily  place 
them  at  the  head  of  the  savage  tribes  of  the  world,  especially  when 
taken  in  conjunction  with  their  industrial  development.  They  bathe 
frequently  in  the  sea,  but  on  the  other  hand  continually  daub  their 
faces,  bodies,  and  heads  with  grease  and  paint,  although  this  latter 
fashion  is  now  dying  out  and  has  almost  disappeared,  except  as  an 
occasional  custom.  They  were  formerly  indifferent  to  the  stench  of  de- 
cayed animal  and  vegetable  matter  about  their  houses  and  villages, 
but  the  influence  of  the  whites  has  wonderfully  improved  them  in  this 
respect.  They  are  still,  however,  indifferent  to  all  sanitary  laws  of 
ventilation,  and  their  fondness  for  putrid  salmon  noses  and  herring 
roe  is  very  trying,  while  the  smell  of  rancid  grease  destroys  the  {es- 
thetic value  of  many  otherwise  interesting  curios  from  the  region.  A 
visit  to  an  Indian  house  is  to  the  uninitiated  still  somewhat  of  an  ordeal, 
although  nothing  to  what  it  formerly  was.  Through  living  in  such  in- 
timate relations  in  the  houses,  there  is  an  absence  of  a  becoming  sense 
of  modesty  in  family  life,  although  the  offenses  are  chiefly  to  be  laid  at 
the  door  of  the  men,  who  in  the  summer  months  go  almost  naked, 
whereas  the  women  dress  very  much  the  same  in  all  seasons. 

GEWERAL  CONSIDERATIONS. 

Contact  with  the  whites  has  staggered  and  arrested  these  Indians  in 
their  development.  They  are  now  adjusting  themselves  to  a  new  mode 
of  life.  Although  much  reduced  in  numbers,  they  are  far  from  being 
near  extermination.  Much  is  to  be  hoped  for  in  the  recent  establish- 
ment of  industrial  and  other  schools  and  in  the  general  interest  now 
taken  in  the  Indians.  In  the  prohibition  and  prevention  of  the  sale  of 
liquor  to  them  a  great  step  has  been  taken.  Much  more  needs  to  be 
done  in  the  suppression  of  prostitution,  in  the  recognition  of  Indian 
rights  to  hunting  and  fishing  grounds,  and  in  medical  assistance  to  a 
people  childishly  ignorant  of  the  simplest  laws  of  health.  Their  Indian 
doctors  are  fast  disappearing,  and  with  them  much  of  the  degrading 
superstition  of  an  ethnical  group  capable  of  almost  any  rise  in  the  scale 
of  civilization. 


in. 

REGULATIVE   ORGANIZATION:   CONSANGUINEAL-POLITICAL— IN- 
DUSTRIAL. 


Government  does  not  l)ogin  in  the  ascendency  of  chieftains  throngh  prowess  in  war, 
mt  in  the  slow  special  i/atlon  of  executive  functions  from  communal  associations 
Ibased  on  kinship.  «  •  *  Evolution  in  society  has  not  been  from  militancy  to  in- 
lustrialism,  but  from  organization  based  on  kinship  to  organization  based  on  prop- 
[)erty,  and  alongside  of  the  specializations  of  the  indnstries  of  peace  the  arts  of  war 
iiave  been  specialized." 

GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS. 

On  the  northwest  coast  totemism  permeates  the  whole  tribal  organi- 
sation. The  ceremonies  at  birth,  initiation,  naming,  matrimony,  feast- 
ing, dancing,  funerals,  and  all  other  social  occasions,  all  have  for  their 
^bject,  in  some  way,  the  identification  of  the  individual  with  his  totem 
^nder  its  specific  name.  A  totem  is  simply  an  organization  of  con- 
languineal  kindred  into  a  recognized  gronp  or  baud,  but  with  its  defi- 
lition  and  practical  workings  we  have  more  to  do  later. 

Amongst  the  Tlingit,  Haida,  and  Tsimshiau,  the  orgauizatian  is 
)ased  on  mother-right;  that  is,  birth  rights,  such  as  rank,  wealth,  prop- 
erty, etc.,  are  received  from  the  mother.     Amongst  the  southern  tribes 
)f  British  Columbia  father-right  is  the  form  of  social  organization, 
[n  the  lowest  and  rudest  forms  of  primitive  human  society  we  have 
jimply  the  recognition  of  the  maternity  of  a  child,  the  paternity  either  not 
jeing  known,  or  not  considered.    Matriarchy,  this  tracing  of  descent  in 
the  female  line  only,  "mother  rule,"  finds  its  most  primitive  form  in 
bhe  trib..j  organization  of  some  of  the  Australians,  where  the  tribe 
child  recognize  a  group  of  mothers  (a  subi)hratry),  their  issues,  as 
|it  were,  being  pooled.    The  evolution  of  patriarchy,  the  recognition  of 
jdefinite  male  descent,  "father-rule,"  is  obscure,  but  its  most  primitive 
[form  is  also  found  amongst  some  Australian  tribes,  where  a  group  of 
fathers  belonging  to  a  sub-phratry  have  the  monopoly  of  ])rivileges 
nth  the  women  of  a  corresponding  female  subphratry,  although  the 
tribes  may  be  a.thousand  miles  apart  and  speak  different  languages,  t 
IS  we  advance  from  matriarchy  towards  patriarchy,  we  find,  at  the 
)undary, tribes  wavermg  between  female  and  male  descent,  or  in  which 


*  MaJ.  .1.  VV.  I'owell.     An.  Rep.,  Uiin-au  of  Kthnology,  I,  p.  83. 
t  Fra/.er,  Totemisin,  p.  «>7. 


m 


^S    r:'. 


V     I 


244 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1««8. 


the  maid  and  female  line  have  equal  rights,  but  everywhere  mother 
rule  seems  to  have  preceded  father  rule.  «'The  couvade  or  custom  in 
accordance  with  which  the  husband  takes  to  his  bed  and  is  treated  as 
an  invalid  when  his  wife  has  given  birth  to  a  cliild  is  perhaps  a  fiction, 
intended  f;o  transfer  to  the  father  those  rights  over  the  children  which 
under  the  previous  system  of  mother-kin,  had  been  enjoyed  by  the 
mother  alone."*  In  the  evolution  of  social  organization,  therefore, 
matriarchy  uaturaliy  precedes  patriarchy.  In  the  recognition  of  pater- 
nity and  in  the  accumulation  and  inheritance  of  property  from  botli 
father  and  mother,  or  either,  we  find  the  beginnings  of  patriarchy  and 
of  the  evolution  tlrom  '<  organization  based  on  kinship  to  organization 
based  on  property."  The  recognition  of  property  may  be  in  itself  the 
first  step  in  this  evolution.  With  the  development  of  the  institution 
of  marriage,  man's  positioa  in  the  community  becomes  fixed  by  kinship. 
In  the  segregation  of  blood  relatives,  based  on  either  matriarchy  or 
patriarchy,  we  get  the  household.  In  the  organization  of  consanguiueal 
kindred,  we  have  the  basi^  of  the  communal  organization.  In  this 
stage,  "There is  no  place  in  a  tribe  for  any  person  whose  kinship  is 
not  fixed,  and  only  those  persons  can  be  adopted  into  the  tribe  who 
are  adopted  into  some  family  with  artificial  kinship  specified.  The 
fabric  of  Indian  society  ib  a  complex  tissue  of  kinship.  The  warp  is 
made  oi  streams  of  kindship  blood,  and  the  woof  of  marriage  ties."  t 
What  has  here  been  briefly  said  with  regard  to  the  origin  and  de 
velopmeut  of  the  patriarchal  form  of  social  organization  from  the  ma- 
triarchal is  peculiarly  pertinent  to  a  study  and  comparison  of  the 
ethnical  affinities  of  the  tribes  of  the  northwest  coast.  The  southern 
tribes  have  very  few  of  the  customs  and  traditions  peculiar  to  the 
northern,  ana  their  social  organization  is  different,  "mother-rule"  be- 
ing peculiar  to  the  northern  group  and  "  father-rule"  to  the  southern. 
Dr.  Franz  Boas  says : 

On  uccount  of  philological  cousiderations,  T  tliink  that  thu  social  organization  of 
the  Kwakiutl  was  originally  patriarchal,  or  it  may  bo  more  correct,  to  say  that  the 
male  aud  female  line  had  eqnal  rights.  This  opinion  is  foun.led  on  the  fact  that  even 
among  the  tribes  among  whom  matriarchate  prevails  at  present,  the  same  terms  are 
nsed  for  denoting  relationship  in  the  male  and  female  lines. t 

No  satisfactory  inferences  as  to  the  influence  of  these  various  north- 
west coast  tribes  on  one  another  in  traditions,  customs,  a^id  social 
organization  can  as  yet  be  drawn  in  view  of  the  meager  data  we  have. 
There  is  no  more  promising  field  for  sociological  study  than  in  this  re- 
gion. In  the  ceremonial  institutions,  in  the  elaborate  dance  parapher- 
nalia, in  the  carved  heraldic  columns,  in  the  wide  variations  in  the 
mortuary  cust>oms,  in  all  the  practices  cf  tribes  of  highly  imaginative 
and  inventive  Indians,  we  have  here  similarities  and  differences  so  be- 


•P'razer,  Totemisni,  p.  78. 

t  Major  Powell,  in  An.  Kept.,  tinreaii  of  Ktlinol<i<>y,  I,  \t.  (il*. 

t  Hi'imvv,  Vol.  xn.  No.  '299,  p.  19.".. 


THE    INIHANS    or    THK    NOIMHWKST    COAST. 


24r. 


various  north- 


wildering,  that  it  iHdiflHcnIl  to  trace  the  mutual  iuHuences  of  the  ditler- 
eiit  ethuic  groups.  In  nothing,  however,  more  thau  iu  the  totemic  or- 
ganization do  we  recognize  these  ditt'erences.  ■-  < 

TOTEMISM. 

The  organization  of  consanguineal  kindred  is  variously  called  the 
totem,  the  clan,  the  totem  clan,  or  the  gens  (plural,  gentes).  Frazer,  iu 
his  work  on  Totemism,  thus  defines  it :  * 

A  totem  is  a  class  of  material  objects  which  a  savage  regards  with  superstitious  re- 
spect, believing  that  there  exists  between  him  and  every  member  of  the  class  an  in- 
timate and  altogether  special  relation.  *  •  •  The  connection  between  a  man  and 
his  totem  is  mutually  beuolicent ;  the  totem  protects  the  man,  and  the  man  shows 
his  respect  for  the  totem  in  various  ways,  by  not  killing  it  if  it  be  au  animal,  and  not 
cutting  or  gathering  it  if  it  be  a  plant. 

Considered  in  relation  to  men,  totems  are  of  at  least  three  kinds :  (1)  The  clan  to- 
tem, conmion  to  a  whole  clan,  and  passing  by  inheritance  from  generation  to  genera- 
tion; (2)  the  sex  totem  *  *  *  ^3)  The  individual  totem,  belonging  to  a  single 
individual  and  not  passing  to  his  descendants.     *     »    • 

TAe  clan  to<«»i.— The  clan  totem  is  reverenced  by  a  body  of  men  and  women  who 
call  themselves  by  the  name  of  the  totem,  believe  themselves  to  be  of  one  blood,  de- 
scendants of  a  common  ancestor,  and  are  bound  together  by  common  obligations  to 
each  other,  and  by  a  common  faith  in  the  totem.     Totemism  is  thus  both  a  religious 
and  a  social  system.    In  its  religious  aspect  it  consists  of  the  relations  of  mutual  re- 
jspect  and  protection  between  a  man  and  his  totem;    in  its  social  aspect  it  consists  of 
|the  relations  of  the  clansmen  to  each  other  and  to  men  of  other  clans.     In  the  later 
liistory  of  totemism  these  two  sides,  the  religious  and  the  social,  tend  to  part  com- 
!>any.     "    *    *    On  the  whole,  the  evidence  points  strongly  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
ttwo  sides  were  originally  inseparable  ;  that,  in  other  words,  the  fnrther  wn  go  back 
fthe  more  we  should  lind  tliat  the  clansman  regards  himself  and  his  totem  as  beings  of 
the  same  species,  and  the  less  he  distinguishes  between  conduct  towards  his  totem  and 
towards  his  fellow-clansmen. 

Tribal  Society. — These  totems,  clans,  or  gentes  are  sometimes  organ- 
ized into  groups  called  phratries,  the  union  of  the  latter  forming  the 
tribe  or  people.  We  have,  therefore,  (1)  the  household  or  family ;  (2) 
the  totem ;  (3)  the  phratry ;  and  (4)  the  tribe. 

On  the  northwest  coast  the  household  is  not  the  unit  of  the  totem  or 
of  the  phratry,  as  more  than  one  totem  is  represented  in  each ;  the  father 
belonging  to  one  totem  and  the  mother  and  children  to  another.  Besides 
this,  a  brother  and  his  wife  may  belong  to  the  household,  or  a  sister  and 
her  husband ;  thus  numerous  totems  may  be  represented  under  one  roof. 

The  practice  of  totemism  on  the  northwest  coast  has  not  yet  received 
the  thorough  study  it  deserves.  It  remains,  for  some  organization, 
governmental  or  incorporated,  to  systematically  collect  the  data  nec- 
essary for  a  complete  tabulation  of  the  phratries  and  gentes  of  all  the 
trib>.  J,  and  an  exposition  of  their  mutual  relations  and  significance.  In 
(/Dunectiou  with  this,  a  study  of  the  totemic  carvings,  legends,  myths, 
and  folk-lore,  must  be  prosecuted.  The  lists  of  totems  from  time  to  time 
published  have  served  so  far  to  obscure  rather  than  elucidate  the  sub- 


Totemism  p.  1,  «(j. 


1         !' 
■      I 


246 


REPORT    OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,   1H88. 


n: 


!i 


ject,  owiug  to  the  apparent  waul  of  agreement  of  auy  two  writers.  The 
tendency  to  generalize  from  a  study  of  one  tribe  alone  has  added  to  the 
confusion.  Thorough  and  systemacic  collection  of  data  at  each  villagi' 
can  alone  give  a  reliable  groundwork  for  generalizations.  This  work 
must  be  undertaken  soon,  or  it  will  prove  either  incomplete  or  too  laU' 
altogether. 

The  exceedingly  imperfect  data  given  here  will  at  least  serve  as  a  pre- 
liminary sketch  of  the  tabulation. 

OONSANGUINEAL  OROANIZATION. 

Totems. — From  their  nature,  totems  are  in  a  state  of  flux.  Clans  tend 
to  become  phratries  split  up  into  sub-phratries ;  sub-phraties  decay  and 
finally  disappear.  An  individual  distinguishes  him8eU,becomes  wealthy, 
and  hence  a  leading  man  in  the  village.  His  totem,  or  indeed  his  in- 
dividual crest  or  sub-totem,  may  have  been  an  obscure  one.  As  he 
rises,  its  importance  in  the  tribe  rises  with  him.  Under  his  successsor, 
the  totem  widens  its  numbers  and  influence,  and  finally  eclipses  other 
clan  totems,  which  eventually  melt  away  or  are  incorporated  with  it. 
In  the  course  of  time,  either  by  the  accession  of  other  totems  or  else  by 
its  splitting  up  into  sub-totems,  it  came  finally  to  bo  ranked  as  a 
phratry,  then  a  sub-jihratry.  In  this  evolution  we  see  the  sut)toteui 
grow  into  a  clan  totem,  then  into  a  phratry  or  sub-phratry,  when  decay 
sets  in,  and  it  "  melts  into  the  vast  reservoir  of  nature  from  which  it 
sprang." 

On  the  northwest  coast  we  see  only  a  few  of  the  stages  in  this  evolu- 
tion, but  by  a  study  of  totemism  as  it  exists  in  all  parts  of  the  world 
the  curve  of  the  rise  and  fall  of  totems  has  been  so  accurately  plotted, 
that  there  will  probably  be  found  in  this  region  no  wide  variations 
from  the  general  system. 

Tlingit. — Amongst  the  Tlingit  two  exogamoi.s  groups  of  gentes  exist, 
that  is,  they^  are'divided  into  two  phratries.  The  individuals  composing 
the  gentes  in  one  phratry  can  only  marry  individuals  in  any  gentes  of 
the  other.  These  phratries  are  popularly  called  the  Raven  and  the 
Wolf.  Much  confusion  arises  from  the  fact  that  in  the  Wolf  phratry 
we  have  the  Wolf  totem,  and  in  the  Eaven  phratry  the  Baveu  totem. 
Frazer  says  of  this : 

Considering  tbe  promiueut  parts  played  in  Tlingit  mythology  by  the  ancestors  of 
the  two  phratricH,  and  considering  that  the  phratries  are  also  names  of  clans,  it 
seems  probable  that  the  Raven  and  Wolf  were  the  two  original  clans  of  the  Tlingitu, 
which  afterwards  by  sub-division  became  phratries*. 

Through  popular  misapprehension  the  origin  of  these  two  phratries 


'Frazer,  Totemism,  p.  62.  This  seems  to  be  further  borne  out  by  the  testimony  ol' 
Lisiansky,  Yoyag.,  p.  242,  Sitka  (1805).  "Tbe  tribe  of  the  wolf  are  called  the 
Coquebans,  and  have  many  privileges  over  the  other  tribes.  They  are  considereil 
the  best  warriors,  and  are  said  to  b''  scarcely  sensible  to  pain,  and  to  have  no  fear  ol 
death.  If  in  war  a  person  of  this  tribe  is  taken  prisoner  he  is  always  treated  well 
and  is  generally  set  at  liberty."  ^ 


THE   INDIANS   01'   THE   N0KTHWE8T   COAST. 


247 


writers.  The 
|i8  added  to  the 
It  each  villugt^ 
IS.  This  work 
lete  or  too  late 

■serve  as  a  pre- 


X.    ClaDS  tend 

ties  decay  and 
[comes  wealthy, 

indeed  his  in- 
re  cue.    As  he 

his  successsor, 
r  eclipses  other 
orated  with  it. 
items  or  else  by 
>e  ranked  as  a 
)  the  sabtoteui 
ry,  when  decay 
i  from  which  it 

es  in  this  evola- 
rts  of  the  world 
urately  plotted, 
wide  variations 

I  of  gentes  exist, 
luals  composing 
n  any  gentes  of 
Raven  and  the 
e  Wolf  phratry 
B  Baveu  totem. 

by  the  ancestors  of 
uatues  of  olans,  it 
ms  of  the  Tlingitii, 

>e  two  phratries 

»y  the  testimony  of 
>lf  are  called  tho 
ley  are  considercl 
1  to  have  no  fear  of 
Iways  treated  well 


is  assigned  to  the  tradition  of  the  two  mythical  beings  or  heroes,  TMl 
and  Kanuk,  whose  struggles,  valor,  and  beneticeuce  endowed  the 
Tlingit  with  the  good  things  of  life.  In  his  frequent  transformations 
Tetl  often  adopted  the  form  of  tiio  raven,  giving  to  the  Raven  phratry 
the  apparent  right  to  claim  descent  from  the  great  Tvtl.  Some  authori- 
ties claim  to  identify  Kanuk,  the  other  godlike  personage  with  the 
progenitor  of  the  Wolf  phratry ;  but  Dr.  Franz  Boas  claims  through  his 
[  interpretations  of  the  Tlingit  legends  that  "  this  Kanuk  is  identical 
[with  the  eagle,"*  and  also  that  the  Tlingit  use  the  title  Eagle  and  Wolf 
'without  discrimination  in  designatinj^ the  so-called  Wolf  phratry. 
May  not  this  be  due  to  a  possible  amalgamation  of  the  Wolf  anu  the 
Eagle  totem  at  a  remote  period  antedating  the  growth  of  the  totem 
into  a  phratry.  Tliis  amalgamation  takes  place  in  the  course  of  time 
in  all  Indian  communities  having  a  totemic  organization.  The  partial 
list  of  Tlingit  totems  as  verided  by  the  writer  is  as  follows : 


•■■ii 


riiratriifl. 

1 
Wolf  or  Eagle.              Itnveu. 

Totems. 

Wolf. 

Kuvi'ii. 

Bear. 

Frog. 

Eagle. 

Goose. 

Whale. 

Bcavfir. 

Shark. 

Owl. 

Porpoiso. 

Sea-lioii, 

Puffin. 

Salmon. 

Orca. 

Dog-flsli. 

Orca-bear.t 

Crow. 

The  above  totems  are  divided  into  sub-totems  with  special  names 
denoting  locality  and  collateral  relationship.  The  vocabulary  of  titles, 
sub-titles,  etc.,  is  a  large  one,  and  needs  in  itself  special  study.  The 
data  has  not  yet  been  collected  to  enable  us  to  give  an  adequate  idea 
of  the  complexity  and  ramifications  of  the  Tlingit  totemic  organization. 

Kaigani. — The  principal  totems  are  the  Crow,  Raven,  Brown  Bear, 
Beaver,  Eagle,  Wolf,  and  Whale.  In  addition  are  also  found  the  Seal, 
Orca  (Killer),  Gull,  Crane,  Frog,  Shark,  and  others.  Boas  adds  the 
Sparrow-hawk,  Codfish,  and  Skate.  The  two  exogamous  groups  or 
phratries  amongst  the  Kaigani  are  the  Wolf  and  the  Eagle,  according  to 
Boas,  designated  as  the  Is^dtVWnas  and  TakHl  iVnas.    The  division  of 


'Notes  oa  Ethnology  of  British  Columbia,  before  Am.  Philoa.  Society,  November 
18,  1887,  p.  42*2. 

tAt  Fort  Wrangell  several  households  of  the  Orca  and  Bear  totems  have  beeu  amal- 
gamated into  one  called  by  a  different  name  from  either,  viz,  NSna&'ri, 


248 


HKI'OKT   MP    NATIONAL    MI'MKITM,   \XHK 


\\      !  < 


the  above  uaiuud  tuteiiiM  into  the  two  groiii>.s  is  not  known  delluitob 
enough  by  the  writer  to  warrant  giving  the  list.  Enough  is  known 
however  to  illustrate  several  anomalous  groupings.  For  instance,  the 
Kaven  and  Bear  totems  belong  to  the  Eagle  phratry,  whilst  amongst  the 
Tlingit  they  belong  to  the  opposite  or  Eaven  phratry.  In  consequence 
of  this,  when,  for  instance,  a  Kaigani  of  either  of  these  totems  goes  to 
Fort  Wrangell  (Stikiue)  or  Tongass  (Tunghoash),  he  becomes  a  member 
of  the  opposite  phratry,  and  can  only  marry  in  what,  in  his  own  village, 
would  be  his  own  phratry.  This  illustrates  very  forcibly  that  it  is  the 
gens  or  totem  which  counts.  Once  a  Bear  always  a  Bear;  whereas  the 
phratry  is  in  one  sense  limited  or  local.  The  obligations  attaching  to 
a  totem  are  not,  therefore,  contiued  to  tribal  or  national  limits,  but  ex- 
tend throughout  the  whole  region.  In  childhood  a  transfer  can  be 
made  from  one  totem  to  another.  Supposing  a  chief  desires  his  son  to 
succeed  him  and  to  belong  to  his  own  totem ;  the  babe  is  transferred 
to  his  sister  to  suckle,  and  is  figuratively  adopted  by  her.  In  this  way 
the  son  acquires  the  totemship  of  his  father,  and  at  an  early  age  is  taken 
back  by  his  own  mother  to  raise.  Dawson  cites  these  cases  of  transfer 
as  often  effected  among  the  Haida  to  strengthen  the  totem  of  the  father 
when  its  number  has  become  reduced  and  there  is  danger  not  only  of 
loss  of  prestige  but  of  extinction.  The  ties  of  the  totem  or  of  the 
phratry  are  considered  far  stronger  than  those  of  blood-relationship. 
A  man  can  not  marry  in  his  own  totem  whether  witLin  or  without  his 
own  tribe,  or  his  own  phratry  within  iu^  owu  tribe.  There  is  nothing  to 
prevent  a  man  from  marrying  hi";  fv^at  cm  jsin,  and  much  to  prohibit  his 
marriage  to  a  most  remote  connect  io?i  or  an  absolute  stranger.  The 
children  always  take  the  mother'^  iotem  amongst  the  Tlingit,  Kaigani, 
Haida,  and  Tsimshian,  unless  transferred  to  the  father's  by  a  fiction. 
Thus  "mother-rule,"  or  matriarchy  prevails.  Wealth  and  chiefship 
descend  in  the  fumale  line  in  a  most  curious  way,  as  explained  hereafter 
in  dealing  with  the  subjects  of  chiefship  and  inheritance.  Dawson, 
speaiking  of  the  intertribal  relation  of  totems,  says : 

Au  ludian  on  arriving  afc  a  strange  village  where  he  may  apprehend  hostility  wonld 
look  for  a  house  indicated  by  its  carved  post  as  belonging  to  his  totem  and  make  for 
it.  The  master  of  the  house,  coming  out,  may,  if  he  likes,  make  a  dance  in  honor  of 
his  visitor,  but  in  any  case  protects  him  from  all  injury.  In  the  same  way,  should  an 
Indian  be  captured  as  a  slave  by  some  warlike  expedition  and  brought  into  the  vil- 
lage of  his  captors,  it  behooves  any  one  of  his  totem,  either  man  or  woman,  to  pre- 
sent themselves  to  the  captors,  and,  singing  a  certain  sacred  song,  offer  to  redeem  the 
captive.  Blankets  and  other  property  are  given  for  this  purpose.  Should  the  slave 
be  given  up,  the  redeemer  sends  him  back  to  his  tribe  and  the  relatives  pay  the  re- 
deemer for  what  he  has  expended.  Should  the  captors  refuse  to  give  up  the  slave 
for  the  property  offered,  it  is  considered  rather  disgraceful  to  them.  This,  at  least, 
is  the  custom  pursued  in  regard  to  captives  included  in  the  same  totem  system  as  them- 
selves by  the  Tsimshiaus,  and  it  is  doubtless  identical  or  very  similar  among  the 
Haidus,  though  uo  special  information  on  this  subject  was  obtained  from  them.* 


*  Dawson,  Report,  B,  p.  134, 


TIIH    INPIANS    OF   TIIK    NOKTIIWK.ST    COAST. 


2V.) 


[)wii  d«liuitol> 

igh  is  known 

instance,  the 

t  amongst  the 

1  consequence 

;oteuis  goes  to 

nes  a  member 

8  own  village, 

that  it  is  the 

whereas  the 

8  attaching  to 

imits,  but  ex- 

ansfer  can  be 

ires  his  son  to 

is  transferred 

In  this  waj' 

y  age  is  taken 

ses  of  transfer 

1  of  the  father 

jer  not  only  of 

tern  or  of  the 

d-relationship. 

or  without  his 

:e  is  nothing  to 

to  prohibit  his 

stranger.    The 

ingit,  Kaigani, 

:'s  by  a  fiction. 

and  chiefship 

ained  hereafter 

ace.     Dawson, 

id  hostility  would 
tein  and  make  for 
dancn  in  honor  of 
ae  way,  should  an 
light  into  the  vil- 
r  woman,  to  pre- 
tifer  to  rodeem  the 
Should  the  slave 
itives  pay  the  re- 
give  up  the  slave 
.  This,  at  least, 
u  system  as  them- 
milar  amon<T  the 
i  from  them.* 


This  is  iiKsn  tlu^  cuHtoni  amongHt  llu'  Tlingil,  ami   Kaigani.     liaiig.s 
dorll  (1805)  cites  the  custom  about  Sitka,  an<l  ways  that  the  raubom  was 
usually  paid  in  scaotter skins.* 
Hauia. — Dawson  states  that — 

A  HinjjloHystom  of  totems  (lliililu,  Kwalla)  oxteudH  throughout  the  difl'ci-ent  tribes 
[of  the  Hiiidas,  KiiiganiH,THim«hian.s,  and  neighboring  peoph's.  *  '  "  The  totttiiiH 
(found  iiniong  these  peoploH  are  designated  ai*  the  catjle,  wolf,  crow,  black  bear,  mu\JiH- 
Iwhale  (or  killei).  The  two  last  named  aie  united,  so  tiiat  but  four  clans  are  counted 
Jin  all.  The  llaida  names  for  Mieso  are,  iu  order,  koot,  kooji,  kitni-naxa  and  Hxa-nu-xa. 
'  Tlio  membeirt  of  the  dill'eieut  totems  are  generally  pretty  equally  distributed  in  each 
tribe.  Those  of  the  same  totem  ^ro  all  counted,  as  it  were,  of  one  family,  and  the 
}  cliief  bearing  of  the  system  uppwirs  to  be  on  marriage. t 

According  to  Boas,  the  Haida  are  divided  into  numerous  totems  and 
into  the  two  phratries,  Eagle  and  Raven,  the  same  as  the  Kaigani.  J 

In  the  absence  of  any  other  information  the  subject  must  rest  in  this 
unsatisfactory  condition. 

THivtshian. — Amongst  the  Tsimshian  there  are  four  gentes  or  totems, 
the  Raven,  the  Eagle,  the  Bear,  and  the  Wolf.  A  person  of  any  totem 
may  marry  into  any  other  than  his  own  inditterently.  In  the  strict  sense, 
therefore,  there  are  no  phifitries  ntnongst  the  Tsimshian.  Boas  states 
that  the  totems  of  the  Kwakiutl  are  the  Raven,  Eagle,  and  Bear,  and 
[that  he  believes  that  the  Tsimshian  have  in  general  modified  the  cus- 
ftoms  of  northern  Kwakiutl.  § 

Origin  of  Totenmm. — Some  idea  has  been  given  of  the  systems  of 
Itotems  amongst  the  northern  tribes  of  the  northwest  coast.  Its  prac- 
itical  workings  will  be  given  later  on,  iu  treating  of  the  habits,  customs, 
^and  traditions  of  these  tribes.  It  may,  in  oue  sense,  be  out  of  place 
here  to  deal  with  the  theory  of  totemism  in  a  work  of  this  nature,  but 
something  may  be  added  to  the  general  fund  of  speculation.  No  satis- 
factory theory  has  yet  been  advanced  in  explanation  of  the  origin  of 
totemism.  Mr.  Herbert  Spencer  finds  it  (I)  in  the  primitive  custom 
of  naming  children  after  natural  objects  from  some  accidental  circum- 
stance or  fanciful  resemblance  or  in  nicknaming  later  iu  life ;  (2)  the 
confounding  of  or  misinterpretation  of  such  metaphorical  names  or 
nicknames  with  the  real  objects,  that  is,  confusing  these  objects  with 
their  ancestors  of  the  same  name,  and  reverencing  them  as  they 
already  reverenced  their  ancestors.  Sii  John  Lubbock  takes  his  stand 
on  the  ''supposed  resemblance"  theory.  Totemism  can  not  be  traced 
from  ancestor  worship  directly,  because  it  actually  exists  where  there 
is  the  most  unsatisfactory  recognition  of  ancestry,  that  is  of  paternity 
or  maternity,  or  even  both.  The  confusion  of  natural  objects  with  their 
known  ancestors  of  the  same  names  and  reverencing  them  as  they  rev- 
erence such  ancestors  is  in  itself  quite  plausible  enough,  but  the  ex- 


*  Langsdorif,  Voyages,  part  ii,  p.  130. 

t  Dawson.  Report,  p.  134,  B. 

X  Correspondence,  also  Science,  Oct.  2(5,  1888. 

ij  Science,  Vol.  xii.  No.  a<)0,  p.  1!).'). 


250 


REPORT    OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


istence  of  tot&iuistu  where  ancestry  is  vaguely  or  Dot  at  all  recognized 
would  seem  in  itself  ^o  call  for  some  other  solution. 

Does  not  the  theory  of  anthropomorphism,  the  childish  and  natural 
philosophy  of  all  phenomena,  as  suggesed  by  Prof.  O.'T.  Mason,  accouut 
for  totemism  ?  Belief  in  the  possibility  of  uuman  descent  from  natural 
objects  exists  universally  amongst  primitive  people.  This  has  undoubt 
edly  been  strengthened  by  the  credibility  of  the  reality  of  experience  in 
dreams,  which,  as  a  sequence,  12  followed  by  a  belief  in  the  possibility 
of  sexual  relations  with  objects  ol  nature  also  founded  on  dreams.  The 
e::istence  of  customs  in  Bengal,  Sorvia,  and  Greece  of  marrying  bride 
and  groom  to  trees  before  marria§:e  to  each  other  is  an  illustration  of 
the  survival  of  such  belief.* 

Clearly,  before  we  can  have  a  recognition  of  ancestry,  we  must  have 
a  recognition  of  paternity  r  and  a  misinterpretation  of  names  and  con- 
founding of  ancestry  with  natural  objects  can  not  precede  a  belief  in 
the  possibility  of  sexual  relations  and  descent  from  natural  objects.  It 
seems  not  unreasouablo  therefore  to  trace  the  origin  of  the  belief  last 
named  to  the  well-known  anthropomorphism  and  credulity  of  savages 
in  the  reality  of  droams.  This  is  simply liere  suggested  as  a  partial 
solution  of  the  question. 


POLITICAL    ORGANIZATION. 

Chiefs  and  Petty  Chiefs. — In  the  senso  in  which  the  term  is  ordinarily 
used,  there  is  no  absolute  chiefship.  The  family  is  the  sociological  unit. 
The  head  of  that  household  in  the  village,  which,  through  inheritance, 
wealth,  numbers,  and  influence,  predominates  over  the  others,  is  nomi- 
nally chief  of  the  village.  His  authority  is  shadowy,  and  his  power  is 
largely  due,  aside  from  wealth,  good  birth,  and  family  influence,  to  his 
prowess  in  war,  or  o  i^ersonal  and  masterful  <[ualities.  Now  and  then, 
through  various  causes,  a  chief  may  rule  a  village  with  absolute  or  des 
potic  sway,  but  the  power  is  not  so  much  due  to  headship,  in  itself,  as 
to  personal  and  aggressive  qualities  in  the  individual.  Bank  is  prin- 
cipally dependent  on  wealth  and  good  birth,  although  the  latter  in  itself 
implies  inheritance  of  rank  and  wealth.  Personal  «iualities  count  for 
what  they  arc  worth  in  addiUun.  General  recognition  and  consensus 
of  opinion  settle  the  question  of  rank.  That  is  to  say,  it  is  about  what 
tue  individual  can  make  it  by  all  the  arts  of  assertion,  bargain,  int  Hguo, 
wealth,  display,  and  personal  prowess. 

Besides  the  principal  chief,  there  are  others,  who  are  the  heads  of  the 
other  principal  clan  totems  or  households  of  the  village.  Their  rank 
or  claim  to  distinction  and  respect  is  relative  to  that  of  the  chief  in 
the  degiee  of  their  wealth,  age,  superiority  of  natural  uuderstaodinfj:, 
the  nuknbur  of  persons  Of  which  their  household  consists,  and  the  gen- 
eral good  fortune  and  prosperity  of  the  group  of  persons  of  which  they 

*  Frazer,  Toteuiitiiu,  p.  '>H. 


i'HE    INDIANS    OF    THE    NOKTHWEMT    COAST. 


251 


all  recogoized 

ih  and  natural 
[ason,  accoQut 
Jit  from  natural 
lisijas  undoubt 
^f  experience  in 
the  possibility 
)n  dreams.  The 
|tnarryiug  bride 
illustration  of 

,  we  must  have 
ames  and  cou- 
ede  a  belief  in 
ural  objects.  It 
f  the  belief  last 
ulityof  savages 
ited  as  a  partial 


arm  is  ordinarily 
sociological  unit, 
ugh  inheritance, 
>  others,  is  nomi 
and  his  power  i.s 
influence,  to  hih> 
Now  and  then, 
I  absolute  or  des 
ship,  in  itself,  a.s 
Bank  is  priii- 
he  latter  in  itself 
alities  count  for 
1  and  consensus 
it  is  about  what 
argain,  int  'iguo, 

the  heads  of  the 
ge.  Their  rank 
of  the  chi«f  in 
understaudinj:, 
its,  and  the  gen 
la  of  which  thtv 


Ti 


are  the  recognized  head.  Indeed,  each  household  is  in  itself  a  subor- 
dinate government.  The  head  of  it,  through  heredity,  wealth,  ability, 
or  otherwise,  simply  is  recognized  as  a  petty  chief  in  the  village.  The 
head  chief  merely  overshadows  in  the  extent  of  his  influence  the  petty 
chiefs.  Often  reverses  of  fortune  turn  the  tables,  and  some  decline  in 
influence  while  others  rise.  Often  the  alliance  of  the  medicine  men 
is  gained  by  purchase  or  by  the  sacrifice  of  private  property,  and  the 
'.  chiefs  and  shamans  combine  to  uphold  each  other  in  the  respect  and  fear 
of  the  community.  Many  bitter  feuds  grow  out  of  the  rivalries  of  house- 
holds and  geutes  in  the  struggle  for  power  and  influence  in  the  tribe. 
Often  a  man  is  strong  enough,  like  Chief  Skowl  of  Kasa-an,  to  crush  out 
all  opposition,  or  even,  like  Chief  Skiddaus,*  to  extend  his  influence 
beyond  his  own  village  through  the  ownership  of  valuable  lands,  or 
through  the  necessities  of  war,  and  have  his  suzerainty  recognized 
by  the  chiefs  of  other  villages.  In  a  strict  sense,  however,  the  village 
is  the  tribal  unit.  Alliances  of  tribes  have  always  been  oaiy  temporary, 
and  no  lasting  federation  bas  ever  been  formed.  Simpson,  who  visited 
Alaska  in  1841,  saye,  of  the  rivalries  of  Chiefs  Shakes  and  Qualkay, 
at  Fort  Wrangell  (Stikine),  "  though  Shakes  way  the  principal  chief, 
yet  he  had  comparatively  little  influence;  while  the  second  ruler  in 
the  tribe  (Qualkay)  possessed  a  strong  party  in  the  village."t 

A  chief,  as  a  rule,  is  not  treated  with  any  very  marked  deference  on 
i  ordinary  occasions  excepting  by  his  own  household,  but  in  ceremonies 
a  degree  of  state  was  formerly  kept  up,  to  Impress  visitors  or  strangers 
with  the  iraportauce  and  high  rank  of  the  dignitary.  In  the  ceremonies 
at  the  conclusion  of  peace  Ixii^een  the  Eussians  and  Indians  at  Sitka 
(1804),  Lisiansky  states  that  the  Indian  chief  who  acted  as  an  ambassa- 
dor was  either  borne  by  his  slaves  upon  a  mat-carpet  or  rug,  or  carried 
on  the  shoulders  of  his  attendants,  as  become  his  rank,  and  not  due  to 
any  infirmity  of  the  chief,  for  In  the  ceremonial  dances  which  followed 
he  took  a  promhient  par*^.  4. 

In  early  days  thecLief  traded  for  all  his  tribe  or  houcebold,  subject 
however,  to  the  approval  of  those  present ;  but  in  recent  years,  with  the 
aboHtion  of  slavery  and  the  influence  of  the  whites,  the  authority  of 
the  chiefs  has  been  very  much  weakened.  Instances  are  not  rare 
where  medicine  men  or  shamans  have  been  head  chiefs  of  villages. 

frecwe.  .—Below  the  chiefs  come  the  freemen,  who  are  the  ordinary 
people  of  the  tribe  composing  the  different  households.  Above  these  in 
one  sense,  or  above  the  petty  chiefe  for  that  ma;  ter,  come  the  shamans 
or  medicine  men.  This  rank,  however,  is  in  no  sense  political.  They 
are  simply  a  class  whose  fanctious  are  largely  religious. 

Slaves.— On  our  acquisition  of  the  territory  of  Alaska  in  1867  the 
practice  of  slavery  received  its  death-blow  amongst  the  Indians.    Pre- 


•  Poole,  Queen  Charlotte  Islauds,  British  Colnmbis,  p.  108. 
t  Simpson,  Journey  Ronnd  the  World,  Vol.  i,  p.  ai2. 
\  LiHiansky,  Voynges,  i>.  2M. 


252 


REPORT    OF    NATIONAIi   MII8KUM,  1888. 


n      ' 


I      I' 


viously  to  that  the  Kussiaii  aulhuritic^  had  Hongbt  to  ameliorate,  iu  .some 
degree,  the  hardships  of  this  wretched  class  in  the  vicinity  of  Sitka,  but 
it  was  still  in  practice  when  we  took  possession.  The  slave  class  has 
now  gradually  been  absorbed  into  the  body  of  the  freemen  and  slavery 
is  a  thing  of  the  past. 

Formerly  wealth  consisted  largely  in  the  possession  of  slaves.  Simp- 
sou  estimates  that  in  1841  one-third  of  the  entire  population  of  this 
region  were  slaves  of  the  most  helplesss  and  abject  description. 
Though  some  of  them  were  prisoners  of  war  and  their  descendants,  y^f 
the  great  supply  was  obtained  by  trade  with  the  southern  Indians,  ^ 
which  the  Tsirashian  acted  as  middlemen.  They  were  kidnapped  ov 
captured  by  the  southern  Indians  from  their  own  adjacent  tribes  and 
sold  to  the  Tsimshian,  ..ho  traded  i^hem  to  the  northern  Tlingit  and  in- 
terior Tinnd  tribes  for  furs.  The  last-named  had  no  heref^itary  slaves, 
getting  their  supply  from  the  coast.  Dunn  states  (1834)  that  at  Port 
Simpson,  British  Columbia,  ''  A  full-grown  athletic  slave,  who  is  a  good 
hunter,  will  fetch  nine  blankets,  a  gun,  a  quantity  of  powder  and  ball, 
a  couple  of  dressed  elk  skins,  tobacco,  vermilion  paint,  a  flat  file,  and 
other  little  articles."  * 

Slaves  did  all  the  drudgery;  fished  for  their  owner;  strengthened 
hia  force  in  war;  were  not  allowed  to  hold  property  or  to  marry; 
and  when  old  and  worthless  were  killed.  The  master's  power  was 
unlimited.  If  ordered  by  him  to  murder  an  enemy  or  rival,  his  own  life 
paid  the  forfeit  or  penalty  if  lie  either  refused  or  failed.  The  children 
of  slave  women  by  the  master  were  slaves.  In  certain  ceremonies  it 
was  customary  to  give  several  slaves  their  freedom  ;  but  at  funerals  of 
chiefs,  or  iu  ceremonies  attending  the  erection  of  a  house  by  a  person 
of  consequence,  slaves  were  killed.  Slaves  sacrificed  at  funerals  were 
chosen  long  before  the  death  of  their  master  and  were  supposed  to  be 
peculiarly  fortunate,  as  their  bodies  attained  the  distinction  of  cremation, 
instead  of  being  thrown  intothe  sea.  Simpson  (1841)  says  of  Chief  Shakes 
at  Wrangell  (Stikine),  that  be  was  "  said  to  be  very  cruel  to  his  slaves, 
whom  he  frequently  sacrificed  in  pnra  wantonness,  in  order  to  show  how 
great  a  man  he  was.  Un  the  recent  occasion  of  a  house-warming,  he 
exhibited  as  part  of  the  festiv  ities  the  butchery  of  five  slaves ;  and  at 
another  time,  having  struck  a  white  man  in  a  fit  of  drunkenness  and  re- 
ceived a  pair  of  black  eyes  for  his  pains,  he  ordered  a  slave  to  be  shot, 
by  way  at  once  of  satifying  hie  own  wounded  honor  an<\  ^,,u»Iogizing 
to  the  person  whom  he  had  assaulted.  His  riva'  \Quulk>iyy  ou  the 
contrary,  was  possessed  of  such  kindness  of  heart,  uhafc  on  ^laud  holi- 
days he  was  more  ready  to  emancipate  his  slaves  than  to  destroy  them ; 
yet,  strange  to  say,  many  bondmen  used  to  run  away  from  Qualkay, 
while  none  attempted  to  escape  from  Shakes;  an  anomaly  which,  how- 
ever, was  easily  explained,  inasmuch  as  the  one  would  pardon  the 
recaptured  fugitives,  and  the  other  wonld  torture  and  murder  tbera."! 


•Dnnn,  Orfigon,  p.  273. 


tSimpHnn..Tonrnev,  Vol.  i,  pp.  212,  213. 


THE   INDIANS   OF   THE   NOKTHWEST   COAST. 


253 


orate,  m  some 
'of  Sitka,  but 
lave  class  haa 
ill  and  slavery 

ilaves.  Simp- 
lation  of  this 
description, 
icendants,  j'^t 
rn  Indians,  ^  > 
kidnapped  ov 
ent  tribes  and 
riingit  and  in- 
ef^itary  slaves, 
4)  that  at  Port 
I,  who  is  a  good 
wder  and  ball, 
a  flat  file,  and 

1  strengthened 
or  to  marry; 
r's  power  was 
eal,  his  own  life 
The  children 
I  ceremonies  it 
t  at  funerals  of 
ise  by  a  person 
t  funerals  were 
supposed  to  be 
n  of  cremation, 
jfChief  Shakes 
il  to  his  slaves, 
er  to  show  how 
se-warming,  he 
slaves ;  and  at 
cenness  and  re- 
ive to  be  shot, 
u\  ^iuilogizing 
alkuyV  f>n  the 
Oii  <^iaud  holi- 
destroy  them ; 
from  Qualkay, 
ly  which,  how- 
Id  pardon  the 
rderthera."t 

p.  '212,  nx 


The  practice  of  killing  slaves  in  ceremonies  and  for  reparation  in 

[quarrels  was  quite  common  among  the  northern  tribes,  and  namerons 

instances  might  be  cited.    At  Howkan,  in  one  of  the  Indian  houses,  may 

[be  seen  a  couple  of  large  wooden  images  each  representing  a  wolf,  with 

luman  face  and  real  human  hair  on  the  head.    This  was  to  remind 

flaves  that,  if  they  escaped  from  their  owners,  they  would  become 

■ansforraed  into  creatures  like  those  depicted,  half  man,  half  wolf. 

Poole  (1863)  says  that  the  Haida,  Chief  Elue,  informed  him  "that 

iiSjiorae  years  previously  his  brother-in-law,  in  those  days  the  greatest 

^hief  on  the  coast,  had  been  entrapped  by  the  Fort  Rupert  Indians  on 

is  way  home  from  Victoria  and  scalped  and  killed,  with  all  his  males, 

lis  females  being  divided  as  slaves  among  the  victors."*    This  example 

is  cited  to  show  that  it  was  very  questionable  if  the  northern  Indians 

ade  very  good  slaves,  being  so  warlike,  and  preferring,  as  they  claim, 

leath  to  slavery.    On  the  other  hand,  the  southern  tribes  were  more 

[ocile,  the  Flatheads  forming  the  principal  part  of  the  slave  popula- 

;ion  of  the  northern  Indians.    In  case  of  the  liberation  of  a  sl^ve,  he 

as  adopted  as  a  freeman  into  the  clan  to  which  his  mother  belonged 

lither  by  birth  or  as  a  slave. 

Civil  Oovernmont. — There  are  no  stated  periods  for  councils  or  deiib- 

irativo  gatherings.    A  household  consultation  or  u  meeting  of  the  gena 

ir  of  the  chiefs  takes  place  under  the  spur  of  necessity.    Women  have 

IsuR'iy  ri3  much  to  SDy  as  the  men  on  other  than  ceremonial  occasions, 

IMii-  idvice  is  frequently  followed,  particularly  in  affairs  of  trade. 

>  uti  rs  affecting  one  oi  more  gentes  or  the  village,  representatives 

^  ^  V  vrii;U8  houseboUls  or  gentes  meet  more  formally.    They  squat 

irouni    .'  y'^-j  cross  legged,  delivering  formal  speeches  in  turn,  which 

re  heard  »vith  rapt  attention  and  .ipprovcd  of  by  grunts,  murmurs, 

ud  uplifting  of  hands.    In    ;.ih'»8  such  as  witchcrift  or  offenses  of 

edicine  men,  sentence  to  d^  .'^    yr  to  fine  is  adjudged  by  the  leading 

men  of  the  village  after  trial.     Under  most  circun: stances,  however, 

be  law  of  blood  revenge,  an  "  eye  for  an  eye, "  leaves  little  need  for 

■other  than  family  councils,  a3  they  are  purely  totemic  offenses,  and  are 

rranged  by  the  injured  gens, 

INDUSTRI.iL  OKOANIZATION. 

Divinion  of  Lftlor.—As  between  the  sexes,  the  women  attend  mostly 
to  the  common  household  duties,  but  tl  .e  men  have  a  fair  share  of  the 
I  outside  work  about  the  house  and  camp.  A  chief  is  usually  more  or 
I  less  waited  on  by  his  dependents.  When  slavery  was  in  vogue,  this  class 
I  performed  all  the  menial  drudgery.  The  libdrated  slaves  still  occupy 
i  a  somewhat  dependent  position.  Tiio  men  are  the  warriors  and  hunt- 
!  cr.s,  though  an  old  woman  of  rank  usually  steers  the  war  canoe.  In 
ordinary  lian.sit  tho  women  assist  the  rfien  in  peddling,  and  the  owner 


•IVmiIp,  (Jiifcn  Ch.Trlnffc  l-liinds,  (i.  W>. 


WMf 


rem 


254 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


iili' 


orthe  mostexperieuced  person  steers.  In  the  season  of  hnnting  fur-bear- 
ing animals,  the  women  and  children  (and  formerly  slaves)  take  charge 
of  the  camps — fishing,  drying  fish,  and  gathering  and  drying  berries 
for  winter.  Altogether  the  division  of  labor  is  upon  equitable  and 
economic  principles,  and  the  women  by  no  means  do  all  the  drudgery. 
During  the  runs  c'^  salmon,  herring,  and  eulachon,  and  in  fact  at  all 
*imes  during  the  Si  .  reason,  special  employment  is  dropped,  and 

all  the  natives  alike  c.  j  in  the  work  in  hand.  In  addition  to  the 
food  supply,  materials  a.c  collected  to  be  worked  up  during  the  winter 
months,  by  those  specially  skilled,  into  various  useful  and  ornamental 
objects.  Diflferent  men  and  women  acquire  adeptness  in  different  arts 
and  industries,  and  devote  their  leisure  to  their  trade.  Some  of  the 
men  are  expert  house-carpenters,  canoe-builders,  basket-makers,  tan- 
ners of  hides,  hewers  of  wood,  metal  workers,  carv  ers  of  wood,  stone, 
horn,  bone,  slate,  manufacturers  of  metal  implements,  ornaments,  house- 
hold utensils,  etc.^  and  are  regularly  paid  for  their  services.  This  is 
especially  true  of  the  wood-carvers,  who  make  and  paint  the  totemic  and 
mortuary  columns.  Othersenjoy  prestigeas  successful  huntersof  certain 
animals  or  expert  fishermen.  Some  of  the  women  are  expert  basket- 
makers,  carvers  of  household  utensils,  weavers  of  cloaks  and  mats  of 
cedar  bark  and  wool,  and  maVrrsof  dance  and  ceremonial  costumes. 
Generally  the  men  are  carvers  and  the  women  weavers.  Dnnn  (1834) 
says  of  the  Tsimshian,  and  it  applies  also  to  the  Haida  and  Tlingit, 
"  Every  chief  keeps  an  Indian  on  his  establishment  for  making  and  re- 
pairing canoes  and  makinjj  masks  for  his  religious  representations;  this 
man  they  call  the  carpenter. "  * 

Portlock  (1786)  says  of  the  Tlingit,  "the  women  are  the  keepers  of 
their  treasures,  "t  In  fact,  as  before  stated,  the  women  are  practically 
on  an  equality  with  themeu  in  the  industrial  organization,  and  whether 
her  advice  in  all  matters  is  sought  or  not,  she  is  quite  apt  to  give  it. 
Gases  of  "hen-pecked"  husbands  are  not  rare. 

Inheritan  ?. — In  this  totemic  organization  some  singular  features 
present  themselves.  Blood  relationship  is  cut  across  in  an  arbitrary 
way,  giving  rise  to  peculiar  customs  and  laws.  As  before  stated,  first 
cousins  may  marry,  but  totally  unrelated  persons  in  the  same  phratry 
may  not.  In  a  war  between  gentes  or  phratries,  a  groom,  while  cele- 
brating his  nuptials,  may  be  called  upon  to  fight  his  father-in-law  on 
account  of  some  trivial  feud. 

Property  is  inherited  by  the  brother  of  the  deceased,  a  sister's  son,  a 
sister,  or  the  mother,  in  the  order  named,  in  the  absence  of  the  preced- 
ing. As  a  rule  the  wife  gets  nothing.  She  h.is  her  own  dovvry  and 
personal  property.  Whoevej  inherits  the  property  of  the  deceased,  if 
a  brother  or  sister's  son,  must  either  take  the  widow  to  wife,  or  pay  an 
indemnity  to  her  relatives  in  case  of  failure  to  do  so.  In  case  the  heir 
is  already  married,  the  next  in  snocesaion  takes  her;  for  instance,  the 


'Dnmi,  Oregon,  p.  iWI. 


t  PoHlock,  Vo.vuKas,  p.  21H). 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    NORTHWEST   COAST, 


265 


iropped,  and 


{brother  may  inherit  the  property  and  the  nephew  get  the  relict.    In 

[case  there  is  uo  male  relative  to  marry  her  or  in  case  an  indemiyty  is 

[paid,  the  widow  may  marry  any  other  man.    Sometiives  an  adopted 

[child  or  the  sou  adopted  by  a  sister  of  the  deceased  may  be  the  heir. 

iThe  heir  of  Chief  Skowl   of  Kasa-an  (Kaigani)  was  his  sister's  son, 

^ahattan,  who  is  now  chief  of  th*-  •  Jlage.    Should  a  boy  be  killed  by 

iccident,  the  indemnity  is  paid,  by  a  reversal  of  this  rule,  to  his  mother's 

)rother,  the  boy's  uncle.    Property  inherited  is  taken  possession  of  by 

jbhe  heir  as  soon  as  the  body  is  burned  or  enclosed  in  the  burial  box. 

It  becop^es  bis  duty  within  a  year  to  give  a  great  feast  and  erect  a 

lortuary  column  in  honor  of  the  deceased.    This  ceremony  is  called 

glorifying  or  elevating  the  dead,  and  is  one  of  the  principal  ones  in  this 

region. 

Lisiansky  (1805)  says  of  the  Tlingit  about  Sitka: 

The  rigbt  of  succession  is  from  uncle  to  nephew  [meaning  sister's  son],  tbe  dignity 
)f  chief  to  yon  excepted,  which  passes  to  him  who  is  the  most  powerful,  or  has  tbe 
Igreatest  number  of  relations.  Thuug;-  the  toyons  have  power  over  their  subjects,  it 
lis  a  very  limited  power,  unless  when  an  'ndividual  of  extraordinary  ability  starts  up, 
Iwho  is  sure  to  rule  despotically,  and,  as  elsewhere,  to  do  much  mischief.  These  toy- 
f  ons  are  numerous ;  even  in  small  settlements  there  are  often  four  or  five.* 


SUMMAKV. 

The  industrial  or^iization  is  not  difterent  from  the  political,  and 

lost  of  the  laws  and  customs  which  control  thom  in  their  actions  are 

rounded  on  totemic  laws,    traditions,   legends,  folk-lore,  and  super- 

gtitious.    For  this  reason  the  regulative  organization,  while  not  exactly 

peak,  is  at  least  not  well  differentiated.    The  actual  function  or  occu- 

Ipation  of  the  individual,  both  as  a  member  of  a  household  and  of  the 

Itribe,  is  partially  developed,  although  there  are  no  real  craft  classes. 

j  Organization  is  based  on  kinship,  and  descent  is  in  the  female  line. 

Totemism  cuts  across  blood  relationship  and  its  chief  bearing  is  on 

[  marriage.    Most  of  the  ceremonies  have  a  bearing  directly  on  totemism, 

and  have  for  their  object  the  identification  of  the  individual  with  his 

totem. 


•Lisiansky,  Voyages,  p.  243. 


IV. 

PERSONAL  ADORNMENT:  MUTILATIONS,  LIP  ORNAMENTS,  TATTOOING, 
AND  PAINTING.  ORNAMENTS,  NECKLACES,  PENDANTS,  AND  BRACE- 
LETS.   DRESS,  ANCIENT,  MODERN,  RAIN,    IfAR,  AND  CERE  MONIAL. 


MUTILATIONS. 

The  practice  of  mutilation  is  older  than  recorded  history,  Man  never 
jias  been  satisfied  with  either  his  structure  or  appearance,  and  has  con- 
stantly e;ideavored  to  improve  upon  both.  On  the  northwest  coast  the 
mutilations  are  of  the  head  and  face,  the  practice  of  flattening  oi-  com- 
pressing the  head  being,  however,  peculiar  only  to  the  southern  tribes 
of -this  region.  Mackenzie,  in  his  visit  to  the  Bilqnla,  in  1793,  described 
their  heads  as  "  wedge-shaped."  This  does  not,  however,  obtain  among 
the  Haida,  Tsinishian,  and  Tlingit,  but  they  pierce  the  ear  and  the  sep- 
tum of  the  nose,  and  in  addition  the  women  slit  the  lower  lip. 

Zip,  nose,  and  ear  ornaments. — While  amongst  the  Eskimo  the  men 
pierce  the  lip  and  wear  the  sleeve  button-shaped^brets  of  bone,  shell, 
ivory,  or  stone,  amongst  the  northern  Indians  the  women  alone  wear 
the  lip  ornament.  Between  these  two  geographically  are  the  Koniagas 
and  Aleut.  With  the  Koniagas  both  sexes  pierce  the  septum  of  the 
uose  and  the  under  lip  and  wear  ornaments  in  them. 

Beginning  with  the  Yakutat*  and  running  as  far  south  as  the  Kwa- 
kiutl,t  we  find  the  custom  amongst  the  women  of  wearing  a  labret  in 
a  slit  cut  in  the  lower  lip.  It  is  symbolic  of  maturity,  the  incision  first 
being  made  either  in  childhood  or  else  at  puberty.  In  either  case  it  is 
done  with  some  ceremony,  which  is  described  in  Chapter  xiii.  A  cop- 
per wire|  or  piece  of  shell  or  wood  is  introduced  into  the  fresh  incision 
to  keep  the  wound  open.  The  object  inserted  is  gradually  enlarged 
until  an  artificial  opening  of  some  size  is  made.  Wiien  maturity  is 
reached  a  block  of  wood  is  inserted.  This  is  oval  or  elliptical  in  shape, 
and  amongst  the  Haida  and  Tsinishian  quite  elongated.  With  the 
Tlingit,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  almost  (circular  in  shape.  In  general 
it  is  hollowed  out  on  both  sides,  and  grooved  on  the  edge  like  the  sheave 


/'  i 


*  Dall,  Alaska,  p.  428,  and  Jiaiicroft,  Vol.  i,  Native  Races,  both  state  that  the  Ya- 
kutat do  not  now  wear  ^Uo  lip  ornaiiiont.  Dixon  (1787),  howovov,  in  Voyajjos,  )i.  172, 
niinntely  detw-iibeH  the  cimtoni  as  then  in  vojtne  !inionj{8t  tlieiii. 

t  SimpHon,  .Tournoy  Round  the  World,  p.  'MH,  Vol.  i.  (Itjil). 

t  Van<'Ouvfir,  Voyages,  Vol.    ii,    p.  40H,  states  that  the  eopiicr  or  brass  "corrodes 

the  lacerated  parts,  and  by  eonsinniiij;   tiie  llesh'ijradnally  imreiiHeN  ll rilice  until 

it  Ih  HuHieieiitly  larjjo  to  uilniit  tlie  wooden  appendn-^e." 


?,  TATTOOING, 
;,  AND  BRACE- 
HE  MONIAL. 


jT,  Mail  never 
},  and  has  cou- 
west  coast  the 
ten  in  g  oi-  com- 
outhern  tribes 
L793,  described 
,  obtain  among 
w  and  the  sep- 
V  lip. 
kimo  the  men 

of  bone,  shell, 
len  alone  wear 
i  the  Koniagas 

septum  of  the 

th  as  the  Kwa- 
ing  a  labret  in 
le  incision  first 
iither  case  it  is 
r  XIII.  A  cop- 
e  fresh  incision 
liially  enlarged 
en  maturity  is 
itical  in  shape, 
^ed.  With  the 
>e.  In  general 
like  the  sheave 


itate  that  tlie  Ya- 
iii  Voyages,  p.  172, 


r  lii'Hss  "rovrodcs 
I'H  (III'  oi'idi'c  iiiilil 


256 


1 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   IV, 

Chief  Kitkun,  of  the  Haida  Village  of  Las  Keek,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British 

Columbia. 

From  a  photograph  in  the  U.  S.  National  Muse.im. 

Kitkun  is  liere  selected  as  a  type  of  the  Haida  Indian.  Tlie  rank  which  he  held 
in  1873  was  that  of  a  petty  chief  of  the  Aillage.  his  brother,  Chief  Klue.  l)eing  the 
head  chief.  On  the  death  of  his  brother,  Kitkun  Ix'canie  liead  chief  of  tiie  village, 
assuming  the  hereditary  title.  Chief  Klue.  The  tattoo  mark  on  the  breast  repre- 
sents Kahatla,  the  cod-fish,  and  that  on  his  arms  Cheena,  the  salmon.  The  de.sign 
on  his  back  is  shown  in  Fig.  2,  Plate  V,  and  represents  Wasko,  a  mythological 
being  of  the  wolf  si)ecies. 


ill 


1 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888 — Niblack. 


PLATE   IV. 


Islands,  British 


£  which  he  held 
Khie,  \mng  tlie 
f  of  tlie  village, 
le  breast  repre- 
jn.  The  design 
a  mythological 


^HIEF  KiTKUN,  OF  THE  HAIDA  VILLAGE  OF  LAS  KEEK,  QUEEN  CHARLOTTE   ISLANDS,  BRITISH 

Columbia. 


■ 


ill 


1';   I. 


f  :  ■ ! 


h 


V  Ml 

I  1 


!'■! 


I 


EXPLANATION   OF  PLATE  V. 


Haida  Tattooing. 

From  photographs  by  the  author  and  sketches  by  James  G   Swan,  of  Port  Townsend,  Waihington. 

Fig.  8.  Design  copieil  from  tlif  hack  of  Ciiief  Kitkun, representing  Wasko.  a  myth- 

ologiciil  being  of  the  wolf  .specii  s. 
Fig.  tin.  Tattooeil  'lesigi:  on  the  back  of  tiie  Haida  (nliown  in  Fig.  4)  representing 

the  Thiin<ler-l)ir(l. 
Fig.  '6l>.   Design  on  the  leg  of  the  Haitla  (shown  in  Fig.  4),»half  way  between  the 

knee  anil  thigli,  representing  tiie  sijuid  octopus. 
Fig.  3c.  Design  on  tlie  skin  of  tlu-  Haida  (sliown  in  Fig.  4)  just  below  the  knee, 

repres*  nting  Tliinkostan.  the  frog. 
Fig.  4.  Young  Hilda  from  C^ueen  Cliarlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.     The  tattoo 

mark  on  tiie  breast  repre.sents  Hoorts,  the  bear,  and  that  on  liis  fore-arm 

Koot,  ihe  eagle 


Rtport  of  N«<ional  Muieum,  IS8B — Niblick. 


Plate  V. 


T 


??f 


1 !'  H- 


1        i' 


J' 


8^ 


?'\       ■      *     !    - 


Haida  Tattooing. 


■ 

• 

i 

Ik 

1  i  I  'i 


THE    INDIANS   OF   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


25V 


of  a  pulley  to  keep  it  iu  place.  Each  succeediug  year  a  larger  f<ad 
larger  lip-block  is  inserted,  the  effect  being  iu  old  age  tc  drag  the  lip 
down,  exposing  the  discolored  and  worn  teeth,  and  forming  altogether, 
to  the  European,  a  disgusting  spectacle,  but  to  them  a  thing  of  beauty 
and  a  token  of  rank,  maturity,  and  social  position.  In  running,  it  flops 
up  and  down  between  the  nose  and  chin  iu  a  very  und'siified  manner. 
It  is  as  embarrassing  to  an  Indian  woman  to  be  seen  without  her  labret  as 
for  a  European  woman  to  be  seen  with  uncovered  bosom.*  Female 
slaves  were  invariably  forbidde  i  the  privilege  of  wearing  them.  The 
size  of  the  labret  measures  the  social  importance  and  wealth  of  the 
wearer.  The  oustom  is  now  dying  out,  but  is  still  seen  amongst  the 
older  Haida  women,  the  labrets  being  principally  made  of  wood.  Form- 
erly it  was  the  custom  to  ornament  tUecx  with  copper  and  inlay  them 
with  haliotis  shell  by  way  of  beautifying  tlieni.  They  varied  in  size 
from  4  inches  long  by  3  broad  down  to  small  but '>n8  to  wear  in  the 
lirst  incision.  No  -  that  this  custom  is  dying  out,  a  form  of  it  is  seen 
ill  tl'.e  piercing  of  itie  lip  with  a  small  hole  and  the  insertion  of  a  silver 
tube  or  bar  (Plate  xi). 

Piercing  the  nose. — Both  sexes  pierce  the  saptum  of  the  nose  and  in- 
sert orna;j»ents,  originally  of  copper,  bone,  wood,  or  haliotis  shell,  but 
now  of  silver,  such  as  rings  or  bars  or  tufts  ot  red  woolen  yarn,  wi^h 
pe  'dent  shark's  teeth.  The  Tlingit  wear  a  silver  or  bone  ring  through 
the  nose,  as  seeu  in  several  accompanying  plates,  but  formerly  the  cus- 
tom cf  wearing  an  ivory  stick  or  pin  obtained  in  some  localities. 

Piercing  the  ears. — Both  sexes  pierce  the  lobe  of  the  ear  and  wear  or- 
naments as  in  the  nose.  Around  the  rim  of  the  ear  additional  holes  are 
jiierced.  Men  of  rank  have  as  many  as  five  or  six  of  these  latter.  For- 
merly, according  to  Dawson,t  "  these  held  little  ornaments  f'  '-med  of 
plates  of  haliotis  shell,  backed  with  thin  sheet  copper  or  the  sii.dll  teeth 
of  the  tin- whale."  This  custom  is  also  fast  dying  out.  i^  aougst  the 
older  men  and  women  one  still  sees  these  practices,  but  iu  a  modified 
and  less  pronounced  form. 

Tattooing.— Thi»  practice  is  found  rarely  among  the  Tlingit,  if  at  all, 
and  only  occasionally  amongst  the  Tsimshiau,  although  it  crops  out 
here  and  there,  in  a  very  mild  form,  all  along  the  coast.  With  the 
lliiida  alone,  of  all  the  Indian  stocks,  tattooing  is  a  fijie  art,  and  is  com- 
nioii  to  both  sexes.  The  figures  are  conventional  representations  of 
llu'ir  totems,  pricked  in  charcoal,  lignite,  or  black  pigment,  and  serve  to 
itkiitiify  the  iudividual  with  his  or  her  totem,  Tlie  men  have  these  de- 
'ij;!i3  tattooed  on  their  breasts,  on  their  backs  between  their  shoulders, 

0  1  the  front  part  of  their  legs  below  the  thighs,  on  the  shins  below  the 

1  knee,  and  on  the  back  of  the  fore-arms.    Occa^iionally  the  men  also  have 
these  designs  on  the  cheek  and  back  of  the  hai*.ds,  although  rarely  seen 


*  l.a  P6rouBO,  Voyage,  torn,  ii,  p.  "itW, 

H.  Mis.  142,  pt.  3 17 


t  Dawfiou,  Roport,  B,  p.  I0i>, 


258 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL    MU.^EUM,  1888. 


II   1. 


now.*  The  women  tattoo  the  same  ass  the  mi  n,  excepting  that  the  de- 
signs on  the  upper  part  of  the  leg  are  said  to  le  omitted.  The  designs 
on  their  fore-arms  invariably  extend  down  ove.''  the  back  of  the  hands 
and  knuckles,  and  this  alone  serves  to  distingt  ish  the  Haida  women 
from  those  of  other  tribes  on  the  coast.  Plate  iv  shows  the  tattooing  on 
KUkUn,  Chief  of  Laskeek,  Queen  Charlotte  Islani\s,  British  Columbia. 
Plate  V  shows  the  details  of  tattooing,  which  subjeit  will  be  found  more 
thoroughly  treated  in  a  paper  by  Judge  J.  G.  Swan,  in  the  Fourth 
Annual  Report  of  the  Bureau  of  Ethnology,  pp.  66-73.  Fig.  2,  Plate  v, 
is  the  design  on  back  of  Kitkim.  Frequently  the  tatrooing  on  the  hands 
represents  finger-rings  and  bracelets.  A  Haida  woman  who  had  on  her 
person  a  figure  of  a  halibut  laid  open,  with  the  face  of  the  chief  of  her 
tribe  shown  on  the  tail,  told  Poole  that  it  would  protect  her  and  her 
kin  from  drowning  at  8ea.t    •    •    *    Judge  Swan  says: 

It  shoald  be  borne  ia  mind  that,  diiriug  tbese  festivals  and  masquerade  perform- 
ances, the  men  are  entirely  naked,  and  the  woiueu  have  only  a  thort  skirt  reaching 
from  tbe  waist  to  the  knee;  the  rest  of  their  persons  are  exposed,  and  it  is  at  such 
times  that  the  tattoo  marks  show  with  the  best  eft'ect,  and  the  rank  ,ind  family  connec- 
tion are  known  by  the  variety  of  designs.  Like  all  the  other  coast  tribes,  the  Haidns 
are  careful  not  to  permit  the  intnision  of  white  persons  or  strangers  to  their  Tomana- 
wos  ceremonies,  and  as  a  cousoqueuce  but  few  white  people,  and  certainly  none  of 
those  who  have  ever  written  about  these  Indians,  have  been  present  at  their  opening 
ceremonies  when  the  tattoo  marks  are  shown.  *  *  *  As  this  tattooinu;  is  a  mark  of 
honor,  it  is  generally  done  just  prior  to  a  Tonianawos  performance,  ,ind  at  the  time 
of  raising  the  heraldic  columns  in  front  of  the  chief's  houses.  The  tattooing  is  done 
in  open  lodge  and  is  witnessed  by  th«  company  assembled.  Sonjetimen  it  takes  sev- 
eral years  before  all  the  tattooing  is  done,  but  when  completed  and  thu  body  is  well 
ornamented,  then  they  are  happy  ;iii(l  can  take  thoir  sea'.';  it.uoiig  the  eiders. 

The  design  is  carefully  drawn  in  charcoal  or  lignite  (ground  in  water) 
on  the  body  and  tlien  pricked  ia  witli  needles.  It  takes  some  time  to 
finish  a  design,  but  once  completed  tiie  status  of  the  individual  is  fixed 
for  life. 

Painting  the  body. — From  tlio  Yakutat,  throughout  the  region  south, 
the  cur.tom  obtains,  on  ceremonial  ocicasioiis,  of  painting  the  face  and 
body  a  variety  of  colors,  and  daubing  the  hair  with  red,  black,  or  brown 
pigments.  This  custom  is  now  becoming  rare.  On  ceremonial  occa- 
sions of  importance  the  white  down  of  eagles  or  other  birds  is  pow- 
dered over  the  paint  on  the  body  and  head,  giving  a  polite  coat  of  tar 
and  feathers.  In  war  various  hideous  and  grotesque  patterns  were 
formerly  adopted  for  the  face,  such  as  a  circle  of  black  with  a  red  chin, 
giving  to  the  wearer  the  appearance  of  having  on  a  mask.  The  colors 
on  the  body  are  removed  in  lines  by  brushes  or  sticks  in  order  to  trace 
the  pattern  '>f  the  totem  of  the  wearer,  similar  to  the  tatooing  on  the 
body.    Amongst  the  Tlingit  this  in  effect  takes  the  place  of  tattooing; 


eometimes 
Nowadays 
it  was  th 
coat  daily 
abilities, 
whom  he 

These  bad 
ural  uglinesi 
(lid  not  seen 
their  natura 

Before  t 

toilets.  I 
of  adornin 
In  war  an 
fled  the  v 
the  body  i 
principal 
black  pail 
the  moun 
brownish- 
the  skin  i 
a  protecti 
Boot,  like 
skin  witt 
iiewed. 

In  gen( 
gus;  whi 
and  powd 

Hair,— 
the  hair 
git,  this 
worn  sho 
who  nsua 
in  one  pi 
lier  custc 
says:  "1 
ii  bunch 
tied  at  tl 

The  hi 
as  illusti 
Kmmon£ 
Figure  1 


•Seen  by  the  writer  at  Knsaan  village  (Kaignni)  188.").    Tht^practice  of  tattooing 
is  dying  out  and  only  found  among  the  older  peoiile. 
tPoolo,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  311  [18G4]. 


THE   INDIANS   OF    THE    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


259 


eoiuetiiues  the  desiguH  are  laid  over  the  other  paint  with  charcoal. 
Nowadays  the  paiut  is  washed  off  after  the  ceremouies,  but  formerly 
it  was  the  custom  throughout  the  coast  for  the  rich  to  reuew  the 
coat  daily,  while  the  poor  would  have  to  manage  according  to  their 
abilities.  Vancouver  thus  describes  the  war  paint  of  the  Nass,  with 
whom  he  had  a  hostile  encounter : 

These  bad  contrived  so  to  dispora  of  the  red,  whitj,  and  black  as  to  reuder  the  uat- 
ural  ugliness  of  their  counteuances  muio  horribly  hideous.  This  frightful  appearance 
(lid  not  seeiu  to  be  a  new  fashion  among  theto,  but  to  have  been  long  adopted  by 
their  natural  ferocious  dispositions.* 

Before  the  advent  of  looking-glasses  the  Indians  made  one  another's 
toilets.  A  chief  was  served  by  his  slaves  or  his  wife.  This  custom 
of  adorning  the  body  with  paint  served  other  than  aesthetic  purposes. 
In  war  and  ceremouy  it  added  to  the  effect  on  the  observers ;  it  identi- 
fied the  wearer  with  his  totem,  and  finally  served  as  a  protection  to 
the  body  against  mosquitoes  and  the  weather.  This  last  named  is  the 
principal  use  to  which  the  custom  is  now  put,  viz,  of  wearing  a  coat  of 
black  paint  on  the  face  and  hands.  This  must  be  distinguished  from 
the  mourning  paint  made  from  charcoal.  The  other  referred  to  is  a 
brownish-black  paint,  now  commonly  worn  to  .prevent  ih(^  burning  of 
the  skin  in  hot  weather  from  the  gkre  of  the  sun  on  tht  >ter,  and  as 
a  protection  against  mosquitoes  and  sand-flies.  This  coat  c<  tisists  of  a 
yoot,  like  burnt  cork,  made  from  a  charred  fungus,  rubbed  into  tlio 
skin  with  grease.  This  gradually  turns  black  and  is  frequently  i-e- 
iiewed. 

In  general  the  paints  used  were  charcoal,  charred  and  roasted  fun- 
gus; white,  red,  and  brown  earths  (ochres);  lignite,  vegetable  juices; 
and  powdered  cinnabar. 

Hair. — As  mentioned,  ochres  and  bird's  down  are  used  for  dressing 
the  hair  for  ceremonial  occasions.  Portlock  says  that  among  the  Tlin- 
git,  this  was  only  practiced  by  the  men.t  Ordinarily  the  hair  is 
worn  short  by  the  men,  excepting  the  shaman^  and  long  by  the  women, 
who  usually  wear  it  done  up  in  two  plaits  down  the  back,  but  sometimes 
iu  one  plait,  or  "clubbed"  behind  and  bound  with  red  cloth.  The  ear- 
lier custom  was  somewhat  different,  according  to  Portlock  (1787),  who 
says:  "The  women  wear  their  hair  either  clubbed  behind  or  tied  up  in 
a  bunch  on  the  crown  of  the  head ;  the  men  wear  theirs  either  loose  or 
tied  at  the  crown." 

The  hair  is  dressed  with  combs  of  a  somewhat  conventional  pattern, 
as  illustrated  in  Figs,  lie  and  lid,  which  are  from  two  specimens  in  the 
Kmmons  Collection  in  the  Museum  of  ^Natural  History,  New  York. 
Figure  lie  is  made  from  a  small,  thin  piece  of  bone,  while  lid  is  carved 


!•!. 


il 


;f 


*  Vftnoouver,  Voyage.  Vol.  n,  p.  337.         t  Portlock,  Voyage  (1787),  p.  890. 


i 


II  ' 


:ii 


260 


REPOKT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


from  w.lar  wood  and  oruauieuted  with  a  totemic  design.    Figure  lie  is 
a  Rtoue  comb  in  this  same  collection. 


Pig.  lie. 

Bo^B  COMU. 

(Tlingit.    Kuunoiia  Cullection.) 


Fig.  lid. 
Wooden  Comb. 

(Tliiifit.    KiiimoQS  CoUectioQ.) 


Fig.  11«. 
Stone  Comu. 

(Tliiifit.    Kniriiuns  Cullet'tiun. ) 

ORNAMBNTS. 

With  the  practice  of  mutilations  comes  the  adorn  aieut  of  the  person 
with  ornaments  fashioned  from  a  great  variety  of  materials.  It  seems 
that,  not  content  with  the  facilities  ottered  naturally  for  securing  theisc 
to  the  person,  mutilations  were  often  practiced  solely  to  enable  tlie 
wearer  to  attach  ornaments  to  the  ear,  lip,  nose,  or  cheek. 

Labrets  or  lip  ornaments — These  are  made  of  stone,  wood,  bone,  shell, 
ivory,  silver  or  copper,  sometimes  of  one  material  only,  sometimes  of  a 
combination  of  several.  In  form  they  vary  from  a  pulley-shaped  dm' 
ifl  a  collar  butt/on,  and  in  size  from  4  inches  to  a  Kuiall  cylinder  of 
one-eighth  inch  in  diameter.    The  labret  shown  in  Plates  XLix  ami 


uru  lie  is 


lie  person 

It  seems 

pjug  tbeisc 

uable  tLic 

one,  sbel), 
itues  of  A 
aped  diisc. 
f'linder  of 
XLix  auil 


f 


■i't 


i  i !  :' 


i 


I 


!  Vii 


h  I   I' 


E  I 


f 

. ! 

r 
i  ■ 

1    ,; 

i 

> 

i 

''1 

1 

!'>M;: 

i  ,     ; 

•■i 

:.'] 

1 

1! 

J4 

i' 

EXPLA'   ATION   OF   PLATE  VI. 


o 

o 

s      ^ 

s 

^% 

^    ^ 

9  £ 

i    ^ 

o  ^ 

5^      O 

//CU 

T  (f: 

1      "^ 

^•'-e       Wx 

//      # 

Fig. 

Fig. 
Fig. 

Fig. 

Fig. 

Fig. 

Fig. 

Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 


Ancient  and  Modern  Metal  Ornaments  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

.5.  Copper  Bkacelets.  same  as  those  worn  in  Alaska.  Cat.  No.  20627.  U.  S. 
N.  M.  KwaikutI  Indians,  Bella  Bella,  British  Colunihia.  Collected  by 
James  G.  Swan. 

6.  Copper  Bracelets.     Inlaid  with  shell.     Cat.  No.  19.529,  U.  S.   N.   M. 

Tlingit  Indians,  Fort  Wrangell,  Alaska.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

7.  Copper  Bracelet.     Inlaid  with  shell.    Cat.  No.  20()37.  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tsim- 

shian  Indians,  Fort  Simpson,  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G. 
Swan. 

8.  Bracelets.     Of  twisted  copper  wire.    Cat.  No.  56468.  U.  S.  N.  M.    Kwa- 

kiutl  Indians,  Fort  Rupert,  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  Jan  es  G. 
Swan. 

9.  Copper  Necklace.    Ancient  form.    Cat.  No.  ■!8715.  U.  S.  N.  M.    3Ia.sset 

Indians  (Haidan  stock).  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,   British   Columbij>. 
Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

10.  Necklace.     Of  copjier  wire,  ancient  form.     Cat.  No.  HK746.  U.  S.  N.  M. 

Masset  Indians  (Haidan  stock).  Queen  Charlctte  Islands.  British  Colum- 
bia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

11.  Hair  Ornament  (Tchenes).     Of  steel,  highly  iiolished.  inlaid  with  haliotis 

shell.     Ancient  form,  worn  by  young  girls,  and  valued  at  one  to  two 
slaves.     Cat.  No.   10313,  U.  S.  N.  M.      Tsimshian  Indians,  Nass  River, 
British  Columbia.     Collected  by  Lieut.  F.  W.  Ring.  U.  S.  A. 
llo.  Hair-pin.     Of  iron  inlaid  with  shell.     Cat.  No.  19.528.  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tlin- 
git Indians.  Fort  Wrangell.  Alaska.     Col'ecled  by  James  G.  Swan. 

12.  Ear-R1N(js.     Of  silver,  modern  tyiie.     Cat.  No.  19.5.52.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit 

Indians,  Sitka,  Alaska.     Collected  by  James  fi.  Swan. 

13.  NosE-RlNCis.     Of  silver,  modern  type.     Cat.  No.  19.551,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit 

Indians,  Sitka,  Alaska.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

14.  Ear-rixos.     Of  silver,  modern  type.    Cat.  No.  19.5.50.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Kaigani 

Indians  (Haidan  stock).  Prince  of  Wales  Island.  Alaska.     Collected  by 
James  G,  Swan. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack 


Ancient  *nd  Moijern  Metal  Ornaments  from  the  Northwest  Coast, 


•t 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   VII. 


k 


>h 


Bone  and  Shell  Ornaments  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  19.  Eak  and  Nose  Ornaments.  Of  shark's  teeth.  Cat.  No.  72993,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Auk  Indians,  Admiralty  Island,  Alajska.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fl^.  21.  Ear  Pendants.  Of  skeins  of  red  worsted,  ornamented  with  abalone  shell 
Cat.  No.  8888:5,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Masset  Indians  (Haidan  stock),  Queen  Char- 
lotte Islands,  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  (}.  Swan. 

Fig.  22.  Necklace.  Of  dentalium  shell  with  i)endant  of  abalone.  Cat.  No.  88885, 
U.  S.  N.  M.  Masset  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  British  Columbia. 
Crtllected  by  .James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  23.  Ear  Pendants.  Of  red  worsted  and  abalone.  the  latter  carved  to  show 
wearer's  totem.  Cat.  No.  20674,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Collected  by  James  G. 
Swan. 


li; 


B»portof  National  Muieum,  1888.— Niblack.         , 


Plate  VII. 


Bone  and  Shell  Ornaments  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


L  in  the  6 
and  appei 

Nose  or 
ring  A  in  i 
sbnpe  ina( 
ear  i^  the 
usnnlly  a 
red  worst 
piece  of  l 
iiioant  to 
Fig.  17, 1 
of  a  diffei 

Ear  on 
ver  ear-ri 
As  nieuti 
oruatneii. 
Fig.  12rt  ii 
ill  the  Ml 
and  detsij 
Koniagas 
type  8om< 

Hair  01 
liiiir-pia  f 
iis  inlaid  ' 


^ 


Kg.  12 
Ear  Orna 

vTiirigit.      Kmmoi 
tmn. ) 

piece  of  al 
Columbia 
of  twisted 
same  kind 
and  looks 


THE    INDIANS    OK   THE    NORTIIWK8T    COAST. 


2(i\ 


h  in  the  figure  of  the  "Bear  Mother"  is  a  good  illnstration  of  the  size 
iind  appearance  of  thin  appendage  ah  worn  np  to  recent  year». 

Nose  ornamenta. — Fig.  13,  Piute  vi,  is  the  general  type  of  silver  nose- 
ring.^ in  nse  around  Dixon  Entrance.  It  is  often  worn  in  this  same 
shape  made  of  bone.  Another  favorite  ornament  both  for  tlie  nose  and 
ear  is  the  shiirk's  tooth,  as  shown  in  Fig.  20,  Plate  vii.  As  sin^h  it  is 
usanlly  ait.iched  to  the  hole  in  the  nose  or  lobe  of  the  ear  by  a  yarn  of 
red  worsted.  Sometimes  the  red  worsted  is  alone  worn;  sometimes  a 
piece  of  bone  triangular  in  shape  replaces  the  shark's  tooth  which  it  is 
meant  to  imitate.  A  bone  or  ivory  stick  or  cylinder  was  formerly  worn. 
Fig.  17,  Plate  vii,  is  an  illustration  of  a  primitive  bone  nose  ornauiont 
of  a  different  type  from  any  of  these  mentioned. 

Ear  ornaments. — Figs.  12  and  14  represent  the  common  types  of  sil- 
ver ear-rings  now  worn  in  the  northern  region  around  Dixon  Entrance. 
As  meuticiiHl  above,  sharks' teeth  and  red  worsted  are  favorite  ear 
oruameii.  .  'hese  are  illustrated  in  Figs.  20,  21,  and  23,  Plate  vii. 
Fig.  12rt  is  a  Tlingit  ear  ornament  of  ivory  from  the  Emmons  Collection 
lit  the  Museum  of  Natural  History,  New  York.  In  its  ornamentation 
and  design  it  sbuws  the  effects  of  intercourse  with  the  Aleut  and 
Koniagas  to  the  north.  Fig.  12b  is  a  pin  or  peg  of  ivory  or  bone  of  a 
type  sometimes  worn  by  the  Tlingit  and  Haida. 

Hair  ornaments.— Fig.  11a,  Plate  Vi,  is  an  iron 

hair-pin  from  Fort  Wrangell,  Alaska  (Tlingit.)    It 

[»  inlaid  with  haliotis  and  highly  polished.    Fig. 

11,  Plate  VI,  is  au  iron  "tcheue" 

rp%  highly  polished  and  inlaid  with 

A1  haliotis  shell.  It  is  worn  by  young 

girls  as  an  ornament  in  the  hair. 

This  specimen  is  from  the  Nass 

Indians  (Tsimshian),  but  they  are 

also  found  amongst  the  Tlingit 

and    Haida,  and  were  formerly 

valued  at  from  one  to  two  slaves. 

4  Bed  is  the  favorite  color  for  cloth 

If  or  ribbon  used  by  the  women  for 

If  dressing  their  hair,  as  described 

If  previously. 

Necklaces.— Fig.  22,  Plate  Vii,  is 
a  necklace  of  red  beads  and  dentii- 
lium  shell  strung  alternately  and 
further  ornamented  with  a  square 
piece  of  abalone  shell  pendent.  This  specimen  is  from  Masset,  British 
('olumbia(Haida),  as  is  also  that  shown  iu  Fig. 9,  Plate  vi,  which  is  made 
of  twisted  copper  wire  and  is  of  a  very  primitive  type.  Fig.  10  is  the 
same  kind  as  that  shown  in  Fig.  9,  but  it  has  been  oxidized  by  the  heat 
!iii(l  looks  somewhat  like  iron  wire  instead  of  copper. 


Fig.  12a. 
Kak  Ohnament. 

iTlingit.      Knimons    CnllM- 
tion. ) 


Fif;.  12A. 
Eak  Ohsamknt. 

(T)ingir  unit  H;li(lii.    Knimonn  ColI«c> 
tion. ) 


).\ 


,    i 


1  M  || 
■i  ■    ■  ■'  -.::'      -I 


I    \  : 


'■  i.    ait 


I  :|i5 


fi;<  y 


mi:u 


m' 


\k 


ii  i\ 


262 


REPORT   OF  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


Fig.  16ft. 
InoN  Bbacklet. 

(Tlingil.     Kminoni  t'ollnction. ) 


Finger-rings. — These  were  formerly  made  entirely  of  copper,  boue, 
shell,  or  black  slate,  and  were  ornsimented  with  totaniic  designs,  Jew 
silver  has  so  generally  displaced  all  other  materials  that  the  prim  tive 
types  are  rarely  seen. 

Braoelets.—Fig.  5,  Plate  yr,  is  a  pair  of  copper  bracelets  from  Bella 
Bella,  British  Colnmbia,  (Kwakintl)  similar  to  tho&e  ^orn  north.  Fig. 
6  represents  a  pair  from*  Fort  Wraugell,  Alaska,  {^Iso  of  copper,  in- 
laid wjth  haliotis  shell.  F\^.  7  is  one  8imil»r  in  styl^  to  that  shown  in 
Fig.  6,  from  Fort  Simpson,  British  Columbia  (Tsimgbian).  Fig.  8  rej*- 
resents  a  very  primitive  type  of  copper  bracelet  of  twisted  copper  wire, 
from  Fort  Rupert,  British  Columbia  (Kwakintl),  but  similar  to  those 
worn  north.  Fig;.  16ft  is  a  Tlin^it  iron  bracelet  of  nauve  workman- 
ship, from  the  Emmons  Collection.  Plata  viii 
represents  the  types  of  silver  bracelets  worn 
on  the  northwest  coast  at  the  present  day. 
They  are  made  from  silver  coin,  and  have  re- 
placed those  of  bone,  horn,  copper,  shell,  and 
iron  formerly  worn.  Fig.  24  represents  the 
coin  hammered  out  into  a  flat  strip  of  the  re 
quired  width  with  ends  rounded  into  shape. 
Fig.  25  represents  the  same  bent  nearly  into 
shape  by  gentle  hammering. 
In  its  flat  shape  the  silver  has  little  or  no  elasticity  or  spring,  so  the 
next  step  is  to  round  the  bracelet  out  on  the  inside,  as  shown  in  croiS«- 
section,  Fig.  26.  This  is  done  by  means  of  a  hammer  and  a  blunt  cold 
chisel.  In  the  process  of  hammering  the  bracelet  curls  up  more  and 
laore,  and  is  beaten  out  thinner  and  broader.  This  ecoiicuii/ss  silver, 
and  gives  elasticity  and  clasp  to  the  bracelet.  The  next  step  is  to  carve 
the  design  on  it  as  shown  in  the  liui<r)hed  bracelet,  Fig.  27.  On  tins 
width  toteniic  designs  are  seldom,  carved,  scroll  work  being  used.  The 
tools  are  of  the  most  primitive  .kind,con8iiitingot  aliauuuer,  bluntcoid.- 
chisels,  and.  a  sharp  steel  carving  or  etching  tool.  Figs.  28  and  M) 
•represent  a  stylo  of  clasp  somewhat  i>i  vogue,  but  Figs,  27  and  29  are 
tlie  prevailing  patterns.  On  the  larger  bracelets  the  totemic  design  of 
the  wearer  is  usually  carved.  Fig.  31  represents  the  design  on  Fig.  2!) 
rolled  out,  and  Fig.  32  the  same  for  Fig,  30.  The  former  design  repre- 
sents the  Bear,  and  the  Litter  the  Thunder  Bird.  Fij^a.  27,  28,  and  L'i' 
areTlingit,  Fig.  30Haida,  but  the  same  types  are  found  amongst  ;iii 
tlie  northern  tribes;  the  Uaida  being  the  n.ost  expert  silversmiths,  iw 
tliey  are  also  in  general  the  best  carvers  on  the  coast. 

Dixon  (1787)  states  that  the  Tlingit  and  Haida  wore  large  circuhir 
wreaths,  of  copper  about  the  neck,  evidently  of  native  manufactnie. 
With  the  introduction  of  inm  by  Eur«)peans  bracelets  of  iron  wire  aoi.ie- 
what  took  the  place  of  the  more  expensive  cop]»er  omc,  to  be  in  turn 
later  suecoedetl  by  those  of  silver.    The  present  custom  is  to  wear 


Ill- 


!    ' 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   VIII. 


I  i 


It 


»    !' 


General  Modern  Type  of  Haida,  Tsimshian,  and  Tlingit  Silver  Bracelets. 

Fig.  24.  Strip  of  Silver,  liamniercd  from  a  coin  ;  first  step  in  makii)g  the  braet'let 

rejireseuted  in  finished  state  in  Fig.  27. 
Fig.  2.5.  Second  Step  in  makino liu acelet. 

Fig.  2().  Third  Step  in  makixu  Bracelet.    .Strip  hammered  to  concave  section. 
Fijg.  37.  Finished  Bracelet.    Cat.  No.  \mii),  U.  S.  N.  M.    TUngit  Indians,  Alaska. 

Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  28.  Bracelet.     VVith  clasit.     fat.  No  4i)201.  U.  S.  N.   'SI.    Tlingit  Indians. 

Sitka.  Alaska.     Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 
Fig.  29.  Sprino  Clasp  Bracelet.    Cat.  No.  1J»."):52.  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tlin«it  Indians. 

Alaska.     Collected  by  James  (J.  Swan. 
Fig.  30.  Bracelet.     I^n-gest  size.     Cat.   No.  2()2."")1.U.  S.   N.  M.     Haida   Indians. 

Queen   Charlotte  Islands.   British  Cohunbia.      Collected   by  James  G. 

Swan. 
Fig.  31.  Deskin  on  Bra('ELET,  Fig.  29.     Thunder-bird  or  Eagle.     IloUed  out  im- 
pression. 
Fig.  32.  Deskjn  on  Bracelet,  Fig.  30.     Hoorts,  the  Iwar.     Rolled  out  impression. 


I 


■'    & 


M: 


Roporto?  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


•     Plate  VIII. 


(gi^lii!ti:il5iiiii!l'iiii!'!!l!!i^ 


General  Modern  Type  of  Haida,  Tsimshian,  and  Tlinqit  Silver  Bracelets. 


W' 

1^  tl^ 

; 

"  1  II"  ' 

*P 

J.       :■ 

'1  r 

1 

1 

> 

1 

I  ": 


HI 


i! 


i' 

11 


'1  I !  :■  'I 


THE    INDIANS    OF    THE   NORTHWEST    COAST. 


263 


bracelets  and  ear,  uose,  aud  tiujfer  rings  of  silver.  The  natives  prefer 
silver  to  gold.  Their  fondness  for  red  worsted  as  ear  ornaments  has  also 
been  alluded  to,  and  is  well  illustrated  in  Plate  VII. 

DRESS. 

Primitive  clothing. — What  early  attracted  the  traders  to  this  region 
was  the  character  of  the  clothing  worn  by  the  natives,  consisting  of 
valuable  furs  roughly  sewn  together,  seal  and  sea-otter  being  the  most 
(jommon  and  the  most  sought  after.  The  costume  of  the  men  was 
scanty,  consisting  of  an  under  coat,  a  cloak,  and  sometimes  a  breech 
clout,  although  the  last  named  seemed  to  be  a  very  unimportant  and 
often  omitted  article  of  dress.  Dixon  (1787)  describes  their  clothing  as 
"  made  of  such  skins  as  tancy  suggests,  or  their  success  in  hunting  fur- 
nished them  wiih,  and  sometimes  loose  cloaks  thrown  over  the  shoulders 
and  tied  with  small  leather  strings.  *  »  *  The  dress  of  the  women 
differs  in  some  respects  from  that  of  the  men.  Their  undergarment  is 
made  of  fine  tanned  leather,  and  covers  the  body  from  the  neck  to  the 
ankle,  being  tied  in  difterent  parts  to  make  it  fit  close.  *  •  •  The 
upper  garment  is  made  in  !'..ich  the  same  manner  as  the  men's  coats, 
..nd  generally  of  tanned  leather,  the  women  not  caring  to  wear  furs. 
*  *  *  Over  this  is  tied  a  piece  of  tanned  leather  like  an  apron,  and 
which  reaches  no  higher  than  the  waist."* 

In  other  words,  both  sexes  wore  a  cloak  and  an  under  garment  or  coat 
reaching  to  the  waist.  To  this  the  men  added  a  belt  or  breech  piece, 
and  the  wonten  a  skirt  or  gown  reaching  to  the  calf  or  atdde.  Both 
sexes  went  barefooted,  although  wearing,  as  now,  in  very  cold  weather, 
a  kind  of  moccasin. 

Sea-otter  skins  were  a  staple  article  of  trade  amongst  the  Indians 
themselves,  and  were  stored  in  large  quantities,  being  the  basis  of 
wealth  and  the  unit  of  value.  The  eagerness  of  Europeans  to  trade  for 
them  led  to  the  exhaustion  of  the  stock  on  hand,  the  sacrifice  of  their 
clotluntr,  the  practical  extinction  of  the  seaotter,  the 
adoption  by  the  J-ulians  of  European  clothing,  and  sub- 
stitution of  other  standards  of  value  and  wealth.  Gar- 
ments of  fur  are  still  worn  in  cold  weather,  the  skins  of 
the  less  valuable  animals,  such  as  the  rabbit,  squirrel, 
and  goat  being  used.  ThCvse  skins  are  fastened  together 
with  cords  of  twisted  linen  or  finely  spun  vegetable 
fibre.  Figs.  21rtand  216rei)resent  two  varieties  of  boiie 
fids  or  awls  for  prii-king  the  holes  in  the  skins  to  enter 
the  thread  for  sewing. 

Ceremonial  blanket — These  northern  Indians,  particularly  the  Chil- 
kat  tribes  (Tlingit),  have  possessedfrom  time  immemorial  the  art  of 
weaving  twisted  bark  thread  and  the  wool  of  the  mountain  goat  into 
blankets.    These  they   value  must   highly,  ami  persojfs  of  rank  and 


FiK8.  21a,  216. 

BOXR    AWI.H. 

(Tlingit.     einmiins  Collei- 
tiiin. ) 


"Dixoii,  \'ii,viij;i'.  i>. '~Ml>. 


r 


I  \ 


I 


I 


'  i 


' 

■j  ' 

i  ^ 

" 

, 

1  X 

f 

il 

264 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


llliH 


11    I   I 


wealth  wear  them  ojily  on  extraordinary  c^^asions.  They  are  com- 
monly C.I  lied  Ghilkat  blankets,  and  form  heir  .ooms  in  every  wealtby 
family.  One  of  these  is  pictured  in  Plate  x,  Jbig.  33.  To-day  they  are 
worth  from  $25  to  $40  each.  Dawson  states  that  the  Haida  obtain 
them  from  the  Tsimshian.  The  warp  consists  of  ♦^^wine  of  finely 
shredded  ^jedar  bark  spun  into  a  thread  or  cord.  The  woof  is  of  yarn 
spun  from  the  wool  of  the  mountain  goat.  (The  details  of  the  weaving 
are  shown  in  Plate  x,  Fig.  33a.)  Mnch  confusion  exists  on  this  point- 
The  mountain  goat  resembles  our  domestic  animal  in  external  appear- 
ance, but  has  beneath  the  hair  an  inner  coat  of  white,  soft,  silky 
wool,  while  the  mountain  sheep  (big-horn)  has  a  thick  covering  of  hair 
like  a  deer.  The  fringe  on  the  side  is  shorter  than  on  the  bottom.  Tbe 
wool  is  woven  into  a  pattern  representing  the  totem  of  the  owner,  dif- 
ferent dyes  being  used  in  the  wool,  the  conventional  colors  being  black, 
yellow,  white,  and  sometimes  brown.  The  black  is  obtained  from  char- 
coal and  the  yellow  dye  from  a  moss  called  sekhone  (Tlingit).  The 
blanket  is  woven  in  different  designs  skilfully  blended  into  a  complete 
pattern,  as  in  tapestry,  Fig.  33.  A  ceremonial  coat  or  gown  similar 
in  design  is  also  woven  in  this  way.  A  specimen  is  figured  in  Plate  x, 
Fig.  34.  The  details  of  the  method  of  weaving  both  these  garments 
are  shown  in  Fig.  33a,  same  plate. 

Chief^a  ceremonial  head  dress, — In  connection  with  this  blanket  and 
coat  or  gown,  a  conventional  head  dress  is  worn  by  the  chiefs  in  this 
northern  region.  These  are  shown  in  Plate  x.  Fig.  35,  and  consist  of  a 
cylindrical  wooden  frame  aboutlO  inches  high,  with  an  elaborately  carved 
front  of  hard  wood,  beautifully  polished,  painted,  and  inlaid  with  aba- 
lone  shell  and  copper.  Pendent  behind  is  a  long  cloth,  on  which  are 
closely  sewn  the  skins  of  ermine,  which  form  an  important  item  iu  a 
chief's  outfit.  Around  the  upper  periphery  of  the  headdress  is  an 
elaborate  fringe  of  seal-whiskers.  In  ceremonial  dances  the  space  within 
this  fringe  and  the  top  of  the  head-dress  is  filled  with  eagle  or  other 
bird's  down,  which  falls  like  snow  in  the  motions  of  the  dance.  This 
costume  is  completed  by  leggins  of  deer's  hide,  ornamented  with  tlie 
beak&  of  puffins,  which  rattle  with  the  movements  of  the  wearer. 
These  are  shown  in  Fig.  36,  Plate  x.  The  costume  complete  as  worn 
by  a  chief  is  figured  in  Plate  ix. 

Amongst  northern  tribes  these  ceremonial  blankets  are  worn  by  the 
chiefs.  Amongst  the  Haida,  women  of  rank  also  wear  them  in  the 
dances.  In  all  its  details,  the  costume  showa  in  Plate  ix  well  illus- 
trates the  height  to  which  the  native  arts  of  weaving,  inlaying,  carving^ 
and  dyeing  had  risen  on  this  coast  before  being  influenced  by  the  ad- 
Vent  of  the  whites. 

The  dress  of  a  Ghilkat  chief,  encountered  by  Vancouver  at  Lynn 

Canal  in  1794  is  thus  described  by  him : 

His  external  robe  was  a  very  fine  large  garment  that  reached  from  his  neck  down 
to  his  heels,  made  of  wool  from  the  mountain  sheep,  neatly  variegated  with  several 


!  I 


;  I 


Hi 


m 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   X, 


J'JtfZ' 


Details  of  Chief's  Costume,  as  shown  in  Plate  IX. 

From  photographs  and  sketches  by  the  author 

Fig.  ;3;5.  Ceremonial  Blanket.  AVora  'oy  Indians  of  rank  and  wealth  on  the  North- 
west coast,  conmionly  called  a  "Chilkat  blanket."  Ix'cause  the  best 
specimens  come  from  the  Chilkat  conntry.  although  other  trilies  are 
more  or  less  exjjert  in  weaving  them.  The  wai'p  is  composed  of  twi.sted 
cord  or  twine  of  ce(lar  hark  til)er,  and  the  woof  of  worsted  spini  from  the 
wool  of  the  mountain  goat.  Brown,  yellow,  black,  and  white  are  the 
colors  used,  and  these  are  skillfully  wrought  into  a  pattern  rejiresenting 
the  totem  or  a  totemic  legend  of  the  owner.  The  details  of  the  weaving 
are  shown  in  P''ig.  JWrt.  The  design  on  both  the  Manket  and  the  cere- 
monial shirt  represents  Hooi'ts.  the  i)ear, 

Fig.  84.  Crkicmonial  (taumext  or  Shirt.  Woven  as  described  aliove.  The  trim- 
ming on  the  collar  and  culfs  is  sea-otter  fur. 

Fig.  35.  Chief's  Ceremonial  Head-Dress.  Carved  from  hard  wood,  beautifully 
inlaid,  jiainted.  and  i)olished.  The  erect  fringe  on  the  up|)er  circumfer- 
ence is  formed  by  seal  whiskers  set  into  the  frame.  The  pendent  trail 
is  made  from  three  lengths  of  ermine  skins,  there  being  about  ten  skins 
in  each  row.  The  top  of  the  head-dress  is  tilled  with  birds"  down  on 
ceremonial  occasions,  and  in  the  motion  of  the  dances  this  sifts  through 
and  falls  like  snox^  alxmt  the  person  of  the  dancer. 

Fig.  ;i(i.  Blc'Kskix  Legoinhs.  With  three  rows  of  pulHn  beaks,  which  rattle  with 
the  motion  of  the  wearer.  This  style  of  legging  is  also  made  from  ordi- 
nary cloth,  or  from  the  woven  blanket  stuff,  similar  to  Fig.  88. 


I  I  ! 


Report  of  National  Museum,  I888.~Niblacl<. 


Plate  X. 


m 


Details  of  Chief's  Costume,  as  shown  in  Plate  IX. 


feH: 


colon, 
dyed  ol 
shape  I 
niimbei 
vnrioac 

An( 
seen  t 

Tbesi 
yellow 
otter,  t 

Thif 
Kwak 
follow 

Thee 
froni  tfa 
wrough 
colors, 
purpose 

The 
theTsi 
kuitl,  j 
cedar 
the  801 
be  said 
inakiD{ 
fibre, 
and  thi 
but  tb( 
tiuguis 
and  tb' 
other  i 
Queen 
ship, 
earliesi 
and  id 
liar  net 
most  ol 
been  tl 
have  in 
liar  cus 

Mod4 
strippe 

•Vane 
t  Lisia 


T 


THE   INDIAN^    OP   THE    NORTHWEST   COAST. 


265 


colon,  and  edged  aud  othorwiMe  decorated  with  little  tufts  or  frogs  of  vroolen  yarns 
dyed  of  various  colors.  His  head-dress  was  made  of  wood,  much  resembling  in  its 
shape  a  crown,  adorned  with  bright  copper  and  brass  plates,  from  whence  hung  a 
number  of  tails  or  streamers,  composed  of  wool  and  fur  wrought  together,  dyed  of 
various  colors,  and  each  terminating  by  a  whole  ermine  sicin.* 

Another  variety  of  this  blanket  is  described  by  Lisiansky  (1805),  as 
seen  by  bira  near  Sitka: 

These  l>lanket8  are  embroidered  with  square  figures,  and  fringed  with  black  and 
yellow  tassels.  Some  of  them  are  so  curiously  worked  on  oue  side  with  fur  of  the  sea- 
otter,  that  they  appear  as  if  lin  mI  witli  it,  and  are  very  handsome. t 

This  is  not  unlike  a  blanket  described  by  Vancouver,  as  worn  by  the 
Kwakiutl,  Johnstone  Strait,  Britisli  Columbia  (latitude  52<^  20' N.),  as 
follows: 

Thecl  )thing  of  the  natives  here  was  either  skins  of  the  sea-otter  or  garments  made 
from  the  pine  bark.  Some  of  these  latter  have  the  fur  of  the  sea-otter  very  noat  ■ 
wrought  into  them,  and  have  a  border  to  the  sides  and  bottom  decorated  with  various 
colors.  lu  this  only  they  use  woolen  yarn,  very  fine,  well  spun,  and  dyed  for  that 
purpose,  particularly  with  a  very  lively  and  beautiful  yellow. t 

The  art  oficeaving. — These  fine  bark  garments  are  found  also  amongst 
the  Tsimsbian,  who  either  made  them  or  traded  for  them  with  the  Kwa- 
kuitl,  giving  in  exchange  sea-otter  skins.§  In  general,  while  the  art  of 
cedar  bark  weaving  was  understood  throughout  the  coast,  and  while 
the  southern  Indians  had  some  knowledge  of  weaving  in  wool,  it  may 
ba  said  that  the  northern  Indians  were  more  expert  in  weaving  wool  and 
making  baskets  of  grass,  and  the  southern  Indians  in  weaving  bark 
fibre.  To-day,  at  the  two  extremes,  we  And  the  northern  Tlingit  tribes, 
and  the  Makah  Indians  of  Cape  Flattery,  the  expert  basket  makers, 
but  the  character  of  their  work  is  sodifterent  that  it  can  be  readily  dis- 
tinguished. The  southern  tribes  are  also  the  expert  cedar  bark  weavers, 
and  the  northern  Tlingit  the  best  weavers  of  wool.  Wherever  these  or 
other  arts  may  have  been  developed,  it  is  amongst  the  Haida  of  the 
Queen  Charlotte  Islands  that  we  find  the  best  specimens  of  workman- 
ship. Originally  the  wealthiest  stock  on  the  coast,  they  have  from 
earliest  times  been  remarkable  for  their  readiness  to  adopt  the  customs 
and  ideas  of  others,  and  to  develop  and  adapt  them  to  their  own  pecu- 
liar needs.  The  Tsimsbian  seem  to  have  acted  as  the  middlemen,  for 
most  of  the  trade  and  intercourse  of  the  Haida  with  the  other  tribes  has 
been  through  them.  In  this  way  it  will  be  found  that  the  Tsimsbian 
have  influenced  the  Haida  not  a  little  in  the  development  of  their  pecu- 
liar customs  and  ideas. 

Modern  dress.— The  change  in  ordinary  dress,  as  the  Indians  became 
stripped  of  sea-otter  and  seal  skins,  consisted  largely  in  the  substitution 


*  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  iii,  p.  249-50. 
t  Lisiansky,  Voyage,  p.  238. 


{  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  il,  p  281. 
M6»rf-,l»- 325. 


lI   ^  i     1 


I 


266 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


•  \ 


of  oloth  for  garments  and  Eurupeau  blankets  for  fur  cloaks.     Langs 
dortt"  says  of  the  Tlin^fit  in  1806: 

The  clotbiug  of  t.l>«H«  i>  .nni«  ii,  very  aiinple,  cousitttiug  of  a  ooveriug  uroimd  the 
waist,  and  aa  outer  garmeut  iua<le  of  a  piece  of  olotb  or  skin  about  5  feet  square,  two 
euds  of  which  are  either  tied  rouud  the  neck  or  fastened  together  with  a  button  and 
button-hole,* 

The  favorite  colors  were  red  and  blue,  but  this  costume  was  only  worn 
about  the  vilhiges.  Out  hunting  and  fishing  they  practically  went 
naked.  Later,  when  the  European  blanket  replaced  the  cloth  cloaks, 
they  were  ornamented  with  a  border  of  red  or  blue  cloth,  on  which  was 
sewn  rows  of  pearl  buttons,  thimbles,  Chinese  coins,  etc.  This  style  of 
blanket  obtains  to-day.  (See  Plate  xi.)  Plate  xi  represents  the 
modern  costume  of  the  Tlingit.  The  ear  pendents  of  the  man  are 
shark's  teeth.  The  labret  of  the  woman  is  bone  or  silver,  and  illustrates 
the  transition  stage  from  the  large  labret  to  none  at  all,  or  almost  none. 

The  early  voyagers  were  astonished  at  the  demand  for  thimbles  on  the 
coast,  and  supposed  the  women  to  need  them  for  sewing.  It  was  found, 
however,  that  the  use  of  the  needle  was  very  little  under8tood,t  and 
that  the  thimbles  were  regarded  as  rare  ornaments  for  blankets  and 
clothing.  Formerly  abalono  and  deutalium  were  looked  upon  as  the 
most  valuable  kind  of  trimmings  and  ornaments,  but  their  importation 
in  quantities  by  Europeans  cheapened  their  value.  The  Chinese  coins 
were  admired  for  the  cabalistic  characters  on  them. 

The  women  early  adopted  European  dress,  supplemented  with  the 
ordinary  blanket.  The  present  costume,  with  head  kerchief  of  black  silk, 
is  seen  in  Plate  xi.  The  earlier  costumes,  however,  were  ornamented 
more  elaborately.  On  the  dress  were  tightly-fitting  stays  of  cloth,  often 
of  scarlet  color,  ornamented  with  pearl  buttons.  These,  with  silver  or 
bone  nose-rings,  bracelets  on  the  arras,  braids  of  silk  or  red  worsted  in 
the  ears,  and  European  blankets  across  the  shoulders,  made  up  the 
costume  of  the  Indian  women  around  Dixon  Entrance  up  to  more  recent 
years,  since  when  plain  "  store  clothes"  have  displaced  the  former  more 
gaudy  vestments.  To  complete  the  former  costume,  it  should  be  added 
that  the  hair  worn  long,  was  usually  parted  in  front  and  bound  club- 
shaped  behind  with  scarlet  cloth.  At  present  the  hair  is  usually  worn 
in  two  plaits  down  the  back.  Both  sexes  as  a  rule  go  barefooted,  but 
before  the  introduction  of  European  shoes  moccasins  of  one  or  two  thick- 
nesses of  deer  or  elk  hide  were  worn  in  cold  weather.  The  older  Indians 
still  wear  them  in  out-of-the-way  localities.  These  they  either  mako, 
themselves  or  trade  for  with  the  Tinn6  tribes  of  the  interior. 

Head-covering. — Both  sexes,  until  recent  years,  either  went  bare- 
headed, or  wore  hats  woven  of  grass  and  painted  with  the  totem  of  the 
owner.  In  ceremonies,  of  course,  various  styles  of  ceremonial  head- 
dresses are  and  were  formerly  worn  ;  and  in  war  costume,  heavy  wooden 
helmets  protected  the  head.    At  present,  all  styles  of  European  hats 


*Langsdorff,  Voyages,  Pt.  u,  p.  118. 


t  Lisiausky,  Voyage,  p.  S41. 


\    • 

i 

n] 

1 

■i 

'till 

1^' 
'  i 

.  i 

■i>5 

i 

•- 1 

li 

i 

3 
( 

: 
1 

^■'  1 

1 

r  1 

1 

i 

'^ '  \- 

1 

1 

i 

'■  1 

•-■1 

: 

'     i'            •      ; 

,  p 

■'      t 

1 

J 

; 

'    i 

j 

■ 

i 

!'(- 


- 


Ai,i 


m  [ 


EXPLANATION    OF   PLATE    XI. 
-     -'  Modern  Tungit  Male  and  Female  Costumes. 

The  costuuu'  of  tlif  inaii  i-t  niore  or  i.'ss  ceic'iiioiiiiil,  as  the  native  (h'PHs  lins  re- 
cently liecn  jj;ent'riil!y  tibiindoneil  .ind  Karojn  jiii  ilothes  adupteil.  The  (h'ess  of  the 
women  is  tlmt  now  generallv  worn  by  all  tin  nortiiern  IiuUaii  w(jnien.  The  plate 
represents  the  eostume  of  ten  oi'  twenty  years  ago.  and  in  this  sense  is  modern.  The 
labret.  ii  stnaJl  cylinder  of  silver  with  a  Ijroad  head,  is  the  niodei-n  .style  of  lip-orna- 
ment, ditferiny  malerially  irom  the  large  ones  worn  until  a  few  yeai's  ago. 


i 


mm 


\ 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1  888  — Niblack. 


Plate  XI. 


Modern  Tlingit  Male  and  Female  Costumes. 


S  '. 


'f 


S 


t    -• 


I 


I     ■   I 


: 

: 

;      i   ' 
^      i 

Mi 

hi  i ; 


\ 

\    ■ 

I\ 


'i  ? 


k  ii 


i    I 


II 


'III 


[I! 


H 
^1 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    XII. 


/^^ 

>  JX 

'^^^ 

r\^^ 

Ok. 

^  (^..cA 

370 

Twined  Grass  and  Spruce  Root  Hats  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  i5T.  Twined  liASKi-yiKY  Hat.     T.viiiiim;  consists  in  weiivinjj;  tlic  woof-strands 

around  a  series  of  war[)-stran(ls.     Two  nietliods  are  eiiiployeil  in  tiiis  lia(. 

Tile  letter  (i  (Fig.  SD  marks  the  Ixmndary  lu'tween  the  cniwn  and  l)rini. 

Above  <i,  the  mode  of  twininj;   is  that  ^Imun  in  Fig.  ;)',l) :  below  a.  thai 

shown  in  Fig.  iiTf.     Fig.  liTt/  is  a  top  \  u  \v  of  this  '-anie  hat.  showing  tin 

toteniic  device,  Hooyeh,  the  Ra\en.  luiinted  in  l)laek  and  red.     (at. 

No.  8tt():i;S,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Ilaida  Indians.  Qut>ii  Charlotte  Islands,  H-nisii 

Columl)ia.     Collceteil  by  Janie>(i.  .Swan. 
Fig.  38.  Twined  Baskf.tuy  Hat.     Fig.  :  «<•  shows  the  methol  of  |ilaiti»>K  oed^' 

bark  fiber.     This  hat  ditTers  from  Fig.  :'"   ►iily  in  ■■wirig  lower  and  flailRiiH. 
Fig.  39.  PAUASol.-SHAl'liU  Hat.     (Jrnaniente  1  with  j  totemu design  at  the  t(j(»«i»4 

jiaint'd  in  solid  color  on  tlie  renia'n«»er  •»:  tlie  outside  surface.     I  iift.  >»■«. 

\'iH2.  U.  S.  X.  M.     Tlingit,  Alaska.     ('ob«-ted  by  Dr.  StukeU«\ 
Fig.  10.  TwiNE')  Hasketky  Hat.     With  wooden  appendagt's  represi>»>m»jt  th«-  U  lU 

of  the  ravi-n  "  Hooyeh."     from  photograj)!'  in   L'.  S,  N*t«<,>«Mtl  ?te»s.um, 

Tlingit  Indians.  Alaska. 


!  I 


I   ill 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.  — Niblack. 


Plate  XII. 


['■■  ■•^i 


*    i 


TwiNEO  Qr«$s  ano  ^i>«i>ct  ftoOT  Hats  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


IIP' 

I 

I  I'll 


! 

il     ' 

1: 

I     •'      ' 

:    :  hi 

n 


iltul  c 

kercl 
place 
with 
rainy 
sions, 
a  moi 
heigb 
botbi 
tall  c 
variel 
repre 
being 
of  tb€ 
and  £ 
crowi 
of  rat 
and  8 
m6th( 
O.  T. 
Fig.  3 
introd 
variet 
offbj 
ing  III 
is  stit 
being 
also  f( 
bark  i 
mater 
in  dot 
thus  I 
twiMe( 
come 
tion  in 
and  o 
head* 
trated 
totem 
forme 
elsewl 
Rai 
worn 
seen  i 
they  { 
was  t< 


THE    INDIANS    OP   THE    NORTHWEST   COAST. 


267 


aiul  caps  are  worn,  but  the  wouieu  use  ganerally  ouly  a  black  silk  baud- 
kerchief.  The  grass  hats  are  still  seen  on  the  coast  iu  out-of-the-way 
places,  particularly  around  Dixon  Entrance.  These  are  cone  shaped, 
with  considerable  spread,  being  particularly  adapted  for  protection,  in 
rainy  weather,  to  the  elaborately  dressed  hair  worn  on  ceremonial  occa- 
sions. In  the  north,  the  truncated  cone-shaped  form  is  surmounted  by 
a  more  or  less  tall  cylinder,  iu  the  ceremonial  hats  reaching  an  absurd 
height;  in  the  south,  it  becomes  more  parasol-like  in  shape,  although 
both  styles  are  found  throughout  the  whole  coast, exceptingthat  the  ver^' 
tall  ceremonial  hat  is  limited  to  the  north.  Plate  xii  illustrates  the 
varieties.  Fig,  37  is  the  usual  type,  ornamented  with  the  toteraic  device 
representing  the  Raven,  painted  on  the  hat  in  red  and  black,  the  detail 
being  shown  in  Fig.  37d,  which  is  a  top  view  of  Fig.  37.  The  details 
of  the  weaving  or  twining  are  illustrated  in  enlarged  section  in  Figs.  37ft 
and  37c.  The  hat  naturally  divides  itself  into  two  sections — the 
crown  and  the  rim — the  dividing  line  being  at  a  in  Fig.  37.  The  metho«l 
of  making  the  crown  is  the  same  as  that  used  in  the  Haida  basketry, 
and  shown  in  376,  while  the  rim  is  woven  by  a  variation  in  the  above 
method  shown  in  Fig.  37c.  These  figures  are  from  an  article  by  Professor 
O.  T.  Mason  on  Basket  Work,  in  Smithsonian  Report,  1884,  Part  ii.  (Jf 
Fig.  37c  he  says:  "It  shows  the  regular  method  of  twined  weaving,  the 
introduction  of  the  skip-stitcL  or  twilled  weaving  into  the  greatest 
variety  of  geometric  patterns,  and  the  ingenious  method  of  fastening 
off  by  a  four-ply  braid  showing  only  on  the  outer  side."  At  the  divid- 
ing line,  marked  a,  on  the  inside,  a  cylindrical  head-band  of  spruce  root 
is  stitched  to  make  the  hat  fit  the  head,  a  string  passing  under  the  chin 
being  usually  added.  Fig.  38  is  an  ordinary  type  of  spruce  root  hat 
also  found  on  the  coast.  Amongst  the  southern  Indians,  where  cedar 
bark  is  so  much  used,  these  two  styles  of  hat  are  reproduced  in  that 
material,  which,  not  being  tough  enough  to  twine,  is  woven,  as  shown 
in  detail  in  Fig.  38e.  This  is  the  same  pattern  as  their  mats.  The  hats 
thus  made  are  light  and  flimsy  and  soon  lose  their  shape,  whereas  the 
twined  spruce  root  ones  and  the  baskets  both  retain  their  shape  and  be- 
come water  tight  after  a  preliminary  soaking.  Fig.  39  is  another  varia- 
tion iu  the  shapes  found  on  the  coast.  It  is  often  painted  in  solid  colors 
and  ornamented  on  top  with  a  totemic  design.  Fig.  40  is  a  ceremonial 
head<lress,  similar  in  design  and  outline  to  the  wooden  helmets  illus- 
trated in  Plate  xiii.  This  shape  is  seen  in  the  carvings  in  the  large 
totemic  columns,  and  is  doubtless  an  imitation  of  the  wooden  helmets 
formerly  worn  in  battle.  These  survivals  and  imitations  are  spoken  of 
elsewhere.    The  animal  represented  in  Fig.  40  is  the  Raven. 

Bain  Cloaks. — Along  the  whole  coast  a  peculiar  form  of  cloak  was 
worn  in  rainy  weather  to  shed  water.  Dixon  (1787)  says  of  them,  as 
seen  at  Sitka :  "  I  had  no  opportunity  of  examining  them  minutely,  but 
they  appear  to  be  made  of  reeds,  sewed  very  closely  together,  and  I 
was  told  by  one  of  our  gentlemen  who  was  with  Captain  Cook  during 


? 


:     : 


!    I 


1 

i       1- ' 

J 

268 


REPORT  OF  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


11  hi 


<!  • 


V 


his  last  voyage  that  they  were  exactly  the  same  with  those  worn  by  the 
inhabitants  of  New  Zealand."*  Mackenzie  mentions  this  rain  dress 
amougsb  the  Bilqula  (1793).t  These  mats  or  cloalcs  were  circular  in 
form,  with  an  opening  in  the  center  for  the  head. 

Ceremonial  Paraphernalia. — The  origin  of  the  custom  of  wearing  cere 
monial  masks  and  head-dresses,  in  this  region,  would  seem  to  have 
originated  in  the  actual  wearing  of  them  in  war.  Much  of  the  cere- 
monial disphiy  amongst  these  Indians  has  reference  to  prowess  in  com- 
bat, and  it  is  an  undoubted  fact  that,  in  the  survival  of  many  primitive 
implements  of  war  we  have  the  origin  of  much  of  the  dance  and  cere 
monial  paraphernalia  peculiar  to  this  region. 

With  the  desire  to  protect  the  body,  armor  naturally  originated.  The 
masks  and  visors  worn  were  painted  in  all  the  hideous  colors  and  pat- 
terns adopted  ordinarily  for  the  face.  They  were  sometimes  carved 
with  representations  of  the  totem  of  the  owner,  but  were  intended  in 
any  case  botii  to  protect  the  wearer  and  to  strike  terror  to  the  enemy. 
Vancouver  (1793)  mentions  an  encounter  with  the  Til n git,  up  fiehm 
Canal,  Alaska,  in  which  the  chief  put  on  a  mask  consisting  of  a  *<  Wolfs 
face  compounded  with  the  human  countenance."  The  masks  were  often 
worn  without  head  pieces  or  visors,  and  some  of  them  were  so  thick  that 
a  musket  ball  fired  at  a  moderate  distance  could  hardly  penetrate  them.f 

There  seems  nothing  unreasonable  in  tracing  the  origin  of  much  of 
the  dance  and  ceremonial  paraphernalia  to  customs  originating  in  war. 
Most  of  our  secret  and  benevolent  societies  which  parade  in  public  have 
a  military  organization  and  uniform.  The  grass  hat  shown  in  Fig.  40, 
Plate  XII,  is  in  imitation  of  the  wooden  war  helmet,  and  other  sur- 
vivals will  be  pointed  out  from  time  to  time. 

Armor. — Formerly  the  body  was  protected  in  combat  by  various  de- 
vices, the  simplest  being  a  leather  garment,  jerkin,  or  doublet.  This 
was  nsually  made  of  one,  two,  or  three  thicknesses  of  hide  and  in  itself 
offered  considerable  resistance  to  arrows,  spears,  or  dagger  thrusts,  but 
was  still  further  reinforced  by  a  cuirass  or  coat  of  wood,  made  of 
strips  or  slats,  worn  either  over  or  under  the  doublet,  but  usually  over. 
These  are  illustrated  in  Plate  xv,  Figs.  52  and  53.  The  doublet  or 
shirt  has  an  opening  for  the  neck  and  one  for  the  left  arm  ;  the  right 
side  is  not  sewed  up,  faciliting  the  putting  on  of  the  garment  and  be- 
ing secured  by  ties  or  toggles  and  straps.  There  are  two  other  admir- 
able specimens  in  the  National  Museum  (Nos.  40465  and  00240),  but 
as  they  are  similar  in  patterns  to  the  one  illustrated  in  Plate  xv 
they  are  not  reproduced  here.  They  diflfer  only  in  having  shoulder 
pads  of  hide  secured  on  by  toggles  and  straps  and  in  offering  some 
protection  to  the  arms.  Vancouver  (1793)  thus  describes  a  similar 
shirt  worn  by  a  war  party  of  Nass,  which  his  boat  parties  encountered : 

Their  war  garments  were  formed  of  two,  three,  or  more  folds,  of  the  strongest  hides 
of  tlieland  animals  they  are  able  to  procnre.     In  the  center  was  a  hole  sufficient  to 


"Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  Wl.  t  Mackenzie,  Voyages,  p.  371. 

(Lisiansky,  Voyagse,  p.  IGO. 


;8.  bnt 


THE   INDIANS  OF   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


269 


admit  (he  head  and  left  arm  to  paw  through,  the  mode  of  wearing  them  being  over 
the  right  shoulder  and  under  the  left  arm. 

The  left  side  of  the  garment  is  sewed  up,  but  the  right  side  remains  open ;  the 
body  is,  however,  tolerably  well  protected,  and  both  armn  are  left  at  liberty  for  action. 
As  a  further  security  on  the  part  which  covers  the  breast  they  sometimes  tix  ou  the 
inside  thin  laths  of  wood.* 


Fig.  46. 
Detail  op  Wravino  Abhor. 

(Cat  No.  49»13,  U.S.  N.  M.    TlinsiU    Collfcted  by  J.  J.  McLean. ) 

Fig.  53  is  a  rear  view  of  a  wooden  cuirass  or  body  armor  from 
Sitka,  showing  method  of  strapping  it  to  the  body.  It  is  from  a 
specimen  in  the  National  Museum  (No.  49213)  consisting  of  numerous 
(seventy-four)  rods  of  hard  wood  about  2  feet  long,  woven  together  with 
dark  and  white  twine  in  alternate  bands.  The  threads  are  sometimes 
single  and  sometimes  in  pairs,  and  are  made  to  pass  over  and  under  the 
rods  in  pairs,  but  in  such  manner  that  the  overlappiags  alternate  from 
one  row  to  the  next.  This  is  shown  in  detail  in  Fig.  46,  where  la  and 
lb  represent  the  parts  of  one  cord,  and  2a  and  2b  represent  those  of 
another.  The  view  represents  the  upper  left  hand  corner  of  the  weav- 
ing  and  two  upper  threads,  showing  seven  rods  in  both  plan  and  sec- 
tion. As  stated,  this  method  of  running  the  cords  or  twine  is  varied  by 
occasionally  running  them  in  pairs.  Fig.  43,  Plate  xiii,  is  a  front 
view  of  the  same  specimen  of  armor.  Fig.  49,  Plate  xiv,  represents 
another  variety  of  body  armor  in  which  the  wood  is  in  the  shape  of 
laths  or  broader  flat  strips  of  wood,  also  woven  together  with  twine. 
Strips  of  hide  were  sometimes  used  to  secure  the  strips  of  wood  to- 
gether; and  sometimes  the  breast  piece  or  covering  was  in  one  solid 
thick  piece.  The  armor  shown  in  Plate  xiv  is  fh>m  a  sketch  in 
Lislansky's  Voyage,  p.  160,  Plate  i.    The  method  of  wearing  it  is  shown 

•  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  ii,  p.  339. 


'I 


t  ' 


ii 


^ 


;  11 


■ 


.:.M 


H  ' 


270 


BEPORT   OP  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


il 


I  , 


l-'f 


in  Fig.  61,  Plate  xiv,  which  also  shows  the  mask  aud  helmet  in  place. 
The  partA  are  very  heavy  and  clumsy,  uud  the  ino'^t  that  can  be  said  in 
their  favor  is  that  they  protected  the  vital  parts  from  injury. 

With  the  introduction  of  iron  and  of  Dre-arnis  the  Tlingit  iidopted 
a  new  form  of  protection,  consisting  of  a  buckskin  strip  around  the 
neck,  with  iron  i)lat<;s  attached  pendant  down  the  breast.* 

Helmets  and  head-dretises. — The  chief's  ceremonial  head-dress  has 
already  been  described,  and  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  35,  Plate  x.  In  Plate 
XIII  a  variety  of  helmets  is  shown.  Fig.  41  represents  a  wolFs  head, 
the  wearer  or  owner  belonging  to  the  Wolf  totem.  It  is  so  light  that  it 
could  not  have  served  as  a  protection  of  any  kind,  and  hence  is  cer- 
emonial in  its  nature.  Fig.  42  is  a  thick  massive  helmet  similar  to  the 
one  illustrated  in  Plate  xiv,  Fig.  47.  Fig.  44  represents  the  Bear 
totem,  while  Fig.  45  is  carved  in  representation  of  the  Beaver.  On  the 
rim  of  the  latter  four  copper  plates  or  shields  are  painted.  These  two 
helmetA  (Figs.  44  and  45)  are  similar  in  shape  to  the  grass  hat  shown 
in  Fig.  40,  being  that  of  an  oblique  truncated  cone  surmounted  by  a  tall 
cylinder,  and  evidently  represent  the  ancient  form  of  helmet  worn  by 
the  chiefs  aa  seen  in  the  carved  columns  and  other  old-time  pictographs. 
They  are  now  worn  only  in  the  ceremonial  dances,  the  two  illustrated 
being  of  light  cedar  wood  and  of  rather  recent  make.  Another  variety 
of  bead  dress  is  a  ring  of  shredded  cedar  bark,  twisted  into  a  rope, 
stained  dull  red  with  the  juice  of  the  bark  of  the  alder,  and  made  into 
a  circular  grommet  like  a  crown  Plate  xviii.  Some  of  these  are  orna- 
mented with  bows,  rosettes,  and  tassels  of  the  same  material,  the  finest 
and  most  elaborate  being  found  amongst  the  Haida,  although  clearly 
borrowed  or  copied  in  design  from  those  of  the  Tsimshian  and  Kwakiutl. 
With  the  latter  these  are  only  worn  in  the  winter  religious  ceremonies, 
and  their  use  is  considered  improper  on  an>  other  occasions,  whereas 
the  Haida  wear  them  in  any  of  their  dances  without  the  peculiar  signi- 
ficance attached  to  them  by  other  tribes. 

ifa«^.— What  has  been  said  in  a  general  way  of  helmets  and  head- 
dresses is  equally  true  of  masks,  with  the  addition  that  the  latter  are 
found  even  in  much  greater  variety  and  more  ingenuity  is  displayed  in 
constructing  them.  The  writer  has  endeavored  to  trace  the  origin  of  the 
custom  of  wearing  masks  in  ceremonies  to  the  original  practice  of  wear- 
ing th<  m  in  war  as  a  protection.  In  this  view,  the  simplest  form  is 
that  shown  in  Figs.  48  and  50,  Plato  xiv,  the  former  being  a  side  and 
the  latter  a  top  view.  The  top  rim  is  thinner  than  the  lower  part,  aud 
has  several  grooves  or  peep-holes  cut  in  it  to  enable  the  wearer  to  see 
through,  as  shown  in  the  plate.  The  front  is  carved  or  painted  with 
the  totemic  representation  of  the  owner.  Fig.  60  shows  a  projection 
on  the  inner  side  (front),  which  consists  of  a  leather  becket  or  eyelet, 
covered  with  a  wrapping  of  grass  or  cedar  bark,  and  let  through  the 
front  of  the  mask,  being  secured  by  a  knot  outside.    This  goes  m  the 


'  Lisiansky  (1805),  Voyage,  p.  ^38. 


IMAGS  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


.'*. 


V 


m 


A 


% 


1.0 


I.I 


■dm 

2.2 


2.0 


1.8 


1.25      1.4 

1.6 

^ 6"     - 

► 

v] 


<^ 


/a 


-> 


^e-: 


^•V'^ 


/(S 


7 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


33  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  M580 

(716)  072-4503 


V 


^^ 


<F 


:\ 


\ 


^<b 


.V 


^^'- 


o^ 


^'h'- 


HI 

'.  1  ■ ' 

^  , 

1 

EXPLANATION  OF   PLATE  XIII, 


Fif?.  41. 


FiK. 

42. 

Fig. 

4:1 

FiK. 

44. 

Fig. 

4,j. 

Wooden  Helmets  and  Cuirass,  or  Eddy  Armor. 

Wooden  Hklmet.  Ciirvt'd  in  slia|M'  of  wolf's  iiciid.  Cat.  No. ','iw41.  U. 
S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  (jiiccn  Charlntli-  Islands.  British  0>lun\l)ia. 
Collected  hy  James  (i.  Swan. 

WooDKX  Hei.mkt.  similar  to  Fig.  4T.  Plate  XVI.  Cat.  No.  74:^41,  U.  8.  N. 
M.     Tlingit  Indians.  Sitka.  Alaska.     Collected  hy  Jolm  J.  Mtlx'an. 

WooOEX  .\HMoK.  Made  of  hanl  wimmI  vcmIs  woven  togetiier  with  twine. 
Detail  in  Fig.  4(5.  Another  view  is  given  in  Plate  XViF'ig.  .">;{).  showing 
metluMl  of  securing  it  to  the  body.  Cat.  No.  4!t'Ji;{.  U.  S.  N.  .\i.  Tlingit 
Indians.  Sitka,  .Alaska.     Col'i-cte<l  hy  .John  J.  MeLi'an. 

Hei-MET.  Carved  to  represent  Hoorts.  the  hear.  Cat.  No.  SJMClT.  U.  S.  N. 
AI.  Haida  Indians,  Skidegate.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  Colleeted  by 
James  (J.  .Swan. 

He!.,.MET.  Surniouiile<l  hy  a  carved  figure  of  Tsing,  the  heaver.  Tin 
l)ainted  figiu'es  represent  copper  jjlates.  endil(>ms  of  wealth  and  inllu- 
ence.  Cat.  No.  Hit(i:t,-..  U.  s.  N.  M.  Sk.dan  Indians,  t^neen  Charlotte 
Islands,  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  Janies  (i.  Swan. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


PLATE  XIII. 


MM:: 


miMSMi 


mm^im 


r-mwmm 


•f?^8WW|ffllBH^5R  '•'"'  K^mffSJ^PMW' 


r'vfi." 


WooDE  I  Helmets  and  Cuirass,  or  Body  Armor. 


■> 


"ill 


r  • :  !■ 


■  i. 


V:il 


j       eg 


w 


r!! 


Ji 


i,  !; 


I 


' 'i 


ii  h 


.1  \ 


i       4 


\i 


■I 


:( 


HI 


n 


.    H       :i 


I'-   ' 


,  'A 


I  1  J 


T 
i 
i 


!j     L 


'I' 


EXPLANATION  OF   PLATE  XIV. 


Tlingit  Wooden  Armor 

Fig.  47.  Wooden  Helmet.     Swuri'd  to  the  head  l»y  straps  fasteiietl  under  tiierhiu. 

From  Li.'iiaiisky.  Voyage.  Plate  I. 
Fig.  48.  Wooden  Mask  OR  Visor.    Showing  holes  for  ey  s.    Side  view.    From  Lisi- 

ansky.  Voyage.  Plate  I. 
Fig.  49.  Body  Armor.     Made  of  slats  of  wikkI  fastened  together  hy  twine  woven 

around  and  In'twecn  them.     From  Lisiansky.  Voyage.  Plate  I. 
Fig.  50.  Mask  or  Visor.     Showing  lH>cket  or  strap,  whitli  is  held  in  the  teeth  to 

keep  the  mask  in  i)laoe  when  worn  in  fighting.     IMade  of  one  piece  of 

w<xk1.  l)ent  to  shajH"  and  held  hy  a  stra|)of  leather,  as  sh(/wn  at  ti.    Cat. 

No.  ;4a48.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit.  Alaska.     Collected  hy  J.  J.  McLean. 
Fig.  T)!.  Sketch.     Showing  method  of  wearing  the  armor. 

The  leather  jerkin  underneath  is  similar  to  that  shown  in  Plate  XV. 


Rtportof  Nitiontl  Museum,  1688.— NIblack. 


Plate  XIV. 


XV, 


=  'S  . 


Tlinqit  Wooden  Armor. 


,;ii 


1 


H: 


I 


4  J- 


11. 


'f  't 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XV. 


Wooden  and  Leather  Body  Armor. 


Fig.  52.  Jerkin.  Of  t\v«>  thickiieHM>H  of  ihokmi'  liidc  Worn  iiiiilt-r  tlu>  iirinor 
(Khowii  in  Fig.  i>.S)  an  an  udditional  protection  to  tiie  hoily.  The  l<'ft 
sidi'  ha.s  an  arni-Iiol*';  tlie  right  Hide  is  <»jh'1).  Jn-ing  wcnred  hy  strii|«s 
under  tlit'  right  arm.  Cat.  No.  UJO.IMT.  U.  S.  X.  >I.  Tlingit  Indians. 
.Vlaslca.     Ijoanod  hy  Max  B.  Ricliardson. 

Fig.  53.  Armor  ok  Wooden  Rons.     Inside  view  of  Fig.  4;$.  Plate  XIII,  showing 
straps  l)y  wliicli  it  is  s«'enred  aroimil  the  waist,     ('at.  No.  41)218,  U.  S.  M 
M.     Tlingit  Indians.  Alaska.     <'ollected  hy  Jolin  J.  MeLean. 


V 


m 


Report  of  National  Muiaum    1688.— Niblick, 


Plate  XV. 


r 


> 


•Wl 


Ti  I .  I ,  I .  I ,  I M  ■  1 .  1 1 1 .  rrmt. 


Wooden  and  Leather  Body  Armor. 


:; 


:l 


*!;  ; 


i^ 


r 


VA 


fi        ! 


\ 


is  1 1 


. 


n 


m 


'^ 


THE   INDIANS   OF   Till::   N0KTIIWE8T   COAST. 


271 


month  of  the  wearer,  and  is  firmly  fcripped  in  the  teeth  to  hold  the 
mask  iu  place.  Above  tliis  becket  the  mask  is  rooc^sed  or  hollowed 
slif^htly,  to  give  a  clearance  to  the  uose  of  the  wearer.  Altogether  it 
may  be  seen  to  be  a  very  clumsy  method  of  protecting  the  face.  Other 
kinds  of  masks  were  worn  to  protect  the  fuce  iu  war,  having  the  addi- 
tional objects  of  representing  in  f  ><')ir  carved  outlines  the  totem  of  the 
wearer,  or,  by  their  hideousueas  ai.  :  Totesqueness,  of  striking  terror  to 
the  enemy  by  lending  to  the  effect  of  their  menacing  gestures  the  ap- 
pearance of  some  suporhuma"  being.  Often  these  masks  were  so  mas- 
sive as  to  be  worn  without  Imets  or  hoad  pieces.  Straps  or  thongs 
of  leather  fasten  them  to  the  head,  or  a  loop  of  cedar  bark  cord  iu  th*) 
hollow  side  of  Ihe  mask  is  held  :a  lUe  tooth. 

The  ceremonial  masks  are  uarvPil  from  spruce  or  j'ellow  cedar  and 
are  generally  very  elaborate,  being  highly  colored  in  grotesque  or  hide- 
ous designs,  and  often  inlaid  with  abalone  slicM  or  copper.  The  eyes 
are  pierced  througlt  to  enable  the  wearer  to  see  about  him,  and  the 
mouth  is  also  usually  cut  through,  or,  if  not,  teeth  are  carved  or  inlaid 
in  bone.  Lips,  teeth,  nostrils,  and  eyeli<ls  are  sometimes  reprcsente'I 
in  copper.  The  top  of  the  mask  is  usually  bordered  either  with  hair, 
feathers,  or  down.  By  means  of  ingeniously  concealed  mechanism 
the  eyes  are  sometimes  made  to  roll  and  the  jaws  and  beak  to  snap. 
(See  Fig.  60,  Plate  xvi).  Some  of  them,  representing  ravens  and 
cranes,  have  beaks  projecting  from  two  to  four  or  Ave  feet.  In  con- 
junction with  the  masks  Are  often  worn  wooden  fins  or  wings  on  the 
back  of  the  head  or  on  the  back  at  the  shoulders.  Fig.  50,  Plate  xvi, 
represents  the  raven  as  a  ceremonial  mask  with  lips  of  copper,  sur- 
mounted by  a  tall  fin  of  wood  representing  the  (In  of  the  orca  or  killer. 
This  is  fringed  with  human  hair,  and  the  figure  carries  in  its  mouth  a 
bow  and  arrow  of  copper.  Fig.  5G  represents  a  woman's  face,  with 
uose  and  lip  ornaments  of  conventional  pattern,  and  with  curiously 
pointed  lines  in  unsymmetrical  design.  A  variety  of  masks  are 
sketched  in  the  foreground  of  Plate  lxvii.  The  custom  of  wearing' 
wooden  masks  and  headdresses  in  ceremonies  and  dances  is  found 
throughout  the  whole  northwest  coast  from  the  Aleuts  to  Puget  Sound. 
There  is  a  large  collection  of  these  in  the  National  Museum,  which  in 
themselves  are  worthy  of  separate  illustration.  The  limits  of  this 
paper  admit  only  of  presenting  the  few  siiown  in  Plates  xvi  and  LXVii. 

Ceremonial  Batons,  Wanda,  etc—In  Plates  xvi  and  xvii  are  repre- 
sented various  ceremonial  implements  carried  iu  the  hands  of  the 
chiefs  and  shamans  on  state  occasions,  and  permitted  to  be  carried  only 
by  men  of  such  rank.  Fig.  54  is  a  carved  representation  of  a  bow,  the 
figures  on  the  ends  representing  the  whale.  It  is  carried  by  the  Haida 
shamans  in  their  medicine  dances.  Fig.  58  is  a  ceremonial  bow  carried 
by  a  Haida  chief.  The  two  carved  heads  represent  the  bear.  Oarved 
ceremonial  arrows  go  with  this  type  of  bow,  and  in  them  we  see  the 
survival  of  the  ancient  weapon  as  a  purely  ceremonial  emblem,  just  49 


m 


1,    i: 


, 


'. 


[ 


I 


:    ; 


1 

■  i 
t 


,    1 


'I 

If .   I 


!■ 


it!' 


272 


REPORT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


to>day  we  have  the  ooart  sword  as  a  survival  of  the  sword  or  rapier 
carried  by  gentlemeo  of  other  periods.  In  the  same  way,  Fig.  63  is  a 
Tlingit  ceremouial  dance  wand  in  the  shape  of  a  dagger;  aud  Fig.  64  is 
a  Haida  baton  (called  by  them  Taskear)^  in  the  shape  of  a  war  lance  of 
earlier  days.  Fig.  55  is  a  fragment  of  an  ancient  Haida  baton  {Taski 
or  Taskear,)  the  lower  part  being  missing.  The  top  Hgure  of  the  carving 
represents  the  raven,  below  that  the  crow,  and  then  the  whale.  Be- 
tween the  whale  and  the  next  lower  figure,  which  is  Skarmon,  the  spar- 
row-hawk, is  a  spindle  and  socket,  which  pull  apart.  The  sparrow-hawk 
rests  oj  Skillik,  the  ceremonial  hat,  which  in  turn  rests  on  Tsing,  the 
beaver.  This  baton  is  carried  in  the  hand  by  the  chief  on  the  occasion 
of  a  great  potlacch  or  feast.  At  a  given  signal  the  two  parts  are  sepa- 
rated and  the  distribution  of  presents  begins,  the  chief  retimiing  one 
part  in  each  baud.  Fig.  57  is  a  carved  caue  or  wand  from  VWcouver 
Island,  British  Columbia,  inlaid  with  pearl  shell,  and  is  the  finest  spe- 
cimen of  native  carving  from  the  southern  Indians  in  the  Museum. 
Figs.  61,  62,  aud  65  are  types  of  the  Haida  chiefs'  batons  or  Taskears ; 
they  are  held  in  the  hand  on  occasions  of  ceremony.  At  a  potlatch  the 
chief  calls  the  name  of  the  recipient  of  a  present,  and  then  thumps  on 
the  floor  if  the  gift  is  satisfactory  to  the  guests,  as  explained  later  on. 
In  the  totemic  theatrical  .exhibitions  these  batons  indicate  the  totem 
aud  rank  of  the  bearer.  When  a  chief  dies  and  is  laid  out  in  state  the 
baton  stands  near  his  body.  In  Fig.  61  the  top  figure  is  a  chief  wear- 
ing a  ceremonial  hat,  or  SMllik,  similar  to  the  grass  hat  in  Fig.  40.  The 
lower  carved  figure  is  the  frog.  In  Fig.  65  the  upper  figure  is  Koot^  the 
eagle,  and  the  lower  Tsing,  the  beaver. 

Rattles,  Snappers,  and  Whistles. — In  dealing  with  ceremonial  parapher- 
nalia it  might  be  well  to  describe  here  all  the  accessories  of  ceremo- 
uial costumes,  such  a!^  the  accompanying  rattles,  snappers,  drums, 
whistles,  etc.  These,  however,  are  reserved  for  Chapter  VII,  where 
they  are  dealt  with  as  musical  instruments. 

Ceremonial  Blankets. — In  connection  with  Plates  ix  and  x,  a  very 
well-known  type  of  chiefs  ceremouial  costume  has  been  described  in  this 
chapter.  The  Ohilkat  and  cedar  bark  blankets  are  important  factors  in 
all  ceremonial  dances  and  functions.  Other  forms  of  ceremonial  blankets 
or  mantles  are  made  from  Hudsou  Bay  Company  blankets,  with  totemic 
figures  worked  on  them  in  a  variety  of  ways.  The  usual  method  is  to 
cut  out  the  totemic  figure  in  red  cloth  and  sew  it  on  to  the  gan^^ent  (or- 
namenting it  with  borders  of  beads  and  buttons)  by  the  nietho<l  known 
as  appliqu6  work;  another  method  is  to  sew  pieces  of  bright  abalone 
or  pearl  shell  or  pearl  buttons  on  to  the  garment  in  the  totemic  patterns. 
Plate  XIX  well  illustrates  the  appliqu^  method.  Fig.  74,  Plate  xix,  is 
a  vestmeut  which  hangs  pendant  down  the  back,  representing  the 
totem  or  crest  of  the  wearer.  Fig.  75  represents  a  cloak  with  a  neck 
opening  ornamented  in  red  doth  with  the  totemic  design  of  the  Oroa 
or  killer. 


ill 


II 


fi 


i    .( 


'I 


■■WIHHHMBiH 


l| 


VI 


% 

f  ■■ 

f 

\; 

1 

i! 

I 

i) 

EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE  XVI. 


1 


S'ii 


Ceremonial  Dance  Paraphernalia. 

Fig.  54.  Ceremonial  Baton  OR  Wand.  In  form  of  a  bow.  Tlie  ends  represent  the 
liead  and  tail  of  the  wliale.  Carried  b}-  tlie  Sliauian  in  medicine  dances. 
Cat.  No.  89099,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Queen  Cliarlotte  Islands, 
British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  55.  Carved  Cane  {Taski).  Carried  in  the  hand  of  the  medicine  man  at  a 
jwtlatch.  Cat.  No.  88128.  Masset  Indians  (Haida),  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands,  British  Columbia.     Collecttnl  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  56.  Mask.  Representing  woman's  face  with  nose-ring  and  ceremonial  paint. 
Cat.  No.  21570,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tliugit  Indians,  Alaska.  Collected  by  Dr. 
J.  B.  White,  U.  S.  Army. 

Fig.  57.  Carved  Ceremonial  Cane.  Cat.  No.  150847,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Kwakiutl  In- 
dians, Vancouver  Island,  British  Columbia.  Collected  by  James  (4. 
Swan. 

Fig.  58.  Carved  Ceremonial  Bow.  Bear's  head  in  relief.  Carried  by  chief  in  cer- 
emonies and  dances  as  a  wan<l,  baton,  or  emblem  of  rank.  Cat.  No' 
89096,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  Britisli 
Columbia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  59.  Mask.  Representing  Hooyeh,  the  raven,  with  liow  and  arrow  of  coi)pi'r 
in  his  mouth  and  with  the  ttn  of  tlie  orca  above  the  head.  Cat.  No. 
89043,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Laskeek.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands, 
British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  (ir.  Swan. 

Fig.  60.  Mask.  Representing  a  demon  with  mechanical  a])paratus  for  rolling  tlic 
eyes  and  snai)ping  the  jaws.  Teeth  of  cojuwr.  Cat.  No.  89042,  U.  S. 
N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Skidegate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  Briti  li 
Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


h. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888 Niblack. 


Plate  XVI. 


Ceremonial  Dance  Paraphernalia. 


- » 


I     > 


U\ 


w 


II 


■ 


■WOSSUOUK.^ 


■Bin 


1! 

!  i 
I  ' 


^ki 


U: 


11 


lit' 

W 
.  I' 


111 


^1- 


)    « 


ij. 


.j 


I 


i 


I  n 


EXPLANATION   OF  PLATE  XVIIi 


!    I 


Chief  and  Shaman  Ceremonial  Batons. 

Fig.  61.  Chief's  Baton  (taskear).  Cedar  wchkI.  Carried  on  ceremonial  occasions 
to  denote  rank.  Lower  figure,  a  frog ;  upi^er,  chief  with  ceremonial 
hat.  Cat.  No.  89097,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians.  Slsidegate.  Queen 
Cliarlotte  Islands.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  63.  Chief's  Baton  (taskear).  In  dancing  or  when  i)residing  over  a  feast  the 
chief  thum|)s  on  the  floor  with  his  baton  to  emphasize  the  time  or  to  at- 
tract attention  when  al)out  to  speak.  Cat.  No.  89095.  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  63.  Dance  Wand.  Carried  in  the  hand.  Ornamented  with  human  hair.  Cat. 
No.  137169,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Hoodsinoo  Indians  (Koluschan  stock),  Alaska. 
Collected  by  Paymaster  E.  B.  Webster,  U.  S.  Navy. 

Fig.  64.  Dance  Wand.  Of  wooil,  in  imitation  of  ancient  war  spear.  The  carved 
head  is  ornamented  with  human  hair.  Cat.  No.  74r»37,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indiajis.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  James  (i.  Swan. 

Fig.  65.  Chief's  Ceremoxiai.  Baton.  Carved.  Upj)er  figure.  Ktxit,  the  eagle ; 
lower,  Tsing,  the  leaver.  Cat.  No.  89098,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians, 
Skidegate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  tJolumbia.  Collected  by 
James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  66.  Shaman's  Baton  or  Wand.  Supjwsed  to  ]iossess  magical  ix>wers.  Carried 
by  medicine  man  in  his  ceremonies.  Cat.  No.  89100,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida 
Indians,  Skidegate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Col- 
lected by  James  G.  Swan. 


^} 


-V   :fl 


Report  of  National  Museum.  I88B.-Niblack. 


PLATE  XVII. 


Chief  and  Shaman  Ceremonial  Batons. 


If 

i 

I ' 


^ili' 


-•■^ls 


'I'  Si 


f 


4au,.li 


m'-r\7v' 


m^ 


I  '  h 


.^1 


^*w: 


'■I 


i 


1 1 


I  ' 


1 


M 


\ 


I 


'v 


J 


I 


!| 


EXPLANATION   OF  PLATE  XVIII, 


0 

67     . 

© 

68 

69 

7lA 

V 

7A 

S 

A 

Red-cedar  Bark  Paraphernalia  from  the  Northwest  Coast,  and  Ancient  Rattle. 

Figa.  67,  68,  and  69.  He.\d-Dresses.  Of  cetlar-bark  n>|ie,  stained  red  witli  tlu'  juice 
of  the  alder.  Worn  in  the  winter  ceremonial  dani-es  of  ilie  Kwakiutl 
and  other  southern  coast  Indians.  This  style  Iwrrowcd  by  the  northern 
Indians  and  worn  by  them  in  their  ceremonials,  but  not  with  the  same 
significance  as  in  the  south.  Cat.  Nos.  20H4H.  20910,  Hoodsin(x>  Indians, 
Admiralty  Island,  Alaska.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  70.  Necklace.  Of  cedar-bark  roiie.  like  those  above,  witl)  i)endent  tassels  of 
cedar-bark  twine.  Worn  over  right  shoulder  and  under  right  arm. 
Figs.  67,  68,  69,  70.  are  Cat.  Xos.  129r)i:i-l.j,  U.  S.  N.  xM.  Talcomk,  sub- 
tribe  of  Bil(]ula  Indians,  Vancouver  IsUuid.  British  Columbia.  Col- 
lected by  Dr.  Franz  Boiis. 

Fig.  71.  Girdle  or  Necklace.  Of  cedar-bark  roj)e.  W^orn  around  the  neck  with 
the  pendant  down  the  back  of  the  wearer  in  the  south  previous  to  going 
on  a  wlialing  expedition.  Amongst  the  Ilaida  it  is  simplj'  a  ceremonial 
ornament.     No  number. 

Fig.  72.  Sash.  Of  cedar-bark  rope.  Worn  over  the  shoulder.  Ornamented  with 
gulls'  down.  Cat.  No.  72701.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Stikiiie  Indians.  Alaska. 
Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  73.  Rattle.  Ancient  form.  Made  of  wood  with  pendent  beaks  of  the  puffin 
This  type  of  rattle  is  mentioned  by  many  of  the  early  voyagei*s,  Nt> 
number. 


Tt 


Report  of  Nitionil  MuMum,  1888.— Nibliok. 


Plate  XVIII. 


1! 


i  : 


}  h 


uh 


:\ 


; 


■  ii  I 


; 


i 


ii. 


Red-cedar  Bark  Paraphernalia  from  the  Northwest  Coast,  and  Ancient  Rattle. 


J  ;#'    ' 


ill 


iF 


i    ' 


v! 


i  * 


1 


V 


i! 


Report  c 


EXPLAN-ATION   OF   PLATE  XIX. 

CHIEF'S  Blue  Cloth  Ceremonial  Vestment. 

FiK  74  The  design  represents  tlie  halibut,  worked  on  in  red  cloth,  edged  with  bead 
and  buttox.  trniunings.  While  it  is  a  modern  garment,  it  shows  the 
artistic  skill  of  these  Indians  in  working  up  every  article  of  personal 
proiierty  into  a  totemic  design.  As  a  ceremonial  vestment  it  is  worn 
pendent  down  the  back.  Cat.  No.  20679,  U.  S.  N,  M.  Tsimshian  In- 
dians, Port  Simpson,  British  Columbia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888— Niblack. 


Plate  XIX. 


L 


Chie.f'9  Blue  Cloth  Ceremonial  Vestment. 


^>^--' 


!      A 


■fl  1 


THE    INDIANS    OF    THE    NORTHWEST   COAST. 


273 


It  is  in  the  form  of  a  truncated  coue,  with  no  openings  for  tlie  arms. 
Other  forms  of  ceremonial  blanlcets  are  simply  sqnare  pieces  of  cloth 
to  go  about  the  shoulders,  ornamented  in  totemic  designs,  or  with  pend- 


Flg.  75. 
Shaman's  Cloak. 

(Cat.  No.  891S7,  U.  S.  N.  M.     .Skidetnte,  B.  C.     Collfcted  bT  James  O.  Swan.  ) 

ant  pnfBn  beaks  or  deer  hoofs  attached  to  a  long  fringe.  These  are 
sometimes  of  tanned  deer  skin,  having  the  design  painted  on  in  a  regu- 
lar pattern  in  black  and  red  colors. 

Ceremonial  shirts  or  coats. — Fig.  34,  Plate  x,  represents  a  woven  cer- 
emonial coat  of  mountain  goat's  wool  as  already  described.  Other 
forms  are  made  of  cloth  or  blanket  material  and  ornamented  with  to- 
temic designs,  as  described  above.  Fig.  75a  represents  the  Sea  Lion,  and 
Fig.  7oft  is  a  rear  view  of  the  same  coat  ornamented  with  a  design  of 
Wasko^  a  mythological  animal  of  the  wolf  species.  The  edges  and  arm- 
holes  are  bordered  with  red  cloth,  and  the  whole  garment  is  neatly  made. 
Fig.  80,  Plate  xxi,  represents  a  buckskin  coat,  with  the  right  side 
fringed  and  open  and  the  left  side  sewed  np,  having  an  arm-hole  for  the 
left  arm.  The  bottom  is  also  fringed,  and  the  ueck-hole  slit  to  admit 
the  head.  The  design  represents  the  bear.  It  is  a  Tlingit  garment, 
loaned  to  the  Museum  by  Mr.  Max  B.  Kichardson,  of  Oswego,  New 
York.  Other  ceremonial  coats  are  illustrated  in  the  accompanying 
plates. 

Ceremonial  leggings. — These  are  of  buckskin,  blue  cloth,  blanket  stntf", 
or  of  goat's  wool,  woven  as  shown  in  Plate  x,  Fig.  33a.  A  very  coiinium 
type  IS  seen  in  Fig.  36,  Plate  x,  fringed  and  ornamented  with  poiiil- 
ant  beaks  of  the  puffin,  shown  in  the  detail  of  the  same  figure.  Otli(>r 
kinds  are  cut  out  in  the  pattern  or  outline  of  some  totemic  animal  mid 
either  painted  in  design  or  worked  on  in  colored  cloth  by  the  ayplUfue 
method.  They  are  secured  to  the  leg  by  straps  of  cloth  or  bncksUin 
and  are  usually  worn  in  conjunction  with  moccasins  or  the  bare  feet. 
H.  Mis.  142,  pt.  2 18 


^-' 


I 


'  I   ; 


fi  -i 


;f 


J       !:. 

i 
i 


w 


■'8 


llll 


1 

lis 


!!■■; 


I 


,  i| 


:|  i 


274 


BEPOBT   OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


Fig.  75a. 
Cbbkmomul  Shirt. 

(Oat.  No.  891M,  U.  S.  N.  H.    8kide(ite,  B.  C.    Collect      by  Jnmra  O.  Swaa) 


FlR.  TBft. 

Hbar  Tmw  OP  Fi«.  76(1. 


/I 


ff 


^1 


I 


II 


I 


:.  ij 


f';  H 


'  4 


:' 


Ki 


1 


'I  1 


i'  1^ 


:p 


H 


ii! 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XX. 


Carvings  on  Rocks,  and  Stone  Implements  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fiom  photographs  by  the  author. 

Fig.  76.  Anx'IENT  Tlingit  Sculptures.  Carved  on  tlie  rocks  on  the  beach  near 
Fort  Wrangell.  Alaska.  The  figure  represents  the  orca  or  wliale- 
killer. 

Fig.  77.  Ancient  Tlingit  Sculptures.  Representing  several  human  faces  and 
conventional  designs. 

Fig.  79.  Primitive  Stone  Implements,  a  is  a  scraper  for  removing  the  irmer  in- 
tegument or  bark  from  the  trunk  of  the  pine  tree  for  food;  b  is  a  small 
stone  hammer;  c.  a  heavy  stone  sledge:  d,  aifadze,  of  which  e  i^  i  side 
view;  /,  a  variety  of  atone  adze  blades  (see  Plate  XXIII);  g,  a  type  of 
adze,  showing  metliotl  of  hafting;  h,  a  scraj>er  used  in  the  prcKcss  of 
tanning  hides.  Haida  Indians,  Dixon  Entrance.  Collected  bj-  James 
G.  Swan. 


Ill 


Car 


T  1 


Report  of  National  Mussum,  1888, — Niblack. 


PLATE  XX. 


ti 


1 


h' 


Carvings  on  Rocks,  and  Stone  Implements  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


99IR 


^m 
tf 


I-   V, 


.! 


k'i 


flBB! 


Report  of  t 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXI. 

Tlingit  Ceremonial  Buckskin  Shirt. 

Made  of  two  thicknesses  of  buckskin,  sewetl  up  on  the  left  side;  open  on  the 
right.  Tlie  neck-oiH,ming  is  slit  to  admit  the  head.  The  figure  is  painted  on  tlie 
front  in  black  and  red  colors,  and  represents  the  totem  of  the  Bear.  Cat.  No.  1  'M)'m. 
U.  H.  N.  M.    Tlingit  Indians,  Alaska.     Lent  by  Max.  B.  Richardson,  of  Oswego, 

N.  Y. 


Report  of  NationnI  Museum,  1888-  Niblack. 


lie 
lie 

18. 
o. 


Plate  XXI. 


M 


1  ■, 


1 . 1} 


1  ;■ 

i. 
1.  I 


:■  I 


I    I 


Tlinqit  Ceremonial  Buckskin  Shirt. 


'!     !i 


THE 


\ 


8lave'killera.—T 
the  chiefs  in  dispa 
occasions  of  build 
tant  personage,  as 
instruments  are  il 
driven  by  a  quick 
accorded  special  C( 
been  made  of  bone 
w'^vent  of  the  whil 
implements  have,  ] 


'  t. 


THE  INDIANS   OF  THE   NOllTUWEBT   ('OAST. 


276 


8lav€'killera, — ^Theae  are  cerutuouml  impleiueuts  formerly  used  by 
the  chiefs  in  dispatching  the  slaves  selected  as  victims  of  sacriflce  on 
occasions  of  building  a  house,  or  on  the  death  of  a  chief  or  other  impor- 
tant personage,  as  described  in  Chapter  xiii.  Some  varieties  of  these 
instruments  are  illustrated  in  Plate  XLVi.  The  pointed  ends  were 
driven  by  a  quick  blow  into  the  sknll  of  the  victim,  whose  body  was 
accorded  special  consideration  in  burial.  They  seem  in  general  to  have 
been  made  of  bone,  or  of  wood  tipped  with  stone.  Naturally,  with  the 
H'lvent  of  the  whites,  this  custom  has  had  to  be  abandoned,  aud  these 
implements  have,  in  time,  become  very  rare. 


<! 


r 


•i 


V. 


MM'      !; 


hi  '  il 


FOOD;   IMPLEMENTS  AND  WEAPONS;  HUNTING  AND  FISHING. 
FOOD:    ITS  PREPARATION  AND  HOW  OBTAINED. 

Food. — Fish  and  berries  form  the  staff  of  life  amongst  the  Indians  of 
this  reg*  jn.  Around  the  summer  camps,  at  all  times,  can  be  seen  strips 
of  halibut  or  salmon  suspended  in  the  smoke  of  the  dwelling-houses,  or 
dryjr^  in  the  open  air  on  frames  erected  for  the  purpose.  In  the  sum- 
mer i-ieason  there  is  an  abundance  of  all  kinds  of  food,  but  the  energies 
of  che  Indians  are  directed  to  laying  up  a  stock  for  winter's  use.  Hali- 
but abound  from  March  to  November,  and  are  readily  caught  on  their 
favorite  banks,  known  to  the  natives  who  camp  near  such  localities. 
Halibut  and  salmon,  fresh  and  dried,  form  the  basis  of  the  food  supply. 
The  salmon  are  caught  during  the  *'  runs."  After  the  daily  wants  are 
supplied,  and  a  suficient  number  dried  for  winter's  use,  the  surplus  fish 
are  converted  into  oil.  This  oil,  af  well  as  all  other  kinds,  is  used  as  a 
sauce,  into  which  nearly  everything  is  dipped  before  eating.  Seal  and 
porpoise  flesh,  or  blubber,  is  esteemed  a  great  delicacy,  although  they 
will  not  eat  whale'b  blubber  for  superstitious  reasons.  Any  kind  of  meat 
of  wild  animals  is  eaten  when  procurable,  but  it  is  only  in  recent  years 
that  they  have  ever  salted  down  or  dried  meat  for  winter's  use.  Other 
LinrJs  of  lish,  such  as  cod,  herring,  and  eulachon,  are  much  esteemed. 
During  the  run  of  herring  large  quantities  are  dried  or  pressed  into  oil. 
Eulacliou  {ThaleichthyB pacifieus),  the  so-called  "candle-flsh,"  a  kind  of 
smelt,  run  in  March  and  April  at  the  mouth  of  the  Skeeoa,  Nass,  and 
Stikeen  Rivers,  These  have  the  greatest  proportion  of  fatty  matter 
known  in  any  fish.  In  frying  they  melt  almost  completely  into  oil,  and 
need  i  nly  the  insertion  of  some  kind  of  a  v>  ?ck  to  serve  as  a  candle. 

Full  roe. — The  roe  of  fish  is  esteemed  a  g"eat  delicacy,  and  greet 
care  is  taken  to  collect  it  in  the  water,  or  remove  it  from  captured  fish. 
It  is  either  eaten  fresh,  or  dried  and  preservec'.  for  winter's  use,  when 
it  is  eaten  in  two  ways:  (1)  It  is  pounded  between  two  sti  nes,  dilnted 
with  water,  and  beaten  with  wooden  spoons  into  a  creamy  coMsistcticv; 
or  (2)  it  is  boiled  with  sorrel  and  different  dried  berries,  and  molded 
in  wooden  frames  into  cakes  about  12  inches  square  and  1  incli  thick. 

Herhit  ."nd  berries. — Boots,  herbs,  berries,  and  snails  are  amongst  the 
luxuries  of  tlie  summer  season.  Bacpberries,  salmon  berries,  straw- 
berries, currants,  red  and  blue  huckleberries,  salal,  and  thimble  berries 
abound  late  in  the  summer.  Bomo  of  these  are  collected  and  dried  for 
S78 


Xlkp' 


Pool* 


THE   INDIANS   OF    THE   NORTHWEST    COAST. 


277 


cv ; 
(knl 
ick. 
tlin 
aw- 
ries 
for 


wiiu  er's  use,  forming,  with  the  dried  fish,  the  principal  winter's  supply 
Poole  (1863)  says  of  the  Haida,  that  they  often,  thiough  feasting  or 
improvidence,  eat  up  all  the  dried  berries  before  spring,  and  "  were  it 
not  for  a  few  bulbs  which  they  dig  out  of  the  soil  in  the  early  spring- 
time, while  awaiting  the  halibut  season,  numbers  of  Indians  really 
would  starve  to  death."  • 

Portlock  mentions  the  root  of  the  wild  lily  as  very  much  used  by  the 
Tlinglt.  Crab-apples  are  found,  but  are  scarcely  edible.  Wild  parsnips 
arc  abundant  and  palatable.  Many  years  ago  an  American  ship  cap- 
tain gave  the  Indians  potatoes,  and  they  are  now  regularly  cultivated, 
auL*  form  a  considerable  item  in  the  winter  food  supply.  Other  vegeta- 
bles may  be  and  are  grown.  Near  all  the  villages  now  may  be  seen 
patches  of  ground  planted,  however,  principally  in  potatoes. 

(HI. — Fish  is  eaten  dried  by  breaking  it  up  and  soaking  the  bits  in 
fisb-oil  or  grease,  having  the  consistency  of  uncooled  jelly.  This  oil 
is  obtained  from  seals,  porpoises,  herring,  salmon,  eulachon,  goat,  deer, 
bear,  Piid  the  livers  of  the  dog-fish,  shark,  and  otaer  vertebrates.  It 
is  the  odor  of  this  rancid  oil  which  permeates  everything  Indian,  and 
renders  a  visit  to  a  lodge  on  the  northwest  coast  somewhat  of  an 
ordeal. 

Invertebrates. — Invertebrates  and  several  species  of  marine  ilgae  or 
sea-weed  are  eaten.  Of  the  former  there  are  clams,  crabs,  cattle-fish, 
and  mussels  or  oysters,  the  last  named  being  often  poisonous  at  certain 
seasons.  The  clams,  echinoderms,  and  sea-weed  are  gathered  at  ebb 
tide.    The  shell  flsL  are  usually  eaten  in  the  winter  months. 

8ea-weed. — ^The  sea-weed  is  dried  for  wintei-'s  use  and  pressed  into  a 
kind  of  cake,  like  plug  tobacco.  A  species  of  it,  quite  black  when  dried, 
is  used  for  making  a  dish  called  sopcdlaly,  of  which  the  Indians  are  im- 
mf^'Jerately  fond.  This  is  made  by  breaking  up  a  very  small  piece  of 
die  pressed  aopallaly  cake  into  little  bits  in  a  bowl  or  dish  and  adding 
warm  water.  It  is  then  beaten  with  a  wooden  spoon  and  sugar  is 
added.  It  troths  and  foams  like  the  white  of  an  egg  or  like  soap,  and 
gradually  turns  from  a  terra-cotta  color  to  white.  Berries,  fresh  or 
dried,  are  sometimes  added,  and  the  mixture  is  consumed  with  avidity 
by  old  and  young.  Langsdorff  (1805)  says  in  spring  and  summer  the 
Tiingit  gather  several  sorts  of  sea- weed,  which,  "  when  cooked,  make  a 
bitterish  sort  of  soup."  ': 

He  mentions  also  "  a  sort  of  square  cake  made  of  the  bark  of  the 
spruce  fir,  pounded  anc*  mixed  with  the  roots,  berries  and  train  oil."  t 

Bark. — The  inner  bark  of  the  spruce  and  hemlock  forms  an  important 
part  of  the  food  supply  of  the  Haida,  Tlingit,  and  Tsimshian.  The 
southern  Indian  eats  pine  bark.  Plii^e  xx.  Fig.  79a,  shows  a  stone 
scraper  used  by  the  northern  Indians  for  removing  this  inner  bark  from 
the  trunk.    The  scrapings  are  molded  into  cakes  about  a  foot  tiqnare 

*  Poole,  Qc<^n  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  315.       t  LangsdorflT,  Voyages,  Pt.  Ii,  p.  131. 


? 


^ifp 


Is 


4 


278 


REPORT   OF  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


|; 


i\ 


it- 

Mill 


;!  I 


n 


.    :!■  ! 


i 


and  an  inch  thick,  dried  and  preserved  for  winter's  use.    It  is  eaten, 
like  dried  fish,  with  oil  as  a  sance. 

Birds. — The  Indians  are  remarkably  fond  of  wild  fowl,  but  the  diffi- 
culties of  shooting  and  entrapping  them  with  their  ordinary  imple- 
ments and  means  have  made  them  a  very  inconsiderable  source  of  their 
food  supply.  At  certain  seasons,  however,  they  capture  them  by  strat- 
egy- Wild  geese  they  catch  after  they  have  she')  their  large  wing 
feathers  and  are  unable  to  fly.*  At  other  timp**  t;*  *  'iint  wild  fowl 
by  uight  with  torches  and  full  them  with  clubs.  *.  ;:>  <?.64)  thus  de- 
scribes bird  slau  ghtering  amongst  the  Ewakiutl : 

The  birds,  which  are  small  but  plamp,  burrow  their  holes  in  tha  sand-banka  on  the 
shii.i'es.  Whea  the  slaughtering  season  arrives  the  Indians  prepare  torches  composed 
of  long  stiok^having  the  tips  smeared  with  gam  taken  from  the  pine  trees.  Armed 
with  handy  clubs,  they  then  place  these  lightcu  torches  at  the  months  of  the  holes, 
and  as  soon  as  the  birds,  attracted  by  the  glare,  flutter  forth,  they  fell  them  to  the 
ground,  t 

Birds'  Eggs. — Birds'  eggs  are  collected,  wherever  possible,  in  early 
summer.  The  Haida  derive  their  supply  from  th^  outlying  rocks  of 
the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  The  Kaigani  make  trips  out  to  Forrester 
and  other  islands.  Each  location  is  pre-empted  by  particular  families, 
and  considered  hereditary  property,  which  is  handed  down  from  gen- 
eration to  generation. 

Cooking  and  Preparation  of  Food. — Dried  fish,  bark,  r»i»  i;t.;.-  are 
eaten  with  grease  or  oi),  as  before  stated.  Salmon  roe  ^  !•  il  J  in 
boxes  on  the  beach,  washed  by  the  tide,  and  eateu  in  a  .\o..  y.r  >  i^A 
state.  The  heads  of  salmon  aud  halibut  arc  esteemed  a  gre^  ^xury 
when  putrefied  in  the  tide  or  salt  water.  Meat  is  either  broileti  f ..  o, 
stick,  roasted  on  hot  stones,  or  boiled  in  a  kettle.  Before  the  intro- 
duction of  kettles,  meat  was  boiled  in  a  wooden  dish  or  water-tight 
basket  by  means  of  red  hot  stones  added  to  the  water.  Fresh  fish  and 
cuttle  fish  are  always  cooked.  Oil  is  extracted  from  the  livers  of  dog- 
fish and  stranded  sharks  and  whales,  to  sell  to  the  whites.  Oil  is  ob- 
tained in  different  localities  from  salmon,  herring,  eulacbcn,  and  pollock. 
The  fish  is  usually  allowed  to  partially  putrefy  and  then  ^  >•  >'  d!  in  vs  ooden 
boxes  by  means  of  hot  stones  dropped  in  the  water.  Tht  ; , ;  'a  or  oil 
is  skimmed  firom  the  surface.  The  refuse  is  sqneezeJ  in  c^.  u  and  the 
grease  obtained  is  stored  in  boxes.  Sometimes  this  grease  or  oil  is  run 
into  the  hollow  stalks  of  £iant  keK;,  v-iich  have  beea  tinned  or  pre- 
pared beforehand  as  follows:  '  he  8talK«  ..r-  soaked  in  v'resh  water  ic 
extract  the  salt,  dried  in  the  i.nw  or  in  the  smoke  of  the  dwelling,  and 
then  toughened  and  made  pliable  with  oil,  rubbed  thoroughly  in.  In 
this  form  of  storage  the  oil  is  as  portable  as  in  bottles,  or  in  jars,  with 
less  danger  of  breakage.  Birds  or  wild  fowls  are  toasted  on  a  stick 
before  a  slow  fire  without  any  previous  plucking  or  cleaning,  and  the 
feathers  and  skin  removed  afterward.  The  entrails  are  supposed  to 
add  a  decidedly  better  flavor  to  the  bird. 


'  Porllook,  Voyage,  p.  265. 


t  Poole,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  284. 


» 


r         1    "S'W 


/ 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXII. 


Primitive  Sto?;:  I;.;plements  from  the  Northwest  Coast,  with  Wooden  Wedge  for 

SPLITTING  Wood. 

Fig.  8L  Stone  Hammer  OR  Sled(je.  Head  of  basalt;  Imft  of  wocxl.  TiuMlrawing 
shows  method  of  hafting.  Cat.  No.  88820,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Masset,  Queen 
Cliarlotte  Islands.  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  83.  Stone  Sledge.  Head  of  basalt;  handlejof  wood;  lashing  of  spruce  root. 
Cat.  No.  888Jrf».  U.  S.  N.  M.  Mas.set.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  Britisli 
Columbia.     Collected  l>y  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  83.  Stone  Festive.  For  grinding  jtaint,  and  sometimes  used  as  a  hand 
weajKin.  Cat.  No.  89011,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians.  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands.  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  O.  Swan. 

Fig.  84.  Wooden  \VED(iE.  Bcnly  of  spruce  or  cedar;  lasiiing  on  the  head  of 
twisted  spruce  rf)ot.  Used  in  sj^litting  logs  and  getting  out  timln'r  for 
industrial  iiurjjoses.  Cat.  Nc.  726T9,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Makali  Indians.  Cape 
Flattery.  Washington.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  85.  Stone  SleD(*e.  Head  of  hasiUt;  lashing  of  raw-hide.  Cat.  No.  20596.  U. 
S.  N.  M.  Kwakiutl  Indians,  Bella  Bella,  British  Columbia.  CoUp<-t»(', 
by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  86.  Stone  Sledoe.  Head  of  basalt:  lashing  of  spruce  root.  Cat.  No.  20898, 
U.  S.  N.  M.  Kaigani  Indians  (Haida).  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska. 
Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


Primitive  St 


■■fi 


!.!    I 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888— Niblack. 


Plate  XXII. 


Primitive  Stone  Implements  from  the  Northwest  Coast,  with  Wooden  Wedge  for 

SPLITTING  Wood. 


!!■ 


■  :fc 


f 


1   ;*f 


:      l..M^ 


!■       ,  .1, 


4 


J 

i 
i 
1 

1       ■    ,' 

t 


M       ' 


to 
hi 
Tl 

of 
dv 
in 
do 
th( 
flei 
an< 
fro 


J 
oiu 

to  4 

Bo\ 

ties 

oft 

cop 

smo 

beei 

beei 

M 

carv 

and 

and 

prim 

At 

InFi 

varif 

meth 

plani 

gardt 

the  n 

Plate 

itefo 

(1787 

Haidt 

New 

Kni 

coppe 


•  Ti'  n 


THE   INDIANS    OF   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


279 


' 


Wbeu  tUo  salmon  or  halibut  are  cangbt,  it  is  the  duty  of  the  women 
to  clean  and  dry  them.  The  head  is  cat  off,  the  fish  slit  down  the 
back,  back-bone  and  entrails  removed,  and  the  tail  and  fins  cut  off. 
The  cleaned  fish  is  then  cut  into  long  flakes,  which  are  hung  on  a 
wooden  frame,  and  cured,  without  salt,  either  in  the  sun  or  by  means 
of  a  slow  fire  beneath.  Sometimes  they  are  dried  in  the  smoke  of  tliu 
dwellings.  The  fish  when  dried  are  either  wrapped  in  bark  or  stored 
in  chests  or  boxes,  and  stowed  for  future  use  out  of  the  reach  of  the 
dogs  and  children.  When  bear,  deer,  goats,  or  other  game  are  killed, 
the  skin  is  not  generally  removed  from  the  carcass  until  most  of  the 
flesh  has  been  eaten.  In  this  way  the  skin  forms  a  wrapper  to  preserve 
and  protect  the  flesh.  Grease  obtained  by  boiling  the  meat  is  skimmed 
from  the  surface  of  the  water  and  esteemed  a  great  delicacy. 

INDUSTRIAL  IMPLEMENTS  OK  TOOLS. 

In  general. — Pr:*nitive  tools  were  of  stone,  the  most  common  edged 
ones  being  of  flint,  or  a  peculiar  hard  green  jadeite,  or,  where  possible 
to  obtain  it,  of  jade,  which  last  named  they  got  from  the  north  in  trade. 
Eough  tools  and  implements,  such  as  sledges,  hammers,  mortars,  pes- 
tles, scrapers,  etc.,  were  of  igneous  rock,  roughly  carved  in  the  totem 
of  the  owner.  The  knives  for  more  delicate  carvings  in  wood  were  of 
copper,  flint,  jade,  or  the  bones  of  flshes  and  mammals,  the  work  being 
smoothed  down  with  shark  skin  used  as  a  sand-paper.  Steel  has  now 
been  substituted  for  stone  in  all  of  their  tools,  but  the  native  shape  has 
been  in  a  measure  retained. 

Hammers  and  Sledges. — These  were  of  hard  igneous  stone,  rudely 
carved,  and  are  used  here  and  there  even  to  this  day.  Figs.  81,  82, 85, 
and  86,  Plate  xxii,  represent  a  variety  of  these  as  regards  shapes,  sizes, 
and  methods  of  hafting,  while  Plate  xx,  Figs.  79,  b  and  o,  show  a  very 
primitive  form  of  hammer  and  sledge-head,  respectively. 

Adzes. — A  variety  of  adz-blades  of  a  green  jade-like  stone  are  shown 
in  Fig.  79,  same  plate,  d,  e,  and  /.  Figs.  88  and  89, 1'late  xxiii,  are  other 
varieties  of  this  pick-shaped  blade,  of  which  Figs.  90  and  91  show 
methods  of  hafting.  A  more  handy  variety  of  adz,  for  finishing  and 
planing  work,  is  shown  in  Fig.  79  g,  f  being  a  variety  of  blades  as  re- 
gards size.  The  methods  of  hafting  this  flat-shaped  blade  tbroughont 
the  northwest  coast  are  shown  in  Fig.  79  g  and  Figs.  87, 92,  93,  and  94, 
Plate  xxiiL  Iron  or  steel  is  now  substituted  for  stone,  and  the  favor- 
ite form  is  that  made  by  sharpening  the  end  of  a  broad  flat  file.  Dixon 
(1787)  says  the  only  stone  implement  he  saw  amongst  the  T'.ingit  and 
Haida  was  an  adze  made  of  jasper,  "  the  same  as  those  used  by  the 
New  Zealanders."* 

Knives. — Before  the  introduction  of  iron  the  only  metal  available  was 
copper.    This  was  not  used  for  industrial  purposes,  as  knives,  on  ac- 


*  Dixou,  Voyage,  p.  824. 


I        !■ 


^ 

M 

f^ 

wf" 

'         i; 

■ 

!  n 

;'  ■;.    I 

.': 

■ 

ik 

280 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


!'• 


r 


y 


m 


count  of  its  softness.  Chief  reliance  was  placed  in  jade,  flint,  or  other 
stone,  and  upon  shells  and  bone.  In  the  Emmons  Collection  in  the 
Museum  of  Natural  History  in  New  York  are  two  primitive  Tiingit 
stoue  knives,  with  horn  handles,  and  illustrated  in  Fi^s.  99  a  and  99  b. 
Tliu  handles  are  of  deer  horn,  the  blades  of  jade,  and  the  lashing  of 
buckskin.  Marchand  (1791)  expressed  his  astonishment  at  the  elab- 
orately carved  posts  in  front  of  the 
Haida  houses  of  Queen  Charlotte  Isl- 
ands, which,  he  says,  Wtsre  fashioned 
out  with  *'  a  sharp  stone,  bafted  on  a 
branch  of  a  tree,  the  bone  of  a  quadru- 
ped, the  bone  of  one  fish  and  the  rough 
skin  of  another."*  On  the  introduction 
of  iron,  which  both  Cook  and  Dixon 
attribute  to  the  Bussians,  the  Indians 
were  not  slow  to  adapt  it  to  their  pur- 
poses. Dixon  says  that  in  Captain 
Cook's  time  ''iron  implements  were 
then  also  in  use"  among  the  Tiingit 
and  Haida,  while,  in  1787,  their  knives 
were  "so  very  thin  that  they  bend  them 
into  a  variety  of  forms,  which  answer 
their  every  purpose  nearly  as  well  as 
if  they  had  recourse  to  a  carpenter's 
tool  chest."  t  This  applies,  however, 
equally  well  to-day,  as  Plate  xxiv  wiU 
show.  Figs.  97  to  103,  inclusive,  illus- 
trate a  variety  of  knives  from  the  north- 
west coast,  all  of  similar  design  or  pat- 
tern, those  from  the  north,  however, 
having  their  handles  carved  with  totemic  designs  after  the  usual  custom 
of  this  region.  Figs.  95  and  90  represent  fish  knives  of  a  simple  pattern, 
which  replaced  those  of  shell  formerly  used.  Fig.  103  represents  a  pat- 
tern not  uncomDiou  in  the  north,  being,  besides  a  dagg^nr,  an  all  around 
knife  for  carving,  cleaning  fish,  cutting  up  game,  etc.,  much  as  a  bowie 
knife  is  used  by  the  trapper  of  the  interior. 

Scrapers. — Two  varieties  of  stone  scrapers  are  shown  in  Plate  xx,  Fig. 
79a  and  h.  The  former  is  a  very  primitive  instrument  used  for  scraping 
off'  the  inner  bark  of  the  spruce  and  hemlock  for  food.  The  latter  is  a 
stone  skin  scraper  used  in  cleaning  hides  in  the  process  of  tanning.  These 
are  also  of  bone,  as  shown  in  Fig.  79k  from  the  Emmons  collection, 
and  are  often  ornamented  with  totemV*  designs,  as  in  the  si>ecimen 
shown. 
Mortars  and  pestles. — Stowed  away  in  the  older  houses  of  the  different 


a- 


Figs.  00a  and  99/>. 
Stonb  Bladed  Knivrs. 

(Haid«.     Eninions  Collection. ) 


*  Quoted  by  J.  G.  Swan,  in  Smithson.  Cont.  to  Knowledge,  267,  p.  12. 
t  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  24"J. 


fi  r 


1 


r! 


1   ;■ 


I      1 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXII!. 


Primitive  Stone  and  Steel  Implements  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  87.  Stone  Adze.  Rudest  form;  showing  mode  of  Iiaftiiig.  Set>  Platf  XX, 
79/.  Cat.  No.  43234,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tlingit.  Alaska.  Collet-ted  by  Com- 
mander Beardslee,  U.  S.  Navy. 

Fig.  88.  Stone  Adze  Blade.  Hafting  shown  in  Fig.  01.  Cat.  No.  88996.  U.  S.  N. 
M.  Tsimsliian  Indiana,  Fort  Simpson,  British  Columbia.  Collected  by 
James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  89.  S:une  as  Fig.  88.    Cat.  No.  89013,  U.  S.  N.  M. 

Fig.  90.  Stone  Adze.  With  lashing  of  twisted  sj)ruce  root.  See  also  Plate  XX, 
Fig.  79,  d  and  e.  Cat.  No.  88816,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Masset  Indians  (Haida). 
Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Collected  by  James  G. 
Swan. 

Fig.  91.  Same  as  Fig.  90.     Cat.  No.  88720,  U.  S.  N.  M. 

Fig.  92.  Hand  Adze.  Blade  of  steel;  handle  of  Iwne.  Cat.  No.  23376.  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Makah  Indians  (Wakashan  stock),  Cajw  Flattery,  Washington.  Col- 
lected by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  93.  Adze.  Blade  of  steel.  Cat.  No.  23462,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Clallam  Indians  (Sal- 
ishan  stock),  Wasliington.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  B4.  Adze.  Blade  of  steel;  general  northwest  tyj)e.  Hafting  same  as  used  for- 
merly on  stone  blades.  See  Plate  XX,  Fig.  79/.  Kwakiutl  Indians, 
Bella  Bella,  British  Columbia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


^  ^1  \  \ 


Report  of  National  Muieu.-n,  1888.— Niblack, 


Plate  XXIII. 


Primitive  Stone  and  Steel  Implements  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


i  ■*? 


! 


wpp 


!  I 


!        . )    :  ; 


tn 


. ' ' '! 


1 


i'  I,' 


Ill  , 


ll    'l> 


i 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXIV, 


Industrial  Implements  or  Tools-Knives  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


Fig.  95. 
Fig.  96. 
Fig.    97. 

Fig.    98. 

Fig.  99. 
Fig.  100. 
Fig.  101. 
Fig.  102. 
Fig.  103. 


Fish  Knife.     Steel.    Used  in  cleaning  anu  preparing  fish  for  drying.    Cat. 

No.  74873,  U.  &.  N.  M.    Tliugit.  Sitka,  Alaska.    Collected  by  John  J. 

McLean. 
Fish  Knife.    Steel,  with  copper  handle.     Cat.  No.  88773,  U.  b.  N.  M. 

Haida   Indiana,  Masset,  Quee'n  Charlotte  Islands,  British  C'olumbia. 

Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 
Woon-cARViNO  Knife.    Blade  of  s'oel.    The  ejid  of  the  blade  is  curved  to 

make  the  deep  cuts  of  relief-carving.     Cat.  No.  129977a,  U.  S.  N.  M. 

Kwakiutl  Indians.  Fort  Rui)ert,  Vancouver  Island,  British  Columbia. 

Collected  by  James  G.  Swan, 
WooD-c'ARViNo  Knife.    Straight  blade  of  steel :  handle  carved  to  represent 

a  sea-lion.     Ca^..  No.  128977?).  U.  S.  IS.  M.     Kwakiutl  Indians,  Fort 

Rupert,  Vancouver  Island  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G. 

Swan. 

ViWiod,  V.  S.  N.  M.     Kwakiutl  In- 
Island,  British  Columbia.     Collecled 


129978/>,   U.  S.  N.  M. 


Kwakiutl  In- 
Collected  by 


WooD-CARviNO  Knife.    Cat.  No. 

dians.  Fort  Ruix'rt,  Vancouver 

Ijy  James  G.  Swan. 
WOOD-CARVlNG  Knife.     Cat.   No. 

dians,  F<)rt  Rupert,  Vancouver  Island.  British  Columliia. 

Jan'es  G.  Swan. 
WooD-t'A.Hvrxi  Knife.     Curved  end  of  blade.     Cat.  No.  20881 ,  U.  S.  N.  M. 

Kaigani  Indians.  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska.     Collected  by  James 

Cr.  Swan. 
W()()D-c'ARViN(i  Knife.     Carving  repre8<n\ts  Hooyeh.  the  raven.     Cat.  No. 

67831.  U.  S,  N.  M.     Tlingit  Indians.  Sitka.  Alaska.     Collected  by  John 

J.  M(;Lean. 
Knife.     Used  as  a  wea|)on  and  for  carving  wood,  cutting  up  meat,  fish, 

etc.     Cat.  No.  74267,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit  Indians,  Sitka.  Alaska.     Col- 

lei'ted  by  John  J.  McLean. 


r 


' 


■  f;l 


ait  I  lu- 
•tfil  by 

N.M. 
James 

'lit.  No. 
jy  Joliu 

at.  tish, 

I.      Col- 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


PLAie  XXIV. 


™! 


I      t 


'J, 


i 


Indusvrial  Implements  on  Tools— Knives  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


i     !! 


wedges 
front  t 


1      I' 


THE   INDIA.4S   OF   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


281 


11 


a 


villages  are  now  found  large  and  small  stone  mortars  and  pestles,  sur- 
prisingly well  carved  in  totemic  designs. 

These  were  by  some  people  supposed  to  indicate  that 
in  early  days  these  Indians  ground  maize,  as  did  and 
do  the  hunting  Indians  of  the  interior,  bat  such  is  not 
the  case,  as  they  were  unacquainted  with  cereals  of  any 
kind.  These  mortars  were  used  for  an  entirely  diQerent 
purpose.  In  the  larger  ones  we  :e  ground  and  prepared 
the  tobacco  plugs  for  chewing;  in  the  smaller  were 
mixed  and  ground  the  different  paints  used  for  the 
body,  ma8ks,  earrings,  and  all  the  various  purposes  to 
which  these  native  pigments  were  and  are  now  applied. 
Fig.  83,  Plate  xxii,  represents  a  paint-pestle,  which  was 
also  used  as  a  weapon  or  missile,  carried  in  the  hand  in 
times  of  local  feuds,  brawls,  and  quarrels.  Fig.  83a 
represents  a  pestle  of  this  kind  in  the  JiJmmons  Col- 
lection already  referred  to.  Another  variety  of  pestle  is 
shown  in  Plate  LXiii,  Fig  338.  Fig.33!t  (»1  same  plate 
is  an  ancient  tobacco  n-  "  tar  of  marble  or  calcite,  neatly 
curved  on  the  exterio.  *vith  a  totemic  design.  Other 
mortars  carved  in  likene.-.s  of  frotrs,  bir<i8,  fishes,  aii<i 
flower-pots  are  found  throughout    ne  northern  region. 

Wedges. — These  are  usually  of  W(  n\  and  foi  uerly 
were  entirely  so.    Now,  however,  iron  wedges  are  some 
times  used.    These,  in  any  case,  are  for  splitting  up  lo^ 
into  boards,  and  in  getting  out  timber  in  tin'  rough 
generally.     A  very  useful  type  of  wooden    »vedge  is 
shown  in  Fig.  84,  Plate  xxii,  general  throughout  the  p,   ^^^^ 

coast.    These  were  used  in  connection  with  the  he;    y    bonbskimscbapkr. 
sledges  shown  in  the  same  plate.    The  heads       iiie    (Tiinut  En.moo.coM«> 

lion. ) 


Wn^^ 

■-''  f'f 

i  ■ 
-]■ 

1    I  !• 


m 


Fig.  83<i. 
Taint  Pbstlb. 

(Tliniit.     Einmont  Collection.) 


wedges  are  protected,  or  prevented  from  splitting,  by  a  grommet  woven 
from  tough  withes  or  from  spruce  root  and  put  on  as  shown  in  the 


282 


UEPORT   OP    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


) 


illustration.    The  .^kill  with  which  huge  slabs,  rafters,  and  boai'da  are 
gotten  out  with  the  rough  tools  employed  is  surprising. 

Chisels.— A  primitive  type  of  chisel  is  shown  in  Fig.  78,  consisting  of 
a  green  stone  blade  mounted  in  a  wooden  handle.  The  blade  is  similar 
in  shape  to  those  of  the  adzes.  This  instrument  was 
used  in  roughing  down  the  surface,  the  smoothing  being 
done  by  scraping  with  sharp-'^dged  shells  or  stones,  or 
even  by  rubbing  wi til  shark  or  uog-flsh  skin  to  get  a 
finished  surface. 

Jhills. — Holes,  where  drilled,  were  made  by  patient 
digging  with  a  pointed  instrument  of  stone  or  bone,  or 
by  driving  in  a  copper  spike  and  withdrawing  it.  Joints 
were  made  by  dovetailing,  mortising,  tonguing  and 
grooving,  or  notching  and  lashing,  great  ingeudity 
being  slown  in  avoiding  the  necessity  for  pegs  or  nails. 
Paintbrushes. — These  are  shown  in  all  their  varieties 
in  Plate  xlv,  A  and  B,  and  are  well  adapted  to  the 
neat  work  demanded  of  them.  Bristles,  hair,  and  vege- 
table fiber  are  the  materials  used  for  the  brush-heads. 
The  handles  of  those  from  the  northtrn  region  are  carved 
with  the  usual  totemic  designs. 
I)    i  tiil  Other  tools  and  implements  adapted  to  special  uses 

in  their  arts  and  industries  will  be  described  in  Chapter 
VII. 


ir 


, 


WEAPONS  OP  WAB  AND  OF  THE  OHASB. 


Weapons. — The  principal  weapons  before  the  advent 
of  the  whites  were  clubs  of  wood  and  stone,  bows  and 
arrows,  spears  with  shell,  bone,  flint,  copper,  or  jade 
tips,  and,  above  all,  the  dagger,  the  constant  companion 
Fig  78.  ^^  ^-''^  Indian  of  this  region. 

Chisel.  Clubs.— These  were  of  wood,  of  stone,  or  of  stone 

ainii«.n.fioii«tin„.)  hafted  with  wood.  The  Jiafted  stone  clubs  were  simply 
industrial  implements  ah  idy  described  and  used  for  the  time  being 
as  weapons.  A  Tsimshian  stone  war-club  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  122, 
Plate  xxvii.  A  Tlingit  si  one  war-club  in  the  Emmons  Collection,  New 
York,  is  shown  in  Fig.  1  I9a.  It  is  possible  that  the  slave-killers,  shown 
in  Plate  xlvi,  were  also  carried  as  weapons,  although  no  war-clubs  of 
this  type  are  now  found  in  this  region.  Plate  xxviii  illustrates  a 
variety  of  clubs  used  for  dift'erent  purposes.  Fig.  132  is  a  war-club 
pure  and  simple,  the  others  being  hunting  or  fishing  implements  an<l 
used  to  give  the  death-blow  to  seals,  sea-otters,  or  fish  after  their  cap- 
ture by  the  different  methods  explained  hereafter.  These  are  all  carved 
either  with  the  totemic  design  of  the  owner  or  a  representation  of  the 
animal  itself.    Kach  club  is  used  distinctly  for  the  purpose  of  dispatch- 


h:??,,!'.!!^ 


I 


THE   INDIANS   OF  THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


283 


ing  the  animal  for  which  It  was  made.  Figs.  128  and  129  are  sea-otter 
clubs ;  Figs.  130  and  131  are  seal  clubs.  The  halibut  and  other  tish 
clubs  are  similar  in  design.  A  t;>pe  not  here  illustrated  is  a  round 
wooden  knob  with  straight  handle. 

Daggers. — Dixon  (1787)  says  of  the 
Ilaida  and  Tlingit: 

Their  weapons  are  Bpearo  fized  to  a  pole  6 
or  B  feet  long,  and  a  kind  of  abort  dagger, 
which  is  worn  in  a  leather  case,  and  tied 
round  the  body;  to  this  dagger  a  leather 
thr.  ^  is  fastened,  at  the  end  of  which  is  a  hole 
for  the  middle  fluger ;  the  leather  is  afterwards 
twisted  round  the  wrist  in  order  to  fix  the 
dagger  firm  in  the  hand,  so  that  the  warrior 
loses  his  weapon  only  with  his  life.* 

Tlie  handle  is  generally  nearer  one 
end  than  the  other,  giving  a  long  blade 
and  a  short  one.    The  leather  sheath 
is  usually  strapped  to  the  waist  or 
hung  about  the  neck,  concealed  be- 
neath the  blanket.  The  handle  is  small 
in  diameter,  «vrapped  with  leather,  and 
secured  by  a  thong  to  the  wrist  when 
carried  in  the  hand.    The  blades  are 
flat  and  thicker  down  the  middle  than 
towards  the  edges,  being  generally 
grooved  on  each  sid^^  of  the  center 
ridge.    All  varieties  of     tterns,  how- 
ever, are  found,  the  diiferent  types 
being  well  represented  in  Plate  xxv, 
of  which  Fig.  108  represents  a  primi- 
tive dagger  of  copper  inlaid  with  hali- 
otis  shell,  while  Fig.  107  is  the  same 
type,  of  steel,  with  copper  mountings. 
Fig.  107 d  is  a  sheath  of  buckskin  for 
the  short  blade  of  the  dagger,  and  lOle 
the  same  for  the  long  blade,  the  latter 
having,  as  s'  own,  a  strap  to  go  about  the  neck.    The  dagger  ^liown  in 
Fig.  107  is  from  the  Copper  River  Indians,  but  is  clearly  a  Tlingit  type, 
having  uuJoubtedly  reached  that  region  in  the  course  of  trp'^.e.   Fig.  106 
shows  a  one-bladed  dagger  with  a  o»rvpd  handle.   Fig.  10»,  with  its  three 
details,  a,  b,  and  c,  shows  the  method  of  securing  the  handle  to  the  blade. 
Fig.  105  is  a  Tlingit:  chiefs  dagger.    The  edgesof  ^11  of  them  are  rather 
dull  and  the  points  somewhat  blunt,  but  the  execution  which  these 
deadly  weapons  do  is  in  the  force  with  which  they  are  driven  into  an 


'  :        I'i 


Tig.  122a. 
Stone  War-Club. 

(Tlinflit.    KmniDtM  Collection.) 


*  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  244. 


■mm 


vi 


m 


I 


'ii5- 


;!    !■■ 


Mi 


284 


HEPOBT   OF  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


adversary.  The  two  .primitive  types  of  copper  daggers  seen  by  Dixon 
(1787)  in  this  region  are  reproduced  from  sketches  in  bis  Voyage,  p.  188, 
in  Plate  xxvn,  Figs.  116  and  117.    Amongst  the  Aleut  and  Tinn^  to 


V':' 


fcxi 


FiK.  1086. 
Stonb  Daoobr. 

(TlingiU    KmntoiM  Collection.) 


Fig.  108c. 
Stonb-bladbd  Daooer. 

(Tlitifit.     Eminona  Collei'tion. ) 


the  north  the  type  of  dagger  is  that  shown  in  Fig.  118,  described  also 
by  Portlock  (1787)*.    This  type  is  fonnd  iu  the  Ynkon  region  and  well 

*  Portlock,  Voyage,  p.  SWl. 


■niT'-firf, 


es .  V'V  . 


>ixon 
.188, 
ii6  to 


I 


ed  also 
id  well 


;  a 


l;»       I 


I     '    ^! 


/ 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXV. 


fOjd. 


/a? 


/oa 


Fig. 


Copper  and  Steel  Daggers  with  Sheaths  of  Buckskin  and  Moose  Hide. 

104.  DAaoER.  Steel  blade;  cedar-wood  handle,  allowing  method  of  attach- 
ment. Cat.  No.  74264,  U.  S.  N.  M.  TUngit  Indians.  Sitka,  Aht-^ka. 
Collected  by  Jolm  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  105.  Dagger.  Steel  blade;  carved  wooden  handle,  representing  an  Indian 
chief  sitting.  (Sheath  of  moose  hide  to  the  left.)  Cat.  No.  74262.  U. 
S.  N.  M.     Tlingit  Indians,  Sitka,  \laska.     Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  106.  Dagger.  Steel  blade;  carved  cedar-wood  handle.  Cat.  No.  7646.3.  U.  S. 
N.  M.    Tlingit  Indians,  Sitka,  Alaska.     Collected  by  James  C{.  Swan. 

Fig.  107.  DouBLE-BLADED  DAGGER.  With  Copper  mountings;  Tlingit  type.  Prob- 
al)ly  ac(iuired  by  Copjier  River  Indians  through  trade.  Fig.  107*"  i.s 
buckskin  sheath  with  neck-strap.  Fig.  107f/  is  the  sheath  for  the  short 
blade.  Cat.  No.  88702,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Atna  or  Cop|X'r  River  Indians 
(Athapaskan  stock),  Alaska.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  108.  Dagger.  Of  copi)er;  double-headed;  primitive  tyjie;  elalwrately  cha-sed 
and  inlaid  with  abalone  shell.  Cat.  No.  89020.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  In- 
dians, Skidegate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  British  Columbia.  Col- 
lected by  James  G.  Swan. 


.' 


fhasefl 
a  ilia  In- 
Col- 


Rsport  of  National  Muieum,  188S.— Niblack. 


PLATE  XXV. 


Copper  and  Steel  Daggers  with  Sheaths  of  Buckskin  and  Moose  Hide. 


)•  ' 


i^  \  ;S 


■■, 

-    * 

1 

mi^ 

-  '{  r. 

:  l' 

; 

■ 

; 


! 


U 


Ik  4 
if 


Iff 


U        .,«! 


'"'■'! 


>» 


I 


THK   INDIANS   OF  THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


285 


back  into  the  interior.  Fi];.  116  is  a  slight  modification  in  the  type  of 
117,  in  the  direction  of  118.  The  first  daggers  thatr/ere  made  of  stoel, 
after  the  advent  of  the  whites,  were  converted  by  the  natives  from 
large  flat  files,  which  they  also 
made  into  adze  blades.  The  skill- 
fnl  manner  in  which  the  Indians 
ground  down  the  files  into  beauti- 
fully fluted  daggers  challenged 
the  admiration  of  the  traders, 
who  found  the  work  as  skillfully 
done  as  that  by  European  metal- 
workers. The  primitive  dagger 
was  of  stone  or  bone.  Those  of 
bone  were  of  the  shai>e  shown  in 
Fig.  107,  Plate  xxv,  with  a  sharp 
ridge  running  down  the  middle. 
Fig.  1086  represents  a  Tlingit 
stone  dagger  from  the  Emmons 
Collection  Fig.  I08c  from  the 
same  source,  has  a  blade  of  stone 
and  handle  of  wood  covered  in 
totemic  design.  Another  dagger 
of  jadeite  or  nephrite,  not  here 
represented,  is  a  long  prism  of 
square  cross-section  pointed  at 
each  end,  about  three-fourths 
inch  on  a  side,  with  the  handle 
about  one-third  of  the  distance 
from  one  end.  Fig.  1 08d  is  a  steel 
dagger,  also  from  this  collection, 
of  native  workmanship.  The 
edges  are  very  sharp,  and  it  is 
an  exceedingly  dangerous  weap- 
on. The  handle  is  covered  with 
plate  copper,  as  shown.  Fig. 
lOSe  is  a  Tlingit  steel  dagger  also 
from  the  Emmons  Collection. 
The  handle  is  wrapped  with  buck- 
skin strips,  and  outside  of  all  is 
wound  a  cord  of  plaited  human 
hair.  Fig.  lOSf  is  a  Tlingit  ivory 
guard  for  the  point  of  a  dag- 
ger to  protect  the  wearer  from 
danger  of  accidental  stabbing, 
guard  for  fastening  over  the  sharp  edged  point  of  a  dagger.    Both  of 


ii' 


I'  1 


Fig.  108«I. 

Fig.  108e. 

Stbel  Dagobr. 

Steel  Daooeb. 

limit.    Emmona  Collae- 
tion. ) 

(Tlinfit.     eminoDa  Collet 
tion.  ^ 

Fig.  180g  is  an  ivory  dagger  edge 


i_,  IL-HWIBW 


^i    :! 


1 . 
j 

i 

!   I 

1 

:         1 

i 

1 

1 

1   m! 

lii 

b     f 

1  f       .'1 

M 


!      il 


286 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


these  specimens  are  from  the  Emuious  GoUeotioo. 
bladed  dagger  with  goat-horn  handle. 


Fig.  108A  is  a  steel. 


Fig.  108/. 

IVOBT  GUAUU  FOR  DAOOBK 
POIRT. 

{TliDfits.     KrnnKin*  Cotlec-tiun. ) 


Vlg.  lOHy. 
IVOUY  OUAKI)   roK 

Daciobk. 

(Tliniil.     KiniiMiitt  (-'dllec- 
lion. ) 


Botes  and  arrows. — In  the 
course  of  trade 
many  of  the  Eski- 
mo types  of  bows 
and  arrows  have 
found  their  way 
south  amongst  the 
Indians,  particu- 
larly amongst  the 
Yakutat  and  other 
northern  Tlingit. 
With  the  Eskimo 
and  Aleut  the  bow 
and  arrow  i 
equally  with  the 
harpoon,  a  weapon  of  the  greatest  importance,  and  a  high 
type  of  each  has  been  develoi>ed.  The  backing  of  sinew 
on  the  bow  is  occasionally  found  amongst  the  Tlingit,  but 
not  so  skillfully  applied  as  in  the  north  (see  Smithsonian 
Report,  1884,  "A  Study  of  the  Eskimo  Bows  in  the  U.  S. 
National  Museum,"  by  Mr.  John  Murdoch).  Amongst  the 
Indians  of  the  northwest  coast  the  bow  and  arrow  is  and 
always  has  been  only  an  auxiliary  hunting  implement, 
although  a  very  important  one,  in  the  capture  of  sea-otter. 
To-day  the  bow  and  arrow  survives  only  as  a  means  of 
despatching  wouuded  game  to  save  powder  and  ball.  The 
two  types  of  coast  Indian  bows,  the  broad  and  narrow, 
are  shown  in  I*late  xxvi.  The  narrow  type  (Figs.  109, 110, 
and  116)  is  principally  confined  to  the  Tlingit,  whereas  the 
broader  one  (Figs.  Ill,  112,  and  114)  is  found  amongst  not 
only  the  Tlingit,  but  the  Haida  and  Tlingit  as  well.  In 
Fig.  112  the  peculiar  groove  down  the  inside  of  the  bow 
is  shown.  The  device  in  Fig.  lib  to  protect  the  thumb 
from  the  snap  of  the  bow-string  consists  of  a  wooden 
bridge  lashed  to  tlie  inner  side  of  the  bow  at  the  middle. 
This  is  a  willow  bow  of  the  type  found  in  the  interior 
amongst  the  Tinue,  and  either  copied  from  their  type  or  obtained  by 
trade  from  them.  Cedar  and  yew  are  the  principal  woods  used  by 
the  coast  Indians  for  bows,  the  strings  being  of  hide  or  sinew.  Few 
bows  are  now  seen  amongst  these  Indians  except  as  toys  for  the  chil- 
dren. 

Arrow*.— Before  the  introduction  of  iron,  arrow-heads  were  of  bone, 
flint,  shell,  or  copper.  The  copper  and  later  iron  heads  were  of  the 
shape  shown  in  Fig.  133w  or  134a,  Plate  xxix,  fitting  into  an  ivory  or 


M 


// 


Fig.  lOM. 

Stkbl-iilaubd 
Daqokk. 

(Tlintit.     Ginmoni 
Cnllei'lion. ) 


'I  <  II 


I 


tl 


w 


I    "! 


|!i. 


',  !'•  I  f 


1 1 


1  II'   '  :    i 


if! 


I   i!l 


I  m 


'■^i 


i:  ^ 


f 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXVI. 


Ifl 


/»i»  //O  M  //«7  /^    •/^^  //S 


Tlinqit  AND  Haida  Bows  AND  Tlingit  War-cpear. 

Fig.  109.  Bow.     Tliiigit  tj-pe;  narrow,     ("at.  No.  "AV^\,  U.  S.  N.  M.     TUnuit  In- 

(lianss.  Alawka.     Collet-ted  by  John  J.  JfrLfuii. 
Fig.  110.  Bow.     Narrow   type.     Cat.  No.   1(1400.  U.  S.    N.   31.     Yi  kutat   luiliuna 

(Tlingit).  Alaska.    CoUerted  by  Williani  H,  Uall. 
Fi),'.  111.  Bow.     Creneral  coast-tyiM^.     Cat.  No.  »i:r)"»l.  U.  S.  X.  M.    Tlin.<it  Indian'i, 

Sitka.  Alaska.     Co!k\ted  by  Jolin  J.  McLfun. 
Fifj.  113.  Bow.     Gt'neral   broad  coa9t-tyi)e:  under  side  showing  the  ki'<»^»v»'.     Cat. 

No.  7;r»4('<.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Kaigani  Tn<?ians  (TIaida).  Qiucn   Charlotte 

I.sland.s.  British  (~\)liinibia.     l''olk'<'ted  by  J.  Looiuis  (Jould. 
Fig.  113.  W.vu  Spe.\.k.     Crpneral  type  after  intnxluction  of  iron      ilandlc  tarved 

with  (vwner's  totoni.     Bla>le  of  steel  (bayonet  sliai)e).     Cat.  No.  r.")119. 

U.  S,   N.  M.     Tlingit  Indians,  Hitka.   .Ma.ska.     Collected  by  John  J. 

MeLean. 
Y\^.  114.   Bito.ki)  Bow.     (General  coast  tyiv.     Coni))are  111.  11'J.     Cat,  No.  HUBT,'. 

U.  S.  N.  M,     Masset(Haida),  l^neea  CharN.tte  Islands,  British  Ciilninbia. 

Collected  by  James  (1.  Swan, 
Fig.  11.-).  Wil.Low  Bow.     With  device  for  receiving  the  blow  of  the  .string.     Cat. 

No.  7.')4ri.").  V.  H.  N.  M.     Tinne  Inilians.  interior  of  Alaska.     Collected 

liv  .Iohi>  J,  .^h'lyeall  in  Sitka. 


m 


'■1 


HH813.. 
ninltiii. 


Report  of  National  Mussum,  1888.— Niblack. 


PLATE  XXVI. 


.  <    I 


iii 


I  i: 


M  i; 


Tlingit  and  Haida  Bows  and  Tlinqit  War-spear. 


ft  !■ 


11 


i  :i^ 


;j 

IK  ' 

1  i 

: ! 

*     ' 

'II  ^ 
liiir 


mi 


i  11 


I 


H 


. 


• 


1     I 


■ 


Repoi 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXVII. 


!3 


3     f. 


I    \\ 


<       ;  ■ 
S       1 


ii 


/5/ 


rj^  /aJ  '«<-t  >a^  /«tf  /^/^^/6 


Weapons  of  War  and  of  the  Chase. 

Figs.  116  and  117.  Copper  Daggers.    From  Dixon's  Voyage,  page  188. 

Fig.  118.  Steel  Dagcjer.  Cat.  No.  2025,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Arctic  coast  and  Yukon 
River.     Collected  by  B.  R.  Ross. 

Fig.  119.  Steel  ARRdw-HEAO.  Foreshaft  of  bone.  Cat.  No.  74960,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Tlingit,  Alaska.     Collected  by  Jolin  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  120.  Steel  Arrow-head.  B<me  foreshaft.  Cat.  No.  74958.  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Tlingit,  Alaska.     Collected  by  .John  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  121.  Steel  Arrow-head  and  Foreshaft.  Cat.  No.  74966.  Tlingit,  Alaska. 
Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  122.  Stone  War  Club.     Tsimshian,  Fort  Simpson,  Alaska.     From  i)hotograph. 

Fig.  123.  Arrow.  Shaft  of  cedar;  steel  head  and  foreshaft  in  one  piece.  Cat.  No. 
78457,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Kaigani.  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska.  Col- 
lected by  J.  Loomis  Gould. 

Fig.  124.  Arrow.  Shaft  of  cedar;  bone  .•ien<i  r.nd  wooden  foreshaft.  Feathers  at- 
tached to  the  sliuft  at  their  extremities.  Cat.  No.  20694,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Biliiula  Indians.  British  Columbia.     Collecte(i  hy  J,imes  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  l«v"..  Arrow.  Head  of  sliell;  ti-athering  glued  to  the  shaft.  Cat.  No.  20694, 
U.  S.  N.  M.  Bilqula  Indians,  British  Columbia.  Collected  by  James 
G.  Swan. 

Fig.  126.  Blunt  Arrow.  Of  cetlar;  for  practice  and  diHi)atching  game.  Cat.  No. 
63551,  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tlingit.  Sitka.     Collected  by  Joim  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  127  (a  and  b).  Throwincj-stick.  Of  wood;  carved  in  totemic  designs  and  in- 
laid with  haliotis  slu>ll.  Cat.  No.  7899,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tlingit,  Sitka. 
Collected  by  Dr.  T.  T.  Minor,  U.  S.  Army.  The  Tlingit  are  not  known  to 
have  used  tlie  throwing-stick.  wlule  it  txicunn  throughout  the  entire 
Eskimo  area.  (See  Hmitlisonian  Report,  1884,  Part  II,  legend  to  Plate 
XVII.) 


i 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888,— Niblack. 


Plate  XXVII. 


.r 


Weapons  of  War  and  of  the  Chase. 


ii=  \i 


Ml 


!    ii 


<n 


I 


THE  INDIANS   OF   THE  NORTHWEST  COAST. 


287 


bene  fore-shaft,  the  shaft  being  of  cedar.  In  some  varieties  the  barbs 
are  on  one  side  only.  Fig.  124,  Plate  xxvii,  represents  a  bone-headed 
arrow.  Figs.  135  and  136,  Plate  xxix,  are  bone  spear-heads,  but  the 
same  shape  of  smaller  size  are  used  for  arrows.  These  are  set  into  a 
boue  or  ivory  fore  shaft  similar  to  the  Eskimo  arrows.  Fig.  125  rep- 
resents an  arrow  with  a  head  made  of  shell.  The  fore-shafts  are  of  light 
cedar  wood  let  into  the  larger  shafts.  In  the  Emmons  Collection  is  a 
black  flint  arrow-head  represented  as  coming  from  this  region.  The 
style  of  blunt-headed  arrow  is  shown  in  Fig.  126.  These  are  generally 
used  for  despatching  wounded  game.  Fig.  126rt  shows  one  variety  of 
bone  arrow-head  of  this  blunt  pattern.    The  teuon  at  the  butt  fits  ^nto 


Fig.  126a. 
BONB  Abkow-iiead. 

(Tlingit    Kmnions  Collectiuii. ) 


Fig.  1266. 
liOKK  AKHUW-HXAD. 

Cl'lingil  IndiaiiH.    Emmonii  Collection.) 


Fig.  126c. 
Bone  Arkow-heau. 

(Tliniit  Indians.    Einntnnii  Collection.) 


a  socket  either  in  the  boue  fore-shaft  or  in  the  cedar  shaft  itself. 
Fig.  1266  shows  another  kind,  in  which  the  shaft  fits  into  ttie  head 
itself,  where  it  is  secured  by  means  of  a  tight  lashing  of  twisted  bark, 
cord,  or  sinew.  Fig.  126c  shows  a  third  variety,  in  which  a  thiu  tongue 
or  projection  on  the  side  of  the  bone  arrow-head  lets  into  a  groove  on 
the  side  of  the  shaft.  Through  holes  pierced  in  this  tongue  and  through 
the  head  of  the  arrow-shaft  wires  are  run  to  attach  the  head  to  the 
siiaft.  The  gene*^:;!  types  of  iron  arrow-heads  are  shown  in  Figs.  119, 
120,  121,  and  123,  Plate  xxvii,  and  133a,  134a,  and  138,  Plate  xxix. 
The  fore-shalis  of  119  and  120  are  of  bone.  Arrows  with  bone  fore- 
sliafts,  or  boue  or  ivory  sockets  on  the  head  of  the  arrow-shafts,  and 
with  detachable  heads  similar  to  those  used  by  the  Eskimo,  are  occa- 
sionally found  amongst  the  Tlingit.  The  arrows  of  the  southern  Indians 
are  in  general  superior  to  those  of  the  northern,  and  of  the  interior  In- 
dians to  those  on  the  coast. 

irar  «j)car«.--The  primitive  form  was  a  simple  wooden  pole  sharpened 
and  hardened  in  the  fire,  or  pointed  with  copper  and  later  with  iron.* 


Bodega  y  Qnadra,  ((iiotod  iu  Hauoruft,  Native  Races,  Vol.  i,  p.  101. 


i-l 


!,■■■' 


288 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


ii'f 


Not  many  stone  spear  heads  are  found  in  this  region.  There  is  one 
in  the  Emmons  OoUection  in  New  Yorlc,  bnt  how  it  was  attached  to  the 
spear  shaft  does  not  appear.  Marchand  (1793)  describes  the  war  sp^ar 
as  consisting  of  two  parts,  a  wooden  shaft  and  an  iron  head,  shaped  like 
a  Swiss  halberd.*  Plate  xvii,  Fig.  64,  shows  a  wooden  ceremonial 
spear,  doubtless  an  imitation  of  an  ancient  form  of  copper  or  stone- 
headed  spear.  Fig.  113,  Plate  XXYI,  is  a  Sitka  war  spear  with  carved 
handle  or  shaft  and  steel  bayonet  pointed  head.  In  general  the  war 
spears  have  shafts  from  10  to  14  feet  long,  whereas  the  hunting  spears 
are  nmch  shorter. 

Fur-seal  spear. — ^This  in  general  consists  of  a  long,  ligut  cedar  shaft  and 
a  detachable  head.  The  shaft  is  of  the  primitive  type  with  a  socket  in  the 
upper  end  to  receive  the  butt  end  of  the  detachable  head.  This  latter 
was  formerly  made  of  bone  but  later  and  at  present  of  iron  or  steeL 
(Plate  XXIX,  Figs.  133a,  134a,  135  and  136.)  The  steel  ones  are  generally 
made  by  the  Haida  themselves  from  old  flat  flies  which  they  purchase 
from  the  traders.  The  end  is  sharply  pointed,  as  shown  in  the  flgure, 
while  the  edges  and  back  are  wrought  into  sharp  barbs  to  hold  in  the 
flesh.  A  loop  of  wire,  or  a  shackle  near  the  butt  end,  serves  for  the 
attachment  of  one  end  of  a  strong  cord  of  plaited  sinew,  sea-weed,  or 
vegetable  fibre,  the  other  end  being  secrred  to  a  float  or  bladder.  This 
spear  is  nothing  more  nor  less  than  a  harpoon.  The  seal  being  struck, 
the  head  detaches  itself  and  the  animal  is  thus  secured  to  one  end  of  a 
line.  When  not  in  use,  the  bead  is  carried  in  a  sheath  made  of  two 
pieces  of  cedar  wood  in  the  shape  of  a  fish's  tail,  securely  lashed  together 
with  bark  or  spruce  root  lashings.  (Figs.  1336  and  1346.)  When 
about  to  be  used,  the  sheath  is  removed  and  the  detachable  head  fixed 
in  the  socket  of  the  light  cedar  shaft.  Figs.  135  and  136  represent  de- 
tachable spear  heads  of  bone,  with  barbed  edges.  The  cross  sections 
c  and  d  show  that  one  is  lenticular  in  shape  and  the  other  triangular. 
This  type  of  spear  head  is  not  unlike  that  of  the  Eskimo  and  Aleut  and 
is  of  very  primitive  design.  Arrow-heads  of  this  shape  and  description 
are  common  amongst  the  Eskimo  but  are  rare  in  the  coast  Indian  region. 
The  furrseal  spears  here  described  are  virtually  harpoons. 

Salmon  spears. — Primitive  types  of  salmon  spear  heads  are  shown  in 
Figs.  137  and  138,  Plate  xxix.  The  shafts  are  now,  as  always,  of  light 
cedar  wood,  the  receut  changes  in  the  character  of  the  spears  being  due 
to  the  substitution  of  large  steel  fish  hooks  for  spear  heads.  These 
hooks,  purchased  from  the  traders,  are  lashed  to  the  spear  shaft  near 
the  end,  as  shown  in  Fig.  149,  Plate  xxx,  and  the  old-fashioned  spear 
head  done  away  with  altogether.  This  is  a  very  eflfective  spear,  and  in 
the  Indian's  bands  seldom  fails  to  bring  up  its  victim.  Fig.  137«  is  a 
bone  salmon  spear  head  from  the  Emmons  collection.  Fig  149a  is  a 
Tlingit  salmon  gig  of  deer  antler  for  snagging  salmon,  also  from  the 

*  Marchaud,  Voyage,  totn.  ii,  p.  ti8,  also  quoted  by  Bancroft. 


M  !  .  I'i 


'11 


!l  'a 


'', 


'it 


!! 


;|i  > 


M 


Repo 


1        t 


:i  ii' 


] 


i    I 

:  III 

I      1    ■■  ' 
i 

:■    i 

Weapons  of  War  and  of  the  Chase-Clubs. 

Fig.  128.  Club.  For  killing  sea-mtev.  Carved  to  represent  the  animal.  Cat.  No. 
88828,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Masset,  Queen  Cliarlotte  Islands, 
British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  (».  Swan. 

Fig.  129.  Club.  For  killing  sea-otter.  Cat.  No.  Htf82.-),  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  In- 
dians, Masset,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  130.  Club.  For  killing  seals.  Carved  sea-lion.  Cat.  No.  H8824.  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  131.  Club.  For  killing  seals.  Carve<l  seal.  (^at.  No.  88930,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians.  Queen  Charlotte  Ishmds.  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  .James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  138.  Wak  Club.  Carved  to  represent  the  raven.  The  three  figures  («.  /).  and 
c)  are  frogs.  Tsimshian  Indians.  Fort  Simpson,  British  Columbia.  Col- 
lected by  James  G.  Swan. 


Ropor*  of  National  MuMurn,   1888  -  Niblack, 


Plate  XXVIII. 


and 
Col- 


i^ 


;  I 


I'll 


'  '^f !: 


Weapons  of  War  and  of  the  Chase— Clubs. 


ii 


I  :;,, 


u 


1^ 


m^i 


fm 


EXPLANATION    OF   PLATE   XXIX. 


Report 


ii  Jn 


ii 

'  '  V  ill 

K     ■11 

1(1          1' 

l{ ; 

li'    - ' 

i  ' 

1  !i       ' 

u  { 

1  i' 

1^ 


m 

III 

■INr 


/^j* 


/J9 


li 


Haida  and  Tlingit  Hunting  and  Fishing  Implements. 

Fi«c.  133  (a  and  ?»),  Hkal  Spkar-head.  Of  steel.  Head  detachable  trom  foresliaft 
and  secured  by  a  plaited  lanyard  of  sea-v\eed  made  fast  to  a  shackle  in 
tlie  butt.  The  case  b  is  rriade  of  two  pieces  of  cedar  lashed  together 
with  !sj)lit  spruce-root.  (,'at.  No.  88929,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Masset  Indians, 
Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia,  t'olleoted  by  James  G. 
Swan. 

Fig.  134  {<(  and  h).  Seal  Spear-head.  Barbs  on  the  back  as  well  as  on  the  sidos. 
Cat.  No.  88890,  TT  g.  jif.  m.  Masset  Indians.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands, 
British  Columbia.     Collected  by  Jauiet,  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  135.  Bone  Sp*"  ,u-Head.  Barbed  and  detachable.  Cross  section  shown  in  c. 
Cat.  No.  74962,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Thngit  Indians,  Sitka.  Alaska.  Collected 
by  John  J.  Mcl.#an. 

Fig.  136.  Bone  Spf.aimiead.  Cross  section  shown  in  d.  (Dat.  N(\  74903.  IT.  S.  K.  M. 
Tlingit  Indians.  Sitka.  Alaska.     Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  J  37.  Speak-head.  OC  steel;  fo';^8haftof  wood.  Steel  head  shown  in  <( .-  fore- 
shaft  ill  h.  The  point  d  fits  into  a  s(M'ket  in  the  f()x>ar-head  a.  The 
point  c  of  tlie  foreshaft  fits  into  a  socket  in  the  sjv'ar-head.  Cat.  No. 
HH8()3.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Masset  Indians,  Queen  Ch.-irlotte  Islands.  British 
Columbia.     Collected  by  J  nies  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  138.  Fish  Spe  \r-heaI).  Three  prongs  of  steel.  Cat.  No.  18933.  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Tlingit  Indians,  Sitkii    Alaska.     C'ollected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  139.  FiSH  Rake.  Teeth  of  sliari)ened  iron  nails.  For  taking  herring  during  a 
run.     From  a  sketch  by  the  author. 

Fig.  140.  Haubct  LiNF-rujAT.  Of  cedar  w(k>(I:  carved  to  represent  a  shag  or  duck. 
^  Cat.  No.  4' .237.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit  Indians.  Sitka.  Alaska.    Collected 

bv  Commander  L.  A.  Beardslee,  U.  S.  Navv. 


(hlrk. 
Ic.  ted 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


Plate  XXIX. 


Im 


I ; 


\'V'V'.Vv^V<v'v'v''.''.''ff'^ 


V 


ri 


it 


Haioa  and  Tlingit  Hunting  and  Fishing  Implements. 


ill. 


III. 
m 


THE   INDIANS   OF   THE    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


291 


the  barb  aud  just  under  it.  Fig.  158  is  also  a  primitive  type  of  book 
made  iu  two  pieces  and  of  the  same  character  as  those  just  described. 
A  second  primitive  variety  is  that  made  by  steaming  and  bending  a 
tough  limb  of  yew  or  other  wood  into  the  shape  shown  in  Fig.  153, 
which  is  a  Makah  hook  from  Cape  Flattery,  Washington  Territory 
(Wakashau  stock).  Their  hooks  are  by  far  the  neatest  on  the  coast, 
aud  are  traded  to  the  northern  Indians.  The  lashing  shown  across 
it  in  the  plate  is  for  securing  the  bait,  this  being  the  method  of  winding 
the  string  when  the  hook  is  not  in  use.  Fig.  I51i  is  a  Chilkat  and  157 
a  Haida  version  of  this  same  type  of  hook.  Fig.  152  is  an  iron  one 
modeled  also  on  this  design,  and  similar  iu  shape  to  Fig.  161. 

Another  kind  of  hook  difteriug  from  those  just  described  in  shape, 
principle,  and  freedom  from  fouling  the  bottom,  is  used  for  catching 
cod,  flounders,  etc.,  and  is  thus  described  by  Judge  J.  G.  Swan  in  a 
pamphlet  on  the  fisheries  of  the  north: 

They  are  made  of  the  kuots  of  hemlock  limbs  cut  ont  from  old  decayed  logs. 
These  are  split  iu  pieces  of  suitable  size  and  whittled  to  the  required  shape,  aud 
bent  by  being  steamed  into  the  form  which  in  the  skil  hook  resembles  the  longitu- 
dinal section  of  a  goose  egg.  The  lower  portion  of  these  hooks  are  curved  inward  to 
form  a  barb,  and  when  not  in  use  the  two  euds  of  the  hook  are  fastened  together  by 
a  piece  of  twine,  which  is  also  used  to  tie  on  the  bait.  When  the  hook  is  to  be  used 
the  two  parts  of  the  hook  are  separated  by  means  of  a  stick  or  peg,  which  the  lish 
knocks  out  when  he  takes  the  bait,  aud  the  two  ends  of  the  hook  close  together  aud 
bold  him  fast;  the  peg  floats  to  the  (surface  and  indicates  to  the  Indian  that  he  has 
caught  a  fish. 

The  sinker  is  another  ingenious  joutrivance;  it  is  a  large  stone,  weighing  from  I'i 
to  15  pounds,  and  a  smaller  one  to  serve  as  a  tripping  stone ;  tho  line  is  firmly  wouud 
around  these  stones  with  many  turns,  aud  a  bight  or  loop  tucked  under  one  of  the 
parts  in  the  same  manner  a  signal  officer  rolls  up  a  flag  in  a  bill  and  tucks  a  bight 
of  the  haliard  under  a  turn,  which,  when  pulled  out,  sets  the  flag  free;  so  when  the 
Indian  fisherman  thinks,  from  the  number  of  floating  pegs,  that  he  has  euou(i,u  'Ish, 
he  pulls  out  the  loop  of  his  line,  the  stones  become  loosened  and  fall  out,  and  he 
hauls  in  his  line  relieved  of  their  weight. 

The  Haidas  frequently  put  on  one  hundred  hooks  to  a  sini^ie  line,  which  acts  like 
a  trawl,  and  so  plentiful  are  the  black  cod  that  often  from  fifty  to  seventy-five  are 
hauled  in  at  one  time.  The  bait  used  seems  to  be  anything  han<ly,  as  the  akil  is  a 
greedy  feeder,  and  will  take  either  fresh  herring,  squid,  or  a  strip  of  the  white  skin 
from  a  halibut's  belly.  The  Indian,  however,  has  enemies  to  contend  with;  one  of 
the  most  formidable  is  the  ground  Hlmrk,  or  nurse  fish,  as  tho  sailors  call  them,  which 
will  eat  off  'he  bodies  of  a  whole  line  full  of  fish,  leaving  miiy  their  heads;  there  is 
a  small  fish  of  the  cottoid  or  sculpin  variety  (Blepsias  oirrlii)su»)—Xukaio,  kahmijo— 
(Haida)  which  will  steal  the  bait  and  sometimes  gets  caught.  Dogfish  also  are  at 
times  very  troublesomci.  Whenever  ibe  Indian  is  sure  of  the  presence  of  these  pests 
he  goes  to  another  place  tn  fish. 

This  type  of  hook  is  also  reproduced  in  iron.  A  sketch  is  given  in 
Plate  XXX,  Fig.  US  a  and  h.  The  former  shows  the  hook  baited  and 
pried  open  with  a  peg;  the  latter  shows  it  when  not  iu  use,  lashed  to 
preserve  the  spring  in  the  wood  or  iron.  Fig.  160,  Plato  xxxi,  shows 
a  peculiar  device  used  by  the  Haida  for  catching  red  Ilsli.  The  withe 
d  wood,  a,  if^      agb  Hud  elastic,  aud  secured  at  its  middle  point  to  the 


.u= 


1 1 


292 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


ilii 


f  . 


1    ! 


■'*'■     :§', 


line.  The  hooks  are  somewhat  on  the  pattern  of  those  just  described, 
but  no  pegs  are  used.  Fig.  141  represents  an  Inuian  trawl  line  for  the 
ocean  fisheries  of 'the  northwest  coast.  The  ground-line  is  made  of 
cedar  roots,  the  snoods  or  gaugings  of  whalebone  and  cedar,  and  the 
hooks  of  steamed  and  bent  cedar  wood,  with  barbs  of  iron.  Except  in 
the  use  of  an  iron  barb  the  whole  tievice  is  a  very  primitive  pattern. 

It  should  be  noted  here,  however,  that  the  use  of  whalebone  is  found 
extensively  amongst  the  southern  coast  Indians  (especially  of  Vancou- 
ver Islands),  and  the  Kenai,  Aleut,  and  Eskimo,  but  rarely  amongst 
the  Tlingit,  Uaida,  and  Tsimshian.  For  superstitious  leasons  the  whale 
has  never  been  bunted  in  this  last  named  locality,  and  the  eating  of 
whale's  blubber  has  been  prohibited  to  them  by  tradition  and  custom. 
Where  whalebone  is  found  in  use  amongst  them  it  has  reached  them 
in  the  way  of  trade  from  the  north  or  south. 

Fish-rake. — A  rake  consisting  of  a  long  thin  lath  with  sharp  spikes  of 
bone,  copper,  or  iron  on  one  edge,  like. a  comb,  as  shown  in  Fig.  139, 
Plate  XXIX,  is  used  in  herring  and  eulachon  fishing.  With  these  in- 
struments the  Indians  beat  the  surface  of  the  water,  during  the  "run" 
of  these  fish  in  enormous  shoals,  seldom  failing  to  bring  up  two  or  three 
at  a  time,  transfixed  on  the  sharp  teeth. 

Fish-baskets. — These  differ  little  from  the  open  mesh  type  of  basket 
hereafter  described.  They  are  used  for  dipping  out  fish  during  the 
*'  runs"  and  in  this  sense  are  simply  dip-nets. 

Fishing-lines. — Thest*  are  either  made  from  the  stems  of  the  giant 
kelp,  which  grows  so  abundantly  on  tlie  coast,  or  from  vegetable  fiber, 
such  as  l»ark,  sprnce,  and  cedar  root.'^,  etc.  Sinew  and  whalebone  are 
little  used  amongs^i  the  northern  coAvM  Indians.  The  vegetable  fiber  is 
neatlj  twisted  into  two  or  three  strand  cord,  as  shown  in  Fig.  144,  Plate 
XXX,  although  sometimes  plaitoil  with  threads  of  wild  hemp  or  shredded 
sea-weed.  The  stems  of  tht»  giant  kelp  are  cured  in  the  smoke  or  sun 
and  simply  knott<^l  together,  the  i»s}i.il  knot  being  that  shown  in  detail 
in  Fig  143.  Plate  xxx.  This  kelT»  i;rrows  in  from  3  to  30  fathoms,  or 
deei)er.  A:  the  root  it  is  »te«*4  ©uoiourth  inch  in  diameter,  and 
solid,  expikUilinjj  up'w;irds  tkad  kewmiing  hollow  about  half  way  up. 
Its  upper  end  is  snrTno»i;it«Hl  b>  r  largc  hollow  bull\  from  whioh  lioats 
long,  streamer-like,  or  Ue-volate  leaves.  These  are  great  ro<*k  or  shoal 
indicators,  and  are  invaauable  •  notices  to  raar'iwrs."  .Tadge  Swan  says : 
"  The  Indians  cut  th«we  stems  close  to  the  bottom  ^  i  situplc  instru- 
ment formed  of  a  V  shaped  branch,  a«;ross  the  smaller  portion  of  w**ich 
;i  knife  blade  is  securcvl ;  this  is  lowered  over  m  k*^*  pliuit  in  3©  oi  30 
iathoms,  ami  the  stem  easily  out  off  by  a  «khld«i  pull  «  che  line  at- 
tached to  t be  cutter.''  The  solid  st<>n>s  art*  use*!  *W  tehing  lines  and 
the  bulbs  for  oil  bottle.s,  both  bein^.;  <Hjred  by  s*.^aking  in  ft*«<l»  water 
and  drying  in  the  8nii>ke  or  sun.  The  smoke-drie*i  lices  ar*'  Mack,  and 
the  sun-dried  of  a  li 7b  t  yellow  or  neutrnl  color.  Tt  should  be  not«>*l 
here  that  the  Itakt  dt  and  other  Tiiu^Eit  of  the  oxtreiao  Nortii  have 


i, 


i 


K 


if 


Re 


■i 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXXII, 


ff 


J3    9.   g — &^ 


/63 


'  V--<r-<rv~v-<5^S 


/«  'i?  use 


\a    ! 


!  -i  i 


1 1  i'l 


i: 


Drag  and  Dip  Nets;  Paddles;  Details  of  Netting  and  Basket  Weaving. 

Fig.  163.  Dra((-nkt  or  Seine.  Woven  from  twisted  thread  of  cedar-bark  fiber, 
with  ropiiiK  of  same  material.  Tlie  details  of  the  knots  are  sliown  in 
Fig.  1()2(/.  Tlif  wooden  float  d  is  on  tlie  end  of  the  drag-line.  Tlie 
wooden  floats  on  tlie  head  of  the  net  are  flat  pieces  of  wtx)d  spaced 
about  8  feet  apart.  Tlie  sinkers  at  the  foot  are  black  pebbles  or  stones 
lashed  in  a  circular  wooden  hoop  and  spaced  from  8  to  10  inches  apart. 
Lengtli  of  net,  r^1  feet:  depth.  64  inches.  Cat.  No. 89303,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians,  Qiiecm  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  James  (\.  Swan. 

Fig.  163.  Dip-net.  Triangular  in  sliape.  with  frame  of  forked  branches  of  tree 
with  two  cross  i)ieces.  Tlie  details  of  the  netting  are  shown  in  P'ig. 
Ifl8f>.  Cat.  No.  89309,  U.  S.  N.  M.  ITaida  Indians.  Queen  Cliarlotte 
Islands,  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  104.  Dip-net.  Of  ceilar-bark  (ilier:  oval  frame.  Used  to  catcli  echini.  Queen 
Ch.arlotte  Islands,  British  Cohimbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  165  (rt.  ?}.  and  c).  Paddles  of  the  Ilaiila  and  Tlin^it;  ])ainted  in  toteniic  de- 
sign. Fig.  10.")/(  represents  the  type  of  steering-paddle,  while  a  and  C 
are  the  ordinary  type. 

Fig,  166.  Paddle.     General  typ(>  of  Puget  Sound  and  South  Coast  Indian  ])a(ldle. 

Fig.  167.  Paddle.  New  Zealand.  Painted  in  a  design  similar  to  the  totemic  orna- 
meiitation  of  this  region. 

Fig.  168.  B.VSKET  Weavino.  (From  Plate  XIV,  Fig.  3,")?).  Smithsonian  Report.  1884. 
Aboriginal  basket-making.  Prof.  O.  T.  Mason).  Makah  Indians, 
Neah  Bay,  Wa.shingtoii.     Collected  by  James  (i.  Swan. 


ii' 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack, 


Plate  XXXII. 


Drag  and  Dip  Nets;  Paddles;  Details  of  Netting  and  Basket  Weaving. 


it 


1^ 


•  ftl 


THE    INDIANS   OF   THK    XORTHWEaT    COAST. 


293 


been  mach  inflaeuced  by  the  Keuai  and  Aleut,  who  une  sinew,  blad- 
ders, and  intestines  of  animals,  in  the  manufacture  of  their  llshing  im- 
plements.   Dixon  (1787)  speaking  of  the  Yakutat  halibut  Ashing  says: 

They  bait  their  hooks  with  a  kind  of  fish  •  •  •  or  squid,  •  »  »  an^ 
having  sunk  it  to  the  bottom  they  fix  a  bladder  to  the  end  of  the  line  as  a  buoy,  and 
should  that  not  watch  sufficiently  they  add  another.  Their  lines  are  very  strong,  be- 
ing made  of  intestines  of  animals.  One  man  is  sutli  tuut  to  look  after  five  or.six  of 
these  buoys;  when  he  perceives  a  fish  bite  be  is  in  no  great  hurry  to  haul  up  his  liue, 
but  gives  him  time  to  be  well  hooked,  and  when  he  has  hauled  the  Hsh  up  to  the  sur- 
face of  the  water  he  knocks  him  on  the  heatl  with  a  shorr  club  provided  for  that  pur- 
pose, and  afterwards  stows  his  prize  away  at  his  leisure.  This  is  done  to  prevent 
the  halibut  (which  sometimes  are  very  large)  from  damaging  or  perhaps  upsetting 
his  canoe  in  their  dying  struggles.  Thus  were  we  fairly  beat  at  our  own  weapons, 
and  the  natives  constantly  bringing  us  plenty  of  fish  our  boat  was  never  sent  on  this 
business  afterwards.t 

Amongst  the  Tlingit  these  floats  are  generally  dnck-shaped  and 
carved  from  wood,  although  bladders  are  also  used  amongst  them  as 
mentioned  by  Langsdorf  (1805),  who  says :  "  To  every  line  is  fastened 
a  small  bladder,  which  floats  upon  the  surface  of  the  water,  so  that  one 
person  can  attend  fourteen  or  fifteen  lines."  t 

Floats. — ^The  modern  type  of  fishing-float  is  of  wood,  carved  to  repre- 
sent an  aquatic  bird  of  some  sort,  and  these  floats  are  of  two  kinds, 
ander-water  and  surface.  The  surface  floats  have  been  spoken  of 
above,  and  one  is  represented  in  Fig.  140,  Plate  xxix.  The  under- 
water ones  are  to  float  the  halibut  hooks  just  clear  of  the  bottom,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  161&,  Plate  xxx,  as  it  is  here  that  the  halibut  feeds. 
The  stone  sinker,  a,  is  detachable  from  the  line,  and  is  used  to  keep 
the  hook  and  float  both  near  the  bottom.  This  style  of  float  is  also 
illustrated  in  Fig.  159,  Plate  xxxi. 

Fishing-clubs. — These  have  been  spoken  of  at  the  beginning  of  this 
chapter  and  illustrated  in  Plate  xvin.  A  peculiarly  carved  club  is 
used  for  each  different  kind  of  animal,  superstitious  reasons  being  given 
for  such  variety. 

Dragnets. — ^Nets  are  made  from  cedar  bark,  wild  hemp,  or  wild 
nettle  fiber,  spun  into  twine,  and  now  woven  with  a  shuttle  similar  to 
that  used  by  fishermen  on  our  own  coast.  Some  of  these  are  small,  and 
are  secured  to  poles  and  dragged  between  two  canoes ;  others  are  long 
and  are  similiar  to  our  seines.  Fig.  162,  Plate  xxxir,  represents  a  Haida 
drag-net  of  this  last  kind.  The  roping  is  of  cedar  bark;  the  netting, 
of  hemp  twine;  d  is  a  wooden  float  on  the  end  of  the  drag-line ;  the 
floats  along  the  head  are  thin  flat  blocks  of  cedar  wooil,  spaced  about 
3  feet  apart ;  the  sinkers  at  the  foot  are  black  pebbles  or  stones  lashed 
in  a  circular  hoop  and  spaced  about  8  to  10  inches  apart.  Details  of 
the  netting  are  shown  in  Fig.  lG2a.  The  net  from  which  this  illustration 
was  drawn  is  52  feet  long  and  64  inches  deep,  from  Masset,  Queen 
Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.     What  were  the  styles  and  by 


WM 


*  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  174. 


t  Langsdorf,  Voyages,  pt.  ii,  p.  134. 


1  i 


M 

M 


294 


REPORT    OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888, 


wlmt  roeariH  nets  were  woven  before  the  advent  of  the  whites,  the 
writer  was  unable  to  learn. 

Dip  nets. — Two  varieties  of  these  are  shown  in  Plate  xxxii,  Figs. 
103  and  164,  the  frame  of  the  one  being  oval  and  the  other  triangular. 
Details  of  the  netting  are  shown  in  b  and  c.  Fig.  163  is  the  kind  used 
by  the  Indians  for  scooping  up  echini  or  sea-urchins  at  low  tide,  while 
Fig.  164  is  the  kind  used  for  dipping  out  salmon  caught  in  the  river- 
traps,  and  for  herring,  eulachon,  etc ,  during  the  "runs." 

Weirs. — Across  the  streams  where  salmon  run  weirs  are  usually 
built  for  trapping  them.  Where  the  water  is  shallow  and  swift,  frames 
of  split  sticks,  inte|;>woven  with  older  branches  in  a  kind  of  basket- 
work,  are  stretched  across,  driven  into  the  bottom,  and  strengthened 
with  braces  held  in  position  by  pegs.  These  frames,  or  weirs,  are 
spaced  a  little  distance  apart,  so  that  when  the  salmon  leaps  the  first 
frame  he  is  trapped  between  it  and  the  second,  and  is  removed  by  a 
dip-net  or  speared  at  leisure.  In  deeper  water  the  dam,  or  weir,  consists 
of  a  basket-work  frame  with  round  openings  here  and  there,  with  pass- 
age-ways conical  in  shape,  formed  by  converging  pointed  sticks,  like 
some  kinds  of  wire  rat-traps.  The  salmon  going  up  stream  forces  his 
way  through  and  is  trapped  in  a  basket-work  compartment  and  dipped 
out  at  leisure. 

Bird  and  other  land  traps. — The  usual  forms  of  Indian  traps  are  found 
in  this  region,  consisting  of  a  cage  and  flgure-of-four  trigger,  a  bent 
sapling  with  snare  noose,  and  the  larger  game  traps  of  the  usual  dead- 
fall pattern. 

Canoes. — The  canoe  is  to  the  northwest  coast  what  the  camel  is  to  the 
desert.  It  is  to  the  Indian  of  this  region  what  the  horse  is  to  the  Arab. 
It  is  the  apple  of  bis  eye  and  the  object  of  his  solicitous  attention  and 
affection.  It  reaches  its  highest  development  in  the  world  amongst 
the  Haida  of  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  Classified  according  to 
shapes,  sizes,  and  uses,  there  may  be  said  to  be  four  kinds  on  the  north- 
west coast:  (1)  hunting,  (2)  family  and  transporting,  (3)  voyaginjr, 
and  (4)  war.  The  voyaging  and  war  canoes,  although  kept  for  different 
purposes  are  practically  the  same  in  size  and  shape,  the  differences,  if 
any,  being  slight. 

Hunting  and  fishing  canoes. — These  are  somewhat  similar  throughout 
the  whole  coast  and  are  well  illustrated  in  the  models  shown  in  Plate 
XXXIII.  The  upper  view  in  the  illustration  is  by  far  the  most  common 
type  of  hunting  canoes,  but  the  lower  one  is  that  seen  about  Dixon 
Entrance.  They  are  light  portable  dugouts  carrying  from  one  to  three 
people. 

Family  or  transportation  canoes. — These  are  from  25  to  35  feet  long 
and  4  to  6  feet  beam,  carrying  whole  families  of  from  four  to  fifteen  with 
camping  outfit,  trading  supplies,  baggage,  provisions,  etc.,  amounting 
often  to  2  tons  weight  or  more.  Farther  south,  around  Paget  Sound 
and  Vancouver  Island,  this  kind  of  canoe  has  a  straight  stern  post,  as 


T--n 


iW} 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    NOUTHWKST   C0A8T. 


295 


shown  in  Plate  xxxiv,  Ki^.  171.     AiiiutigHt  the  Haida  and  other  north- 
ern iribeH  the  stern  projects  backwards  and  slightly  upwards,  forming' 
a  long  spur  running  down  to  a  straight  edge  near  the  water  line  (Fig. 
172,  same  plate).    The  bow  also  curves  upward  and  has  a  regular  and 
gracefully  shaped  cut  water. 

Voyagin;/  ^anoex. — Tliese  are  from  35  to  05  feet  long  and  0  to  8  feet  beam, 
with  fhiring  gunwale  and  long  projecting  spurs  on  both  bow  and  stern. 
These  latter  are  generally  scarfed  on  to  the  main  body  of  the  canoes, 
and  with  the  tiare  of  the  bows  help  to  make  them  more  sea-worthy. 
Poole  (18U;{)  describes  the  canoe  of  Chief  Kene,  of  the  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands,  British  Columbia  (in  which  he  made  a  voyage  from  the  hitter's 
village  to  Victoria,  British  Columbia),  as  having  three  masts,  three  sails, 
and  a  mainstay-sail,  and  carrying  thirty-seven  people,  with  two  tons  of 
baggage,  freight,  etc.*  When  it  is  reflected  that  these  large  canoes, 
often  with  5  tons  cai)acity,  are  hewn  from  a  single  log,  our  marvel  at  the 
skill  displayed  in  their  construction  is  decidely  increased.  To-day  the 
custom  of  painting  the  bow  and  stern  in  elaborate  totemic  patterns  is 
rapidly  dying  out,  but  formerly  it  was  practiced  throughout  the  whole 
coast.  The  totem  was  also  sometimes  indicated  by  a  carving,  either 
wrought  on  the  spur  or  secured  to  it  on  the  top  or  sides.  Vancouver 
(1793)  found  this  custom  as  far  south  as  the  Kwakiutl,  of  (lardner 
Channel,  British  Columbia.  Of  a  canoe  which  he  saw  there  he  says 
"  its  head  and  stern  curiously  decorated  with  carved  work  and  rude 
and  uncouth  figures  in  painting."t 

War  canoes. — These,  in  primitive  times,  are  said  to  have  formed  a 
distinct  class  in  themselves,  having  been  elaborately  painted  and 
decorated,  but  latterly  the  voyaging  canoes  have  practically  taken  their 
places,  there  having  been  no  real  difference  in  point  of  construction  or 
size  between  the  war  and  transporting  craft.  It  is  doubtful  if  any  real 
distinction  could  ever  have  been  drawn. 

Canoes  in  general. — There  is  a  marked  difference  in  the  canoes  of  the 
northern  and  southern  Indians.  It  is  not  so  much  in  the  mere  outward 
appearance  as  in  the  shape  of  the  cross-section  and  in  the  lines.  The 
northern  canoe  is  superior  in  all  the  points  by  which  we  judge  their 
qualities.  At  the  head  of  the  respective  types  are  those  of  the  Haida 
in  the  north,  and  of  the  Makah,  of  Cape  Flattery,  Washington  Terri- 
tory, in  the  south.  The  former  have  projecting  prows,  high,  spur-shaped 
sterns,  daring  gunwales,  and  a  gracefully  rounding  or  curving  cross- 
section,  although  without  any  distinct  keel.  The  latter  have  the  blunt, 
straight  stern,  a  gracefully  curving  bow,  but  a  flat  bottom,  with  little 
curve  in  the  cross  section.  This  type  is  heavier,  roomier,  stronger, 
less  cranky,  and  more  durable  than  the  Ilaida  type,  but  the  latter  is 
swifter,  handier,  ami  more  buoyant.  The  Haida  have  in  some  of  their 
larger  canoes  soniewhat  copied  the  Makah  type  for  the  greater  strength 


•  Poole,  Queeu  Charlotte  Islands,  i>.  *2(;y.        t  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  I,  p.  303. 


-? 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


.'1:  m 


IM 

22 

1.8 


i 


1 
1 

1.25      1.4 

1.6 

^ 

6"     

► 

V] 


<^ 


% 


/} 


'>W  J^^ 


^. 


^V 


-^•j, 


O 


^>. 


/^ 


/ 


/!!« 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


aa  WKT  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14380 

(716)  873-4503 


\ 


^^ 


\ 


\ 


€>       'i 


^\ 


>> 


<*. 


1^- 


I 


TRwrfPupf^T^ 


>^i|^)iiHWi»|l|jPiij|»i!J!iii  j,i;PI!Mii(|iiiii,,i»ppj4^  ",i..iW-' 


296 


BEPOHT  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


Mwared.  Aa  admirable  illnstration  of  this  adaptation  is  seen  in  tiie 
enonnoag  Haida  oanoe  in  tlie  U.  S.  Natonal  Mnseam  (No.  26786),  whioh 
is  yery  maoh  like  Fig.  171,  Plate  xxxit,  in  appearance.  Its  dimensions 
un  as  follows:  Length,  09  foet;  beam,  8  feet;  height  of  stem,  7  feet  3 
inehes;  height  of  stern,  6  feet  3  inches;  height  amidships,  3  feet  7  indies. 
However  mnoh  the  larger  canoes  may  differ  in  shape  and  character,  the 
light,  portable  hnnting  canoes  (Fig.  169,  Plate  xxxiii)  are  much  the 
same  throughout  the  coast. 

Before  the  sea^oUer  became  extinct  they  were  'hunted  well  out  at  sea, 
the  Haida  being  particularly  venturesome  and  successfol,  and  hence 
rich,  and  respected  accordingly.  One  of  their  chief  sources  of  revenue 
to*day  is  in  the  building  and  sale  of  canoes,  which  they  tow  to  Port 
Simpson  or  up  into  Alaska  and  sell  or  trade  to  their  neighbors.  The 
tendency  of  ,the  day  is  in  the  direction  of  smaller  sizes  for  the  canoes 
than  formerly.  This  is  but  the  natural  result  of  peacefol  times,  when  it 
is  not  necessary  to  travel  in  such  large  parties  for  mutual  protection. 
Hcwe^'^r,  the  Yakutat  and  Sitka  canoes  were  never  as  large  as  those  of 
the  Haida,  as  from  earliest  times  the  latter  have  possessed  the  largest 
canoes  on  the  coast.  The  post  of  honor  in  a  oanoe  is  at  the  steering 
paddle  aft.  Usnally  this  position  is  occupied  by  a  woman  or  an  eldei^y 
man,  the  steering  being  accomplished  by  a  few  adroit  side  strokes  inter- 
jected into  tlie  regular  process  of  paddling.  In  the  family  canoe  there 
are  few  idlers,  even  the  young  children  wielding  paddles  and  "  working 
their  passage." 

Otmoe  OutjU.—ThiB  consists  of  masts,  sails,  paddles,  bailers,  and  mats. 
Ballast  of  stone  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  carried.  The  masts  and 
sails  have  been  added  sinoo  the  advent  of  the  whites,  the  rig  being 
spritwBail,  and  the  number  of  masts  varying  from  one  to  three.  Masts 
and  sprits  are  of  light  cedar  wood,  and  sails,  originally  of  muts,  are 
now  invariably  of  white  cotton  sheeting.  These  canoes  will  not  sail  on 
the  wind,  but  with  a  lowing  sheet  the  speed  made  is  astonishing.  The 
northern  type  of  pac  Jle  is  that  shown  in  Hg.  165  a,  6,  oiHi  o,  Plate 
xxxii;  the  southern,  that  in  Fig.  166.  As  may  be  expected,  the  north- 
em  paddle  is  ornamented  with  the  design  of  the  orrner's  totem.  Fig. 
167  is  a  New  Zealand  paddle,  introduced  by  way  of  showing  the  simi- 
larly of  this  in  connection  with  the  many  other  objects  common  to 
these  two  remote  regions.  A  bailer  is  imperfectly  shown  in  Plate  xsxn. 
It  is  simply  a  scof^^  of  wood  with  a  short  straight  handle.  Mat»are 
sometimes  carried'  in  the  canoes  to  cover  them  when  honied  up  and  to 
tiirow  over  the  oa^^  or  household  or  camping  effects  in  transit.  The 
Indian  is  exceedingly  careftal  of  his  canoe  md  all  that  pertains  to  it 
In  landing,  a  gravel  beach  is  selected,  where  possible,  and  the  c«ioe 
hanled  well  np  beyond  high  tide.  When  it  is  to  remain  any  time  ex- 
poaed  to  the  weather,  it  is  protected  fh>m  warping  and  cracking  flrom 
tSt»  mn*»  heat  by  a  cover  of  mats  or  boughs  of  trees. 


\ 


f 


4 


Mi 


nil 


I 


ii 


Rapoil 


> 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXXIII. 


i 


Models  of  General  Types  of  Hunting  and  Fishing  Canoes  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  169.  Hunting  and  Fishing  Canoe.  Tliis  is  tlie  upper  figure  in  the  plate, 
antl  is  an  exc^ellent  model  of  a  Imnting  and  fishing  canoe  foimd 
throughout  the  coast.  The  paddles  are  of  the  Southern  Coast  Indian 
jiattern.  Cat.  No.  640,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Fort  Simpson, 
Britisii  Columbia.    Collected  by  George  Gibbs. 

Fig.  170.  Small  Family  or  Summer  Canoe.  For  fishing,  hunting,  etc.  Haida 
and  Tlingit  tyi>e.  This  stj-le  of  totemic  ornamentation  is  now  only  jnit 
on  the  uiotleLs  of  canoes,  but  it  was  formerly  the  custom  to  so  orna- 
ment all  of  them.  The  general  ty|)e  of  northern  paddle  and  baler  is 
shown  in  outline.  The  paddles  of  both  the  northern  and  southern  tyi)e 
are  better  shown  in  Plate  XXXII,  Cat.  No.  21595,  U.  S  N.  M.  Tlingit. 
Indians,  Sitka,  Alaska ,    Collected  by  Dr.  J.  B.  White.  U.  S.  Army. 


i 


1 


in 


Report  ol  Nitional  Musoun),  1888.  -  Niblack. 


PLATE  XXXIII. 


te. 
lid 
nn 
>n, 

Ida 
nit 

iia- 

'  is 

\ye 

Kit 


4 


ii 


}''  <i'5v 


MM 


Vl 


i 


w 


!|  ft 


'■r, 
i- 

I  in 


Vi 


•:l 


5,t 


^ 


I  i 


. 


o 


I.  ' , 


m 


l>  'i 


\ 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  XXXIV. 


Family  or  Transportation  Canoes  of  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  171.  t'AXOE.  The  upiHT  figure  in  the  plate  illustrates  the  general  ty|H'  of 
South  Coast  Indian  eanoe,  with  its Hwan-like  liarlxHl  prow  and  .straight. 
l)lunt,  high  stern.  The  difference  lietuwn  thw  style  and  that  fouiul 
amongst  the  North  Coast  Indians  is  fully  discas!«ed  in  the  t«'xt. 

Kig.  172.  C.\NOE  (lower  figure).  General  ty|)e  of  the  North  Coast  Indian  i-anoe  with 
its  projecting  prow  and  stern,  round  counter,  and  tine  lines. 


TT^ 


Rtpert  of  Nitionil  MuMum,  1888.— Niblick. 


\ 


Xlllll 


kith 


Plate  XXXIV. 


(- 

to 

< 
o 
U 

I- 

0} 

UJ 

i 

X 

y- 
s 
o 

Z 

ui 

I 


(0 

UI 

o 

z 
< 


i. 


"ii 

P 

! 

i, 

:^n 

>  i^^i 

; 

1 

•igsafs 

■              ,     I.  ^, 

i 

^       -v   ' 

i 

1              !*'  J 

1 

•  ;:«  ■ 

H 

till 

S' 

i 

i  ■  f 

* 

H 

1  I 

:t 

!i" 

ft  f 

i 

r                       n "  "! 

^ 

i  'i'j 

W   '''' .f 

! 

1  ^'i 

: 

1'  •*ii 

i 

li 

i 

^^ 


i 


> 


THR   1NDIAN8   OP   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


297 


Oanoe  making. — Tbe  primitive  toula  used  in  canoe  conMtiruction  are 
so  simple  as  to  excite  oar  surprise.  The  principal  and  almost  only  one 
used  is  the  adze  of  some  pattern  or  ottier  shown  in  Plate  xxiii,  Pigs. 
02,  03,  and  04.  Tbe  logs  for  the  purpose  are  usually  gotten  out  in  the 
summer  season  and  rough  hewn  to  somewhat  the  shape  of  the  canoe  in 
odd  hours  about  tbe  summer  camp — the  finishing  work  being  left  until 
winter.  The  trees  are  generally  selected  near  some  watercourse  and 
felled  in  such  a  direction  as  to  admit  of  launching  them  into  tide  water. 
The  log  is  trimmed  where  felled  to  rough  dimensions,  launched,  and 
towed  to  summer  carap,  where  the  preliminary  work  is  done.  Often  by 
combined  labor  numerous  logs  are  gotten  out  in  this  way  at  one  time, 
made  into  a  raft,  and  by  means  of  sweeps  and  sails  and  by  dint  of 
working  the  tides  brought  to  the  village  or  to  the  neighborhood  of  the 
camps.  Good  trees  for  canoe  purposes  are  sufficiently  rare  to  make  their 
selection  difficult  and  expensive  in  both  time  and  labor.  The  best  wood 
for  all  purposes  is  the  yellow  cedar  (Chanuceyparis  Nutkaenaia),  found  on 
the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  and  in  spots  around  the  southern  Alaska 
boundary.  The  smaller  canoes  are  made  from  the  Sitka  spruce  {Picm 
Sitchenaia),  and  the  very  largest  from  the  giant  cedar  ( TImja  gigantea). 
The  whole  process  of  canoe  construction  may  be  briefly  described  as 
follows:  The  tree  is  felled  with  an  ax  (formerly  stone  ones  were  used). 
The  trimming  and  rough  hewing  is  done  by  wedges  and  sledges.  The 
rest  of  the  work  is  done  by  patient  cutting  with  an  adze.  The  canoe 
being  roughly  worked  out  is  widened  in  beam  by  steaming  it  with  wa- 
ter and  hot  stones  placed  in  the  bottom  of  the  cauoe,  stretchers  or 
thwarts  of  gradually  increasing  sizes  being  forced  in  as  tie  wood  ex- 
pands. The  long  spur  ends  in  large  canoes  are  neatly  scaifcd  on  to 
the  body  with  a  dovetailed  joint  and  finished  down  as  part  of  the  whole. 
The  smoothing  work  on  the  outside  is  olten-done  with  a  chisel,  but  usu- 
ally the  interior  of  the  cauoe  shows  thet:hipping  marks  of  the  adze.  The 
smoothing  work  on  the  exterior  to  lessen  the  friction  of  the  water  is 
furthered  by  the  use  of  sandpaper,  sandstone,  or  shark's  skin.  The 
conventional  colors  used  now  in  painting  are  black  outside  and  white 
inside,  with  a  red  strip  on  the  inside  of  the  gunwale  running  quite  around 
the  canoe  and  npon  the  bow  and  stern  spurs.  Tbe  process  of  painting 
is  described  in  the  next  chapter.  The  liLes  of  these  canoes  are  re- 
markably fine  and  good;  and  when  of  considerable  size  and  intelli- 
gently handled  they  are  remarkably  good  sea-boats.  Trips  are  often 
made  in  them  to  Victoria,  British  Columbia;  and  the  Kaigani  visit  the 
outlying  islands  of  the  Prince  of  Wales  Archipelago  in  the  early  sum- 
mer in  search  of  birds'  eggs  about  25  miles  out  to  sea. 

HUNTING  AND  FISHING. 

MBTUODS  OF  CAPTURING  ANIMALS. 

Salmon. — ^The  first  run  of  salmon  occurs  about  the  middle  of  July, 
when  they  swarm  in  myriads  into  the  mouths  uf  the  small  fresh-water 


!      ■*■ 


. 


298 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL    MU8E(JM,  1888. 


I 

1 


\ 


Btrenms.  It  ia  diflQoiilt  to  picture  iu  the  mind  the  abundance  of  these 
fish  and  tlie  uiud  abuuduu  with  which  they  hurl  themselves  over  obsta- 
oles,  wounded,  pantiug,  often  hatHed,  Itut  always  eagerly  pressing  on 
up  the  streams  there  to  spawn  and  die.  Iu  some  of  the  pools  they 
gather  in  sucli  numbers  as  to  almost  solidly  pack  the  surface.  When 
there  is  a  waterfall  barring  their  progress  they  may  be  seen  leaping  at 
the  fall  endeavoring  to  ascend  it,  often  as  many  as  six  or  more  being  iu 
the  air  at  once.  The  desli  at  first  hard  and  firm  on  contact  with  fresh 
water  soon  loses  its  color  and  palatableness,  so  that  the  f^ooner  they 
are  captured  the  better.  The  species  of  the  first  run  vary  along  the 
coast.  They  are  compar'itivel^  small,  do  not  remain  long,  and  do 
not  furnish  the  bulk  of  die  supply,  although  at  the  cunneries  now 
erected  as  many  n^  two  to  five  thousand  have  been  known  to  be  caught 
with  one  haul  of  tlie  hr/gest  seines.  About  the  middle  of  August  the 
Tyee  or  King  salmon  arrives,  the  run  often  lasting  the  year  out. 
When  they  first  appear  they  are  fat,  beautifully  colored,  and  full  of 
life  and  animation;  but  soon  are  terribly  bruised,  their  skin  becomes 
pale,  their  snouts  hook-shape.l,  their  bodies  lean  and  emaciated,  and 
their  flesii  soft,  pale,  and  unwholesome.  In  Wrangell  Narrows  is  a 
waterfall  of  about  13  feet.  At  high  tide  the  salt  water  backs  up  the 
stream  and  reduces  this  fall  to  about  8  feet,  but  never  less  even  at 
spring  tides,  but  the  King  salmon  leaps  the  falls  and  numbers  of  them 
may  be  found  in  the  fresh  water  above.  The  writer  has  deposited  in 
the  Smithsonian  Institution  several  instantaneous  photographs  of  leap- 
ing salmon  taken  by  himself  at  this  locality,  but  it  is  unnecessary  to 
reproduce  them  in  this  conuection.  The  whole  of  the  territory  on  the 
northwest  coast  adjacent  to  the  Indian  villages  is  portioned  out 
amongst  the  dift'erent  families  or  households  as  hunting,  fishing,  and 
berrying  grounds,  and  handed  down  from  generation  to  generation  and 
recognized  as  personal  property.  Privilege  for  an  Indian,  other  than 
the  owner,  to  hunt,  fish,  or  gather  berries  can  only  be  secured  by  pay- 
ment. Each  stream  has  its  owner,  whose  summer  camp,  often  of  a  per- 
manent nature,  cau  be  seen  where  the  salmon  run  in  greatest  a*mn- 
dance.  Often  such  streams  are  held  in  severalty  by  two  or  more  families 
with  equal  privileges  of  fishing.  Sahnon  are  never  caught  on  a  hook ; 
t^iis  method,  if  practicable  at  all,  being  too  slow.  At  the  mouth  of  the 
streams  they  are  speared  or  caught  in  nets.  High  up  the  streams  they 
are  trapped  in  weirs  and  either  speared  or  dipped  out  with  dip-nets. 
The  Indians  are  beginning  now  to  use  seines  and  to  work  for  salmon  on 
shares,  but  the  older  ones  are  very  conservative,  and  cling  somewhat  to 
primitive  methods  in  a  matter  even  so  important  to  tb^m  as  the  capture 
of  salmon,  their  chief  food  supply. 

Halibut. — These  may  be  taken  at  almost  any  season  in  certain  locali- 
ties, while  they  are  more  numerous  during  certain  months  in  others. 
The  Indians  make  the  subject  quite  a  study,  and  know  just  where  all 
the  banks  are  and  at  what  seasons  it  is  best  to  fish.    Often  villages  are 


k 


♦' 


THE   INDIANS  OF  THK   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


299 


located  on  ez|>o8eU  sites  for  no  otber  reason  (ban  to  be  near  certain 
halibut  grounds.  Tliis  fish  varies  in  size  from  20  to  120  iiouuds,  and  is 
caugbt  only  with  a  book  nnd  line.  The  type  of  book  is  that  shown  in 
Plate  XXXI,  and  the  method  of  sinking  it  shown  in  Plate  xxx,  Fig.  151. 
This  fish  stays  close  along  the  bottom,  and  is  such  a  greedy  feeder  as 
to  be  readily  caught  by  the  clumsy  hook  shown.  lu  A<4'<ing  for  halibut 
the  cunoe  is  anchored  by  means  of  stones  and  cedar  b.v:  ro|ies.  The 
bait  is  lashed  to  the  hook,  a  stone  sinker  attache<l  to  fh^  line,  and  the 
contrivance  lowered  to  the  bottom.  Sometimes  th"  upper  ends  of  the 
lines  are  attached  to  Hoats  and  more  than  one  lin^  jnded  at  a  time.  A 
flsh  iK'in:.  Vouked  is  hauled  up,  played  for  a  while,  dra^n  alongside, 
grappUMi,  and  Anally  despatched  with  blows  of  a  clil)  earrio<l  for  the 
piii^tose.  It  requires  no  little  skill  to  laud  a  haudi-ed|>ound  halibut  in 
a  light  flshiug  canoe.  A  primitive  halibut  Ashing  outfit  consists  of 
kelp-lines,  wooden  floats,  stone  sinkers,  an  anchor  line,  a  wooden  dob, 
and  wooden  Ash  hooks.  It  is  impossible  with  our  most  raoilern  appli< 
ances  to  compete  with  the  Indians  in  halibut  Ashing.  With  their  crude 
implements  tbey  meet  with  the  most  surprising  success. 

Herring  and  eulaehon. — Herring  are  found  in  the  summer  months  in 
numerous  parts  of  the  coast,  depending  ^on  the  nature  of  the  t<eediug 
ground.  They  run  in  large  shoals,  breaking  the  surface  of  the  water, 
and  attracting  in  their  wake  other  Ash,  porpoises,  whales,  whale  **  kill- 
ers," Aights  of  eagles,  and  Aocks  of  surf  birds,  all  feeding  either  on  the 
herring  or  on  tlie  same  food  as  that  of  which  they  themselves  are  in 
search.  They  are  dipped  out  by  the  Indians  with  nets  or  baskets,  caught 
with  drag-nets,  or  taken  with  the  rakes  previously  described.  Eulacbon 
or  '*  caadle-Ash  "  run  only  in  the  mouths  of  rivers,  particularly  the 
Skeeui),  Nass,  and  Stikiue  in  this  region.  They  are  considered  great 
delicacies,  and  are  i«'ried  and  traded  up  and  down  the  coast  by  the 
Indians  who  are  fortnuate  enough  to  control  the  season's  catch. 

Cod  are  caught  with  the  skil  hook  previously  described.  DogAsh, 
Aoundcrs,  and  other  kinds  are  caught  with  almost  any  kind  of  hook, 
there  being  no  especial  appliances  used  or  required. 

Spatcn. — For  taking  Ash  eggs  that  have  already  been  spawned,  the 
Indians  use  the  branches  of  the  pine  tree,  stuck  ii  the  muddy  bottom, 
to  which  it  readily  adheres,  and  on  which  it  is  afterwards  dried.  When 
dry  it  is  stripped  from  the  branches  and  stored  in  baskets  or  boxes ; 
sometimes  buried  in  the  ground.  The  spawn  gets  a  pleasing  flavor 
from  the  pine.  Koe  is  taken  from  captured  Ash  and  either  dried  or 
buried  iu  the  ground  to  become  rank  enough  to  suit  the  epicureau  pal- 
ate of  the  ludian  gourmand. 

Sea  otter. — The  custom  in  former  days  was  to  hunt  the  sea-otter  either 
from  the  shore  or  in  canoe  parties.  They  were  shot  with  arrows  from 
behind  screens  when  they  landed  to  bask  on  the  sand  or  on  the  rocks, 
or  approached  noiselessly  by  canoe  parties  when  asleep  on  the  water. 


lu 


Ml    1  ► 


■■ 


300 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


Yeiy  thin  light  paddles  were  used,  and  if  the  Indian  could  get  near 
enough  the  sleeping  animal  was  harpooned.  The  common  cnstom  was, 
however,  to  hnnt  in  parties.  An  otter  being  sighted  was  surronnded  by 
canoes  in  a  very  large  but  gradually  lessening  circle,  advi^ntage  being 
taken  of  the  necessity  of  the  animal  to  come  to  the  surface  to  breathe, 
when  it  would  be  shot  with  arrows  or  harpooned  from  the  nearest 
canoe.  The  Tlingit  and  Haida  were  not  so  expert  as  the  Aleut,  because 
their  canoes  were  not  so  well  adapted  to  the  exposure  at  sea.  In  recent 
years  the  few  remaining  sea-otters  have  been  hunted  with  fire-arms. 
The  Indians  are  poor  marksmen,  and  under  the  excitement  of  firing  the 
instant  the  otter  rises  many  accidents  to  their  own  number  have  hap- 
pened, particularly  to  those  on  opposite  sides  of  the  circle.  By  a  cnrious 
rule  the  otter,  and  all  other  game,  belongs  to  the  one  who  first  wounds 
it,  no  matter  who  kills  it.  As  the  otter  floats  when  killed,  the  same 
skill  is  not  required  as  in  seal  hunting,  but  so  scarce  have  they  become 
now,  that  not  more  than  forty  or  fifty  are  killed  in  a  season  throughout 
the  northern  coast  Indian  region. 

Seals. — Seals  are  hunted  in  practically  the  same  way  as  just  de- 
scribed, but  from  the  fact  that  on  account  of  their  bodies  not  floating 
it  is  necessary  to  harpoon  tl\f  m  before  they  sink,  the  percentage  of  losa 
is  very  large,  although  they  are  more  abundant  than  the  otter.  The 
Indians  rely  to  a  great  extent  on  shooting  them  in  very  shallow  water 
or  on  rocky  ledges  near  shore. 

On  shore  the  Indians  are  very  poor  still-hunters,  and  luck  and  abun- 
dance of  game  are  large  elements  in  their  snccesis.  Fur-bearing  animals, 
such  as  bear,  lynx,  land  ulter,  beaver,  etc.,  are  generally  trapped,  al- 
though shot  whenever  chance  otters.    Breech-loading  arms  are  not 

allowed  to  be  sold  to  the  Indians.  With 
the  use  of  muzzle- loaders  we  find  such 
necessaries  in  the  outfit  of  a  hunter  as 
Figs.  140a  and  1406,  which  are  powder- 
chargers  of  bone,  and  Fig.  140c,  which  is 
a  percussion-cap  box  made  from  the  horn 
of  a  mountain  goat. 

Deer. — Deer  are  very  abundant,  and 
form  a  large  item  in  the  food  supply  of 
the  region.  They  are  hunted  in  the 
rutting  season  with  a  call,  which  lures 
them  to  the  ambushed  hunter,  when 
they  are  readily  shot.  So  efiecti  ve  is  this 
call,  that  it  is  not  unusual  to  be  able  to 
get  a  second  shot  at  them  in  case  of  first 
Stili  hunting  is  very  littlu  resorted  to,  and  an  Indian  seldom 
risks  wasting  a  charge  until  he  is  somewhat  sure  of  his  distance  and 
chances.    They  are  often  captured  swimming,  and  in  winter  recklessly 


Fig.  140  a  u«. 

POWDBa  HOBH  AMD  ClIAKOBBa. 

(Tlinsit,    EmmoM  Collertiuii. ) 

failure, 


i> 


.THE  INDIANS  OF  THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


301 


^ 


i 


slaughtered  for  their  hides  when  driven  down  to  the  shore  by  heavy 
and  long-continued  snows.  The  deer-call  is  made  from  a  blade  of  grass 
placed  between  two  strips  of  wood,  and  is  a  very  clever  imitation  of  the 
cry  of  a  deer  in  the  retting  season.  The  wolves  play  great  havoc  in 
this  region  with  the  deer,  and  it  seems  remarkable  that  they  exist  in 
such  numbers  with  so  many  ruthless  enemies. 

Mountain  goaU  and  sheep. — On  the  mainland  these  are  shot  with  very 
little  difficulty  if  one  can  overcome  the  natural  obstacles  to  reaching 
the  lofty  heights  which  they  frequent. 

Bears. — ^The  brown  and  black  bear  are  the  two  species  quite  gen- 
erally found  in  Alaska.  Both  are  hunted  with  dogs,  shot  when  acci- 
dentally encountered,  or  trapped  with  dead-falls.  The  brown  bear 
( Ursus  Richard«<mii)  is  from  6  to  12  feet  long  and  fully  as  ferocious  as 
the  grizzly.  Tlie  hair  is  coarse,  and  the  skins,  not  bringing  a  good  price, 
are  generally  kept  by  the  Indians  for  bedding.  This  fact,  coupled  with 
the  natural  ferocity  of  this  species,  has  led  to  the  brown  bear  being 
generally  let  alone.  An  accidental  meeting  in  the  woods  with  one  of 
them  is  regarded  as  a  very  disagreeable  incident  by  an  Indian.  When 
women  and  children  run  across  bear-tracks  in  the  woods,  in  deference 
to  a  generally  recognized  superstition,  they  immediately  say  the  most 
charmingly  complimentary  things  of  bears  in  general  and  this  visitor 
in  particular.    PetrolBf  gives  the  origin  of  this  custom  as  follows : 

The  bear  vras  formerly  rarely  hnnted  by  the  Buperstitions  Thiinkit,  who  had  been 
told  by  the  shamans  that  it  is  a  man  who  has  assumed  the  shape  of  an  animal.  They 
have  a  tradition  to  the  effect  that  this  secret  of  nature  first  became  known  through 
the  daughter  of  a  chief  who  came  in  contact  with  a  man  transformed  into  a  bear. 
The  woman  in  question  went  into  the  woods  to  gather  berries,  and  incautiously  spoke 
in  terms  of  ridicule  of  the  bear,  whose  traces  she  observed  in  the  path.  In  punish- 
ment for  her  levity  she  was  decoyed  into  the  bear's  lair  and  there  compelled  to  marry 
him  and  assume  the  form  of  a  bear.  After  her  husband  and  her  ursine  child  had  been 
killed  by  her  Tl.linkit  brethren,  she  returned  to  her  home  in  her  former  shape  and  nar- 
rated her  adveii^ares.* 

This  legend  is  found  in  other  forms  throughout  the  coast,  and  occasion 
will  be  taken  in  another  chapter  to  comment  ou  it  further.  In  conclu- 
sion, it  may  be  saH  that  the  brown  bear  arv^  expert  fishers  and  frequent 
the  streams  in  i<be  salmon  season  along  their  well-beaten  tracks,  which 
form  the  best  paths  through  the  woods. 

The  black  boar  {TJrsxie  americanus)  is,  on  the  other  band,  rather  timid 
and  eagerly  hunted,  not  only  for  his  valuable  black  skin,  but  for  his 
flesh,  which,  when  young  and  tender,  is  very  palatable.  In  the  spring 
they  are  readily  killed  along  the  edge  of  the  woods,  when  they  come  out 
to  feed  on  the  first  sprigs  of  skunk-cabbage  and  other  plants  brought 
out  by  the  warm  sun.  Later  in  the  summer  they  are  found  along  the 
streams,  where  they  feed  on  tbe  dead  and  dying  salmon. 

Taking  it  altogether,  the  Indians  are  expert  fishermen  but  poor  hunt- 

•Petroff's  Report,  p.  168, 


Ill 


302 


HEPOBT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


ers,  indifferent  marksmen,  and  wanting  in  that  coolness  and  nerve  for 
which  the  hunting  Indians  of  the  interior  are  famous. 
Besides  the  animals  hunted  for  their  skins  as  men- 
tioned, there  may  be  added  the  fox,  wolf,  mink,  mar- 
ten, land-otter,  and  an  occasional  Canada  lynx  and 
wolverine  on  the  mainland.  The  method  of  dressing 
the  skin  is  not  different  from  that  of  the  interior 
Indians,  so  generally  described  in  works  of  travel. 
The  skin  scrapers  or  dressers  are  either  of  stone  or 
bone,  and  of  the  pattern  shown  in  Fig.  79  A,  Plate 
XX  and  Fig.  79k. 
Urtnine  and  marmot. — In  Figs.  145  a  and  145b  are 
I  JM      shown  two  bone  trap  sticks,  to  which  are  fastened 

I  M       the  sinew  nooses  used  in  the  capture  of  ermine  and 

//  r  marmot.    Those  for  ermine  are  somewhat  smaller 

If  than  those  shown  in  the  figure.    They  are,  more- 

over, son  times  made  of  wood  instead  of  bone,  and 
are  elaborately  carved  in  totemic  designs.    These 


Fig.  146  a,  6. 
Bon  Tbap-stickb. 


(TUaiit    Kpuneu 


coUMtioikj  f^^Q  specimens  are  lirom  the  Emmons  collection. 


\ 


f 


ii 


m' 


If 

Hi 


for 
us. 
en- 
lax- 
md 
ing 
•ior 
rel. 
)  or 
ate 

are 
aed 
»nd 
Her 
jre- 
SiUd 
lese 


} 


4 


VI. 


LAND-WORKS,  HOUSES,   VILLAGES. 

Dwelliugs  in  general  on  the  northwest  coast  may  be  classed  as  the 
fortified  and  the  unprotected.  These  may  be  either  temporary  or  per- 
manent. 

LAND- WORKS :   FORTIFICATIONS. 

In  the  past  century,  the  form,  location,  and  construction  ot  villages 
have  undergone  considerable  change  in  this  region.  The  rules  or  prac- 
tices of  war  were  such  as  to  entail  the  necessity  for  some  form  of  forti- 
fication. Often,  in  addition  to  the  regular  villages,  fortifications  were 
erected  near  by,  into  which  they  might  withdraw  in  time  of  danger,  but 
sometimes  fortified  sites  were  permanently  occupied.  Before  the  advent 
of  the  whites,  two  considerations  of  prime  importance  obtained  in  the 
location  of  a  site  for  a  village,  (1)  proximity  to  halibut  banks  and  fish- 
ing grounds,  and  (2)  possibility  of  fortification  against  attack.  Van- 
couver says  of  the  Kake  villages,  at  the  head  of  Keku  Straits,  Kupre- 
anoff  Island: 

They  all  uniformly  were  sitaated  on  the  sammit'Df  some  precipice,  or  steep  insular 
rock,  rendered  by  nature  almost  inaccessible,  and  by  art  and  great  labor  made  a 
strong  defense,  which  proved  that  the  inhabitants  had  been  subject  to  the  incursions 
of  hostile  visitors.  These  fortified  places  were  well  constructed,  with  a  strong  plat- 
form of  wood,  laid  on  the  most  elevated  part  of  the  rock,  and  projecting  so  far  from 
its  sides  as  to  overspread  the  declivity.  The  edge  of  the  platform  was  surrounded 
by  a  barricade  raised  by  logs  of  wood  placed  on  each  other.* 

In  the  narrative  of  Dixon's  voyage  (1787)  a  sketch  is  given  of  a  Haida 
fortified  house  on  Hippah  Island,  off  the  west  coast  of  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands.    He  says  of  it : 

The  tribe  who  inhabit  this  hippah  seem  well  defended  from  any  sudden  assault  of 
their  enemies,  for  the  ascent  to  it  from  the  beacli  is  steep  and  difficult  of  access,  and 
the  other  sides  are  well  barricaded  with  piues  and  brushwood,  notwithstanding 
which  they  have  been  at  infinite  pains  iu  raising  additional  fences  of  rails  and  boards, 
so  that  I  should  think  they  cau  not  fail  to  repel  any  tribe  that  should  dare  to  attack 
their  fortification.* 

Captain  P\  on  further  pronounces  it  as  ^'  built  exactly  on  the  plan  of 
the  hippah  oi  the  savages  of  New  Zealand."  t 

Strong  natural  defensive  positions  seem  to  have  been  generally 
selected  along  the  whole  coast.    Vancouver  (1793)  notices  this  point 


'  Vauoo4Ter,  Voyage,  Vol.  ui,  pp.  289,  290. 


t  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  306. 
303 


if 


iift' 


<:li 


-.-i  ''I 


n 


s   t 

k 


n 


ff 


■$m 


I' 


304 


REPORT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


among  the  Bilqula  and  Kwakiutl.*    These  were  noticed  by  Mackenzie 
in  the  same  year  in  the  same  localities.! 
Danu  states  (1834)  of  the  Sebassa  (southern  Tsimshian) : 

They  built  their  villages  chiefly  upon  high  and  precipitous  rooky  islands  or  prom- 
ontories, having  steps  cut  down  to  the  water.  This  is  done  to  prevent  any  sndden 
attack  from  the  en^my.t 

The  skill  of  the  Indians  in  erecting  fortifications  is  well  illastrated 
liy  Lisiansky  (1804),  who  aided  Baranofif  in  reestablishing  the  Russian 
jettlement  at  Sitka 'after  the  massacre.  In  Voyages,  page  163,  Plate 
II,  is  given  a  detailed  plan  and  sketch  of  the  palisade  fort  erected  by 
the  Sitkas.  It  is  unnecessary  to  reproduce  it  here,  but  in  structure  and 
design  it  would  have  done  credit  to  European  ingenuity  of  that  date. 
Laugsdorff  (1805)  describes  the  fortifications  erected  a  year  later  by  the 
Indians  expelled  from  Sitka  as  foUowc : 

They  have  fortified  themselves  ht>re  upon  a  rock  which  rises  perpendicnlarly  to  the 
height  of  some  hundred  feet  abovo  the  water.  *  *  *  The  rock  itself  is  secured 
against  the  attack  of  an  enemy  by  a  double  palisade  of  large  trunks  uf  trees  stuck 
close  together,  measuring  from  12  to  15  feet  in  height,  and  fh>m  3  to  5  feet  in  thick- 
ness. A  natural  wall  of  earth,  beyond  the  palisading,  on  the  side  towards  the  sea, 
conceals  the  habitations  effectually,  so  that  they  can  not  be  discerned  by  any  ship.$ 

The  only  possible  access  to  this  fortification  is  described  as  on  the 
northwest  side,  but  the  approach  was  strewn  rith  very  large  trunks  of 
trees  to  make  it  additionally  difficult  of  access. 


{ 


} 


TEMPOEAEY  DWELLINGS. 

In  summer  camps,  in  hunting  and  fishing,  and  in  canoe  trips,  the 
form  of  dwelling  is  temporary  in  construction. 

Summer  fishing  camp. — Near  the  mouth  of  some  fresh- water  stream 
owned  by  a  household  or  family,  where  the  salmon  run  thickest,  a  rough- 
ly-built house  will  generally  be  found.  This  varies  in  size  and  care  of 
construction  according  to  circumstances.  Usually  the  frame  is  light, 
and  the  roof,  iiisteitd  of  being  made  of  split  boards,  is  formed  by  broad 
strips  of  bark  which  are  laid  on  thus  ^TlT^jT^,  and  held  down  by  stones 
and  cross  piecefi.  The  larger  kind  have  a  smoke  hole,  but  usually  the 
fire  is  built  outside,  where  the  smoke  assists  in  curing  the  strips  of 
salmon  and  halibut  hung  on  frames  above  it. 

Tents.T-The  primitive  form  of  tent  for  traveling  consisted  simnly  of 
scrips  of  bark  carried  in  the  canoes.  To  erect  the  tents  two  saplings 
or  branches  would  be  cut,  pointed,  and  stuck  in  the  ground,  forked  ends 
up,  with  a  cross  pole  resting  in  the  forks.  The  bark  strips  would  then 
be  rested  against  the  pole,  forming  a  sloping  wall  towards  the  wind. 
This  half-open  tent  was  airy  in  form,  but  would  shed  the  water  of  a 
driving  rain.    The  fire  was  usually  built  in  front.    Today  the  Indians 


•  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  ii,  pp.  272,  274, 284. 
t  Mackenzie,  Voyages,  p.  345,  «t  Beq. 


t  Dunn,  Oregon,  p.  274. 
i  Laugsdorff,  Voyages,  Ft.  ii,  pp.  188, 
189. 


TV. 


THE  INDIANS  OF  THE   NORTHWEST  COAST 


305 


{ 


} 


use  cotton  sheeting  for  a  cover  in  the  form  of  an  A  tent.  Along  most  of 
the  water-uonrses  where  there  is  much  travel  the  frames  may  be  seen  left 
Gtanding  near  the  good  camping  spots.  These  latter  ure  selected  from 
their  having  a  good  beacb  to  haul  up  the  canoes,  fresh  water  near,  unex- 
posed position  and  proximity  to  good  hunting,  ground.  The  cotton 
sheeting  is  stretched  taut  across  the  frame  and  the  edges  pegged  into  the 
ground.  This  form  of  tent  was  also  used  in  pritritive  times,  mats^of  cedar 
bark  fibre  or  skins  of  animals  forming  the  tent  walls.  At  these  camp  sites 
are  often  deposited  piles  of  wood  already  cut  for  use.  In  the  short 
winter  days  it  often  happens  that  a  belated  canoe  load  arrives  after 
dark.  Here  they  find  wood  already  cut,  and  they  build  afire  and  warm 
up  without  the  necessity  of  searching  in  tie  dark  or  in  the  snow  for  fire- 
wood. It  is  part  of  the  unwritten  code  that  an  Indian  using  such  fire- 
wood II  ust  ill  the  morning  replace  what  be  has  used  by  a  similar 
amount  gathered  at  his  leisure  before  setting  out  again  on  his  journey. 

HOUSES. 

The  permanent  houses  are  similar  in  fdrm  and  type  throughout  the 
coast,  but  reach  their  highest  development  amongst  the  Haida.  !Nbrtb, 
the  Yakatat  dwellings  are  but  little  better  than  the  summer  dwellings 
of  the  Haida,  while  to  the  south  the  houses  are  equal  in  size  but  inferior 
in  artistic  construction.  In  general,  houses  may  be  divided  into  three 
classes:  fl)  those  built  on  the  surface  of  the  ground;  (2)  those  built 
on  a  foundation  of  logs  or  slightly  raised  platform ;  (3)  those  raised  on 
high  logs  or  stilts. 

Eaiaed  houses.— The  last  named  are  found  amongst  the  Ewakiutl 
and  Bilqula,  and  their  mh  mi  rive  form  of  construction  is  fully  described 
ia  ^<ickenzie,  Voyages,  p.  329,  and  Vancouver,  Voyage,  vol  n,  pp.  268, 
272,  274,  and  284.  They  both  visited  this  region  in  1793.  According 
to  Vancouver,  amongst  the  Kwakiutl  of  Johnstone  Strait,  there  were 
dwellings  "  raised  and  supported  near  30  feet  from  the  ground  by  per- 
pendicular spars  of  a  very  large  size"  with  "  access  formed  by  a  long 
tree  in  an  inclined  position  from  the  platform  to  the  ground,  with 
notches  cut  in  it  by  way  of  steps  about  a  foot  and  a  half  asunder.*  This, 
however,  was  only  one  of  several  styles  of  their  dwellings.  In  general, 
the>  were  ornamented  in  front,  at  the  gables,  and  above  the  doors,  as 
now,  with  hieroglyphic  drawings  of  their  totems. 

Tlingit  dwellings. — Amongst  the  Tlingit,  the  permanent  dwellings  are 
as  a  rule  built  on  a  slightly  raised  foundation  of  logs,  the  approach  to 
the  doorway  being  by  three  or  four  raised  steps  with  a  platform  in  front 
of  the  door  of  the  principal  houses.  This  latter  is  the  loafing  place, 
and  where  the  gamblers  congregate  for  their  incessant  gambling  bouts. 
This  form  of  construction  is  by  no  means  universally  adopted,  as  some 
of  the  dwellings  are  built  on  the  level  of  the  ground.    In  any  case,  the 


:  , 


1 


*  VttLconver,  Voyage,  vol.  ii,  p.  274. 
H.  Mis.  142,  pt.  2 20 


306 


KEPORT   OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


i 


level  of  thedoorsillisabodttbatof  whatmay  be  called  the  ground  floor. 
Eoteriug  the  door,  one  stands  on  a  platform  about  6  feet  wide,  ruuuibg 
around  the  four  sides  of  the  house.  Next,  one  steps  down  about  3  feet 
upon  a  ledge  the  same  width,  also  running  around  the  four  sides.  The 
next  level,  3  feet  below  this,  is  the  solid  ground,  sometimes  bare,  some- 
times with  a  board  floor.  In  the  center  of  this  the  fire  burns,  the  smoke 
ascending  through  a  square  smoke-hole  in  the  roof  in  the  center  of  the 
building.  All  bouses  were  formerly  without  windows,  ventilation  bdng 
secured  by  the  door  and  the  smoke-hole.  If  the  house  is  built  on  the 
surface  of  the  ground,  the  interior  is  excavated  into  a  kind  of  cellar,  the 
ledges  being  cut  in  the  earth  and  covered  by  large  hewn  slabs  of  cedar. 
These  ledges  serve  not  only  as  sleeping  and  lounging  places,  but  as 
shelves  to  deposit  all  sorts  of  boxes,  utensils,  etc.,  belonging  to  the 
family.  In  the  Tliugit  dwellings,  the  fire- place  is  usually  boxed  in  with 
boards,  and  filled  in  with  stones.  When  the  house  is  built  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  ground,  one  enters  the  door  at  the  level  of  the  ground,  and 
descends  to  the  lower  floor  inside.  If  the  house  is  built  on  a  raised 
foundation,  the  bottom  floor  or  court  is  usually  on  the  level  ol  the  out- 
side ground.  One  mounts  to  the  door,  enters,  and  descends  to  the 
ground  inside.  Between  these  two  types  are  slight  variations  in  which . 
the  foundation  of  logs  is  not  so  high,  and  the  interior  is  dug  down  only 
about  2  or  3  feet.  Amongst  the  Tliugit,  the  interior  platform  at  the  level 
of  the  door-sill  is  sometimes  divided  into  living  apartments,  or  small 
state-rooms,  so  to  speak.  Lisianski  (1804)  describes  the  houses  about 
Sitka  as  square  in  form  and  spacious,  with  openings  all  along  the  top 
•About  2  feet  in  width  to  let  out  the  smoke.  The  fire-place  was  fenced 
around  with  boards,  the  place  between  the  fire-place  and  the  walls  be- 
ing partitioned  by  curtains  for  ths  different  families  living  in  the  lodge- 
There  were  board  shelves  fixed  around  inside  of  the  room  for  the  stow, 
age  of  boxes  and  utensils.* 

The  primitive  form  of  construction  is  not  materially  dificrent  from 
that  described  and  illustrated  in  Plate  xxxy.  The  Tliugit  form  of  front 
is  shown  in  Fig.  176,  a  local  characteristic  being  given  to  it  by  the 
vortical  boards  a  a  at  each  corner  of  the  front  as  shown.  Throughout 
the  whole  coast,  it  was  somewhat  the  custom  to  ornament  the  fronts  with 
painted  representation  of  the  totem  of  the  chief  occupant.  To  the  south 
this  was  the  general  custom.  Amongst  the  Haida,  Tsimshian,  and  Tliu- 
git, it  was  only  occasionally  practiced.  In  Plate  xxxv  various  styles 
of  house  fronts  are  illustrated  in  connection  with  the  typical  method  of 
house  construction. 

Fig.  173  is  a  chiefs  house  at  Fort  Simpson,  British  Columbia.  Fig. 
174  is  a  Tliugit  front  at  Tongass,  Alaska.  Fig.  176  is  the  general  Tliu- 
git type  as  described  above.  Fig.  175  is  an  ancient  form  of  front,  aftor  a 
model  from  Sitka  in  the  National  Museum.    Fig.  177  is  a  Kwakiuti  front 


( 


> 


'LiBianski,  Voyage,  p.  239  and  240. 


( 


m 


H 


''  l\ 

I,  i 

1- !  (I  L 

'  ("I 


-I 


1 1  =1^' 


f 

.' 


r  fe 


> 


I     5>         h 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE  XXXV. 


{ 


Details  of  Haida  House  Construction,  with  Types  of  Fbonts  found  elsewhere  on 

THE  Northwest  Coast. 

From  drawingj,  photographs,  and  sitctches. 

Fig.  173.  Ornamented  front  ])aint«(I  to  represent  the  eagle  totem  of  a  chief  at  Port 
Simjison.  British  Columbia  (Tsirashian). 

Fig.  174.  Ornamenteil  front,  painted  to  represent  the  wolf  totem.  Fort  Tongass, 
Alaska  (Tlingit). 

Fig.  n.'i.  Ancient  form  of  Tlingit  ornamented  front,  from  a  |)ainting  in  the  U. 
S.  National  Museum.  Cat.  No.  129776.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Sitka.  Alaska. 
Painteil  l)y  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  178.  General  Tlingit  tyyie  of  front,  with  broad  side-iKwts  and  rectangular  door- 
way. 

Fig.  177.  Ornamented  fron*  after  a  sketch  by  Dr.  Franz  Boas  (Kwakiutl.) 

Fig.  178.  Details  of  smoke-hole,  shutter,  and  nietho^I  of  roofing  and  holding  down 
same  with  liearas.  rocks,  etc.  The  totemii-  figures  on  each  side  of  the 
doorway  represent  the  eagle,  anri  illustrate  a  style  of  totemic  ornamen- 
tation now  found  here  and  there  among  the  Tlingit  as  a  survival  or 
mwiification  of  the  former  custom  of  jKiinting  the  whole  house  front  in 
totemic  design. 

Fig.  179.  Details  of  the  Haida  method  of  house  construction  as  ex)>lained  fully  in 
the  text.  The  sub  cellar  or  excavate<l  living-room  is  dotted  in  beneath 
the  sketch,  the  fire-place  being  shown  at  b. 


^ 


{ 


«t 


> 


RtDort  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


Plate  XXXV. 


ui 

UI 


o 
z 


u. 


? 


f 


X 
b. 
O 

3 

< 
I- 

ul 
O 


! 


I 


;! 


'f 


::)!. 


\ 


M  > 


41 


\ 


THE   INDIANS   OF  THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


au7 


after  Boas.    Tbe  Haida  frootfl  are  rarely  oruameiited  with  totoiuiu  rep- 
reiteutatioiis. 

Totemio  and  mortuary  columm. — It  is  tbe  custom  amongst  theTliiiKit) 
Kaigaiii,  and  Tsimshiau  to  erect  carved  columns  in  frontof  tbe  bouses. 
These  usually  staud  some  feet  from  tbe  fronts.  Amongst  tbe  Haida 
tbey  are  geoeraUy  iu  contact  with  the  front,  tbe  doorway  or  entrance 
being  through  a  bole  iu  the  carved  column  about  three  feet  from  tbe 
ground,  into  which  the  occupant  appears  to  dive  when  be  enters.  This 
form  of  entrance  is  shown  in  Plate  xxxv,  and  is  found  occasionally 
elsewhere,  l)ut  is  rather  peculiar  to  tbe  Uaida.  It  is  now,  however, 
being  generally  superseded  by  the  European  type  of  doorway.  The 
carved  columns  will  be  described  in  detail  in  a  subsequent  chapter. 

Haida  permanent  dicellings. — Fig.  179,  Plate  xxxv,  represents  a  Haida 
house  of  the  conventional  pattern.  Tbe  posts,  gg,  hollowed  out  on  tbe 
backs,  as  shown,  to  reduce  tbe  weight,  with  carved  faces,  are  firmly 
planted  in  the  ground.  Tbe  upper  ends  are  also  hollowed  to  receive  tbe 
enormous  log  plates,  «  «,  which  give  strength  and  solidity  to  tbe  build- 
ing. The  carved  column,  t»,  at  tbe  front  of  tbe  bouse,  is  usually  next 
erected,  as  tbe  work  up  to  this  point  requires  the  cooperation  of  many 
bands,  tbe  gathering  being  the  occasion  of  a  feast  and  a  grand  distribu- 
tion of  presents  (a  potlatch,  as  it  is  called)  amongst  tbe  participants. 
Often,  through  lack  of  funds,  the  work  of  building  a  bouse  l..(S  to  be 
postponed,  the  whole  process  often  requiring  several  years.  The  ex- 
penses are  usually  reckoned  in  blankets,  as  tbey  are  the  conventional 
gifts  on  such  an  occasion.  Tbe  huge  plates  and  purliues,  tbe  hewu 
cedar  planks,  and  the  logs  for  posts  and  carved  columns,  are  gotten  out 
from  tbe  forests  with  great  labor  and  expense,  and  are  towed  to  tbe  vil- 
lage site,  where  tbey  are  hauled  up  on  skids,  and  tbe  work  of  smootb- 
flnisbing  beguu.  Plate  lxx  illustrates  an  animated  scene  at  Fort  Simp- 
son, British  Columbia,  where  a  party  of  Haida  are  represented  as  hauling 
up  a  log  ou  skids  iu  tbe  process  of  house  construction.  Tbe  relief  carving 
on  thetotemic  columns  and  the  posts  is  done  either  by  tbe  owner,  if  be 
be  expert,  or  if  be  be  rich,  by  others  biretl  or  kept  iu  the  establishment  for 
the  purpose.  The  materials  being  ready,  tbe  invited  guests  assemble 
from  far  and  near,  and  the  different  timbers  are  gotten  up  to  the  site  of 
the  house.  Tbe  posts  are  raised  into  position  by  means  of  rope  guys 
and  props,  and  firmly  planted  in  tbe  deep  holes  dug  in  the  ground.  Tbe 
plates  or  huge  logs  which  rest  ou  the  uprights  are  gotten  into  position 
by  what  a  sailor  would  call  technically  skids  and  parbuckles.  To  de- 
scribe the  process  in  detail,  imagine  tbe  four  posts  (or,  as  in  Plate  LXX, 
six  posts)  in  Fig.  179  firmly  planted  iu  tbe  ground,  their  heads  being 
hollowed  out  as  shown.  The  log  (or  plate,  as  it  is  technically  called  in 
architecture)  is  rolled  to  a  distance  of  about  14  feet  from  the  uprights  and 
parallel  to  its  final  position.  Tbe  uprights  are  braced  or  shored  on  the 
opposite  side,  while  on  tbeadjaci>nt  side  skids  are  rested  at  an  angle  to 
form  au  incline,  up  which  the  plate  is,  by  tbe  combined  effort  of  many, 


'ill 


I 


'I 


'  I 


308 


KEPOllT   OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


gradually  rolled.  RopeH  are  rove  over  the  top  of  the  posts  under  aud 
over  the  plate,  then  back  again  over  the  upright.  These  ropes  constitute 
the  parbuckle,  which  is  designed  to  take  the  weight  of  the  log  and  hold 
it  in  position.  Forked  sticks  are  restcMl  against  the  log  with  their  other 
ends  in  the  ground  to  help  the  parbuckle  take  the  weight  as  the  plate 
is  gradually  rolled  up,  the  forked  sticks  being  gradually  also  shifted  up 
as  it  rise:j.  By  dint  of  pushing,  shoving  with  poles,  and  pulling  on  the 
parbuckle,  the  plate  is  gotten  to  the  top  of  the  incline.  It  is  now  a 
question  of  lifting  the  dead  weight  of  the  log  by  means  of  poles  and  by 
pulling  on  the  parbuckle.  At.  last  the  plate  is  hauled  to  the  top  of  the 
upright  and  rolled  into  the  hollow  in  which  it  rests.  The  carved 
toteniic  columns  are  raised  into  position  by  means  of  poles,  props, 
and  rope  guys,  and  tirmly  imbedded  in  the  deep  hole  dug  for  it  io 
the  ground.  The  whole  process  is  an  occasion  of  much  ceremony, 
and  the  work  occupies  but  a  small  part  of  the  time,  the  remainder 
being  filled  in  with  gambling,  dancing,  feasting,  singing,  speech-making, 
and  ceremonial  display  intended  to  inspire  the  visitors  and  guests  with 
the  wealth  and  prowess  of  the  host.    Judge  Swan  says : 

The  self-denial  of  comforts  uud  even  necessaries  exercised  for  many  jears  in  the 
aconniiilation  of  property  by  man  and  wife  is  very  renmrliable,  but,  in  their  estima- 
tion, is  amply  repaid  ou  the  occasion  of  a  distribution  of  tlie  same  and  the  erection  of 
a  decorative  column,  which  in  many  instances  stands  in  front  of  an  nnflniahed  lodge 
frame  as  a  visible  monument  of  the  owner's  folly  and  extravagance.    *  *    The 

owner  probably  lives  in  the  lodge  of  some  relative,  or  perhaps  is  dead.  It  has  been 
beyond  his  means  to  finish  Irs  house,  bnt  for  that  he  cares  little;  his  vanity  has  beer 
gratified;  his  pride  satisfieti.  On  the  day  when  he  stood  presiding  over  his  piles  ol 
goods  and  chattels,  previuus  to  their  distribution  amongst  his  eager  and  expectant 
gnests,  he  had  reached  the  summit  of  his  ambition.     *  *    He  is  thenceforth  a 

petty  chief  of  the  village. 

In  some  of  the  very  latest  types  of  the  houses,  instead  of  the  comer 
posts  « i  and  the  smaller  posts  r  r  supporting  the  eaves-plates  e  e,  there 
are  four  posts  aud  two  heavy  rafters  similar  to  g  and  «.  In  either  case 
the  eaves-plates  e,  or  one  similar  to  s,  are  beveled  to  reoei^^  the  upper 
ends  of  the  boards  forming  the  side  walls  of  the  house,  as  shown  in  w 
and  adjacent  details.  The  heavy  plank  frames  h  h  and  1 1  are  beveled, 
as  shown  in  section  q,  to  receive  the  boards  forming  the  end  walls,  or 
front  and  back  of  the  house.  The  top  purlines  j  jjj  form  the  supports 
for  the  roof-planking,  and  are  held  in  place  by  the  superimposed  frames 
u  u.  The  x'jof^v.g  is  formed  either  of  planks  or  slabs  of  bark  held  down 
by  rock??,  b/^ams  and  cross-pieces,  as  shown  in  Figure  178.  The  smoke- 
hole  fcis  surmounted  by  a  frame  i*  2?  carrying  a  shutter  o,  which  is  closed 
in  the  direction  of  the  wind.  This  shutter  has  a  motion  about  the  ax!e 
p  p.  When  the  wind  changes  a^d  blows  down  the  smoke-hole,  a  chain 
or  rope  is  pulled  and  the  shutter  revolves  to  the  other  position  against 
the  wind.  As  the  house  faces  the  channel,  and  the  v/ind  usually  draws 
up  or  down  it,  the  shutter  works  to  face  one  side  of  the  house  or  t^e 
other.  The  entrance  is  shown  at  a.  Below,  the  sketch  of  the  house  is 
dotted  in  the  form  of  the  excavated  interior.    The  upper  ledge  or  plat- 


\} 


^ 


THE    INDIANS   OF    THK    NORTHWEST   COAST. 


800 


0 


i 


t^ 


form  is  at  the  level,  d ;  oin  the  lower  platform.  The  Are,  6,  burns  on 
the  bare  earth,  or  in  a  frame-work  of  boards  Ailed  with  rocks.  It  is 
here  that  the  family  sleep  in  winter,  stretched  out  on  the  bare  door 
or  on  mats  with  feet  towards  the  fire.  As  stated,  the  occupants 
of  such  a  houHe  are  numerous,  amounting  in  some  cases  to  thirty  or  forty 
in  all,  and  the  household  may  embrace  a  chief,  his  family,  grand- 
children, and  the  families  of  several  of  his  brothers.  Amongst  the  Kai- 
gani  most  of  the  houses  are  built  on  log  foundations,  a  little  above  the 
ground,  and  the  European  form  of  door  is  used.  In  soue  cases  the 
carved  column  in  set  a  few  feet  off  with  a  small  opening  in  it,  but  the 
real  entrance  to  the  house  is  by  a  doorway,  thus  keeping  up  a  semblance 
of  the  ancient  custom.  The  Uaida  houses  are  quite ,  ^'aerally  excavated, 
and  seldom  built  on  raised  foundations.  The  smaller  houses,  and  not 
unasaally  the  more  modern  houses,  consist  principally  of  a  frame 
erected  on  four  posts,  one  at  each  corner. 

VILLAGES. 

The  villages  are  invariably  situated  along  the  shore,  and  usually  near 
a  shelving  beach,  which  admits  of  easily  hauling  up  the  canoes.  Often, 
through  the  desire  to  be  near  a  good  halibut  fishing  bank,  a  very  ex- 
I)08ed  site  is  of  necessity  selected.  The  houses  are  usually  in  a  single 
row,  a  few  feet  above  extreme  high  water,  facing  toward  the  beach  and 
not  far  back  from  it.  At  high  water  the  canoes  can  be  hauled  well  up. 
Between  the  houses  and  high-water  mark  is  a  space  which  serves  as  a 
street,  with  a  beaten  path  near  the  houses  and  patches  of  grass  be- 
yond. This  space  serves  for  hauling  up  canoes  for  long  periods  and 
drying  fish,  as  well  as  the  usual  purposes  of  a  street.  Sometimes  the 
two  rows  of  houses  are  built,  where  the  space  is  contracted,  vrith  a 
narrow  street  betwec*)  the  rows.  The  houses  are  not  very  far  apart  in 
the  rows,  are  often  in  contact,  and  arranged  without  regard  to  rank  or 
precedence.  There  are  one  or  more  carved  columns  in  front  of  each 
house.  These  are  at  first  usually  painted  (formerly  daubed  with  ochre), 
but  the  coat  is  seldom  renewed.  Owing  to  the  bleaching  eft'ect  of  the 
weather,  the  columns  and  he  ses  after  a  while  assume  a  grayish  white 
appearance,  and  become  cove>  d  with  moss.  In  the  weather-cracks  moss 
and  vegetation  flourish,  givi  jg  a  very  ancient  appearance.  At  the  end 
of  the  village  is  the  graveyard,  with  its  variety  of  sepulchres  aad  mort- 
uary columns  of  ancient  and  modern  form,  as  shown  in  Plate  in. 
Scattered  throughout  the  villages,  in  front  and  near  the  corners  of  the 
houses,  are  the  mortuary  or  commemorative  columns  similar  to  those  in 
the  graveyaras.    These  are  pictured  in  all  their  variety  in  Plate  in. 

Behind  the  village,  or  at  one  end,  are  the  small  sheds  in  which  the 
dead  are  placed. 

Names  of  villages. — Oonsiderable  confusion  has  originated  in  the 
enumeration  of  villages  amongst  the  Haida  and  Kaigani  by  Europeans, 
through  the  different  names  assigned  to  the  same  village.    The  Indians 


■  * 


I    4'! 


310 


REPORT  OF  N  VTION..Ii   MUSEUM,  1888. 


have  their  own  names,  bitt  the  traders  atid  others  often  call  a  village 
after  the  name  of  the  chief;  for  instance,  Kaaaan  is  popularly  called 
Skowl's  village;  the  village  of  Skidegate,  Qaeen  Charlotte  Islands, 
British  Columbia,  is  popularly  so  caUed  from  the  name  of  the  hereti'- 
tary  chief;  the  Haida  name  is  Hyo-haika,  hnt  the  Tsimshian  call 
Kil-hai  oo.  • 

Groups  of  villages. — Each  village  practically  constitutes  a  tribe. 
There  uever  have  been  any  permanent  leagues  or  associations  of  til- 
lages to  constitute  a  nation  with  head  ruler,  although,  for  certain  rea 
sons  of  defense  or  offense,  villages  have  so  co-op'^rated  temporarily  for 
mutual  benefit  or  protection.  The  totemic  systems  of  the  Tlingit,  Haida, 
and  Tsmishian  kings,  in  some  senses  uniform^  have  often  operated  to 
make  tlie  alliance  between  phratries  and  totems  of  different  villages  in 
some  measure  stronger  than  the  clannish  feeling  due  to  close  ethnical 
affinity. 

Residence. — During  the  summer  but  few  Indians  are  found  at  the 
permanent  villa^'es.  Occasionally  a  canoe  load  ret::ru8  to  deposit  a 
'rargo,  or  to  get  something  needed  in  the  distant  summer  camp. 
Where  the  fishing  and  hunting  ground  is  near  the  village,  it  is  contin- 
ually occupied,  but  if  at  a  distance  there  are  times  when  the  village  is 
entirely  abandoned,  although  there  may  be  some  camps  quite  near. 
Under  such  circumstances  property  is  entirely  safe.  Early  in  the  sum- 
mer, during  the  first  run  of  salmon,  and  when  birds'  eggs  are  to  be 
gathered,  the  Indians  are  widely  scattered.  Later  on  they  congregate, 
but  disperse  again  for  the  run  of  King  salmon,  which  lasts  well  into 
December.  By  Christmas  time  they  have  all  gathered  in,  and  in  the 
long  winter  nights  take  place  all  those  social  and  cercmoniai  gatherings 
and  feastings  of  which  only  a  winter's  residence  amongst  them  can  give 
an  adequate  idea.  Gathered  around  the  blazing  fire  then  are  related 
those  legends  and  traditions  which  illustrate  their  beliefs.  Tb^n  also 
take  place  those  dances,  ceremonials,  and  theatrical  performances  which 
graphically  illustrate  and  perpetuate  these  traditions,  and  glorify  the 
prowess  and  might  of  the  chiefs  and  their  ancestors. 


*  Davson,  Report,  B,  p.  165. 


> 


>) 


i 


T^ 


«     •     « 


) 


1i    ' 


0 


i 


•  t  •  •  <i 


Yn. 


^Br5  ^.VD  IJ^DUSTRIES-nOVSEHOLD  UTENSILS-  PAIN7TNG,DJiAWING 

AND  CARVING— MUSIC.  •  .  ,• 

•  ;.• 

While  the  Tlingit,  Haida,  and  Tsimshian  are  esseaiiHlly.  wood  car- 
vers, xLm  is  by  no  means  their  only  taleut.  Out  of  the-  abdbdauce  of 
their  resources  they  have  not  only  adapted  wood  ' )  their  ev'eiy  need, 
but  along  with  it  have  developed  many  other  industries.  They  are,  as 
we!r,  expert  carpenters,  basket  makers,  weavers,  and  metalworkers. 
Their  tools  are  crude,  but  with  them  they  accomplish  thjj  mcSt^surprib- 
ing  results.  Along  with  the  totemic  system,  we  find  thjj  identification 
of  the  individual  with  his  totem  carried  out  in  the  ca^vlug  or  painting 
of  his  crest  on  every  article  of  personal  property.  The-  simplest  imple- 
ment or  utensil  is  ornamented  with  some  pictograph  delating  to  the 
legends  of  the  totem  to  which  he  belongs.  Tattooed  on  the  body, 
woven  into  fabrics,  etched  on  the  metal  bracelets  and  ornaments, 
painted  on  the  house  fronts,  drawn  on  the  canoe  outfits,  emblazoned  on 
the  household  boxes,  carved  on  the  huge  columns — commemorated  in 
metal,  wood,  and  stone,  the  totem  of  the  Indii^n  is  his  earliest  and 
latest  care,  yet  it  ia  all  subservient  to  the  ever  recurring  struggle  to 
livis.  In  the  circuit  of  the  seasons  a  regular  routine  of  duties  is  ob- 
served, in  the  time  not  devoted  to  hunting,  fishing,  and  the  procure- 
ment of  food  the  various  arts  and  industries  are  practiced.  In  the 
''uinmer  camp  odd  hours  are  spent  in  cutting  down  trees,  collecting  furs, 
ba;k,  and  grasses,  roughing  out  lumber,  and  in  general  collecting  the 
raw  materials,  which,  in  the  wintei-'s  leisure,  they  convert  into  the 
various  implements,  utensils,  and  finished  products  for  their  own  use 
and  for  trading  purposes. 

Raw  materials. — Various  kinds  of  grasses  are  gathered,  and  after 
being  dried,  are  dyed  and  trimmed  to  finished  dimensions.  Spruce 
roots  are  boiled  until  they  become  pliable,  beaten  with  sticks,  and  the 
fibres  picked  into  threads.  The  cedar  bark  gathered  for  industrial 
purposes  is  from  the  inside  of  the  outer  bark,  that  for  food  being 
scraped  from  the  trunk  itself.  The  former  is  soaked  in  water  for 
several  days,  then  beaten  to  make  it  pliable  enough  to  erable  it  to  be 
stripped  into  shreds.  Fig.  179/  is  ^  bone  barkscraper  used  in  removing 
the  bark  from  trees,  in  scraping  it  down,  and  in  the  preliminary  procesK 

-311 


1  ~> 


II- 


;* 

;% 


■I 


^^:'.< 


U2 


iBEPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


•  * 

of  backj^xtg  it^'inr))icfa,  with  the  beating  it  receives  from  a  bone  wallet 
sach  as'' showji/in  Fig.  179»i,  separates  it  into  fibres.  These  two 
specimeoik^e  jn'^he  Emmons  Gollection. 


(Tliniit..  ,Si|wnoDs  (VI1l<H!;ion. ) 


Fig.  ITBm. 
Babk  Beater. 

(Ttinflit.    Enimons  Collection.) 


Other  )i!iuds  of  vegetable  fibre,  such  as  wild  nettle  and  a  species  of 
wild  heti»]^-are  beaten  ou  the  rocks,  shredded,  and  span  with  a  rade  dis- 
taflf  and  spind^.e'.juto  a  strong  twine  or  thread.  Wood  for  canoes, 
houses,  Qdl{iran£|jpaddi'3s,  dishes,  masks,  helmets,  f  ear-shafts,  arrows, 
floats,  hooks,  e^.^  is  also  gotten  out  dnriug  the  summer  season  and 
roughly  worked -tip  in  camp,  the  finishing  being  often  left  for  winter 
leisure.  At  this*%ime  also  the  trading  is  done  to  obtain  supplies  of 
cloth,  horn,  copper,  shell,  etc.,  for  the  accessories  of  costumes  for  ordi- 
nary and  ceremonial  occasions.  Fibre  of  cedar  bark,  hemp,  and  goat's 
wool  are  spun  into  threads  for  use  in  weaving  the  blankets  for  which 
certain  tribes  are  famous. 

Ropes  and  cords. — The  simplest  cords  or  lines  are  those  of  kelp,  some- 
times single,  sometimes  laid  up  into  two  or  more  strands  for  additional 
strength,  as  rope.  The  neatest  ropes  and  cords,  uowever,  are  made 
from  strauds  of  spruce  root  or  bark  fibre,  the  small  stuff  being  dexter- 
ously twisted  between  the  hand  and  thigh.  The  cordage  for  raising 
large  timbers  and  columns  is  regularly  laid  up  and  twisted  like  our 
owii  ropes.  A  few  of  the  most  important  uses  to  which  the  different 
varieties  of  native  cordage  are  put  may  be  enumerated  as  follows: 
Warp  for  blankets,  fishing  lines,  canoe  anchor  lines,  sheets  for  sails, 
lashings  for  boxes,  grommets  for  beads  of  chisels  and  wedges,  head- 
dresses, girdles,  guys  for  erecting  columns,  and  difiping  lines  for  turning 
the  smoke-hole  shatters  of  the  houses. 

Mats. — These  are  made  principally  of  bark  and  a^e  used  for  bedding, 
for  sails,  and  as  covers  for  canoe  cargoes.  The  coarser  kinds  are  thrown 
over  the  canoes  to  protect  them  from  the  weather  and  as  screens  for 
building  temporary  camps  at  night  in  traveling.  The  use  of  mats,  how- 
ever, for  sails  and  tents  has  given  place  to  the  substitute  already  men- 
tioned— cotton  sheeting.  Amongst  the  Tlingit,  on  ceremonial  occasions, 
the  chiefs  were  carried  on  mats  borne  by  the  slaves  from  the  canoes  to 
the  houses  or  in  embarking  in  state.  Matting  from  the  different  parts 
of  the  northwest  coast  can  be  distinguished  by  the  pattern  and 
texture.    The  method  of  weaving  is  that  shown  in  Fig.  o8e,  Plato  xii. 


THE   INDIANS   OP   THE  NORTHWEST   COAST. 


313 


In  general,  the  mats  of  the  soatheru  Indians  are  made  of  soft,  red,  plia- 
ble cedar  bark,  while  those  of  the  northern  are  stiffer,  coarser,  lighter 
in  color,  and  bordered  with  black  strips  interwoven  into  the  texture  of 
the  fabric. 

Baskets. — ^The  most  expert  tribes  in  basket  making  are  found  at  the 
extremes  of  the  northwest  coast.  In  the  south  the  Makah  excel  all 
others;  in  the  north  the  Ohilkat.  The  method  of  weaving  is,  however,  > 
radically  different.  Amongst  the  Makah  and  other  tribes  of  the  Waka- 
shan  stock  the  pattern  is  that  shown  in  Fig.  168,  Plate  xxxii,  described 
by  Prof.  O.  T.  Mason  as  follows : 

It  msy  be  called  the  "fish-trap  Btyle,"  since  withont  doubt  thi.  finer  basketry  is  the 
line<)il  descendant  of  the  rude  wicker  fish-trap.  Imagine  a  numl^er  of  stakes  driven 
into  the  ground  pretty  close  together.  A  horizontal  pule  is  laiu  against  them  in  the 
rear,  and  by  the  wrappings  of  a  withe  around  the  pole  and  each  upiight  stake  diag- 
onally on  the  outside  and  vertically  on  the  inside  a  spiral  fastening  is  produced.  • 
This  stitch  crosses  the  two  fundamentals  in  front  at  an  angle  and  the  horizontal  frame 
piece  in  the  rear  at  right  angles,  or  vice  versa.* 

Patterns  in  geometrical  figures  are  worked  on  the  baskets  in  black, 
yellow,  drab,  red,  etc.,  in  dyed  straws.  Amongst  the  Haida  and  the 
Ghilcat  and  northern  Tlingit  generally  the  method  of  weaving  basketry 
is  by  that  known  as  "twining;"  that  is,  twining  two  woof  strands 
around  a  series  of  warp  strands.  This  is  illustrated  in  detail  in  Figs.  37o 
and  37d,' Plate  xii,  which  represent  the  same  method  used  amongst 
these  Indians  for  rain  hats.  Different  varieties  of  Haida  and  Tliugit 
baskets  are  shown  in  Plates  xxxvi  and  xxxvii,  and  Figs.  180  to  189, 
inclusive.  Fig.  180  of  the  first-named  plate  represents  a  Tlingit 
"  coiled  "  basket,  of  which  Fig.  185  is  another  variety.  This  method  of 
construction  differs  from  the  "  twined'-  basketry.  The  bottom  ot  this 
type  is  made  of  a  number  of  straight  rods  sewed  into  a  rectangular  mat, 
around  which  the  sides  are  built  up  by  coiling.  "  The  mat-like  bottom 
is  ornamented  by  sewing  on  straws  longitudinally  with  stitciies  wide 
apart,  so  as  to  show  a  checker  pattern  of  straw  and  stitching.  This 
method  of  ornamenting  the  bottom  is  often  pursued  over  the  whole 
external  surface  of  the  basket."  t  Figs.  185  and  186  are  from  Pro- 
fessor Mason's  article  on  basketry  just  quoted.  Fig.  186  shows  the 
method  of  covering  up  the  coiled  work  of  the  sides  by  an  ornamental 
arrangement  of  bark  and  straw.  The  concealed  texture  is  "  built  up  by 
whipping  a  coil  of  rushes  or  small  splints  with  splint  or  birch  bark. 
•  •  •  The  imbricated  effect  upon  the  surface  is  produced  by  sewing 
on  little  loops  of  bark  and  straw,  white  and  brown,  with  blind  stitches, 
in  such  a  way  as  to  conceal  the  manner  of  attachment."t  (See  Fig. 
186.)  Fig.  180  is  a  top  view  and  Fig.  186  is  a  side  view  of  this  type  of 
coiled  basketry.    Four  styles  of  twined  baskets  of  ornamental  pattern 

*  Smithsonian  Report,  1884,  Part  ii,  p.  297-2i)d.    Mason.    Aboriginal  Basket-work, 
t  SmlthsoniaQ  Report,  Part  ii,  1884.    Mason.    Aboriginal  Basket-work.    Plate  vi. 


I  ft 


s  ■■■  ■ 
4  '■' 


il-;     !■ 


A''    ': 

1: 


A' 


i: 


1  (• 


314 


REPORT    OF    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


are  shown  in  Figs.  181,  182,  184,  and  189.  These  are  made  from  the 
fibre  of  the  spruce  root  and  so  delicately  twined  as  to  be  watertight. 
The  bottom  is  roughly  made,  the  warp  l)eing  of  splints  of  sprace  root 
radiating  from  the  center,  and  the  woof  of  twine  woven  in  the  plain 


==r=^^: 


-\ 


b 


■iSm?&im^W 


ill-- 5=-;   ..gi- 


IWilliilM'^ 


IIUPMH    I! 


ipUIBE  ^^^ 


§ 


Vlu.  185. 
Coiled  Basket. 

(Cat  No.  6013&.  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tina*  imlium,  8.  E.  Alaak*     Collected  by  John  J.  McLean.) 

color  of  the  material.  The  cylindrical  portion  above  the  bottom  is  also 
in  the  plain  color  of  the  sprace  root,  but  the  "twining''  is  that  of  Fig. 
37r,  Plate  xii.  Bands  of  red  and  black  are  woven  into  the  structure 
for  ornamental  purposes,  the  strands  being  colored  on  both  sides. 


n 


Fig.  186. 
Detail  of  Fio.  18S. 

*<  Afterwards  little  squares  or  other  plain  figures  are  sewetl  on  in 
"a^'osene,''  that  is,  only  half  way  through,  giving  the  most  varied  effect 
on  the  outside,  while  the  inside  shows  only  the  plain  colors  and  the 
red  and  black  bands."*    In  recent  years  the  most  gaudy  and  brilliant 

*  Biuitbsoniau  Report,  1884,  Part  ii,  Maaon,  Aborigiual  Basket-work,  i>.  Ii95. 


\ 


h 


ft  t 


1  J 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  XXXVI. 


r-so  i) 

Tlingit  and  Haida  Basket-work. 

Fig.  180.  Coiled  Basket.  Made  by  whipping  a  coil  of  rushes  or  small  .splints 
with  splints  or  birch  Iwirk  to  form  the  sides,  which  are  built  np  on  a 
mat-like  bottom.  The  foundation  work  isconceakHl  lieneath  an  imbri- 
cation in  loops  of  bark  and  straw  sewed  on  with  blind  stitches.  Col- 
lected at  Hoonyah,  but  the  work  telongs  to  the  mainland  aiid  the 
interior.  Cat.  No.  60235.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tinne  Indians.  Hoonyali, 
Alaska.     Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 

J^'ig.  181.  Twined  Basket.  Of  spnioe-rcMrt.  Geometric  patterns  worked  on  the 
outside  with  colored  s|>ruce-root  and  dyed  wild  wheat  straw.  Cover 
handle  contains  small  pebbles  to  form  a  rattle.  Metlunl  of  twining 
shown  in  Fig.  .37/>,  Plate  XII.  Cat.  No.  20715,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tlingit, 
Alaska.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  182.  Twined  Basket.  Same  style  as  Fig.  180.  Cat.  No.  7H442.  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.    Collected  by  James  (J.  Swan. 

Fig,  183.  Twined  Basket  Mat.  Of  spruce-root.  Eurojiean  pattern.  Cat.  No. 
20727,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tlingit  Indians.  Sitka.  Colleited  by  James  (J. 
Swan. 

Fig.  184.  Twined  Wallet.  Cat.  No.  1865,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Chilkat  Indians.  Alaska. 
Collected  by  W.  F,  Tolmie. 


^ 


(■■ 


A 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


Plate  XXXVI. 


Tlingit  and  Haida  Basket-work. 


% 


A  I  J 


f  1 


-A 


T- 


^ 


' 


-\ 


r-' 


^ 


n 


■■HP 


I 


;  I 


I  J 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XXXVII. 

GENERAL  TYPE  OF  HAIDA  AND  TUNGIT  OPFN-WORK  TWINED  BASKETRY. 

From  Smithsonian  Report,  1884,  Part  II,  Plate  VIII. 

Fie  190   The  method  of  open  twined  weaving  is  shown  in  Fig.  h.    Hpnu-e-root  ie 
Fig.  m).   llu  1  ^^  .^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^^  ^^^^^  eedai-baik  replaces  .t  u,  tlie  south 

The  handle  is  a  twine  of  spruce-root  fastened  on  by  weaving  in  and  out 
^  t  e  side,  the  lower  end  knotted.  The  fastening  off  at  the  rim  is 
lie  by  bending  down  the  war.  threads  externally  and  sewing  them 
rt  t  'wth  one  row  of  twining,  fat.  No.  H8..C4,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Ha.da  In- 
fC  Qu"n  Charlotte  Islands.  British  Columbia.  Collected  by  James 
(i.  Swan. 


V 


J(s> 


fiaporlof  Nttionil  Museum,  1888.— Niblack, 


Plate  XXXVII. 


I  1',   ' 


'■  f 


i;:    '. 


II  f 


■i.    ,! 


I 

i 

I   ■; 
( -  j  • 


il 


General  Type  of  Haida  and  Tlingit  Open-work  Twined  Basketry. 


11 


CO 


i    I    ' 


^ 


ht  ■  «i 


^ 


THE    INDIANS   OF  THE    NORTHWEST   00A8T. 


315 


i 


colored  wild  wheat  strawM  arc  useil  in  tliis  relief  oroatnentation.    The 

borders  at  the  top  of  the  baskets  are 
formed  by  turning  under  the  warp 
threads  and  catting  them  off.  Cir- 
cular covers,  likewise  ornamented, 
are  fitted  to  baskets  of  the  type  of 
Figs.  181  and  182.  These  frequently 
have  an  ingeniously  woven  compart- 
ment in  the  top  in  which  small  peb- 
bles are  enclosed,  and  which  rattle 
tvhen  shaken.  Fig.  187  illustrates 
the  metho<l  of  making  this  style  of 
basket  amongst  the  Haida,  taken 
from  a  sketch  in  Professor  Mason's 


^  I  ii 


4^ 


Fig.  t87. 
Haida  Basket,  Srt  Up. 

(Cat.  No.  889M.  V.  S.  N.  M.      M:i><»elt    lii.li'in-.  Qili-'n 
Charlutti!  liltnd,  R.  C.    (^nllntpit  by  Jn-.  <i.  !<«:ill. ) 


Fig.  188. 
Detaim  of  Fin.  187. 

article  on  "Aboriginal  Basket-work " 
already  referred  to.    Of  it  he  says: 

The  mnttiod  of  manufacture  of  Haida 
twined  basketry  as  shown  by  Mr.  J.  G.  Swan 
in  a  speoimen  collected  expressly  for  the 
National  Museum  (Fig.  187,  No.  88956. 
Masset,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British 
Columbia).  Mr.  Swan  says:  "This style 
of  making  baskets  differs  from  that  of 
Cape  Flattery.  There  the  women  sit  on 
the  ground  and  weave  baskets  and  mats, 
both  of  which  rest  on  the  ground.  With 
the  Haidas  the  mats  are  suspended  on  a 
frame  and  the  baskets  supported  on  a  stick 
as  in  the  figure.  The  black  color  of  the 
apruoe  root  used  in  making  ornamental 
patterns  is  produced  by  soaking  it  in  the 
mud.  Fig.  188  shows  the  bottom  of  the 
basket  made  by  the  twining  process.  The 
border  of  the  bottom  is  marked  off  by  a 
row  of  double  weaving  or  a  twine  built 
outside  the  body  of  the  basket."* 


m 


*  Smithsonian  Ke|iort,  18H4,  Part  ii,  p.  297.    Aboriginal  Basket-work,  Mason. 


316 


BEPUKT   OP   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


The  principal  differeuce  between  the  styles  of  baskets  shown  in  Figs. 
181  a^d  182  is  in  the  size,  the  former  being  broader  and  flatter  than  the 
latter,  which  is  about  9  inches  deep  and  6^  inches  in  diameter.  Fig.  184 
represents  a  12  by  12  inch  twined  circular  basket  made  by  t'ae  Chilcat 
Indians  with  embroidered  design  on  the  exterior.  Fig.  180  represents 
a  basket  wallet  of  the  same  type  as  the  above,  but  flattened  into  the 
shape  in  which  they  are  usually  carried.  The  colors  used  in  the 
ornamentc^ion  are  bb.ck  and  red.  This  style  of  basketry,  as  all  others, 
is  copied  by  the  Haida,  who,  however,  use  gaudier  colors  and  are  not 
quite  so  expert  as  their  northern  Tlingit  neighbors.  The  specimen 
illustrated  in  Fig.  189  is  No.  21560,  U.  S.  National  Museum.    Fig.  190a, 


(I 


Fig.  180. 
TwiNKD  AMU  Ehbhuidrhbd  Baskrt  Wallet, 

(Cat  No.  allWO,  V.  S.  N.  M.    Chilkat  Indiana,  Alaaka.     Ccillectcil  by  Dr.  J.  B.  White,  U.  8.  A.) 

Plate  XXXYII,  represents  a  general  cype  of  both  Haida  and  Tlingit 
open-work  twined  basket,  the  details  of  the  twine  weaving  being  tchown 
in  6  of  v^e  same  plate.  This  is  reproduced  from  Professor  O.  T.  Maso.i's 
artic^a  on  "Aboriginal  Basket-work"  already  referred  to. 

Dishes. — In  nothing  more  than  in  tbeir  wooden  and  horn  dishes  have 
these  Indians  been  conservative.  Portlock  and  Dixou  (1787),  Marohand 
(1791),  and  Lisiansky  (1805),  all  describe  the  same  types  of  household 
utensils  as  are  found  to-day  in  this  region.  A  few  of  the  general  va- 
rieties of  ;?ooden  dishes  are  shown  in  Plates  xxxviii,  xxxix,  and  XL. 
These  are  usually  carved  from  blocks  of  spruce  wood,  ornamented  with 
rows  of  shells,  and  have  in  more  or  less  elaborate  detail  the  totem  of 
the  owner  etched  or  carved  upon  them.  Often  the  car\ing  represents 
some  legend  of  the  coast;  again,  a  mythical  animal.    With  regard 


4 


( 


4 


ii  ■ 


i       * 


5 


EXPLANATION   OF    PLATE   XXXVIII. 


k  ff /- 


Tlingit  Ceremonial  and  Household  Food-dishes. 

Fig.  191.  Feast  Dish.     A  deep  wooden  trougli  used  by  the  chiefs  in  tlie  feasts  ac- 
companying their  numerous  eereinonials.    The  edge  is  inlaid  with  a 
double  row  of  ojiercula  and  the  ends  faintly  etched  and  painted  in  a 
totemic  design  in  red  and  black.    Cat.  No.  OOlTiH,  U.  H.  N.  M.    Tlingit 
Indians,  Sitka,  Alaska.    Collected  by  Jolm  J.  McLean. 
Fig.  192.  Feast   Dish.     Flat,   shallow  vessel  of  same  character  and  locality  as 
above.    These  are  the  extremes  of  feiwt  dislies  in  depth,  style  of  orna- 
mentation, and  shai)e.    The  carved  figure  on  each  end  rejiresenta  the 
eagle.     These  two  types  are  found  also  amoiigst  the  Haida  and  Tsiin- 
fihian.    Cat.  No.  (i016T.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Sitka,  Alaska.     Collected  by  John 
J.  McLean. 
Food  Dishes.     Fig.  193.  Cat.  No.  74401;  Fig.  194,  Cat.  No.  74425;  Fig.  19r»,  Cat. 
No.  74402:  Fig.  196,  Cat.  No.  74414;  Fig.  197,  Cat.  No.  74412.     All  from  Tlingit  In- 
dians, Alaska.     Collected  b}'  John  J.  McLean. 


if 

0 


H 


^- 


Tr 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.-Niblack. 


Plate  XXXVIII. 


U 


Ml 


■m 


Tlinqit  Ceremonial  and  Household  Food-dishes. 


I 


. 


n  ■ 


\r 


,  ■  { 


I 


V 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  XXXIX. 


Types  of  Wooden  Household  Utensils  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  198.  Tkeasure  ok  Trinket  Box.    Of  wood,  with  ornamental  top  and  handle 

ot  cord.     Some  of  these  ho.\es  are  as  large  as  2  by  3  feet.     Cat.  No. 

60170,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Hootznahoo  Indians,  Alaska.     Collected  by  John 

J.  McLean. 
P"'ig.  199.  Food  Dish.     Wtmd,  with  rounded  sides;  totemic  carvings.     Side  view. 

C(;mi>are  Fig.   195.   Plate  XXXVIIL     Cat.   No.  89ir)B.   tJ.  S.  N.   M. 

Haida  Indians,  Queen  Cliarlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.     Collected 

by  James  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  2(H).  Food    Dish.      Ornamented  with    ojiercula.     Com[)ave    Fig.    196,   Plate 

XXXVIIL     Cat.  No.  67936.  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tlingit   Indians,  Alaska. 

Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 
Fig.  201.  Ladle.    Cat.  No.  6016.5.  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tlingit  Indians.  Sitka.  Ala.ska.    Col- 
lected by  John  J.  McLean. 
Fig.  202.  Bowl.    Cat.  No.  6016.').  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tlingit  Indians,  Alaska.     Collected 

by  John  J.  Mcl^ean. 


ReDortof  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack, 


Plate  xxxix. 


,8T. 

and  handle 
.  Cat.  No. 
pd  by  John 

Side  view, 

.  S.  N.  M. 

Collected 

196.   Plate 
ns,  Alaska. 

ia.ska.     C'ol- 

toliected 


Types  of  Wooden  Household  Utensils  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


1 


H 


■ 

1 

i 
-     U 
r    i' 
i 

ll 

1 

11 


,    i 

,          ,' 

u 


'«i 


EXPLANATION  OF   PLATE  XL. 


Food-dishes  from  the  NcrtTHWEsr  Coast. 

Fig.  203.  Oil  Bowl.  Design,  a  sm-guU.  Cat.  No.  ^08.50.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Stikine  In- 
dians, Fort  Wrangell.  Ala.ska.    {yoliectt'd  by  James  (i.  Swan. 

Fig.  204.  Bowl.  Design,  Olalla.  the  mountain  demon,  and  Kaltz-da.  the  crow. 
Cat.  No,  89136,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians.  Skidegate.  British  Colum- 
bia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan.  , 

Fig.  205.  Bowl.  Of  wood.  Design,  a  version  of  same  legend  a?i  tluit  of  Fig.  204. 
Cat.  No.  89134,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians.  Skidegate.  British  Cohnn- 
bia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  206.  Food  Dish.  Design,  a  seal  and  legendary  carving.  Ornamented  witli 
opercula  of  shells.  Cat.  No.  6T902,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tling=t  Indians.  Sitka, 
Alaska.    Collected  by  John  J,  McLean. 

Fig.  207.  Bowl.  Of  wood.  Handles  represent  human  faces.  Cat.  No.  20858,  U. 
S.  N.  M.  Stikine  Indians,  Fort  Wrangell.  Alaska.  Collected  by  James 
G.  Swan. 

Fig.  208.  Dish.  Of  wood.  Design.  Tsing,  the  l)eaver.  Cat.  No.  89133,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians,  Skidegate,  Britisli  Columbia.  Collected  by  James  (}. 
Swan. 

Fig.  209.  Dish.  Desfgn.  Skam-son,  the  sparrowhawk.  Cat.  No.  888«'2,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians,  Masset.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  Britisli  (Jolumbia. 
Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


Report  nf  National  Museum,  1888.     Niblack. 


PLATE  XL. 


■ 


'.'■'H 


JliJ^i 


Food-dishes  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


f"  ^1 


THK  INDIANS   OP   THE   N0BTUWK8T  COASr. 


317 


to  the  materials  of  which  these  native  dishes  are  made,  they  may  be' 
divided  into  woqden  and  horn.  In  shapes  they  may  be  classified  as 
boat  shaped,  flat,  square,  round,  spherical,  oblong,  and  tub-shaped. 
They  are  all  essentially  food  dishes,  but  one  or  two  exceptions  will  here- 
after be  noted.  In  the  large  feasts  given  by  the  chiefs,  ceremonial  dishes 
are  used,  di£fering  in  size  and  character  from  the  ordinary  household 
variety.  Figs.  191  and  193,  Plate  xxxviii,  represent  the  two  extremes 
of  this  type  of  dish,  the  former  being  deep,  painted  in  totemic  design, 
and  ornamented  with  oporcula,  while  the  latter  is  shallow  and  deeply 
carved  but  not  otherwise  ornamented.  Figs.  195  and  199  represent 
another  type  of  ordinary  food  dish  with  rounded  sides  and  elaborate 
relief  carving,  the  former  being  a  top  and  t!  ti  latter  a  side  view. 
Other  varieties  are  discussed  in  connection  wiili  the  explanations  of 
illustrations. 

Fig.  198  is  a  carved  wooden  treasure-box.  The  larger  boxes  of 
this  type  are  used  for  transportation,  and  storage  cases  for  dog- 
fish oils,  dried  fish,  and  other  food  supplies,  and  are  often  as  large  as 
24  inches  in  height  by  14  inches  in  breadth.  These  must  be  distin- 
guished from  the  household  boxes  used  for  the  storage  of  goods  and 
chattels.  These  latter  are  lighter  and  more  beautifully  carved  and 
painted.  The  former  are  heavier  and  clumsier,  and,  although  carved, 
are  generally  soiled  with  oil  and  grease.  It  is  in  this  style  of  box  that 
the  Indians  transport  eulachon  and  other  kiud^  of  oil,  grease,  or  fats 
in  quantities  of  100  pounds  or  more.  The  chests  or  household  boxes 
are  described  in  another  paragraph.  Boxes  of  a  shape  corresponding 
to  Figs.  195  and  199,  also  used  for  food  and  supplies  of  grease,  are 
often  as  large  as  20  inches  in  length  by  12  inches  in  height.  Fig.  209, 
Plate  XL,  represents  a  tub  shaped  dish,  ornamented  with  a  totemic  de> 
sign.  A  specimen  of  this  kind  in  the  U.  S.  N^ational  Museum  measures 
32  inches  in  length  and  17  inches  in  extreme  height.  It  may  be  noted 
in  passing  that  these  native  wooden  dishes  are  now  being  rapidly  su- 
perseded by  cheap  earthernware  purchased  from  the  traders.  Dishes 
and  spoons  have  been  made  on  the  coast  from  the  horns  of  the  mountain 
sheep  and  goat  from  time  inj memorial.  The  Haida  have  excelled  all 
others,  however,  in  the  art  of  carving  in  general  and  inlaying  in  shell, 
yet  curiously  enough  they  have  to  get  the  horn  by  trade  with  the 
Tsimshian  and  Tliugit  on  the  mainland,  as  the  goats  and  sheep  are  only 
found  in  the  loftiest  parts  of  the  main  coast  ranges.  Fig.  217  repre- 
sents an  end  view  of  an  elaborately  carved  Haida  horn  dish,  of  which  a 
side  view  is  not  unlike  Fig.  209.  A  top  view  of  a  similar  dish  is  shown 
in  Fig.  222. 

Spoons  and  ladles. — Plates  XLi  and  XLii  illustrate  a  sufficient  variety 
of  spoons  to  give  an  idea  of  how  elaborately  so  simple  a  household 
article  as  this  is  carved  and  ornamented.  The  first  mentioned  plate 
shows  a  variety  of  horn  spoons.  Fig.  218  being  a  representative  one  in 


■! 


t^i 


i 

■ 

i 

•'■  '. 

'y  i 

M 

318 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  18«8. 


point  of  (jize,  althougu  it  is  severely  plain  and  auortiamented.  Looking 
at  a  ben  of  a  mountain  sh«;ep  it  seems  difficult  to  conceive  how  the  Indians 
can  get  so  large  a  spoon  out  of  such  a  curled  and  uapromising  looking 
object.  The  bowl  of  the  spoon  comes  from  the  largest  part;  the  handle 
runs  the  full  length  to  the  tip,  and  is  afterwards  straightened  out  by 
steaming  it.  In  general,  spoons  are  shaped  by  steaming  in  a  wooden 
mould  made  in  two  pieces,  and  scored  out  inside  to  the  required  shape. 
This  type  of  great  horn  spoon  is  usually  elaborately  and  deeply  carved 
in  totemio  design,  and  sometimes  inlaid  with  abalone  shell.  They  are 
preserved  as  heirlooms  in  the  familiei:)  and  considered  of  great  value. 
A  .lot  uncommon  type  of  spoon  is  shown  in  Figs.  210,  212,  213,  and 
221,  the  bowl  being  from  the  horn  of  a  mountain  sheep  and  the  handle  a 
mountain  goat  horn,  elaborately  carved  in  a  legendary  or  totemic  de- 
sign. The  handle  is  very  ingeniously  secured  to  the  bowl  by  n  sort  of 
tongue  and  groove  rivetted  through  with  copper.  The  signiflcance  of 
the  carvings  on  the  handles  of  those  shown  in  the  plate,  as  far  as  known 
t<)  the  writer,  is  f;iven  in  the  explanation  of  the  figures.  The  spoons 
shown  in  Figs.  211,  214,  and  219  are  made  entirely  of  the  horns  of  the 
mountain  goat,  the  bowls  being  formed  by  splitting  the  horn  at  the 
base  and  rolling  it  out  flat  by  steaming  and  bending  it.  Fig.  220  is  a 
plain  sheep-horn  spoon,  similar  in  shape  to  the  wooden  one  shown  in 
Fig.  238.  The  long,  flat  putty-kuife  or  spft-tula-shaped  obj'^ats  shown 
in  Plate  xlii  are  berry  spoons,  or  ceremonial  feast  spoons,  mit'e  of  wood 
and  carved  or  painted  in  totemic  design  These  are  shown  in  different 
views,  well  illustrating  the  variety  of  shapes.  Fig.  224  of  the  pre- 
ceding plate  represents  a  pair  of  spoons  of  this  type  carved  from  whale- 
bone aud  obtained  at  Sitka,  Alaska.  A  most  elaborately  carved  pair  of 
wooden  ceremonial  spoonij  in  the  collection  resemble  the  ovca  or 
whale-killer.  Other  types  of  ordinary  wooden  spoons  are  ahoTvn  in 
Figs.  233,  237,  238,  and  239.  Fig.  274,  Plate  Li,  illustrates  a  wooden 
ceremonial  spoon  of  enormous  si''!;e  found  amongst  the  Haida,  the 
bowl  having  a  capacity  of  Iwo  quarts.  This  is  used  in  the  ceremonies 
attending  the  initiation  of  young  men  into'the  responsibilities  of 
rank,  when  the  novice  must  publicly  drink  to  the  last  drop  the  contents 
of  the  bowl  consisting  of  fish  oil,  without  removing  the  spoon  from 
his  lips.  The  exact  nature  of  thisceremony  is  not  understood  by  the 
writer,  but  this  use  for  such  a  large  spoon  has  been  explained  to  him 
by  several  people  well  versed  in  Haida  customs.  Fig.  201,  Plate 
XXXIX,  represents  a  carvetl  wooden  oil  ladle  or  spoon. 

Bouseliold  boxes  or  chestn. — These  are  for  tiie  stowage  or  ]>acking  away 
of  ceremonial  paraphernalia  and  the  goods  and  chattels  of  the  household. 
They  vary  in  size  and  shape,  as  shown  in  Plate  Li. 

Tub  ublong  chests  are  simply  gieat  wooden  boxes  with  heavy  bottoms 
and  peculiarly  shaped  lids.  The  sides  of  these  are  made  either  in  two 
or  in  four  pieces.  When  made  in  two  pieces  a  thin  wide  pieco  of  cedar 
is  bent  at  right  angles  by  means  of  hot  water,  forming  a  side  and  an  end, 


iOoking 
[ndiauH 
tookiug 
handle 
out  by 
woodea 
[  shape, 
carved 
hey  are 
t  value. 
13,  and 
landle  a 
ijaic  de- 
sort  of 
ance  of 
I  known 
spoons 
ft  of  the 
I  at  the 
220  is  a 
10 wn  in 
i  shown 
of  wood 
different 
tho  pre- 
n  whale- 
d  pair  of 
ovca  or 
howu  in 
wooden 
Ida,  tho 
remouies 
ilities  of 
contents 
)on  from 
kI  by  the 
1  to  him 
)1,  Plate 


S'tl 


I    1 


ing  away 
uusehoUl, 


r  bottoms 
ler  in  two 
^  uf  cedar 
id  an  end, 


EXPLANATION   OF    PLATE    XL!. 


Horn  and  Whalebone  Spoons  and  Dishes  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  210.  Sheep-horn  Spoon.  Handle  of  goat  liorn;  totemic  design:  "  The  killer 
whale  and  the  owl."  Cat.  No.  89173,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Skidegate,  British 
Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  412.  Horn  Spoon.  Totemic  designs:  "  The  Iwar  and  the  hunter,"  and  above, 
"  The  raven  and  tlie  man."  Cat.  No.  89174,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Skidegate, 
British  Cohimbia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  313.  Horn  Spoon.  Totemic  de.sign8:  "The  bear  and  tlie  hunter,"  and  "The 
mountain  demon  and  tlie  frog."  Cat.  No.  8916.%,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Skide- 
gate, British  Cohimbia.     Collecte<l  liy  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  214.  Horn  Spoon.  Both  pai-ts  of  goat  s  horn.  Cat.  No.  88710,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Masset,  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  21.5.  Sheep-horn  Dish.  Style  of  carving  resembles  that  of  Eskimo.  No  num- 
ber.   Sitka^  Alaska. 

Fig.  316.  Sheep-horn  Bowi,.  Less  arti.stic  than  those  of  the  Haida.  Cat.  No. 
75436,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tlingit,  Sitka,  Alaska.  Collecte.1  by  John  J.  Mc- 
Lean. 

Fig.  317.  Sheep-horn  Bowl.  Carved  ami  inlaid  witli  haliotis.  CJat.  No.  30sr)6,  IT. 
S.  N.  M.  Masset,  (^ueen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  218.  Sheep-horn  Bowl.  Made  from  a  single  horn  by  steaming.  Cat.  No. 
88866,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Ma-sset.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  British  Columbia, 
t  -ollected  bj'  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  219.  Goat-horn  Spoon.  Cat.  No.  74697,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Sitka,  Alaska.  Col- 
lected by  John  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  230.  Spoon.  Of  mountain-sheej*  horn.  Cat.  No.  74283.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Col- 
lected by  John  J.  McLean. 

Fig.  231.  Horn  Spoon.  Legend:  "  The  bear  and  the  hunter."  Compare  210,  212, 
213.  Cat.  No.  KOH'mc,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Mas.set.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands, 
British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  232.  Sheep-horn  Bowl.  Cat.  No.  23400,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida,  Queen  Char- 
lotte Islands,  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  223.  Sheep-horn  Dish.  Cat.  No.  SSS.'iS,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Miwset.  Queen  Char- 
lotte Islands.  British  Colmnbia.     Collect«>d  by  James  Ci.  Swan. 

Fig.  224.  FiATiNO  Sticks.  Of  whal  i.one.  Cat.  No.  H944  (1  and  2).  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Sitka,  Alaska.    Collectctl  by  Dr.  A.H.  Hoff.  U.  S.  Army. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblick. 


P.'JVTE  XLI. 


■    I 


: 


M 


'i 


■  ''I 


I  •■' 


« 


Horn  and  Whalebone  Spoons  and  Dishes  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


■ 
1 

1 

■r-1 

'I 
H 


1 
i 


Ij! 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE  XLII. 


Wooden  Spoons  from  the  Northwest  Coast, 


Figs 

.227. 

Figs 

.231, 

Figs 

.226, 

Fig. 

233. 

Fig. 

387. 

Fig. 

238. 

Fig. 

239. 

229,  230,  236,  and  240.  Spoons.    Of  wood.     Used  especially  for  berries  by 

all  Northwest  Indian  tribes.    Cat.  Nos.  20820-25.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Kake 

Indians  (Tlingits)  Alaska.     Collecied  by  James  G.  Swan, 
232.  and  235.  Spoons.     Of  wood;  painted.     Cat.  Nos.  1625:^-  "55,  U.  S.  N. 

M.    Tsimshian  Indians,  British  Columbia.    Collected  by  Dr.  W.  H, 

Dall. 
227,  238.  and  234.  Spoons.    Of  wood;  plain.    Cat.  Nos.  60145.  60153,  and 

1147,  U.  S.  N,  M.     Kootznahoo  Indians,  Alaska.     Collected  by  Jolin  J. 

McLean  and  James  G.  Swan. 
Oil  Ladle.     Wood.     Design,  a  raven.    Cat.  No.  60161,  U.  S.   N.  M. 

Tlingit  Indians,  Alaska.    Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 
Spoon  or  Ladle.    Wootl.    Cat.  No.  74309,  U.  S.  N.  M.    Tlingit,  Alaska. 

CoUecteti  by  John  J.  McLean. 
Spoon.     Wood;   plain.    Cat.   No.  700,    U.  S.  N.    M.     Northwest  coast. 

Collected  by  George  Gibbs. 
Spoon.     Cawed  w<kk1.  inlaid  with  haliotis  shell.     Cat.  No.  33393,  U.  S.  N. 

M.    Tlingit  Indians,  Alaska.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


■  I 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


Plate  XLII. 


berries  by 
M.    Kake 

5,  U.  S.  N. 
Dr.  W.  H. 

60153.  and 
by  Jolui  J. 

.  S.   N.  M. 

jit,  Alaska. 

west  coast. 

193,  U.  S.  N, 


M 


Wooden  Spoons  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


ii^! 


(i. 


it 


K.  rl 


EXPLANATION   OF  PLATE  XLIII. 

Household  Box;  also  used  as  a  Depository  for  the  cremated  Ashes  of  the  Dead. 


Fig.  242.  Cedar  Box.  Totemic  design,  Hooits,  the  bear.  Tlie  lid  iH  made  of  a 
slab  of  wood  beveled  on  the  under  side  to  fit  over  the  box.  The 
sides  are  made  of  two  pieces,  one  being  the  end  iind  the  other  a  single 
piece  l)ent  twice  at  right  angles  to  form  the  two  sides  and  the  other 
end.  There  is  very  little  api)eiirance  of  breaking  at  the  two  corners. 
The  joints  at  the  other  two  corners  are  pegged  together.  The  l)ottom 
is  made  of  a  separate  piece  of  wood,  so  that  altogether  there  are  four 
pieces  used  in  the  construction  o  the  box.  This  type,  liesides  being 
used  for  various  household  purposes,  is  also  the  kind  used  amongst  the 
Tlingit  as  a  deix)sitory  of  the  ashes  of  the  dead.  Cat.  No.  7475.5,  U.  S. 
N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  l^ritish  Columbia. 
Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


^ 


Report  of  National  Muieum,  1888.— Niblcck, 


Plate  XLIII. 


Household  Box  ;  also  used  as  a  Depository  for  the  cremated  Ashes  of  the  Dead. 


I'll 


'II 


1  / 


;!   r 


B-i  i^  il 


II 


'  l-\ 


!   ■ 


'    I 


I! 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE  XLiV. 

Haida  carved  Box  of  black  Slate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia. 

Fig.  24b.  Carved  Box.  Of  black  slate.  On  the  lid,  a  top  view  of  which  is  shown 
alwve  the  box,  t^vo  fiyuies  or  facea  iiiay  be  seen.  The  ui)j>er  one  with 
the  rows  of  teeth  and  protruding  tongue  is  Hoorts,  the  bear.  The  two 
small  oblong-  figures,  one  in  each  upiHT  corner,  represent  the  ears  of 
the  hear,  the  lower  figure  on  the  lid  the  face  and  llipi)ers  of  Kye,  the 
sea-lion;  also  seen  in  the  handles  on  each  side  of  the  box.  In  the  latter 
the  sea-lion  iias  in  hia  mouth  the  salmon.  The  face  on  the  side  of  the 
box  is  that  of  lloorts,  the  bear,  h.aving  in  his  mouth  ihe  hunier.  This 
legend,  ia  explained  in  Chap.  VII.  The  oblong  figures  in  each  corner 
are  tiie  paws  of  the  liear.  It  aliould  be  mentioned  here  that  in  the 
Haida  drawings  an  eye  is  i)laced  in  the  breast,  in  the  ear.  paw.  tail, 
etc.,  of  figures,  presumably  on  the  lielief  that  e-.ch  memljerof  the  body 
has  the  power  of  looking  out  for  itself  or  controlling  its  own  move- 
ments. Cat.  No.  81)000,  U.  S.  N.  M.  TIaida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands.  Britisli  l''>lutubia.     Collected  by  .himes  G.  Swan. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888 NIblack. 


PLi.TE  XLIV. 


r  1 


I  11 


fUi 


iJ 


OLUMBIA. 

Ii  is  shown 
r  one  with 
The  two 
he  ears  of 
f  Kye,  the 
n  the  latter 
side  of  the 
II  lev.  Tliia 
aeh  corner 
til  at  in  the 
.  i)aw.  tail. 
of  tlie  body 
own  move- 
ii  Chnrlott* 


'  1 


H- 


HaIDA  CARVED  BOX  OF  BLACK  SlaTE,  FKOM  QUEEN  CHARLOTTE  ISLANDS,  BRITISH  COLUMBIA. 


[f 


wmmm 


1 


THE   INDIANS   OF    THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


319 


a  similar  piece  foriniug  the  opposite  side  and  end,  and  ttie  joints  secured 
by  pegs  or  dowels.  Where  four  pieces  are  used  the  corners  are  secured 
either  by  dove-tailing  or  by  pegging.  The  bottom  is  made  in  a  separate 
piece  and  i)egged  to  the  sides  and  ends.  The  top  is  slightly  arched  at 
the  crown  and  bevelled  on  t)ifl  under  side  to  lit  over  the  chest.  Some- 
times the  top  is  flat  and  as  thin  as  the  sides,  the  edges  having  a  broad 
strip  running  around  them  to  fit  over  the  box.  Another  type  of  house- 
hold box  is  about  18  iLches  square  by  24  inches  high,  as  shown  in  Fig. 
272,  Plate  Li,  which  also  shows  the  method  of  cording.  The  top  and 
bottom  are  made  in  somewhat  similar  shape  of  separate  pieces.  The  sides 
are  of  a  single  wide  thin  piece  of  cedar,  which  is  scarfed  and  deftly  bent 
three  times  at  right  angles  by  steaming  and  hammering,  with  very  little 
appearance  of  breaking  at  the  bends,  and  pegged  at  the  fourth  corner, 
making  a  neat  and  tight  joint.  These  boxes  and  chests  are  either  carved 
or  painted,  or  both,  in  totemic  design,  and  are  very  elaborate  and  or- 
namental. A  smaller  and  more  handy  type  of  wooden  box  is  shown  in 
Plate  XLiii,  which  has  a  use,  at  times,  other  than  that  as  a  household 
utensil,  viz,  in  receiving  the  cremated  ashej  of  the  dead.  Its  use  as  a 
funeral  box  is  shown  in  Plates  lxiv  and  lxv.  Figs.  340, 343,  and  348. 
A  beautifully  carved  and  polished  Haida  black  slate  box  is  represented 
in  Plate  xliv.  It  is  purely  a  work  of  art,  and  as  such  is  a  ^jplendid 
illustration  of  the  skill  of  these  Indians  in  stone  carving.  The  joints  are 
made  with  wooden  dowels  and  further  secured  with  fish  glue. 

Cradles. — These  are  now  rarely  found,  the  child  being  carried  slung 
in  a  shawl  or  blanket  over  the  back  in  the  usual  Indian  fashion.  Dixon 
(1787)  describes  the  primitive  cradle  which  he  saw  amongst  the  Haida 
and  Tlingit  as  follows: 

Throe  piocos  of  bark  are  fastened  together  so  as  to  form  a  kind  of  chair  j  the  infant, 
after  being  wrapped  in  fnr,  is  pnt  into  tliis  chair  and  lawhed  so  close  tiiat  it  can  not 
alter  its  postnro  even  with  strnggling,  and  the  chair  is  so  contrived  that  when  a 
tiiothcr  wants  to  feed  her  child,  or  give  it  the  breast,  there  is  no  occasion  tc  release  it 
from  its  shackles.    Soft  moss  is  nsed  l)y  the  Indian  nurse  to  keep  the  child  clean.* 

Lisiansky  mentions  the  wife  of  a  chief  coming  on  board  his  ship  (1805) 
carrying  her  child  in  a  basket.  At  the  present  day  a  canvas  or  blanket 
hammock  is  sometimes  used,  in  cami)  or  indoors,  to  rock  the  baby  to 
sleep. 

Paints. — As  previously  mentioned,  the  different  kinds  of  paints  used 
by  the  Indians  in  tiiis  region  are  charcoal,  ro.isted  and  burnt  fungus, 
white,  red,  and  brown  ochres,  lignite,  cinnabar,  berry  juice,  spruce  sap. 
and  various  other  kinds  of  vegetable  compounds.  For  tattooing  aud 
painting  the  face  and  body  black,  charcoal  and  lignite  are  used.  Cil  is 
mixed  with  all  i>aints  used  on  the  body.  Where  lignite  is  used  on  wcod, 
or  for  other  purposes  of  a  permanent  nature,  it  is  ground  dry  with  salmon 
eggs,  first  chewed  with  cetlar  barli.    This  gives  consistency  to  the  paint 


4 


•  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  '239. 


i,Ji 


'} ; 


320 


REPORT   OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


and  makes  it  stick  welL  A  fangoid  growth  from  the  hemlock  tree  by 
various  treatD>eut  becomes  yellow,  red,  or  black.  When  decayed  to 
a  powdery  consistency,  it  is  yellow ;  when  roasted,  it  is  red ;  and 
when  charred,  black.  The  Cbilkat  get  the  brilliant  yellow  for  their 
blankets  from  a  kind  of  moss  called  aekhone.  Faint-brushes  have  been 
described  in  Chap,  v,  and  are  illustrated  in  Plate  xlv.  The  stone 
mortars  and  pestles  for  grinding  paint  are  similar  to  those  shown  in 
Figs.  337  and  339,  Plate  lxiti,  for  preparing  native  tobacco. 

Metal  icorking. — The  tools  with  which  the  Indian  artisan  works  out 
the  surprisingly  well-finished  metal  ornaments  and  implements  of  this 
region  are  simple  and  few  in  number.  For  bracelet  making  the  silver- 
smith has  a  hammer,  several  cold  chisels,  and  an  etching  tool  which  is 
merely  a  sharpened  steel  pointer  edge.  Improvised  iron  anvils  replace 
the  stone  implements  of  this  kind  doubtlessly  used  in  former  days.  Tbe 
details  of  bracelet  making  are  given  in  Chapter  iv.  Copper  is  beaten 
into  the  required  shapes.  Steel  tools  "ow  used  are  very  deftly  tem- 
pered and  sharpened  by  the  native  artisan,  who  retains  tbe  primitive 
form  of  his  implement  or  tool,  and  merely  substitutes  the  steel  for  the 
former  stone  blade  or  head.  The  ingenuity  wliich  the  Indians  show 
in  adapting  iron  and  steel  to  their  own  uses  is  but  one  of  the  many 
evidences  of  their  cleverness  and  intelligence. 

Lumber  and  woodwork. — Incidental  to  the  description  of  tools,  houses, 
canoes,  etc.,  allusions  have  been  made  to  the  expertness  of  the  Indians 
in  getting  out  lumber  in  the  rough  from  the  forests.  The  tools  employed 
in  wood-work  have  been  described,  but  it  is  a  never  failing  source  of 
wonder  to  Europeans  that  they  can  accomplish  so  much  with  so  little. 
Portlock  (1787)  observes: 

It  is  very  surprising  to  see  how  well  they  [Tlingit]  will  shape  their  boards  with 
the  shocking  tools  they  employ;  some  of  them  being  full  10 feet  loug,  2^  feet  broad, 
and  not  more  than  an  invh  thick.  * 

It  is,  however,  still  more  surprising  to  see  the  exquisite  finish 
wrought  on  the  rattles,  headdresses,  masks,  etc.,  in  the  relief  carving 
for  which  these  Indians  of  the  north  are  famous. 

PAINTINGS,   DRAWINGS,  AND  CARVINGS. 

The  pictographic  art  of  these  Indians  is  illustrated  in  nearly  all  the 
accompanying  plates.  A  few  details  need  to  be  added  to  explain  the 
significance  and  trace  the  origin  of  the  designs  so  lavishly  bestowed 
upon  nearly  evtvy  article  of  personal  and  household  property.  The 
early  voyagers  were  much  struck  by  the  artistic  abilities  of  these  peo- 
ple, and  Dixon  (1787)  voices  this  feeling  when  he  says  of  the  Tlingit 
and  Haida: 

Many  of  these  carvings  are  well  proportioned  and  executed  with  a  considnrnble  de- 
gree of  ingenuity,  which  appears  rather  extraordinary  amongst  a  people  j  remote 
from  civilized  reflnment.t 


•  Portlock,  Voyage,  p.  'JS^, 


t  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  243. 


i'l'l 


I 


\  \ 


X      i 


,    II 


i  il 


I  ' 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE  XLV    A. 


■i'vy 


i*r 


\ 


Paint  Brushes  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig'.  244.  Presents  a  device  for  renewing  tlie  bristle  when  worn  down. 

Fig.  246.  From  Sitka  (Koloshan  or  Tlingit  stock).  Rejn-esents  a  diief  with  tall  cer- 
emonial hat. 

Fig.  248.  From  Massset,  C^ueen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia  (Haidan  stock). 
Represents  a  land  otter. 

Fig.  249.  Represents  a  wolf. 

Fig.  251.  The  handle  is  sjilit,  the  bristles  being  nipped  in  lK>tween  the  two  parts. 
Represents  a  raven.  Cat.  No.  2(1548.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Collected  by  James 
G.  Swan.  All  the  handles  are  made  of  wood.  The  brushes  are  of 
bristle  or  \egetable  fil)er.  The  same  general  type  is  found  along  the 
entire  coast. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888 Niblack. 


PLATE  XLV,  A. 


;■  two  parts, 
'd  by  James 
ishes  are  of 
(1  along  till' 


< 

a. 


! 
■ 


1 

]■] 

!  ' 

,i. 

*  'i 

I 

'1 

\ 

I,. 


'!|!   ! 


t         1, 


I' 


i 


■'I  ^ 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE  XLV,B. 


isz     es-6 


^ss 


Paint  Brushes  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


Fig.  253   Tlepresents  a  raven. 

Fig.  'lh\.  Bone  handle.     Repre.sents  Oolalla,  the  inoiintain  demon. 

Fig.  S.").").  Represents  an  eagle. 

Fig.  256.  From  the  Bella  Bella  tribe  of  the  Kwakiutl  (Haeltzukan  flt(Kk).     fat.  No. 

20,548.  U.  S.  N.  :M.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 
All  the  handles,  exoei)t  of  Fig.  254,  are  made  of  wood.     The  brushes 

are  either  of   l)ristle  or  vegetable  fiber.     The  same  general  type  of 

brush  is  found  along  the  entire  coast. 


Rtport  of  Nttional  Muteunn,  188R.     Niblack, 


Plate  XLV,  B. 


t'  I"  f 


Cat.  No. 

B  brushes 
I  type  of 


I- 

tn 

UJ 

? 

I 
I- 
(£ 

o 

z 

Ul 

I 
y- 

s 
o 

CE 
U. 

to 

Ul 

I 
If) 

a: 
CQ 


,2 


i;  ' 


if: 


^    !  IT 


1% 


■  \ 


VI 


1 1 


m 


i 


i! 


t4\ 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    XLVI, 


'    hi" 

■  1' 


Slave-killers  from  the.  Northwest  Coast  ;  formerly  used  in  dispatching  Slaves. 


'It 


Fit;.  2')T.  Minleof  Ikhh'.     Carved  to  rejiresent  thelx'ak  of  a  ravMi.     Cat.  No.  1'2T1T:>, 

U.  S.  N.  M.     Tliii-it  IndiaiLs.  Alaska.    Collected  by  E.  B.  Webster.  U. 

!S.  Navy. 
Fig.  258.  Ot  wood:  onuimented  with  a  citrved  heart  ami  human  hair.     Cat.  Nd. 

r:i,'.;n.  U.  S.   N.  M      Tlinjiii   'ndiaiis.  Alaska.     Colleeled  liy  I.ieiit. '!'. 

Dix  Holies.  [J.  S.  ISavy. 
Fig.  !i517.  (Seisher  or  Sitzee.  Ilaitlii).     Woodi'U  bend:  steel  jioiiit.     Oriuunented  with 

liunian  hair.     Cat.  .No.  74:0;;.  U.   S.   N.   M.     Ilaida  Indians.  Queen 

Cliarlot,t(.' Iwlands,  Britisii  ( 'ohunbia.     Collectei'  i)y  .fanu'S  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  360.  ?.ladi  from  Elk  antler,  carved  in  toteiuie.  design,  ami  armed  with  a  siiarp 

stone  point.     Cat.   N(\  74.">00.   U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlii)<.:;it    Indians.  .Maska. 

Colleeted  l)y  James  G.  8wan. 
Fig,  2fil.  (Slt/.ee).     '.\f;\de  from  a  deer  antler,  and  carved  to  r  ,)resent  the  bead  of 

Tl'kob.  the  crane:  tiie  hiuidle  represents  a  bear's  paw.     Cat.  No  HHTttl. 

U.  S.  N.  M.     Kaigani  \  illage  of  Hovvkan,  Alaska.     Collected  bv  James 

G.  Swan. 


rfBH 


iiiiiiiiniiliiilfilili" 


'■  I  iiJ 


Repoj;  ,if  rintior.il  Mui-um,  1888.  -Niblack. 


Plate  XLVI. 


HiNG  Slaves. 

k.No.  It2717:i, 
W'ebstor.  U. 

ir.     Cat.  No. 
by  l.ioit.  'I'. 

iinii'iiU'd  vvitli 
(Hans.  Qin'fii 
s  (i.  Swan, 
with  a  sliarp 
iaiis.  Alaska. 

tl)-'  li.'ad  ol" 
It.  No  H8701. 
tc(t  liv  James 


Slave-killers  fRoM  the  Northwest  Coast  ;  formerly  used  in  dispatchino  Slaves. 


^TT 


THE  INDIANS    OF   THE    NORTHWEST   COAST. 


321 


The  nulest  form  iii  which  this  art  embodies  itself  is  in  the  picto- 
graphs  on  the  rocks.  These  are  found  Jnst  above  hip;ii-water  mark 
around  the  sites  of  ancient  and  abandoned  villages.  Two  gronps  of 
them,  from  the  ancient  village  of  Stikine,  near  Ft.  Wrangell,  Alaska, 
are  shown  iu  Plate  xx,  and  in  Figs.  278,  279,  290,  and  297.    These  have 


^^i 


M:^^\^ 


m-(^' 


279 


296 


297  • 

Fi(tR.  278,  270,  296,  2!»7. 
Cabvinos  on  Rocks.    Sitka.  Alaska. 

(  Krnni  ,«k"rrhn«  by  tli»  ;i'illi.M-. ) 

-no  other  signilicance  than  the  practice  in  idle  hours  of  an  art  in  which 
they  'vere  all  striving  to  attain  excellence.  Some,  outstripping  others, 
becftino  in  time  famous  carvers,  de"  "ators.  or  tattooors,  tiitir  fanv  even 
^ij^ten(ling  beyond  their  own  village  or  tribe,  lu  ouo  bcubc  these  carv- 
H.  Mis.  142,  pt.  2—  21 


'li'\ 


!    .(] 


i 

■N 


322 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


iugs  on  the  rucks  are  in  tbe  nature  of  drawings,  as  they  appear  also  in 
painted  ligures  on  the  simpler  objects,  but  in  the  paiutiugs  on  wood  the 
patterns  are  very  much  more  elaborate  than  those  simple  etchings  on 
the  rocks,  as  shown,  for  instance,  in  the  carved  and  painted  figures  on 
the  ihest  and  box  in  Plate  L.I.  In  their  paintings  the  favorite  colors 
used  are  black,  light  green,  and  dark  red.  Whether  produced  in  paint- 
ing, tattooing,  or  relief-carving  the  designs  are  somewhat  conventional. 
However  rude  the  outline,  there  are  for  some  animals  certain  conven- 
tional signs  that  clearly  indicate  to  the  initiated  what  figure  is  meant. 
With  the  brown  bear  it  is  the  protruding  tongue;  with  the  beaver  and 
wolf  it  is  the  character  of  the  teeth ;  with  the  orca,  the  fin ;  with  the 
raven,  the  sharp  beak ;  with  the  eagle  the  curved  beak,  etc.  Certain 
groupings  or  figures  are  also  generally  recognized  as  portraying  certain 
well-known  legends,  such,  for  instance,  as  the  "bear  and  the  hunter" 
(Plates XXXV, xli,  and  xliv);  the  " raven  and  the  moon"  (Plate xxxv), 
etc.,  which  will  be  explained  hereafter.  In  the  interweaving  of  colors 
to  form  a  totemic  pattern  or  design,  as  in  the  Chilkat  blankets,  the 
Indians  attained  the  greatest  perfection  in  their  art  up  to  their  contact 
with  the  whites.  Since  then  the  carvings  of  the  Haida  in  black  slate 
may  be  said  to  show  the  height  which  their  art  has  now  attained. 

Dratcings  and  paintings. — In  plate  xx,  and  in  Figs.  278,  279,  296,  and 
297,  the  crude  sculpturing  on  the  rocks  near  Fort  Wrangell  are  shown. 
In  Plates  iv  and  v  various  tattooing  devices  are  illustrated.  Indeed,  in 
nearly  every  plate  some  form  of  totemic  pictograph  is  represented,  and 
it  only  remains  to  explain  the  significance  of  some  of  the  figures. 
Plate  Lii  is  reproduced  from  illustrations  in  the  "  West  Shore,"  August, 
1884,  accompanying  an  article  by  Judge  J.  G.  Swan,  of  Poi  tTownseud, 
Washington  Territory.  The  drawings  were  made  by  Johnnie  Kit-Elswa, 
the  young  Haida  interpreter,  who  a<'companie<l  Judge  Swan  on  a  trip  to 
the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  in  lSSi\.  It  may  not  bo  out  of  place  here 
to  say  that,  in  the  estimation  of  the  writer,  there  is  no  n*<>re  competent 
authority  on  the  ethnology  of  the  northwest  coiist  th*?  rhidge  Swan, 
and  he  is  particularly  well  informed  in  the  matter  of  cio»*Sit  Indian  my- 
thology and  folklore,  a  brauck  of  which  subject  .'K'  ^ritviean  only 
touch  on  in  this  connection.  It  it-  to  be  hope«i,  Iw^ovei  iliat  a  syste- 
matic Governmental  iuvesiigatiou  will  be  wriliitaktMi  in  the  next  few 
years,  for  it  will  soon  be  too  late  to  gather  t*«  n.aterialw  needed.  Fig. 
280,  Plate  Li,  represents  the  orca,  or  whsur  killn,  which  the  Hiiida 
believe  to  be  a  demon  called  Skana.  Jud^  Swan  says  that,  j*vooriiiug 
to  the  Indian  belief: 

He  cau  cliaugo  into  any  desirfcd  form,  and  many  are  (ho  legpnds  about  him.  «.»«e 
vrhich  was  relateii  to  in»-  was  that  ageH  ago  the  Indians  wer«>  out  s<'al  hunting.  Tho 
wiiathcr  \va8  'aim  ami  the  m-ti  sinootli.  Cue  of  iheBu  UiIUtn,  or  black  ti.si.  .•»  »{kvi«>» 
of  i)ur}ioiHe,  kept  alongside  of  a  canoe,  and  the  > onng  men  ainuMrtl  tlwaM*lve«  by 
throwing  Htones  from  the  cauoe  ballast  iiud  hitting  the  fin  <.f  the  kiW»r.  After  »oni«> 
pretty  hard  blows  from  those  rocks  the  creature  -iiade  for  the  short!,  t^bere  it 
grouuded  on  the  beach.    8ouu  a  amoke  was  seeu,  :u>d  theu  cuj^'ioyit)-  pivtii^>le(l  tbfiot 


ar  also  in 
wood  the 
things  on 
Igures  on 
ite  colors 
1  in  paint- 
reutional. 
u  couven- 
is  meant, 
saver  and 

with  the 

Certain 

ig  certain 

9  hunter  " 

tte  XXXV), 

of  colors 
akets,  the 
ir  contact 
lack  slate 
ned. 

,  296,  and 
ro  shown, 
[udeed,  in 
)uted,  and 
e  figures. 
"  August, 
'ownseud, 
ut-Elswa, 
u  a  trip  to 
)lace  liere 
!ompeteut 
Ige  Swan, 
idiau  my- 

can  only 
L  a  systPi- 
I  next  few 
led.  Fig. 
lie  Hanla 
ftccoruing 

him.  ihie 
iting.  tho 
fc.  »  K|«eci«« 

After  M)iii« 
I,  wbere  it 
iU'lcd  tUeui 


i  I 


!  \  :•] 


I   f 


..    II 


lir 


EXPLANATION   OF   PLATE   XLVIIi 


& 


r- 


-5tf<J 


Slate  Carvings  from  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia. 


FiK- 262.  MODKL  or  ToTKM  Post.  Slate.  Top  tiKUit".  the  ouKlf ;  next,  the  orca  or 
killer;  next,  the  raven:  the  lowest,  the  heaver.  Cat.  No.  88977,  U.  S.  N. 
M.  Ilaiila  Iiidiiiiis.  (^ueen  Charlotte  iHliindH,  British  Colunihia.  Col- 
lected hy  James  (>,  .Swan. 

Fig.  363((.  Figure  in  Black  Slate.  "The  he.-ir  mother."  This  ti^ure  is  re|)ro- 
duced  in  Plates  XLIX  and  L.  For  legend  see  text.  This  may  he  taken 
a,<  the  best  spcHimen  of  llaida  slate-earvinj;.  JNhide  hy  Sk:5ows-ke"ay. 
an  Indian  earver  of  Skidenate.  t^neen  Charlotte  Islands.  British  Colum- 
bia.    Cat.  No.  7;ni7,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Collected  by  James  (1.  Swan. 

Fig.  264.  Slate  Pipe.  Cat.  No.  258!),  U.  S.  N.  M.  Northwest  coast.  Collected  i)y 
Capt.  Charles  Wilkes.  U.  S.  Navy. 

Fig.  265.  Slate  Piim:.  Cat.  No.  2590.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Puget  Sound.  VVa.shington. 
CoUecteil  l)y  the  U.  S.  Exjiloring  Exi)edition.  Cai»t.  Charles  Wilkes, 
conunander. 

Fig.  266.  Sj-ate  Dish.  Design,  the  orca  or  killer.  Cat.  No.  Hi)(H)5.  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Haida  Indians.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Colunihia.  Collecteil 
hv  James  (.}.  Swan. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.     NiblacU. 


Plate  XLVII. 


!  i 


;;!    tf 


^! 

1 

1 

t,  til*'  oira  or 

mil,  u.  s.  N. 

unibia.     t'ol- 

;iut'  is  rt'ino- 

iiiay  lit' taken 

■ik::<i\vs-k('"ay. 

{fitish  Coluiu- 

Swan. 

Collected  liv 

Washington, 
larles  Wilkes, 

IT.  S.  N.  :\i. 

)ia.     Collected 


Slate  Carvings  from  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia. 


*         2^ 


■  I 


.'I  i  , 


® 


n 


1  li 


U.r 


M 


.:|i 


« 


J I 


EXPLANATION  OF   PLATE    XLVIII. 


Pipes  from  the  Northwest  Coast.    Haida  Slate  Dish. 


Fig.  267. 


I 


Fig. 

368. 

Fig. 

269. 

Fig. 

270. 

Fig. 

271. 

Fig. 

272. 

Tobacco  Pipe.     Of  wood;  carved  in  shape  of  dragon  fly.     Bowl,  a  cylin- 
der of  copiHjr.     Cat.  No.  72426,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit,  Sitka.     Collected 

by  John  J.  McLean. 
Tobacco  Pipe.     Of  wood:  in  .shape  of  l)ear's  ])aw.    Cat.  No.  9270,  U.  S. 

N.  M.    Tlingit,  Sitka.     Collected  by  Dr.  A.  H.  Hoflf,  U.  S.  Army. 
Tobacco  Pipe.     Of  antler;  in  shape  of  Indian  doctor.     Cat.  No.  07882. 

U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit,  Sitka.     Collected  by  John  J.  JIcLean. 
Tobacco  Pipe.     Of  slate.    Compare  Fig.  265.     Cat.  No.  2590,  U.  S.  N. 

M.     Piiget  Sound,  Washington.     Collected  by  Capt.  Charles  Wilkes- 

U.  S.  Navy. 
Tobacco  Pipe.     Carved  in  wood  and   inlaid  with  abalone.      Cat.  No. 

6014,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Haida,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia. 

Collected  by  Colonel  Bulkely,  U.  S.  Army. 
Slate  Dish.     Around  the  center  are  carved  two  eagles  and  two  wolves. 

Handles  represent  sea-lions.     Ca!.  No.  89004,  U.  S.  N.   M.     Haida. 

Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Colund)ia.     Collected  oy  James  G. 

Swan. 


Repnrt  of  N.ilinnal  Mutouin    1888      N'hiacit 


Plate  XLVIII. 


I  ^ii; 


!    ;.i 


f 


lit' 


I         V 


5o\vl,  a  cylin- 
a.     Collected 


je.     Cat.  No. 
rih  Columbia. 

(1  two  wolves. 

[.   M.    Haula. 

Dy  James  G. 


Pipes  from  the  Northwest  Coast.    Haida  Slate  Dish. 


^> 


s.aJ 


VA  ^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


1.25 


!ff  Ilia 

I:  1^  lii2.o 


1^ 


1.8 


1.4    111.6 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  M5S0 

(716)  873-4503 


\ 


V 


^^ 


i\ 


\ 


^"^ 


% 


v 


«v 


i 


T 


^5r 


■     if 

1 

IP 

r 

.1. 
* 

-! 

.  1 

it 

"m 


■,.i\i 


m 


m 


m 


i-. 

■Mi 


EXPLANATION   OF  PLATE  XLIX, 

Haioa  Slate-carvinq,  representinq  the  "Bear-mother.  ' 

Fig.  2636.  This  specimen  is  also  shown  in  Plates  XLVII  and  L.  The  legend  is 
given  in  Chapter  V,  under  the  subject  of  bears.  The  Haida  version  of 
it  is  as  follows: 

A  number  of  Indian  squaws  were  in  the  woods  gathering  lierries  when 
one  of  them,  the  daughter  cf  a  chief,  spoke  in  terms  of  ridicule  of  the 
whole  l)ear  species.  The  bears  descended  on  them  and  killetl  all  but 
the  chief's  daughter,  whom  the  king  of  the  bears  took  to  wife.  She 
bore  him  a  child  half  human  and  half  bear.  The  carving  represents 
the  agony  of  the  mother  in  suckling  this  rough  and  uncouth  offspring. 
One  day  a  party  of  Indian  bear  hunters  discovered  her  up  a  tree  and 
were  about  to  kill  her,  tliinking  her  a  bear,  but  she  made  them  under- 
stand that  she  was  human.  They  took  her  home  and  she  afterwards 
became  the  progenitor  of  all  Indians  belonging  to  the  l)ear  totem. 
They  believe  that  bears  are  men  transformed  for  the  time  being.  This 
carving  was  made  by  Skaows-ke'ay,  a  Haida.  Cat.  No.  73t  17,  U.  S.  N. 
M.  Skidegate  village.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  CoUimbia. 
Collected  by  Jame8  G.  Swan. 


!      'I 


I 


' 


Report  of  National  Muteum,  1888.     Niblack. 


Plate  XLIX. 


1 ,1*^ 


■  H 


:.:    n 


Haida  Slate-carving,  representing  the  "  Bear-mother. 


fl! 


l:i 


IB' 


!;; 


p 


►•  u 


I  ; 


EXPLANATION  OF  PLATE   L. 

Haida  Slate-carvinq,  representing  the  "Bear-mother." 

Fig.  263c.  This  specimen  is  also  illustrated  in  Plates  XLVII  and  XLIX,  and  fully 
described  in  the  legend  accompanying  the  latter  plate.  Carved  by 
Skaows-keay,  a  Haida.  Cat.  No.  73117,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Skidegate  vil- 
lage, Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.  Collected  by  James 
G.  Swan. 


l!      I II 


Kcpott  of  National  Muieum,  ISSS.—Niblaek. 


Plate  L. 


i 


1 

m 

m 

'  B 

IM 

■M 

1 

§ 

'■ 

} 


''■  : 

i 

:  i 

i    r 


Haida  Slate-carvinq  representing  the  "  Bear-mother." 


Mi 

ml! 

f 


|!     'M\' 


'     1 


11 ! 


ill 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LI. 


i      IJI 


Chests,  Carvings,  etc.,  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

From  photographi  *nd  ikatchet  by  the  author. 

Pig.  872.  Household  Box  or  "Chest.  With  sides  made  from  a  single  wide,  thin 
piece  of  cedar  scarfed  and  bent  three  times  and  pegged  at  the  fourth 
comer.  The  specimen  is  about  18  inches  square  by  24  inches  high. 
The  method  of  cording  is  also  shown.  The  totemic  design  is  the  l)ear. 
Haida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia. 

Tig,  273.  Household  Chest.  With  sides  made  from  two  pieces  of  wide,  thin 
cedar  wood,  bei^t  at  right  angles  and  pegged  together  at  diagonally  o\y- 
posite  comers.  The  bottom  and  top  are  made  of  oblong  slabs  of  wood 
neatly  dressed  down,  the  bottom  l)oing  pegged  to  the  sides  and  ends. 

Pig.  274.  ClihEHONiAL  Spoon.  Of  wood,  with  handle  carved  to  represent  the  orca 
holding  the  bowl  in  his  mouth.  This  is  use^l  in  the  ceremonies  attend- 
ing a  Haida  youth's  attainment  of  majority,  when  he  is  required  to 
drink  down  the  contents  of  the  spoon,  consisting  of  about  two  (juarts 
of  fish-oil. 

Pig.  275.  Carved  Slate  Figure.  Commemorating  a  legend  relating  the  prowess 
of  a  certain  Indian  shaman,  who  is  said  to  have  raised  two  Indians  from 
the  dead  at  Skidegate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands. 

Fig.  280.  Haida  Pictograph.  Representing  Skana,  the  orca  or  whale-killer.  (See 
Chapter  VII.)  From  a  photograph  of  a  drawing  in  the  possession  of 
James  G.  Swan. 


1 


Rtportof  National  MuMum,  1888.— Nibliok, 


Plate  LI. 


;    n 


]  M 


i   f 
i 


Chests,  Carvings,  etc.,  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


ni: 


il! 

'    ^'S 

U         ^,| 

i  ^ 

? 

f 

; 

£    ' 

l! 

j 

J  i 


r  I 


i'lS 


?' 


1: 


PI 


if  -^ 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    Lll. 


lii  :,]i 


281 

283 

282 

284 

285 

1" 


Haida  Legendary  Drawings  or  Pictooraphs. 

rrom  illuitrations  in  the  West  Shore  (August,  1884),  made  by  Johnnie  Kit-Elswa,  a  Haida  Indian. 

Fig.  281.  Represents  the  legend  of  the  raven  andfthe  finherman^  related  in  Chap- 
ter VII,  page  328. 

Fig.  282.  Represents  Koong,  the  moon,  and  Ecthlinga,  the  man,  and  relates  to  the 
story  of  how  the  man  came  in  the  moon.  The  legend,  as  related  on 
page  323,  seems  also  to  refer  to  the  difference  recognized  by  some  be- 
tween a  wet  and  a  dry  moon. 

Fig.  283.  Represents  the  raven  (Hooyeh)  in  tlie  l»elly  of  the  whale  (Koone).  (See 
page  823.) 

Fig.  284.  Represents  Hooyeh,  the  mischievous  raven  that  possesses  the  power  of 
changing  itself  into  countless  forms,  and  which  has,  from  the  creation 
of  the  world,  been  the  benefactor  and  helper  of  mankind.    (Page  324.) 

Fig.  285.  Represents  T'kul,  the  wind  spirit,  and  the  cirrus  clouds,  explaining  the 
Indian  belief  in  the  causes  of  the  changes  in  the  weather.  (See  page 
324.) 


Rtport  of  Nttional  Muieum,  1888. — Niblack. 


PLATE  LI  I. 


^ 


Haida  Leqenjary  Draw(nqs  or  Pictoqraphs. 


THE   INDIANS   OP  THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


323 


to  aaoertain  the  oause,  bat  when  they  reached  the  shore  they  discovered,  to  their  aar- 
prise,  that  it  was  a  large  uauue,  and  not  the  Skana  that  was  on  the  beaoh,  and  that  a 
man  was  on  shore  cooking  some  food.  He  aslied  them  why  they  threw  stones  at  his 
canoe.  "  You  have  broken  it,"  said  he,  "and  now  go  into  the  woods  and  get  some 
cedar  withes  and  mend  it."  They  did  so,  and  when  they  had  finished  the  man  said, 
"  Tnrn  your  backs  to  the  water  and  cover  yonr  heads  with  your  skin  blankets,  and 
don't  you  look  till  I  call  you."  They  did  so,  and  heard  the  canoe  grate  on  the  beaoh 
as  it  was  hauled  down  into  the  surf.  Then  the  man  said,  "  Look,  now."  They  looked, 
and  saw  the  canoe  just  going  over  the  first  breaker  and  the  man  sitting  in  the  stern ; 
but  when  it  came  to  the  second  breaker  it  went  under  and  presently  came  up  outside 
of  the  breakers  a  killer  and  uot  a  canoe,  and  the  man  or  demon  was  in  its  belly. 
This  allegory  is  common  among  all  the  tribes  on  the  northwest  coast,  and  even  with 
the  iuterior  tribes  with  whom  the  salmon  takes  the  place  of  the  orca,  which  never 
ascends  the  fresh-water  rivers.  The  Chilkat  and  other  tribes  of  Alaska  carve  figures 
of  salmon,  inside  of  which  is  the  full  length  fisjure  of  a  nude  Indian.  »  •  * 
Casual  observers,  without  inquiry,  will  at  once  pronounce  it  to  be  Jonah  in  the  fish's 
belly,  but  the  allegory  is  of  ancient  origin,  far  antedating  the  adveut  of  the  white 
man  or  the  teachings  of  the  missionary." 


The  same  authority 


Fig*  281  represeuts  the  raven  and  the  fisherman, 
says:  - 

Hooyeh,  the  raven,  had  the  mischievious  propensity  of  descending  into  the  ocean 
and  investigating  the  fishing-lines  of  Houskana,  the  fisherman,  and  stealing  both 
bait  and  fish.  At  last  Houskana,  tired  of  this  work,  put  on  a  magic  hook  to  ascertain 
who  his  enemy  was  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea.  The  raven  was  caught,  and  when  the 
fisherman  hauled  iu  his  line  the  rayeu  resisted  by  pressing  his  ftet  and  wings  against 
the  bottom  of  the  fisherman's  canoe.  But  Houskana  was  the  stronger  and  pulled  the 
raven's  beak  entirely  ofi",  and,  seizing  the  raven,  took  him  ashore  to  find  out  who  he 
was,  for,  as  soon  as  his  beak  was  pulled  off  he  changed  to  a  man,  covering  his  head 
with  bis  skin  mantle  so  that  nothing  but  his  eyes  could  be  seen.  The  fisherman  tried 
iu  vain  to  make  him  uncover  his  face.  At  last  one  of  the  young  men  took  a  handful 
of  llUh  and  rubbed  it  in  the  raven's  eyes.  This  made  him  throw  off  his  mantle,  and 
then  they  saw  that  it  was  the  Hooyeh,  This  made  the  raven  so  angry  that,  in  re- 
venge for  this  indignity,  the  raven  and  his  friends,  the  crows  {Kaltzda),  have  ever 
since  annoyed  the  Indians  by  soiling  their  canoes  and  eating  all  their  fish." 

Fig.  282  represents  the  "  Man  in  the  Moon."  According  to  Judge 
Swan: 

Koong,  the  moon,  discovered  Eethlinga,  the  man,  about  to  dip  his  bucket  iu  the 
brook  for  water,  so  it  sent  down  its  arms  or  rays  and  grabbed  the  man,  who,  to  save 
himself,  seized  bold  of  a  big  solal  bush  (Gaultheria  shallon),  but  the  moou  being 
more  powerAil  took  man,  bucket,  and  bush  up  to  itself,  wlicre  they  have  ever  since 
lived  and  can  be  seen  every  f\ill  moou  when  the  weather  is  clear.  The  man  is  a 
frieud  of  Tkul,  the  spirit  of  the  winds,  and  at  the  proper  signal  empties  his  bucket, 
causing  rain  upon  the  earth. 

Fig.  283  i-epresent^  the  raven  (Hooyeh)  in  the  belly  of  the  whale 
(Koone).    Ju<lge  Swan  eii  plains  it  as  follows : 

The  Haidahs  are  not  whalemen,  like  the  Makahs  of  Capo  Flattery,  and  I  never 
kudw  of  their  killing  a  whale:  but  occasionally  a  dea<l  one  drifts  ashore,  having  been 
killed  by  whalemen,  or  sword-fish,  or  orcos  (killers).  Tbe  Haidahs  do  not  care  to 
look  for  natural  causes,  but  adopt  the  iUythologioal  dogma  that  the  raven  goes  into 
the  whale's  beily,  which,  frantic  with  pain,  rushes  ashore,  while  the  invisible  Uwyeh 
walks  quietly  out  and  is  ready  for  another  adventure. 


I:fl 


Ml 


i 


i 


mt 


324 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


Fig.  284  represents  Hooyeh,  the  mischievous  raven  that  possesses  the 
power  of  changing  itself  intocoantless  forms,  and  which  has,  from  the 
creation  of  the  world,  been  the  benefactor  of  mankind,  but  which  like- 
wise delights  in  playing  pranks.  Endless  legends  are  told  of  his  ad- 
ventures. 

Fig.  285  represents  cirrus  clouds; 

The  center  figure  is  Tkul,  the  wind  spirit.  On  the  right  and  left  are  bis  feet,  which 
are  indicated  by  long  streaming  clonds ;  above  are  the  wings,  and  on  each  side  are 
the  different  winds,  each  designated  by  an  eye,  and  represented  by  the  patches  of 
cirrns  clonds.  When  Tkul  determines  which  wind  is  to  blow,  he  gives  the  word  and 
the  other  winds  retire.  The  change  in  the  weather  is  usually  followed  by  rain, 
which  is  indicated  by  the  tears  wliich  stream  from  the  eyes  of  rkul. 

These  legends  illustrate  how  pregnant  with  meaning  is  every  carving 
and  pictograph  of  this  prolific  people,  and  what  work  must  be  embodied 
in  the  task  of  tracing  ttem  out  and  comparing  them  with  those  of  ad- 
jacent regions.  No  idea  of  the  ethnical  affinities  of  the  various  stocks 
can  be  formed  without  comparative  mythological  study,  and  the  sooner  * 
the  work  is  undertaken  the  better. 

Carvings. — Fig.  286  is  a  carved  wooden  rattle,  which  is  pictured  in 
other  positions  in  Figs.  287,  288,  and  290,  Plate  liy.  According  to 
Judge  Swan,  the  carving  on  the  breast  of  the  bird  represents  the 
sparrow-hawk,  the  bird  itself  representing  Hooyeh,  the  raven.  The 
tail  of  the  raven  is  carved  to  represent  a  bird's  head,  carrying  in  its 
beak  a  frog.  The  frog  is  supposed  to  possess  a  subtle  poison  in  its 
head,  which,  when  sucked  out,  enables  a  medicine  man  to  work  bad 
spells.  The  figure  on  the  back  is  Oolalla,  or  Ka-ka-hete,  the  whist- 
ling demon,  who  lived  in  the  mountains  and  was  once  traveling  in  his 
canoe  when  ho  was  capsized  and  nearly  drowned.  He  swam  ashore 
and  ran  into  the  woods  for  shelter.  He  occ^tsionaily  descended  to  the 
villages  and  stole  the  children,  which  he  took  into  the  woods  and  ate. 
KorkOrhete  afterwards  turned  into  a  land-otter.  This  type  of  rattle  is 
found  quite  generally  among  all  the  northern  triljes,  and  is  carried  by 
the  chiefs  in  the  ceremonial  dances.  (See  Plate  ix.)  The  carved  col- 
umns in  front  of  the  houses  may  be  divided  into  two  classes,  totemic 
and  commemorative. 

Totemic  columns. — These  are  the  very  tall  ones  erected  in  front  of  the 
houses,  and  are  generally  surmounted  by  the  clan-totem  of  the  chief 
occupant.  Those  below  may  represent  the  totem  of  his  wife  (and  hence 
of  his  children),  or  illustrate  some  legend  intimately  connected  with  or 
referring  to  the  totem  of  the  owner.  Some  columns  are  purely  legendary, 
but  refer  to  the  totem  of  the  owner,  and  are  in  this  sense  totemic. 
Amongst  the  Tlingit  the  phratry  totem  often  surmoants  the  column 
with  the  clan  and  other  totems  represented  below  it.  None  but  the 
wealthy  can  afford  to  erect  these  carved  columns,  and  the  owner  of  one 
is  thereby  investetl  with  so  much  th(«  ;aore  respect  and  authority  that 
he  becomes,  as  the  head  of  the  household,  a  petty  chief  in  the  village. 
As  heretofore  and  hereafter  described,  the  ambition  of  a  life  centers  iu 


'   i' 


u 


■      i: 


•)  i! 


f  I. 


•1 , 


•'Miiim 


.:Mi 


f 


Fig.  286. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    Llll. 

CARVED  WOODEN  CEREMONIAL  RATTLE  FROM  THE  NORTHWEST  COAST. 

RATTLE  This  is  a  side  view  of  the  rattle  phown  in  back  view  in  Fi),'.  387, 
Sate  Jv  ani  top  view  in  Fig.  288.  T  .is  rattle  is  supposed  to  possess 
malalp^werinthat  it  depicts  a  lege,  i  d  of  Ka-Ka-Tete,  the  wh.stlmg 
3n  rdescribed  in  Chapter  VII,  un-ier  the  head  of  Carvings.  This 
is  a  ve;y  common  type  of  rattle,  and  ,.  found  throughou  the  coast. 
CaVNo.  890a5,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Skid.,;ate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands. 
British  Columbia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


Plate  UIII. 


>   (■ 
1  i- 


ft  FiR.  287, 
to  possess 

}  whistling 

ngs.  Tliis 
the  coast. 

e  Islands, 


'\\i 


i 

.   ■ 

I; 

t  jj 

Pl 

1 

If 

1^ 


Carved  wooden  Ceremonial  Rattle  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


I: !   1 


i) 

ij 

! 

.-   V.  ■ 
''   4' 

i:1 


1 

■ 


i 


.ill 


i     h 


I 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LIV. 


iJ  jf 


Ceremonial  Rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  287.  Rattle.  Of  wood;  carved.  Shown  in  top  vit-w  in  Fig.  2H(;.  Legend  in 
Chapter  VII.  Common  tyi)e.  Cat.  No.  89085,  U.  S.  N.  U.  Haida  In- 
dians, Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  Britisli  Colunil)ia.  Collpcted  l>y  James 
G.  Swan. 

Fig.  288.  Rattle.  Top  view  of  same  kind  of  rattle  as  Fig.  287.  Cat.  No.  89078,  U. 
S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  British  ('olumbia. 
Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  289.  Rattle.  Of  carved  wood.  Design,  a  duck,  with  ornaments  of  beaks  of 
the  puffin.  Cat.  No.  20828,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Klowak  Indians  (Hanega 
tril)e).  Prince  of  Wales  Island.  A  iska.     ColU>cted  by  James  (}.  Swan. 

Fig.  290.  Rattle.  Top  stiction  of  usual  tyiie  of  rattle.  See  Figs.  287. 288.  Cat.  No. 
10309,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tongass  village,  Alaska  (Tlingit  Indians).  Col- 
lected by  Lieut.  F.  W.  Ring,  U.  S.  Army. 

Fig.  291.  Rattle.  Of  wood;  ancient.  Design,  a  crane  with  tail  carved  to  represent 
the  head  of  a  mountain  goat.  Cat.  No.  73798.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Auk  In- 
dians. Alaska.     Collected  by  Lieut.  T.  Dix  Holies,  U.  S.  Navy. 


Rtpoit  of  Ntlionil  MuKum    1888    -Niblick. 


Plate  LIV. 


Legend  in 
Iluidu  In- 
l  by  James 

.  89078,  U. 
(Columbia. 

if  beakH  i)f 
s  (Hanega 
I  (i.  Swan. 
Cat.  No. 
iins).     Vo\- 

o  represent 
Auk  Tn- 


Ceremonial  Rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


: 


i! 


:; 


;lil 


p 


i    IP 


!     mm 


.til  I  V 

li  h 


I 


I  i 


— 


?  ''I 


THE  INDIANS   OP   THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


325 


the  endeavor  to  accamnlate  enough  property  or  wealth  to  enable  a  free- 
man to  rise  to  this  dignity  of  a  petty  chief.  A  great  deal  of  mystery 
has  been  thrown  around  these  pictographic  carvings,  due  to  the  igno- 
rance and  misconception  of  some  writers  and  the  reticence  or  deliberate 
deception  practiced  by  the  Indians  themselves.  They  are  in  no  sense 
idols,  bat  in  general  may  be  said  to  be  ancestral  columns.  The  legends 
which  they  illustrate  are  but  the  traditions,  folk-lore,  and  nursery  tales 
of  a  primitive  people ;  and,  while  they  are  in  some  sense  childish  or 
frivolous  and  at  times  even  coarse,  they  represent  the  current  of  human 
thought  as  truly  as  do  the  ancient  inscriptions  in  Egypt  and  Babylonia^ 
or  the  Maya  inscriptions  in  Yucatan.  The  meaning  of  a  few  of  these 
columns  may,  by  inference,  be  taken  to  represent  the  general  charttcter 
of  all. 

In  Plate  xxxv.  Fig.  179,  is  a  carved  column  in  front  of  the  model  of 
a  Haida  house.  The  8armour.c'''g  figuro  represents  Hoots,*  the  brown 
bear,  which  is  the  totem  of  the  head  of  the  household  who  erected  it. 
At  the  bottom  is  Tsing,  the  beaver,  the  totem  of  the  wife  and  children. 
Above  it  is  the  figure  of  the  "  bear  and  the  hunter,*'  already  alluded  to. 
According  to  Judge  Swan,  the  hunter  ToivaU  on  one  occaaion  visited 
the  house  of  the  King  of  the  Bears,  who  was  absent.  His  wi Ce  being 
at  home,  he  made  love  to  her.  When  the  bear  returned  he  found  his 
wife  in  confusion  and  accused  her  of  infidelity,  but  she  denied  it.  She 
went  regularly  to  get  wood  and  water,  and  the  bear,  still  suspicious, 
one  day  fastened  a  magic  thread  to  her  dress.  On  following  it  up  he 
found  her  in  the  arms  of  the  hunter,  whom  he  forthwith  killed,  as  in 
tlie  pictograph.  Whether  or  not  this  legend  originated  in  the  confusion 
iirising  from  a  failure  to  distinguish  between  one  of  the  bear  totems 
and  a  real  bear,  it  is  impossible  to  say,  but  for  our  purposes  as  a  carv- 
ing it  illustrates  three  points:  first,  that  as  a  legend  it  refers  to  the 
bear  totem;  second,  that  it  warns  wives  to  b.e  faithful  to  their  hus- 
bands ;  and  third,  it  indicates  a  belief,  on  the  part  of  these  Indians,  in 
the  possibility  of  human  relations  with  animals,  which,  as  shewn  in 
Chapter  iii  must  of  necessity  precede  a  belief  in  totemism  itself. 

Above  the  "bear  and  hunter"  is  Tetl,  the  great  raven,  having  in  his 
beak  the  new  moon  and  in  his  claws  the  dish  containing  fresh  water, 
illustrating  the  common  and  familiar  legend  of  the  creation :  Tetl,  the 
benefactor  of  man,  stole  from  his  evil  uncle  Kaunk,t  the  enemy  of  man, 
the  new  moon,  Kung,  which  he  had  imprisoned  in  a  box,  and  also  got 
fresh  water  by  strategy  from  the  daughter  of  Kaunk,  to  whom  he  made 
love,  and,  deceiving  lier,  stole  a  dish  of  fresh  water  and  flew  with  it 
out  the  smoke-hole  of  Kaunk's  house.    Above  the  raven  are  four  disks 


*  In  the  Kaigani  dialect  the  brown  bear  itt  hooU ;  wolf,  howootz  ;  hawk,  howot,  and 
hair  seal,  howoot.  By  inflection  and  aspiration  these  uauioa  are  pronounced  so  dif- 
ferently as  to  lea'  no  room  for  mistaking  one  for  another.  The  hlack  bear  is  tauy 
the  same  as  in  the  Skidegatc  dialect  of  the  Haida  language. 

t  By  some  Kannk  is  identifled  with  the  eagle  in  the  creation  legend  (Boas)  and  by^ 
others  with  the  wolf  ( Veuiaminoflf)- 


f^^:l 


«'•  srr 


326 


REPORT   OP  NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


called  sUl.  These  appear  also  on  Ibe  top  of  several  ceremonial  grass 
hats  aud  wooden  belmets  and  batons,  illustrated  in  tbe  accompanying 
plates.  Their  exact  significance  is  uncertain,  but  the  number  of  these 
skil  disks  is  in  general  an  index  of  the  rank,  wealth,  and  standing  of 
the  chief  or  owner.  It  is  stated  on  some  autliorities  aud  disputed  on 
others,  that  each  disk  commemorates  some  meritorious  act  of  the  owner, 
such  as  the  giving  of  a  great  potlatch,  or  the  gaining  of  a  victory  over 
an  enemy.  In  this  sense  it  indicates  the  right  of  the  owner  to  the 
enjoyment  of  the  respect  and  esteem  of  the  tribe.  It  is  also  stated 
that  the  holes  pierced  in  the  lobes  of  the  ear  and  the  disks  worn  on  the 
ceremonial  hat  also  correspond  to  this  same  number.  The  difference  of 
opinion  is  doubtless  due  to  the  variation  in  the  custom  amongst  differ- 
ent stocks.  The  form  of  carving  may  be  borrowed  without  the  signifi- 
cance l)eing  understood  or  remembered.  The  weight  of  evidence  would 
seem  to  favor  the  belief  that  each  disk  or  sMl  had  the  significance  indi- 
cated, that  is,  of  commemorating  some  deed  of  prowess  of  the  possessor. 
Plate  LY.,  Fig.  292,  represents  another  column  wh'ch  may  be  taken 
liS  a  type.  It  is  found  at  the  ^aigani  village  of  Easa-an,  Skowl  Bay, 
Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska.  The  top  group  represents  the  head 
of  a  European,  with  whitened  face  and  long,  black  whiskers,  flanked  on 
either  side  by  two  figures  representing  children  in  sitting  posture, 
wearing  tall  hats.  These  hats  in  Kaigani  are  called  Hatcachanda, 
and  each  have  four  shil.  The  group  represents  the  following  legend, 
either  commemorating  an  actual  occurrence  or  else  being  a  nursery 
tale  originally  invented  to  frighten  refractory  children,  becoming  in 
time,  through  repetition  and  misconception,  a  veritable  tradition.  Many 
years  ago  the  wife  of  a  chief  went  out  in  a  small  fishing  canoe,  with 
her  two  children,  near  the  summer  camp  to  get  the  pine  boughs,  on  which 
salmon  spawn  is  collected.  She  drew  up  her  canoe  on  the  beach,  and 
warned  the  children  not  to  wander  off.  On  her  return  they  had  dis- 
appeared. She  called  to  them,  and  they  answered  her  from  the  woods 
with  voices  of  crows.  Always  when  she  sought  them,  two  crows 
mocked  her  from  the  trees.  The  children  never  returned,  and  it  was 
said  that  the  white  traders  had  kidnapped  them  and  carried  them  off' 
in  their  ship.  The  face  with  t!ie  beard  represents  the  trader,  and  the  two 
figures  the  kidnapped  chiliren.  The  figure  next  to  the  top,  with  the 
instrument  in  his  claws  across  his  breast,  represents  the  crane  (he  ko), 
and  the  legend,  or  rather  an  incident  in  a  legend,  is  roughly  as  follows: 
The  crane  was  formerly  an  expert  with  tools,  but  they  were  stolen  from 
him  by  a  mischievous  cl-aracter.  {T^slcan-ahl),  and  ever  since  he 
has  been  bewailing  his  fate.  The  cry  which  the  crane  now  utters  is, 
"I  want  my  tools."  The  next  figure  below  is  hoots,  the  bear,  holding' 
between  his  paws  the  butterfly.  At  the  creation,  when  the  groat  Tetl, 
the  benefactor  of  man,  was  looking  for  fair  land  for  man  to  occupy,  the 
butterfly  hovered  over  his  head  as  ho  flew.  When  he  came  to  the 
country  now  occupied  by  the  Haldr.,  the  butterfly  pointed  with  his 


p 


» 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LV. 


Carved  Columns  from  the  Northwest  Coast  and  Tiki  from  New  Zealand. 

From  photographs  by  the  author. 

Fig.  292.  Carved  Column.  At  the  Kaigani  village  of  Kasa-an,  Prince  of  Wales 
Island,  Alaska.     Described  in  detail  in  Chapter  VII. 

Fig.  293.  Carved  Commemorative  Column.  In  front  of  the  feast  house  of  Cliief 
Skowl,  at  Kasa-an  village,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska. 

Fig.  294.  Carved  Mortuary  or  Commemorative  Column.  In  front  of  the  house 
of  Chief  Kootenah,  at  Tongass  village,  Alaska  (Tlingit). 

Fig.  295.  Tiki.  At  Raroera  Pah,  New  Zealand.  Introduced  here  by  way  of  con- 
trast with  the  carvings  of  the  Haida.  From  Wood's  Natural  History, 
page  180.  Of  this  he  says:  '*  This  gigantic  tiki  stands,  together  with 
several  otherii,  near  the  tomb  of  the  daughter  of  Te  Whero-Whero, 
and,  like  the  monument  which  it' seems  to  guard,  is  one  of  the  finest 
examples  of  native  carving  to  l)e  found  in  New  Zealand.  The  precise 
object  of  the  tiki  is  uncertain,  but  the  protruding  tongue  of  the  upiier 
figure  seems  to  show  thiit  it  is  one  of  the  numerous  defiant  statues 
which  abound  in  the  islands.  The  natives  say  that  the  lower  figure 
represents  Maui  the  Atui  who,  according  to  Maori  tradition,  fished 
up  the  islands  from  the  bottom  of  the  sea." 


l:  ! 


m 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— NIblack. 


PLATE  LV. 


Carved  Columns  from  the  Northwest  Coast  and  Tiki  from  New  Zealand. 


•I 


ppi: 

i 

V  , 

■!   ,. 

i ' 

r  fiLJ . 

^R. 

1 
1 

f 

1 

i 
! 

i 

ft 

i    ff 


I    °i 


1;     : 


I         1 


f-i] 


THE   INDIANS  OF   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


327 


'  i. 


proboscis  to  tbe  good  latidn,  and  said :  "  Where  the  bear  is  there  are 
salmon,  herbs,  and  good  living;"  so  that  accounts  for  bow  the  Haida 
came  to  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  and  why  bears  are  so  abundant. 
I  This  is  similar  to  the  story  told  Judge  Swan  by  Edniso  of  Masset, 
British  Columbia.  The  next  figure  is  the  giant  snider  sucking  the 
blood  and  killing  a  man.  One  of  the  numerous  adventures  of  Takan- 
aid  was  to  kill  the  giant  spider,  which  was  such  a  mortal  enemy  to 
man.  Tskanahl  overcome  the  spider  and  threw  him  into  the  fire,  but 
instead  of  burning  he  shriveled  up  and  escaped  as  a  mosquito,  carry- 
ing away  with  him  a  small  coal  of  fire  in  his  proboscis.  Now  instead 
of  killing  men  he  can  c  y  suck  a  little  blood,  but  in  revenge  he  leaves 
a  coal  of  fire  in  the  bite.  My  informant,  a  Kaigani,  stated  thiit  it  would 
take  three  days  to  relate  all  the  adventures  of  T^skan-ahl.  The  lowest 
figure  is  Koone,  the  whole  representing  the  totem  of  the  owner  of  tbe 
column. 

The  key  to  all  the  carvings  is  found  in  the  legends  of  the  Indians. 
Often  their  significance  is  lost;  often  individual  eccentricity  leads  an 
Indian  to  make  a  carving  of  which  he  alone  knows  tbe  meaning;  often 
only  the  older  Indians  are  welt  informed  enough  to  tell  off-hand  what  a 
carving  means.  These  causes,  combined  with  the  indifference  of  the 
younger  generation  and  the  sensitiveness  and  reticence  of  the  older, 
makes  it  extremely  difficult  to  arrive  at  the  significance  of  the  figures. 
Often  they  concoct  stories  to  mislead  an  inquirer,  and  laugh  in  their 
sleeve  at  the  credulity  shown.  Until  a  general  collection  of  the  legends 
of  the  coast  is  made  we  must  remain  content  with  selecting  a  few  types, 
as  in  the  foregoing,  to  illustrate  the  motive  and  significance  of  these 
remarkable  carvings. 

Commemorative  columns. — There  are  two  classeo  of  these  (1),  com- 
memorative proper  and  (2)  mortuary.  It  has  been  explained,  in  the 
description  of  Fig.  2912,  that  the  upper  group  of  figures  commemorates 
a  real  or  supposed  incident  in  the  kidnapping  of  two  Indian  children 
by  the  white  traders.  It  is  the  gciierall}'  accepted  opinion  that  these 
columns  are  in  no  sense  historical,  but  purely  ancestral  or  totemic. 
This  claim  is  entirely  too  sweeping.  Fig.  293  shows  the  details  of  a 
column  erected  in  front  of  the  feast  house  of  tne  famous  Kaigani 
Chief  Skowl  at  Easaan.  This  is  in  the  rear  of  the  living  house, 
on  the  back  street,  so  to  speak.  In  front  of  the  latter  is  his  totemic 
column,  a  tall,  slender,  finely  carved  one,  surmounted  by  his  totem,  the 
eagle,  resting  on  seven  disks  or  skil,  as  shown  in  Plate  in.  The  feast 
house  column  (Fig.  293)  is  surmounted  by  Skowl's  crest,  the  eagle. 
Just  below  it  is  a  carved  figure  of  a  man  with  right  hand  uplifted  and 
index  finger  pointing  to  the  sky.  It  signifies  that  in  the  heavens  God 
dwells — the  God  of  the  white  man.  Below  this  is  the  representation 
of  an  angel  as  conceived  by  the  Indians  from  the  description  of  the 
whites,  and  then  comes  a  large  figure  intended  to  picture  a  Russian 
missionary  with  hands  piously  folded  across  the  breast.    This  group 


m 


1 1 


r' 


328 


REPORT   OP   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


!       ! 


l| 


of  the  figure  with  uplifted  hand,  the  angel,  and  the  misHioiiary,  commem- 
orates the  failure  of  the  Russian  priests  to  convert  SkowPs  people  to  their 
faith,  and  was  erected  in  ridicule  and  derision  of  the  religion  of  the  white 
man.  Below  this  group  is  a  magnificent  carving  of  a  spread  eagle,  and 
at  the  bottom  of  the  column  a  figure  intended  to  represent  one  of  the 
early  traders  on  the  coast.  Skowi  was  always  an  enemy  to  the  mis- 
sionary and  resisted  their  encroachments  to  the  last,  being  remarkable 
for  his  wealth,  obesity,  and  intemperate  habits.  He  weighed  at  the 
time  of  his  death,  in  the  winter  of  1882-'83,  considerably  over  300 
pounds.  As  a  young  man,  his  physical  prowess,  wealth,  and  family 
influence,  made  his  tyrannical  rale  at  Kasa-an  one  long  to  be  re- 
membered, as  he  did  much  to  keep  his  people  to  the  old  faith  and  to 
preserve  amongst  them  the  manners  and  customs  of  his  forefathers. 
Plate  LXYii  is  a  sketch  of  this  chief  lying  in  state  in  bis  lodge  at  Kasa-an 
village,  from  a  photograph  taken  by  the  writer  in  1885.  To  illustrate 
further  the  nature  of  some  of  these  commemorative  columns,  it  may  be 
well  to  mention  here  the  case  of  Chief  "  Bear  Skin,"  of  Skidegate,  Queen 
Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia,  as  cited  by  Judge  Swan.  "  Bear 
Skin,"  on  his  return  from  a  visit  to  Victoria,  British  Columbia,  had 
erected  in  front  of  his  house  two  wooden  effigies  of  Judge  Pemberton 
of  that  city  to  show  his  contempt  for  him  as  a  magistrate  for  putting 
him  in  the  lockup  at  Victoria.  In  the  Berlin  Museum  is  a  small  slate 
carving,  illustrated  in  Fig.  27n,  Tiate  Li,  which  commemorates  the 
prowess  of  a  certain  medicine  man  who  came  up  to  Skidegate  from 
Klue  village  to  work  his  charms  ou  two  dead  men.  He  was  observed 
by  numerous  witnesses  to  squat  upon  their  graves,  and  by  invoking 
the  power  of  his  yakes  with  rattles,  masks,  and  songs,  to  raise  them 
from  the  dead.  Coming  to  life,  they  clung  to  him  as  in  the  image. 
This  incident  is  of  course  vouched  for  by  reliable  witnesses,  but  no 
further  testimony  is  needed  to  insure  its  acceptance  as  gospel  by  the 
Indians  than  that  it  should  be  thus  carved  in  slate.  It  lifts  the  story 
to  the  first  rank  as  a  tradition  to  be  handed  down  as  long  as  the  image 
shall  recall  it  or  the  Indian  mind  cherish  the  recollection  of  it.  It  can 
not  be  claimed  that  a  good  case  has  been  made  out  in  the  illustrations 
here  cited  to  show  tiiat  these  columns  and  carvings  are  ever  historical 
in  the  itrict  sense  of  the  word,  but  they  are,  nevertheless,  at  times  com- 
memorative of  certain  real  or  supposedly  real  incidents,  and  the  state- 
ment that  they  arc  never  historical  at  least  needs  qualification. 

Mortuary  colvmns. — A  broad  distinction  isdrawn  here  between  columns 
that  in  themselves  form  a  mode  of  sepulture  and  those  which  are  com- 
memorative and  erected  at  some  distance  from  the  site  of  the  grave  in 
which  the  body  is  interred.  The  former  are  described  in  detail  in  Chapter 
XII,  on  Mortuary  Customs ;  the  latter  are  in  imitation  of  the  former,  and 
preserve  the  shadow  of  the  primitive  mode  of  sepulture  just  as  to-day 
the  funeral  urn  on  a  modern  grave  is  symbolical  of  the  old  custom  of 
crematiou.    These  are  illustrated  in  Fig.  1,  Plate  ii^rFig.  179«,  Plate 


THK   INDIANS   OV   THK   KollTHWKST   COAST. 


329 


immeiu- 
to  their 
le  wliito 
gle,  and 
5  of  the 
ilie  mis- 
larkiible 
I  at  tliu 
ver  300 
I  family 
}  be  Fe- 
ll and  to 
ifathers. 
Kasa-an 
llustrate 
D  may  be 
e,  Queen 

"  Bear 
ibia,  had 
smberton 
r  putting 
nail  slate 
rates  the 
ate  from 
observed 
invoking 
use  them 
le  image. 

but  no 
jl  by  the 
the  story 
he  image 
t.  It  can 
istrations 
historical 
ines  com- 
bo state- 
It. 

u  columns 
1  are  com- 

grave  in 
n  Chapter 
rioer,  and 
as  to-day 
custom  of 
79e,  Plate 


XXXV,  and  in  IMates  LV,  LXiv,an.i  Lxix,a.s  well  as  in  the  general  viewsof 
Kasa  an  village.  They  arc  erected  usually  near  the  corner  of  the  house 
at  one  side,  and  consist,  as  a  rule,  of  a  short  stout  post  or  column  sur- 
mounted by  a  carved  representation  of  the  crest  or  totem  of  the  de- 
ceased. The  erection  of  these  takes  [dace  at  the  ceremony  known  sis 
Ihe  "  glorification  or  elevation  of  the  dead,"  described  in  Chapter  xiii» 
After  the  body  has  been  entombed  it  is  incumbent  on  the  heir  of  the 
deceased,  if  the  latter  has  been  a  person  of  any  importance,  to  make  a 
feast  and  erect  one  of  these  commemorative  columns.  In  the  southern 
part  of  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  a  very  common  form  of  this  columiii 
is  a  short  stout  post  with  a  sign-board-like  square  formed  of  split  planks 
carved  on  the  outer  face.  This  kind  is  rare  to  the  north,  and  not  seen 
at  all  amongst  the  Kaigani,  as  far  as  known  to  the  writer. 

The  decay  of  totemic  carving. — Amongst  the  northern  Tlingit  these- 
carved  columns  of  all  kinds  have  largely  disappeared.  At  Sitka  only 
the  stumps  of  the  ancient  ones  are  now  found.  Wherever  the  mission- 
aries have  gained  influence  with  these  Indians  the  totemic  column.«r 
hjive  gradually  disappeared  and  the  old  ways  been  given  up.  Of  the 
Tiingit  villages  which  have  retained  many  of  the  primitive  customs 
Tongass  (Tunghaash)  is  the  most  representative.  Kasa-an  stands  at 
the  head  of  the  Kaigani  and  Skidegate  of  the  Haida  villages  in  this 
respect.  Wars,  epidemics,  and  emigration  have  reduced  the  population 
to  such  an  extent  that  former  sites  have  been  abandoned  and  the  Indi- 
ans are  gradually  concentrating  into  a  few  villages.  Graves,  ruins, 
decaying  houses,  grass-grown  village  sites,  graphically  picture  the  re- 
sults of  the  contact  ot  the  coast  Indians  with  our  civilization. 

Slate  carvinf/s. — The  slate  from  which  the  elaborate  Haida  carvings 
are  made  is  obtained  at  the  Slate  Creek,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  It 
has  the  desirable  quality  of  being  soft  and  easily  carved  when  freshly 
quarried,  and  of  hardening  and  taking  a  polish  after  exposure  to  the 
weather  for  some  time.  The  general  range  of  these  carvings  in  boxes, 
ilishes,  pipes,  and  models  is  shown  iu  Plates  XLiv,  XLVii,  and  XLViii. 
Sometimes  highly  polished  oopper  and  the  iridescent  shell  of  hali- 
Otis,  iind  sometimes  bone  or  ivory,  are  inlaid  to  represent  eyes,  teeth, 
etc.  The  finest  specimen  of  Haida  sculpture  known  to  the  writer  is 
that  illustrated  in  Plates  XLix  and  l.  Numerous  other  kinds  of  carv- 
ings in  bone,  ivory,  and  slate,  used  as  talismans  or  doctor's  charms  are 
not  illustrated  here,  being  left  for  separate  treatment  under  the  head  of 
Shaman  Paraphernalia  and  and  Siiamanistic  Rites. . 

MUSIC* 

Singiny. — While  in  r^^cent  years,  in  the  decay  of  the  ceremonial  in-- 
stitutions  of  the  Indians  of  this  region,  the  custom  of  singing  has  some- 

*  In  Filling's  Biltliojfraphy  of  North  American  Languages  is  mentioned  ii  ninnti- 
script  of  5U0])iigosin  liimsian  uud  Tlingit  of  vocabularies,  texts,  seutences,  songs,, 
etc.,  in  the  Tlingit  language  of  8itl<a.  Unfortunately  this  niannscript  ^Tas  inac- 
cessible, being  in  tbo  huiulsof  its  author,  Mr.  Alphonse  Piuart. 


1 
^1 


I 


330 


REPORT    OF   NATIONAL    Ml'SElJM,  1888 


what  died  out,  iu  early  days  they  were  passiouately  addicted  to  the 
practice.  In  the  ceremonies  of  welcome,  of  war  and  peace,  of  trade, 
and  of  all  the  endless  social  gatherings  of  these  exceedingly  sociable 
people,  singing  was  the  invariable  accompaniment.    Dixon  (1787)  says : 

When  tlio  traffic  of  the  daj'  is  pretty  well  over,  they  begin  to  siug  an«l  never  leave 
off  till  the  approach  of  night;  thus  beginning  and  ending  the  day  in  the  Humo  man- 
ner. •  •  •  It  muRt  be  allowed  that  their  snngH  are  performed  with  regularity  and 
in  good  time,  but  they  are  entirely  dentitnte  of  that  ploaning  niodnhition  and  har- 
mony of  cadence  which  we  hart  nsnally  been  accuHtomcd  to  hear  in  tlie  uongH  at 
other  parts  of  the  coaRt." 

Marchand  (1791)  says  that  amongst  the  Haida,  at  fixed  times  morn- 
ing and  evening,  they  sing  in  chorus,  in  whicli  every  one  takes  part. 
Poole  says  of  their  singing:  " a  peculiar  plaintiveness  of  tone  and  a 
quaint  hitch  of  the  voice  at  the  end  of  each  lino  redeems  the  so-called 
singing  from  the  charge  of  inflicting  torture  on  human  ears."!  He 
gives  in  this  connection  a  Haida  carroling  song,  which  is  a  repetition  of 
the  words  given  below  like  the  note  B  in  the  Key  of  E.  The  notes  to 
the  two  upper  lines  are  semi-breves,  those  to  the  under  line  crotchets, 

thus: 

Equ^l— ah,  ah,  ah,  ah,  he,  ll^  he,  andaute. 
EquM — ah,  ah,  ah,  ah,  he,  hb,  he,  creHceiulo. 
Eqni^l — ah,  cqnAl — ah,  hi',  hi",  ll^,  decrcacemlo. 

Plate  LVi  is  a  trading  song,  snug  by  the  Sitka  Indians  in  1787,  as 
reproduced  in  Dixon's  Voyage,  page  243,  and  described  in  Chapter  viii 
of  this  paper,  Fig.  300  is  a  song  of  the  ITaida,  used  as  an  accompani- 
ment to  their  ceremonial  dances  reproduced  from  Poole's  Queen  Char- 
lotte Islands,  page  322. 


I,  e,    "bT       I,      •,    ly-j«h.  H«,     ou, .  K.li,  I,.^  h^ 
Pa  Capo  four  time*,  flmshing  with  dorw. 

Chobd* 

I,    e,    ha.  1.     <b    ha. 

Fig.  300. 
SoNn  Oh-  TiiK  Haida. 

(Fmni  Pnnl...  I 

The  dance  songs  iu  this  region  of  the  coast  are  accompanied  by  the 
beating  of  drums  and  the  spasmodic  shaking  of  rattles.  Amongst 
the  Tlingit  the  women  rarely  dance,  but  sit  at  some  distance  from  the 
dancers,  "  and  sing  a  not  inharmonious  melody,  which  supplies  the 
place  of  music."  J 

*  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  188. 

t  Poole,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia,  p.  323. 

X  Langsdorff  voyages,  Pt.  i,  p.  114. 


^_.,i 


I 


B 


il 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LVI. 
Indian  Sonq. 

Indian  Song,  as  generally  sung  by  the  natives  of  Norfolk  Sound  (Sitkan  tribe) 
previous  to  cimraencing  trade.  Reproduced  from  Dixon's  Voyage,  page  243,  and 
explained  in  Chapter  VIII  of  this  paper. 


I  If 


Report  of  National  Muteum,  1888— Niblaek. 


Plate  LVI. 


^1 


itkan  tribe) 
ge  243,  and 


Indian  Song^  as  generally  Sim/ic  l>y  the  Natives    of 

NORFOLK  SOUND 
previous  to  commencing  trade 

fli     Chitr«(  tilt  tribe 


-  la     haig^ba  haitghhal^  haij^      "^^K  •    -h* 


m=^^  r  r  I  r  ^ 


Lhhkh  hl>K,hJ>hh(lh  hJ>h '  hih      '    hLh  ,  hJib  hlh  hdl 


haigh 


haJgh  'Aai^ 


^ 


aig  ha  haig  ha    haigh 


'I  •  I  '1  ■  iri'fiifrri  ^  ■ 


hl.h  hih  hi5 


^fff¥tfM^ 


fiaigh  hai^  ha  •  hai^  ha  hai^       haigh.     haigh 


^  '  ifrriJj''i^^-±^=^ 


Lm 


t     ;■ 


j 


1    I 


;i;i 


1 


I 

1    '  '  'S 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LVM 


Musical  Instruments  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


i     & 


Fig.  298.  Dance  Whistle.     In  forui  of  a  toy  balloon.  witl>  a  bladi    r  ;•  tj.iin;'  to 

the  wootien  mouth-piece  to  operate  the  whistle.    Cat.  No.  Hi''^'.i'.).  U.  S. 

N.  M.     Haida,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  British  Columbia.         'UTtpd 

by  James  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  399.  Dance  Whistle.     Blown  like  a  tife.     Compare  Fi:j.  826.    Cat.  No.  8905T, 

U.  S.  N.  M.    Skidegate,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  British  Columbia. 

Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  301.  Ceremonial  Trumpet.     Made  in  six  pieces  (see  Fig.  319).  which,  when 

joined,  form  six  chambers,  in  each  of  which  a  piece  of  fabric  is  stretched. 

The  different  tones  ure  not  set  to  a  scale.     Cat.  No.  20687.  U.  S.  N.  M. 

Tsimshiiin,  Fort  Simpson,  British  CJohimbia.    Collcctt^d  by  James  G. 

Swan. 
Fig.  302.  Medicine  and  Dance  Drum.    Tanned  sheep-skin  stretti.if'        -r  i  v  )o«Ien 

frame.    Totemic  figure,  the  bear.     It  is  lieaten  with  iw   -    inarj  '■uck 

imdded  with  cloth.     Cat.  No.   137i;i3.  U.   S.   N.   M.     rii.igit." Sitka. 

Alaska.     Collected  by  Paymaster  E.  B.  Webster,  U.  S.  Navy. 


t"- 


Report  of  National  Museum.  1888 Niblack. 


Plate  LVII. 


■   tJi.:-|H-,'    to 

No.  89057, 
Columbia. 

hicli.  when 
H  strt'tdied. 

J.  S.  N.  M. 
C  James  (J. 

r  :i  V  Kwleii 
.iiarj  "lick 
init.  Sitka. 


Musical  Instruments  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


ri , 


» 


ii  i. 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LVIII. 


Ceremonial  Rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  303.  Shaman  Dance  Rattle.  Of  wood;  ornamented  with  human  hair.  Cat. 
No.  9257,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tlingit  Indians.  Sitka,  Alaska.  Collected  by 
Dr.  A.  H.  Hoflf,  U.  S.  Army. 

Fig.  304.  Dance  Rattle.  WwkI;  ornamented  with  human  hair  and  oixn-cuk. 
Cat.  No.  73853.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tlingit  Indians,  Alaska.  Coli.  .ed  by 
Lieut.  T.  Dix  BoUes,  U.  S.  Navy. 

Fig.  305,  Snapper.  Of  two  pieces  of  woo«l  hinged  just  al)ove  the  wrapped  handle 
and  carved.  Carried  in  ceremonial  dances.  Cat.  No.  73796,  U.  S.  N.  M. 
Tlingit  Indians,  Hoonyah,  Alaska.  Collected  by  Lieut.  T.  Dix  BoUes. 
U.  S.  Navy. 

Fig.  306.  Rattle.  Of  wo<k1;  carved  to  represent  a  legend  which  exi)lains  how- 
toads  and  frogs  come  with  the  rain.  The  latter  is  shown  as  springing 
from  the  eyes  of  T'kul,  the  spirit  of  the  wind.  Cat.  No.  20583.  U.  S. 
N.  M.  Tsimshian  Indians,  Port  Simpson,  British  Cohmibia.  Collected 
by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  307.  Rattle.     Under  side  view  of  ceremonial  rattle  representing  the  double- 
headed  eagle.    This  design  undoubtedly  originated  from  the  imitation 
of  the  Russian  standard.    Cat.  No.  20762,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Sitka.  Alaska 
Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  308.  Dance  Rattle.  Rare  design  and  pecidiar  pattern.  Cat.  No.  74336,  U. 
S.  N,  M.    Tlingit  Indians,  Alaska.    Collected  by  John  J.  McLean. 


Report  of  National  Muieum,  1888. — Niblack. 


Plate  LVIII. 


lair.  Cat. 
Elected  l)y 

1  oixncula. 
)li>    ,ed  by 

ped  handle 
U.  S.  N.  M. 
Dix  Bolles. 

)lain8  how 

s  springiiiK 

0583.  U.  S. 

Collected 

;he  douhle- 
e  uuitation 
ka.  Alaska 

X  74336.  U. 
cLean. 


in 


Ceremonial  Rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


i 


i  1  ' 


'^. 


li 


i 


I-  i 


I 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LIX. 


Ceremonial  Dance-rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 

Fig.  ;J09.  Danc  E  Ratti,e.     In  Hliai>e  of  Hoorts,  the  tear.    Cat.  No.  88796,  U.  S,  N. 

M.     Masset,  Queen  Cliarlotte  Islands.  British  Cohimbia.    Collected  by 

James  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  310.  Cauved  Rattle.    In  shajie  of  the  orta  or  whale-killer,  showing  dorsal 

Hn  and  formidable  teeth.     Cat.  No.  20758,  U.  S.  N.  M.     THngit,  Sitka. 

Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  311.  Carved  Rattle.    In  form  of  cockle  shell.    Cat.  No.  74333,  U.  S.  N.  M. 

Tlingit,  Sitka.     Collected  by  Jolm  J.  McLean. 
Fig.  312.  Dance  Rattle.     Of  wood.     Used  by  Shamans.     Cat.  No.  89081,  U.  S.  N. 

M.     Haida,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  British  Columbia.     Collected  by 

James  G.  Swan. 
Fig.  313.  Dance  Rattle.     Showing  Hoorts,  the  bear,  with  protruding  tongue,  so 

common  in  Haida  drawings.    Cat.  No.  89076,  U.  S.  N.  M.    Skidegate, 

Queen  Charlotte  Islands.   British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G. 

Swan. 
Fig.  314.  Ceremonial  Rattle.     Of  wood;  ornamented  in  i)ahited  designs.     Cat. 

No.   88718,   U.   8.   N.  M.     Masset.  Queen   Charlotte  Islands.  Britisli 

Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


! 


iniiiii 


■■HM 


n 


m 


•6,  U.  S.  N. 
ollccted  by 

ing  dorsal 
iRit.  Sitka. 

J.  S.  N.  M. 

S4.  U.  S.  N. 
<)ll(><;to(l  by 

toiigiu",  so 
Skitlogato. 
James  (1. 

igns.     fat. 
(Is,   Britisli 


Report  of  Nntinnal  MuMum,  1888.— Niblack. 


Plate  LIX. 


Ceremonial  Dance-rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


j  •■; 

If 

:"    '   '  '. 

I 


w 


l!     ? 


It 
1^1 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LX. 


S 


Ceremonial  Dance-rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


Fig.  315.  Shaman's  Dancb  Rattle.    Skaga  aiiiliu.    Ilaida.     Forniorly  owned  In- 

Tsilwak,  a  medicine  man  of  CJold  Harbor.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands. 

British  Columbia.     Clat.  No.  HIM)53.  V.  S.  N.  M.    Collected  b>  JanieB 

G.  Swan. 
Fig.  310.  Rattle.    Sams  as  Fig.  307.  Plate  LVIII.    Cat.  No.  nm2.  U.  .S.  N.  11. 

Sitka,  AlasUa.     Collected  by  James  U.  Swan. 
Fig.  317.  Rattle.     Of  wood;  car\ed  tf)  represent  the  tisli-hawk.     Cat.  No.  !SfST27, 

U.  S.  N.  M.    Haida  Indians.  Masset.  Queen  Chari<)tte  Islands,  British 

C()lnml)ia.     Collected  by  James  (i.  .Swan. 
Fig.  318.  Rattle.     Back  view  of  Fig.  3(lfi,  Plate  T.VIII.     Cat.  No.  •2()583.  U.  S.  N. 

M.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


w% 


'1^ 


Repot  of  Naxiorial  Museuni;   1888.  -  Niblack 


Plate  LX. 


)\viii'(l  by 
tte  Islands. 
i  by  Janie!. 

U.S.  N.  5U 

:.  No.  !SH727, 
nils,  British 

k;!.  U.  s.  N. 


\ 


Ceremonial  Dance-rattles  from  the  Northwest  Coast. 


I     I 


:l 


II     i 


T:| 


I:   ! 


^■■ 

rj 

]\  - 

' '    mS 

'!  ■     , 

y,  - 

'- 

'iu   I 

-,  J 

'L  : 

■  ■ "  ■. 

;f.    •       »  19 


m 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXI. 


Musical  Instruments  from  the  Northwest  Coast  -Wooden  Whistles  and  Trumpets. 

Fig.  319.  Wooden  Trumpet.     Five-chamheri'd.     Coiin)are  Plate  LVII.  Fig.  iJOl. 

Fig.  320.  Cere.momal  Whistle.  Of  wood,  \kitli  womleii  reed  in  yie  moutli-piece. 
Blown  like  a  flageolet.  Cat.  N.;.  »flOr)i).  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida.  Queen 
Charlotte  Tslan«l8.  British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  331.  Cekkmonial  Whistle.  Compare  Fig.  330.  Cat.  No.  SHHTO.  U.  S.  X.  M. 
Ilaida.  <^neen  C'harlotte  Islands.  Rritisli  Columbia.  ( 'oUected  by  James 
(i.  Swan. 

Fig.  333.  Ckuemomm,  Whistle.  Cat.  No.  SHHTfi.  r.  S.  N.  M.  Masset.  Queen 
Charlotte  Islands,  Mritisli  (\)ltnnbia.     Collected  by  James  (t.  !-i\vnn. 

Fig.  333.  Ceremonial  Whistle.  Cylindrical,  with  wooden  reed  in  mouth-piece. 
Cat.  No.  H,SH!»3((.  U.S.  N.  M.  Haida.  Queen  Cliarlott.-  Islaixls.  British 
Columbia.     Collected  by  James  (i.  Swan. 

Fig.  334.  Ceremonial  Trumpet.  Of  wood:  made  in  two  sections  with  reed  U- 
tweeii.  Compare  Fig.  329.  Cat.  No.  30{>89.  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tsimsiiian. 
Fort  Simpson.  British  Colund)ia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  325.  Double  Ceremonial  Whistle.  Comi)are  Fig.  333.  Cat.  No.  8HHT3,  l'. 
S.  N.  M.  Mas.set.Qn.  n  Cinirlotte  Islands.  British  Columbia.  Collected 
by  James  CI.  SwaiL 

Fig.  336.  (^EREMONIAL  WhIstlk  See  Plate  lAMI.  Fig.  290.  Cat.  No.  smr.T.  U. 
S.  N.  JI.  Skideg.ite.  Queen  charlotte  Islands.  Mrilish  Colnnd)ia.  Col- 
lected by  James  (i.  Swan. 

Fig.  337.  Ceremonial  Trumpet.  Of  wocmI:  in  section,  to  show  the  vibrating  |)iece. 
Cat.  No.  20(19.").  U.  S.  N.  M.  Tsimsiiian.  Fmt  Simpson,  Mritish  Colum- 
bia.    ('olU'cted  bv  James  (r.  Swan, 


Report  of  National  Museum,  I888.-Niblack. 


Plate  LXI. 


Trumpets. 

Fis.  301. 
nith-pk't'c. 
da.  QiK'cii 
.  Swan. 
r.  S.  N.  M. 
1  by  .liinu's 

et.   Quet'ii 

tith-pit'cc. 
(Is,  IJiitisli 

li  ri'f'il  1h'- 
rsiinshiiiii. 
an. 

,.  8HHT:{.  U. 
Collcctfd 

H\Wu.   U. 
nhiii.     Col- 

itinK  piece, 
ish  Toluni- 


i 


if 

J 'T 


V  ■■'! : 


}  -4 


■i"  ■'    1^ 


Musical  Instruments  from  the  Northwest  Coast-Wooden  Whistles  and  Trumpets. 


( 


■I  k 


i\W' 


i 


i 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXII. 


Musical  Instruments  from  the  Northwest  Coast— Wooden  Whistles  and  Trl-mpets. 

Fig.  329.  Dance  Whistle.  With  double  reed  mouth-pieces  backed  with  bellows. 
The  cheeks  of  the  bellows  are  painted,  representing  Hoorts,  the  bear. 
Cat.  No.  89064,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Skidegate,  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands,  British  Columbia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  330,  Dance  Whistle.  Of  wood;  principle  of  a  policeman's  whistle.  Cat.  No. 
89067,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Skidegate,  British  Columbia.  Col- 
lected by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  331.  Whistle.  Of  wood.  Cat.  No.  89093,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians,  Skide- 
gate, British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  332.  Trumpet.  WoiKlen  tul^e,  with  vibrating  reed.  Cat.  No.  88895,  U.  S.  N. 
M.  Haida  Indians,  Skidegate,  British  Colimibia.  (yoUetJted  by  James 
6.  Swan. 

Fig.  333.  Whistle.  (See  Fig.  330.)  Cat.  No.  89066,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Haida  Indians, 
Skidegate,  British  Columbia.    Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 

Fig.  334.  Whistle.  Spapakwilla  or  Oolalla's  (the  mountain  demon's)  call.  Used 
only  at  the  commencement  of  great  and  imiwrtant  ceremonies  to  an- 
nounce the  beginning  of  the  distribution  of  i)roperty  in  the  potlatch. 
Cat.  No.  89002,  U.  S.  N.  M.  Skedan's  village,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands, 
British  Columbia.     Collected  by  James  G.  Swan. 


Trumpets. 

th  bellows. 
s,  the  bear, 
n  Charlotte 

;.  Cat.  No. 
tnbia.    Col- 

ians,  Skide- 

)5,  U.  S.  N. 
d  by  James 

ia  Indians. 

I. 

call.     Used 

)nies  to  an- 

:ie  i)otlatch. 

itte  Islands, 


Report  of  National  Museum,  1888.— Niblack. 


Plate  LXII. 


Musical  Instruments  from  the  Northwest  Coast— Wooden  Whistles  and  Trumpets. 


ri 


!1 


'»'■] 


•ill 


M' 

■  1 

Ik  I.I 

!  i»'' 


l-i 


I  I 


X 


01 

n 
si 
u 
a 
b 
P 

t 

I 

s 

I 
( 
{ 


I  '  ' 
It  :^ 
U  ' 


Tl 


THE   TXPTANS   OF    THE   NORTIIWES(T   COAST. 


nai 


AiMitional  notes  im  the  subject  of  singlnpf  M'ill  bo  given  in  (Emptor 
XIII,  in  the  description  of  the  various  ceremonies. 
Drums. — Portlock  ( 1 787)  says  of  a  Tl  in  git  chief  whom  he  traded  with : 

He  was  not  for  trnnHactin<r  liis  bnsiiieHs  in  a  liiirry;  mid  pi'i'liaps  be  thoiijTlit  that 
on  his  last  visit  wo  were  not  iniproHscd  with  a  BiiHicitMit  idea  of  ills  importance;  for 
now  he  came  along-side,  with  his  party,  in  ijreat  ])oiiip  and  Rolcninity,  all  of  them 
singing;  and  in  addition  to  the  vocal  concert,  they  entertained  us  with  iuHtniraental 
music,  which  consisted  of  a  large  old  chest,  beaten  with  the  hands,  by  way  of  a  drnm, 
and  two  rattles.  Tlie  rattles  were  2  feet  lon;^,  and  about  2  inches  round,  nnvdo  of 
hollow  pieces  of  wood  neatly  joined  toijDther,  and  a  number  nf  small  stones  being 
pnt  in,  they  were  closed  at  both  vwdn.  The  chief  held  one  ot  these  rattles  in  his  hand, 
which  he  frequently  shook  with  an  air  of  meaning  intelligenci^  and  the  rest  of  his 
tribe  seemed  to  follow  his  diiTolions  in  Hinging  in  the  itiost  exaut  manner. 

•  The  usual  type  of  drum,  iiowever,  is  that  shown  in  Fijj.  302,  Plate 
LVII,  which  consists  of  a  i)iece  of  deer-hide  or  sheep-skin  stretched 
across  a  circular  hoop. 

liattles. — These  are  usually  made  of  cedar  wood,  generally  in  sections 
neatly  joined  together,  and  elaborately  carved  and  painted  in  totemic 
designs.  There  are  two  kinds,  snappers  and  rattles  proper.  Snappers 
are  usually  made  in  two  pieces  hinged  together  in  such  a  way  that  by 
pulling  a  string  or  jerking  it  bodily,  the  two  parts  come  together  with 
a  snapping  noise.  Often  these  are  carved  in  the  form  of  the  head  of 
some  animal  with  enormous  teeth  and  jaws,  controlled  by  a  string,  being 
very  eflective  in  amusing  the  multitude  when  carried  in  the  native 
dances.  The  most  primitive  rattle,  mentioned  by  the  early  voyagers,  is 
that  shown  in  Fig.  73,  Plate  xviir,  composed  of  two  hoops  joined  by  a 
wooden  cross-piece,  the  circumference  being  closely  strung  with  the 
beaks  of  the  puffin.  The  usual  form  of  rattle  is  a  hollow  wooden 
chamber  with  about  a  dozen  small  pebbles  in  it.  The  forms,  variety 
of  carving,  and  general  shapes  are  so  great  that  only  a  few  typical  ones 
are  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  i)lates  (Lviii,  iix,  ond  LX).  They 
are  carried  in  the  hand  On  ceremonial  occasions,  and  serve  by  their 
noise  to  accentuate  the  measured  lime  of  the  music  in  the  dance. 
Those  shown  in  the  plates  are  described  in  detail  in  the  legend  accom- 
panying each. 

Whistles. — These  are  shown  in  great  variety  in  Figs.  298,  299,  and 
301,  and  in  Plates  LXi  and  LXii.  While  they  are  not,  in  one  sense,  mu- 
sical instruments,  not  being  capable  of  giving  forth  more  than  two  or 
three  distinct  notes,  yet  they  serve  the  purpose  of  the  Indians,  although 
they  do  not  speak  very  highly  for  their  advancement  in  a  musical  way. 
Some  of  their  devices  of  this  kind  are  es^seutially  for  the  purpose  of 
making  a  hideous  noise,  such,  for  instance,  as  that  in  Fig.  298,  consist- 
ing of  a  wooden  whistle  and  a  bladder  like  a  toy  balloon,  or,  Fig.  329, 
consisting  of  a  whistle  backed  by  a  pair  of  bellows  to  furnish  the  wind. 
Such  instruments  are  essentially  for  "  cultus"  dances,  or  those  intended 
to  amuse  the  populace.    Others  are  highly  ceremonial  in  thei'.  nature. 


;l)f 


*  Portlock,  Voyage,  p.  282. 


3.^2 


KKPORT   OF    NATIONAL   MUSKIIM,  1H8«. 


The  most  elabointe  one  of  this  kind  \h  shown  in  Fi}{8.  3(U,  Phite  LVIII, 
and  319,  Plato  Lxi,  both  being  views  of  tiie  same  instrument,  the  latter 
in  detail  and  the  former  put  together  for  use.  It  consists  of  six  pieces 
of  wood,  forming  a  kind  of  trumpet,  with  five  openings.  Through  these 
is  stretched  a  continuous  narrow  band  of  silk.  When  blown  through  it 
gi  .'es  forth  a  noise  like  a  deer  call,  each  section  being  pitched  slightly 
ditferent,  although  not  in  any  musical  scale.  Fig.  299,  of  which  Fig. 
.'t26,  Plate  lxi,  is  another  view,  is  a.  wliistle  pure  and  simple,  being 
blown  by  applying  the  lips  as  in  a  fife.  The  other  instruments  shown 
are  blown  like  a  flageolet,  some  of  them  having  several  flnger-holes  to 
change  the  note.  Fig.  324  has  a  reed  or  vibrating  piece  within,  as  shown 
in  one  section  of  corresponding  type  in  Fig.  327.  Dawson  states  that 
among  the  Haida  "  certain  secrets  are  reputed  to  appertain  to  the  oflBce 
of  chief,  among  which  is  the  possession  of  various  articles  of  property 
which  are  supposed  to  be  mysterious  and  unknown  to  the  rest  of  the  In- 
dians, or  common  people.  *  *  *  •  When  my  informant  was  .ibout 
to  engage  in  the  dance,  the  chief  took  him  aside,  showing  hiUi '  akious 
articles  of  the  mysterious  chief  ^s  properties,  among  others  a  i)eculiar 
whistle,  or  cell  with  vibrating  reed  tongues,  which,  concealed  in  the 
mouth,  enables  the  operator  to  produce  strange  and  startling  noises, 
that  may  be  supposed  by  those  not  in  the  secret  to  imlicate  a  species 
of  possession  in  the  excited  dancer.  These  things  are  exi)lained  by 
the  chief  to  his  probable  successor,  and  are  also  known  to  some  of  the 
more  important  Indians,  but  not  to  all.  They  are,  no  doubt,  among 
the  devices  for  obtaining  and  holding  authority  over  the  credulous 
vulgar."  • 

SUMMARY.  ' 

It  can  not  be  said  that  in  a  musical  way,  according  to  our  standard, 
these  Indians  liave  made  much  progress,  but  the  music,  such  as  it  is, 
has  the  nature  of  an  accompaniment  to  their  dancing,  or  is  at  least 
subordinate  to  other  forms  of  entertainment.  Instrumental  music 
pure  and  simple,  as  an  enjoyment  in  itself,  is  practically  unknown,  but 
the  passion  of  these  Indians  for  vocal  music  has  been  commented  upon 
by  nearly  every  visitor  to  the  coast  who  has  published  the  account  of 
his  experiences.  In  the  art  of  painting,  drawing,  carving,  and  sculpt- 
ure they  stand  at  the  head  of  the  savage  tribes  of  the  world.  In  the 
wealth  of  their  traditions,  in  the  abundance  of  their  industrial  products, 
in  the  range  of  their  capabilities  as  a  people,  there  is  so  much  that  is 
worthy  of  illustration  and  description  that  what  has  been  said  here 
seems  as  but  the  bare  outline  of  a  subject  worthy  of  the  special  study 
of  all  ethnologists. 

*  Dawson,  Report,  B,  p.  120. 


VIII. 


PRODDCTIONS,  LOCOMOTION,   WEALTH,  AND  TRADE. 


PBODUOTIONS  :   UEABING  AND  CULTIVATION. 

Bearing. — The  only  domestic  .animal  is  the  Indian  dog.  It  resembles 
the  wolf,  having  a  sharp  nose,  a  long  bushy  tail,  and  being  in  fact  a 
cross-breed  from  the  wolf.*  The  Indians  are  remarkably  fond  of  them, 
and,  in  every  canoe,  three  or  four  may  be  seen  sticking  their  sharp  muz- 
zles over  the  gunwale.  The  poorer  the  Indian  the  greater  the  number 
of  dogs  he  owns.  Practically  they  are  not  of  very  great  use  to  their 
masters ;  they  occasionally  run  down  deer  in  the  winter  and  are  used 
to  hunt  bear,  but  are  very  badly  trained,  as  they  are  allowed  to  bark 
furiously  on  scenting  a  trail  and  are  very  cowardly.  They  arc,  how- 
ever, of  little  care  to  their  owner,  as  they  pi(!k  up  their  own  food  from 
around  the  refuse  of  the  tide,  camp,  and  village.  The  pure  strain  has 
been  crossed  with  the  cur  dogs  of  the  whites  and  the  present  result  is 
a  degenerate  variety.  Bancroft  is  authority  for  the  statement  that 
"Dogs  of  a  peculiar  breed,  now  nearly  extinct,  were  shorn  each  year, 
furnishing  a  long  whit<)  hair,  which,  mixed  with  hue  hemp  and  cedar, 
made  the  best  cloth."  t 

Cultivation. — The  only  thing  cultivated  amongst  the  Tlingit,  Haida, 
and  Tsimshian,  before  the  advent  of  the  whites,  was  a  species  of  nar- 
cotic plant  similar  to  tobacco,  but  about  which  it  is  difldcult  to  obtain 
definite  information.  Vancouver  (1793)  first  saw  it  at  Kootznahoo  or 
Admiralty  Island,  and  of  it  he  says : 

On  each  side  of  tbe  entrance  some  now  linbitiitionH  were  <!onstrnctiug,  and,  for  the 
first  time  during  our  iiiterconrso  witli  tlie  Northwest  Anierienu  Indi.ans,  in  the 
vicinity  of  these  habitations  were  found  some  square  patches  of  grouuu  in  a  state  of 
cnltivatiou,  producing  a  phmt  tliat  appeared  to  be  a  species  of  tobacco,  and  wliich 
we  understood  is  by  no  moans  uncommon  amongst  the  inhabitants  of  Queen  Char- 
lotte's Islands,  who  cultivate  much  of  this  plant,  t 

All  the  evidence  points  to  the  Haida  as  being  the  chief  cultivators  of 
this  species  of  tobacco  plant.  Today  one  finds  stored  away  in  the 
out-of-the-way  nooks  in  the  older  houses  huge  stone  mortars,  in  which 
this  weed  was  pounded  up  for  use.  (Plate  lxiii.  Fig.  339).  It  was  not 
smoked,  as  may  be  supposed,  but  chewed  or  held  in  the  cheek.  Its 
preparation  consisted  in  drying  it,  pounding  it  in  a  mortar,  and  press- 


•  Dann,  Oregon,  p.  290. 

t  Bancroft,  Vol.  i..  Native  Races,  p.  l(i(). 


t  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol,  iii.,  p.  25C. 


333 


334 


REPORT   or   NATIONAL   MUSEIM,  1888. 


ing  it  into  plugi>  or  cakes.  Lime,  made  iiom  burut  chiui -.shells,  was 
luixed  wjtb  it  to  give  a  good  "  bite."  Tlie  nictice  of  smokiog  came  in 
with  the  whites,  aud  our  tobacco  has  coin  yletely  replaced  the  native 
article,  which  is  uowonly  cultivated,  if  at  all,  iu  the  most  remote  regiouis, 
auu  tLe  writer  was  unable  to  obtain  any  specimens  of  it. 

Gardens. — Around  all  the  villages  garden  patches  may  now  be  seen. 
The  principal  vegetable  cultivated  i.s  the  potato,  although  turnips  and 
a  few  others  are  found  occasioually.  The  Haii'.a  in  particular  cultivate 
potatoes  iu  large  quantities  to  trade  on  the  mainland. 


}m\  \ 


LOCOMOTION:   CANOE  TRAVEL. 

From  the  diversified  nature  of  the  country  Jiud  the  numerous  inland 
water-ways,  travel  is  of  necessity  by  canot\  It  is  unnecessary  to  treat 
of  the  subject  here  after  what  has  been  said  under  the  titles  of  tents, 
tentSj  p.  3(M,  and  canoes,  p.  201. 


;  :;i 


mi% 


WEALTH:   CURRENCY,  PROPERTY,   SLAVES,  LAND. 

Primitive  wealth — Before  the  advent  of  the  wliites,  wealth  cou  -ibied 
in  the  possession  of  sea-otter  sliiins,  hunting  and  ti.shing  grounds,  slaves, 
and  household  and  personal  property,  such  as  daiM.e  paraphernalia, 
household  furniture,  hunting  and  hsliing  implements,  canoes,  houses, 
and  articles  of  trade.  Practically,  however,  the  unit  of  '^'^alue  was  the 
8eaotter  skin,  as  it  was  also  the  basis  of  wealth.  As  the  I'aida  were 
the  most  export  hunters  of  this  animal  in  this  region,  they  bv'came  in 
time  the  most  wealthy  aud  intluential  people  on  the  coast.  TL«i  prin- 
cipal changes  in  the  forms  of  wealth  have  been  iu  the  substituti^tu  of 
blankets  for  skius  and  furs  and  the  abolition  of  slavery.  Other  Tise 
the  enumeration  c^f  articles  of  wealth  is  as  giv«!n  above, 

Currencij — Amongst  the  interior  Indians  of  North  America  the 
beaver  akin  was  the  n?<^diut';  of  exchangti.  In  tlic  trade  betwcon  the 
coast  Imlians  and  those  of  the  interior,  the  deutaliinn  shell  was  valued 
bythr  ii;i;ter,  who  gave  in  exchange  the  abalone  shell  so  highly  prized 
by  the  l\>riner.  Amongst  the  coast  Iiidiiins  themselves,  as  stated,  the 
sea-ottei'  wkin  wa,s  the  basis  of  exdiauge,  although  the  shell  curren(!y 
seems  to  have  had  a  relative  value.  This  latter  lost  its  function  when 
the  whit:e8  began  to  i»)port  such  quantities  of  shell  later  on.  These 
have,  however,  remained  a:;  a  fa\  orit<'  oriiamcnt,  occu!)ynig  somewhat 
the  place  of  jewels  amongst  civilised  people.  With  the  almost  i^otal  dis- 
appearance of  the  sea-otter  through  the  greed  of  Iinliau  and  white  man 
alike,  a  new  currency  sprang  up.  It  happene<l  that,  through  the  com- 
|x»tition  in  trade  between  th(>  Frends,  Englisli,  AmericaJis,  ami  Rus- 
siarn,  success  crowned  the  English  through  the  superiority  of  the 
material  which  theyoffeied  in  trade,  and  with  the  establishment  of  the 
Hudson  Bay  (jompany  tiieir  blanket.-*,  (li rough  uuifoimity  aud  excel- 
lence iu  grading,  be«;ame  the  recognized  currency.    These  vary  from 


I 


THE   INDIANS   OF  THE   NOKTHWEST    COAST. 


335 


I 


m 


"  one  point,"  the  poorest,  to  "  four  points,"  the  best.  These  ■'  poiuts  " 
are  woven  into  tbo  texture  ou  the  edge,  ami  it  has  happened  that  the 
"  two-and-a-half  point "  has  come  to  be  the  unit,  valued  now  at  about 
$1.50.  Just  as  in  former  times,  as  the  sea  otter  skins  wore  stored  away 
representing  so  much  wealth,  so  to  day  the  bhmkets  are  folded  and 
packed  away  in  their  boxes.  They  are  generally  received  at  face  value 
by  all  traders  when  unused  and  in  good  condition.  The  value  of  every- 
thing is  referred  to  the  unit  blanket.  A  four  point  blanket  is  worth  so 
many  blankets  (two- audone-half  point),  ami  the  cost  of  everytning  is 
reckoned  in  the  same  way. 

Property  in  Itmd. — Throughout  this  region  the  coast  line,  streams, 
estuaries,  and  adjacent  lakes  are  divided  amongst  the  different  families, 
the  right  of  possession  descending  from  one  generation  to  another  as 
l)ersonal  property.  The  larger  salmon  streams  aie  sometimes  jointly 
owned  by  several  fau'-ilies,  or  owned  by  one  family  and  leased  for  a 
consideration  to  one  or  several  others.  Stranded  marine  animals,  or 
other  debris  washed  by  the  tide,  belong  to  the  family  owning  that  por- 
tion of  the  shore  line,  the  boundaries  of  possessions  being  defluitely 
marked  and  respected  accordingly.  Nor  is  this  boundary  confined  to 
the  strip  of  coasr,  but  extends  well  out  to  sea,  carrying  with  it  the 
right  to  shoot  seals  and  gather  birds'  eggs  ou  outlying  rocks,  hunt  sea- 
otter,  and  to  ilsh  on  well-known  halibut  or  cod  banks. 

Major  Powell  says:  "  Land  tenure  does  not  begin  in  grants  from  the 
monarch  or  the  feudal  lord,  but  a  system  of  tenure  in  common  by 
gentes  or  tribes  is  developed  into  a  system  of  tenure  in  severalty.''  • 
Tiiis  is  admirably  illustrated  in  this  region,  for  the  ownership  of  a  tract 
of  land  by  a  family  has  come,  through  being  vested  in  an  individual  or 
the  head  of  that  fiimily,  to  mean  practically  individual  ownership. 
Dawson  gives  an  instance  n  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  where  a  rich 
tract  of  country  called  Tl-ell,  which  had  come  into  the  possession  of  a 
former  Chief  of  Skidogato  as  the  property  of  his  wife,  "  was  afterwards 
given  by  him  to  the  Skedans  of  that  day  as  a  pcace-otlering  for  the 
wounding  or  killing  of  one  of  his  (Skedans)  women.  The  tract  thus 
now  belongs  to  Skedans,  and  is  valued  as  a  berry  ground. "  t 

Disputes  over  ownership  of  land,  boundaries,  etc.,  have  been  the 
cause  of  many  feuds.  At  Thorn  Bay,  adjoining  Tolstoi  Bay,  Prince  of 
Wales  Island,  Alaska,  a  valuable  tract  of  hunting  and  tishing  ground 
is  in  dispute  between  the  Stikines  and  Kaigani,  both  tribes  in  true 
American  style  having  up  "K"o  trespassing"  signs  on  the  trees. 

Co/ipt'vs. — Throughout  the  Northwest  coast  copper  plates  or  "cop- 
pers" of  a  conventional  pattern  are  valued  as  emblems  or  tokens  of 
wealth,  and  have  been  handed  down  for  generations.  They  originally 
came  from  the  Chilkat  country,  where  virgin  copper  is  found  in  consid- 
erable quantities,  and  are  made  in  the  form  of  a  shield  from  2h  to  3J 

•  Aiimiiil  Report,  Bmoaii  of  Etliiiology,  ld7y-'80,  p.  83. 
t  Dawson,  Koport,  li,  p.  105. 


■5  '!« 


33G 


KEFOKT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


i'ii 


i<  ' 


iiu 


III  I 


feet  iu  length,  12  to  ii.5  inches  in  width,  and  one  sixteenth  to  oneeightli 
of  an  inch  in  thickness.  They  have  a  groove  running  vertically  in  tiio 
lower  half  and  transversely  across  the  middle  at  the  narrow  part,  form- 
ing a  flgnre  like  the  letter  T.  They  are  sometimes  painted,  but  more 
commonly  etched  on  the  outer  surface  with  the  design  of  the  crest  or 
totem  of  the  owner.  If  they  ever  served  as  shields  in  battle  such  use 
has  long  since  disappeared,  and  now  they  have  only  a  ceremonial  or 
emblematic  significance.  To  be  of  great  value  these  plates  must  be 
large,  of  virgin  copper,  worked  by  hand,  of  n.itive  manufacture,  of 
nujforni  thickness,  except  at  the  edges,  where  they  should  be  thicker 
than  elsewhere;  and,  tinally,  when  struck  should  give  forth  a  dnll 
sound  and  not  ring.  Totemic  etching  on  the  outer  surface  also  adds 
value  to  them.  Modern  "coppers"  of  European  manufacture  are  not 
very  highly  jmzed,  as  compared  with  the  ancient  ones.  Lisiansky 
(1804)  says  that  amongst  the  Tlingit  they  wero  "only  possessed  by  the 
rich,  who  give  for  one  of  them  from  twenty  to  thirty  sea-otter  skins. 
They  are  carried  by  their  servants  before  their  masters  on  different  oc- 
casions of  ceremony,  and  are  boateu  upon  so  as  to  serve  as  a  musical  in- 
strument. The  value  of  the  plate  depends,  it  seems,  on  its  being  made 
of  virgin  copper,  for  the  common  ones  do  not  bear  a  higher  price  than 
a  single  skin."*  The  best,  according  to  Dunn  (183-1),  were  worth 
around  Dixon  Entrance  nine  slaves,  and  were  transmitted  as  a  precious 
heir-loom. t  Now  they  are  valued  at  from  forty  to  eighty  blankets. 
They  are  called  by  the  Kaigani  Pow,  ami  are  sliown  iu  Plate  Lxvii. 
Dr.  Boas  says  of  them  : 

"  They  are  given  as  presouts  by  one  tribe  to  anotlier.  The  Indinim  valn«!  n  copper- 
plate the  more  the  more  freqnently  it  has  been  fjivon  nn  a  present.  Every  Hitijjlo 
plate  has  its  name  and  its  own  honse,  and  in  fed  n'jjniarly.  No  woman  is  allowed  to 
enter  its  house.  Almost  every  tribe  lias  a  tradition  referriuj^  to  their  orijjin.  .Some 
say  that  a  man  who  visited  the  moon  received  it  from  the  man  in  the  moon.  Others 
say  a  chief  living  far  into  the  ocean  gave  it  to  a  man  wlio  came  to  visit  him,  etc. 
Similar  legends  refer  to  the  baliotis  shells  which  are  nsed  for  ear  and  nose  oruamcn's 
and  bracelets."  t 

This  may  be  the  custom  with  regard  to  copper  plates  amongst  the 
southern  coast  tribes,  but  itdiflters  materially  from  that  ot  the  Tlingit, 
Haida,  and  Tsimshiau,  With  thetn  they  are  simply  tokens  of  wealth. 
These  are  shown  m  Plate  lxvii  as  forming  no  inconsiderable  i>ortion 
of  the  wealth  of  Chief  Skowl,  amounting  to  huntlreds  of  blanketi^. 
Dawsou  says  that  amongst  the  I'sinishiau  these  coppers  an'  exhibited 
iu  a  circle  in  upright  position  at  the  ceremony  of  "bringing  out"  a 
young  girl,  who  sits  within  the  circle  and  sings.§ 

Amongst  the  Kaigani  these  fow  are  often  displayed  over  the  grave 
of  a  deceased  person  of  wealth.  One  is  shown  in  Plate  iii,  left  of 
upper  view.    Some  miles  below  the  village  of  Kasa-an,  on  Prince  of 


•Lisiunskv,  Voyage,  i».  150, 
t  Diuiu,  Oregon,  p.  Ii88. 


t  Notes  on  the  Ktlinology  of  hritish  (^oliinib'ft  (Ainer. 

I'hilo.  Socii'*y,  Nov.  IH,  1*7),  p.  Ul. 
i^S  Dawson,  Keport,  U,  p,  IIJl. 


¥ 


THE   INDIANS   OF   THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


337 


Wales  Island,  one  is  nailed  to  a  tree  on  a  point  of  land  to  mark  the  lo- 
cality where  a  canoe  was  upset  and  the  occnpants  drowned.  Lisian- 
sky,  as  quoted,  shows  that  they  were  occasionally  used  by  the  Tiingit 
as  a  sort  of  gong  or  musical  instrument,  being  carried  before  the  chiefs 
by  the  slaves  and  beaten  upon. 

The  change  in  the  articles  of  value  accumulated  and  stowed  away  as 
wealth  is  illustrated  by  an  incident  in  the  summer  of  1886,  where  some 
white  men  robbed  a  cache  of  the  Klawak  chief  Tingaate  of  all  its  con- 
tents to  the  value  of  over  $2,000.  The  booty  included  five  hundred 
blankets,  fifty  wash-bowls,  thirty-six  mirrors,  six  valuable  dancing 
robes,  and  many  other  articles.  It  may  be  mentioued  in  this  connec- 
tion that  the  wash-bowls  are  used  as  receptacles  for  food,  and  are 
taking  the  place  of  the  native  wooden  bowls. 

TRADE:  EXCHANGE  OF  COMMODITIES. 

Port  Simpson,  from  its  central  location  at  the  head  of  Dixon  En- 
trance, has  come  to  be  the  great  emporium  of  trade  for  the  surrouudiug 
region.  -  Dunn  says  that,  in  1831,  the  Haida,  Nass,  Eaigaui,  Tougass, 
Port  Stewart  and  Stikines  generally  rendezvoused  there  in  the  mouth 
of  September  to  trade.*  Simpson  estimates  that,  in  1841,  about  four- 
teen thousand  from  the  various  tribes  of  Stikines  on  the  north  to  the 
Sebassa  on  the  south,  resorted  there,  although  many  of  them  merely 
paid  passing  vis:*"s  en  route  to  the  Nass  River  to  fish  for  eulachou.t 

In  earlier  days,  previous  to  the  }>dvent  of  the  whites,  the  trading 
was  carried  on  less  systematically  and  with  more  formality  on  account 
of  the  feuds  between  the  different  tribes.  The  Indians  of  this  whole 
region  are  expert  traders.  Every  article  purchased  undergoes  the 
closest  scrutiny.  Every  defect  is  discovered  and  the  value  scaled 
down  accordingly.  If  once  a  certain  price  is  obtained  for  a  commodity 
of  theirs  it  is  adhered  to  thereafter  as  the  set  price,  and  the  kuowledge 
of  such  value  travels  fast.  Time  and  distance  are  unimportant  factors 
in  a  bargain.  If  200  miles  farther  on  the  price  paid  for  a  commodity 
is  considerably  greater,  the  distance  is  reckoned  as  nothing  in  going 
there  to  get  the  difference.  On  the  other  hand,  in  purchasing  goods 
from  the  traders,  they  show  rare  good  sense  in  their  selection  of  the 
better  qualities,  mere  cheapness  being  in  itself  no  recommendation. 
Prom  the  earliest  times  they  have  preferred  articles  of  use  to  trinkets. 
Dixon  (1787)  says  that  they  refused  beads  with  contemi)t.  What  Van- 
couver said  of  the  Tiingit  or  the  Kaigani  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  in 
1794,  applies  with  equal  force  to  day : 

In  all  the  commercial  traiisactiouH  thu  wuiiieii  took  a  very  priiUMpal  part,  and 
proved  tliomselves  liy  no  means  iiuetinal  to  the  task.  Nor  did  it  appuar  that  (utlicr 
in  those  or  iu  any  other  respect  they  were  inferior  to  the  nwv  ;  on  the  contrary,  it, 
should  rather  seem  that  they  are  looked  up  to  an  the  snperio;  sex,  for  they  appeared 
in  general  to  keop  the  men  in  'iwe  and  under  sutiJe<;tion.|: 


*Dunu,  Oregon,  p.  281.           t  Simpson,  Journey  Round  the  World,  Vol,  l,  p. '^00. 
{  Vancouver',  Voyage,  Vol.  ii,  p.  401). 
U.  Mis.  142,  i)t.  2 22 


m 


n  «• 


t  i 


838 


REPORT  OP  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


Dixon  (1787)  says  of  the  Sitka  Indiaus : 

The  chief  of  the  tribe  has  always  the  entire  management  of  all  the  trade  belonging 
to  his  people,  and  takes  infinite  pains  to  dispose  of  their  f  nrs  advantageously.  *  *  • 
The  moment  a  chief  has  concluded  a  bargain  he  repeats  the  word  Coo  coo  twice,  with 
quickness,  and  is  immediately  answered  by  all  the  people  in  his  canoe  with  the  word 
Whoah,  pronounced  in  a  tone  of  exclamation,  but  with  greater  or  less  energy,  in  pro- 
portion as  the  bargain  he  had  made  is  approved.  * 

In  general  notes  on  the  northwest  coast  the  same  author  says : 

Whenever  any  large  party  came  to  trade  these  treasurers  [dance  paraphernalia] 
were  first  produced,  and  the  principal  persons  dressed  out  iu  all  their  finery  before 
the  singiug  commenced.  In  addition  to  this,  the  chief  (who  always  conducts  the  vo- 
cal concert)  puts  on  a  largo  coat,  made  of  elk  skin,  tai:<ied,  round  the  lower  part  of 
which  is  one  or  sometimes  two  rows  of  dried  berries  or  the  beaks  of  birds,  which 
make  a  rattling  noise  whenever  he  moves.  In  his  hand  he  has  a  rattle,  or  more 
commonly  a  contrivance  to  answer  the  same  end,  which  is  of  a  circular  form,  about 
9  inches  in  diameter,  and  made  of  three  small  sticks  bent  round  at  diS'erent  distances 
from  each  other ;  great  numbers  of  birds'  beaks  and  dried  berries  are  tied  to  this 
curious  instrument,  which  is  shaken  by  the  chief  with  great  glee,  and  in  his  opinion 
makes  no  small  aduuion  to  the  concert.  Their  songs  generally  consist  of  several 
stanzas,  to  each  of  which  is  added  a  chorus.  The  beginning  of  each  stanza  is  given 
out  by  the  chief  alone,  after  which  botli  men  and  women  join  and  sing  iu  octaves, 
beating  time  regularly  with  their  bauds  or  paddles;  meanwhile  the  chief  shakes  his 
rattle  and  makes  a  thousand  ridiculous  gesticulations,  singiug  at  intervals  in  differ- 
ent notes  from  the  rest;  and  this  mirth  generally  continues  near  half  an  hour  with- 
out intermission. t 

The  song  which  was  usually  sung  on  such  occasions  is  reproduced 
from  the  same  volume  (i».  243),  in  Plate  lvi. 

As  mentioned,  the  course  of  the  slave  trade  was  from  the  south  to 
the  north  and  from  the  coast  iuland.  The  Tsimshiau  were  the  middle 
men,  and  were,  aud  are  still,  the  great  traders  iu  oil  anc^  grease,  of 
which  they  prepare  large  quautities  from  the  eulachon,  seal  blubber,  deer 
and  goat  flesh.  Computed  in  blankets,  the  eulachon  grejise  or  oil  now 
brings  one  blanket  for  from  10  to  15  pounds.  With  the  di.sappearauco 
of  the  sea-otter,  the  Haida,  with  great  foresight  and  judgment,  began 
the  cultivation  of  the  potato,  whicli  was  first  introduced  amongst  them 
by  an  American  ship-captain.  Dunn  (1834)  says:  ••Ibave  known  from 
600  to  800  bushels  being  traded  in  one  season  from  these  Indians 
(Haida)  at  Fort  Simpson."  |  It  is  not  unusual  now  to  sea  fleets  of 
canoes  coming  in  from  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  brnging  pota- 
toes, etc.,  and  towing  new  cauoes  to  trade  or  sell.  The  Hudson  Bay 
Company  now  has  a  "guest  house"  near  its  post,  to  accommodate  the 
visiting  Indians  who  come  to  trade  with  them.  Ordinarily,  however,  the 
visiting  Indians  are  the  guests  of  their  own  gens  at  the  Tsimshian  vil- 
lage near  by.  Large  fleets  now  also  visit  Victoria  each  spring  and  fall 
from  the  north,  not  only  to  trade,  but  too  often,  unfortunately,  for  im- 
moral purposes. 


•  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  189. 


\lUd.,  pp.  242,  243. 


(Dunn,  Oregon,  p.  204. 


THE   INDIANS   OF   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


339 


belonging 
y.  •  •  • 
wice,  with 
h  the  word 
By,  iu  pro- 

ys'. 

pherualia] 
lery  before 
lets  the  vo- 
irer  part  of 
rds,  which 
le,  or  more 
orin,  about 
it  distances 
tied  to  this 
his  opinion 
of  several 
iza  is  given 
in  octaves, 
'  shakes  his 
.Is  in  differ- 
hour  with- 

sproduced 

B  south  to 
ie  middle 
grease,  of 
ober,  deer 
»r  oil  uow 
[ipearaiice 
sut,  began 
ngst  them 
lowii  fri<m 
e  ludiaus 
3  fleets  of 
;ing  pota- 
idsou  Bay 
odate  the 
wever,  the 
ishiau  vil- 
ig  and  fall 
ly,  for  im- 


SUMMARY. 

Bauk  and  social  standing  amongst  these  Indians  being  based  largely 
upon  the  possession  and  distribution  of  wealth,  it  is  not  surprising  to 
find  a  uniform  currency  amongst  the  different  tribes,  and  a  regular 
system  of  exchange  or  trade  based  on  considerations  both  of  supply 
and  demand,  and  of  the  adaptability  of  certain  tribes  or  regions  to  the 
production  of  certain  things  needed  in  other  parts  of  the  coast.  The 
advent  of  the  whites  and  the  abolition  of  slavery  have  destroyed  in  a 
measure  the  tendency  towards  feudalism  in  the  village  communities, 
due  to  the  possession  of  property  and  lands  by  a  few  families,  and 
practically  changed  the  development  of  their  tribal  organization  into  a 
tendency  towards  industrialism  or  division  into  trades  crafts.  This 
tendency  is  seen  today  in  the  adoption  of  certain  trades  by  the  Indians 
and  the  gradual  breaking  up  of  the  old  system  of  household  organiza- 
tion for  industrial  purposes.  The  writer  once  asked  an  Indian  who  was 
loafiug  around  Fort  Wrangell  in  the  summer  doing  nothing,  while  most 
of  the  other  Indians  were  ofl:'  iu  summer  camp  or  working  in  the  can- 
neries, how  business  was,  and  he  answered  "very  dull."  When  asked 
what  his  business  was,  he  replied  "  Oh,  eberyting."  As  a  matter  of  fact 
he  was  a  canoe-man,  carrying  freight  up  the  Stikine  Biver,  and  at  odd 
times  chopped  wood  for  a  living.  The  capabilities  of  these  Indians  in 
a  business  way  is  well  illustrated  by  an  incident  which  the  writer  wit- 
nessed at  Port  Townsend,  Washington  Territory,  early  in  October  of 
1886.  It  was  just  at  the  end  of  the  hop-picking  season  around  Pnget 
Sound,  and  hundreds  of  Indians  wero  coming  in  to  Port  Townsend  en 
route  to  their  villages  to  the  north.  A  party  of  young  Haida  stopped, 
and  one  of  their  number  telegraphed  over  to  Whidby  Island  to  offer  the 
services  of  the  party  to  a  farmer  to  dig  potatoes  for  him.  In  view  of 
the  glut  in  the  labor  market,  due  to  the  presence  of  so  many  idle  In- 
dians just  then,  this  clover  bit  of  enterprise  showed  an  appreciation  of 
the  telegraph  in  a  way  that  needs  no  further  comment  other  than  that 
they  secured  the  job  ahead  of  all  rivals. 


on,  p.  '204. 


IX. 


WAR  AND  PEACE. 

As  a  rule,  the  feuds  between  gentes,  pbratries,  and  tribes  in  this  re- 
gion have  originated  from  such  cauties  as  gambling  quarrels,  failure  to 
pay  indemnity  for  wrongs  done,  or  breaches  of  custom  or  etiquette,  for 
the  observance  of  which  all  are  great  sticklers.  Their  wars  have  been 
characterized  by  treachery,  surprise,  ambush,  night  attack,  superior 
numbers  on  the  aggressive  side,  massacre  of  women  and  children,  im- 
pressment into  slavery  of  the  prisoners  of  war,  and  scalping  of  the 
slain  enemies.  Fair  fight,  excepting  in  <  lels,  seems  to  have  been  un- 
known or  unrecognized.  The  ceremonies  attending  both  warlike  and 
peaceful  demonstrations  have  always  been  of  an  elaborate  character, 
and,  as  has  been  pointed  out,  many  of  the  existing  elaborate  .ceremo- 
nials, with  the  accompanying  paraphernalia,  are  survivals  of  practices 
originating  in  war.  Since  the  military  occupation  of  Alaska  bj'  our 
Government,  and  the  suppression  of  slavery  throughout  the  north- 
west coast,  Indian  wars  have  practically  ceased;  and,  iu  describing  the 
practices  of  war,  it  becomes  necessary  to  speak  iu  the  past  tense. 

WAR  CUSTOMS. 

In  preparation  for  war  the  men  painted  the  body,  powdered  the  hair 
with  eagle's  down,  and  got  themselves  up  in  the  most  hideous  attire. 
The  wooden  masks,  helmets,  and  armor  were  carried  in  the  war 
canoes,  ready  to  be  put  on  for  an  encounter;  and  the  war  parties  con- 
sisted usually  of  both  freemen  and  slaves.  The  war  canoes  were  gen- 
erally steered  by  some  old  crone  whose  courage  and  influence  had  been 
found  oftentimes  to  be  of  the  greatest  incitement  to  the  Wi:rriors. 
From  various  accounts,  it  would  appear  that,  in  early  times,  when  two 
hostile  canoe  parties  met  accidentally,  preparations  for  the  encounter 
consisted  in  putting  on  the  masks  and  war  gart^jnts,  throwing  over- 
board  the  dogs,  and  cautious  advance,  accompanied  by  songs,  men- 
acing speeches,  and  gestures.  Arrows,  missiles,  and  even  bullets 
(after  the  introduction  of  fire-arms)  were  avoided  by  gently  heeling  the 
canoe  and  interposing  its  gunwale  as  a  protection.  In  an  encounter, 
the  victorious  usually  slaughtered  their  opponents,  sculped  them,  and 
cut  off  their  heads,  either  sticking  up  the  latter  on  poles  to  grace  their 
triumph  or  cariyiug  them  ott"  to  prevent  the  friends  of  the  deceased 
from  recovering  them.  In  the  first  encounter  of  the  Uuasian  com- 
manders Lisiansky  and  Baranoff  with  the  Sitka  Indians,  in  1804,  the 
latter  remained  iu  possession  of  the  battle-field,  and  the  bodies  of  the 
340 


a 


THE   INDIANS   OF    THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


341 


; 


filain  Russians  and  Aleuts  were  displayed  by  the  Indians,  borne  aloft 
on  spears.  Subsequently  they  were  compelled  by  the  Russians  to 
abandon  their  fort,  which  they  did  secretly  at  night,  first  killing  their 
dogs  and  young  children  to  prevent  their  noise  giving  notice  of  their 
flight* 

Vancouver  (1794)  mentions  an  encounter  between  some  Kaigani  In- 
dians,  who  were  on  board  ship  trading  with  him,  and  some  Stikine 
who  suddenly  appeared,  coming  around  a  point  of  land.  The  former 
rushed  into  their  canoes,  which  were  alongside,  put  on  their  war  gar- 
ments, and  rested  their  spears  on  the  gunwale.  Thus  prepared,  they 
advanced  slowly  to  meet  the  new-comers,  meanwhile  making  the  most 
violent  and  passionate  speeches,  which  were  answered  in  a  similar  tone 
by  some  persons  who  stood  up  in  the  Stikine  canoe.  After  a  parley, 
lasting  some  moments,  an  amicable  understanding  was  reached,  and 
both  parties  returned  to  the  ship,  though  on  their  guard  towards  each 
other.  At  the  head  of  the  Stikines  was  the  great  chief  O-non  nistoy, 
who,  with  all  his  party,  for  safety,  slept  on  board  the  Discovery,  while 
the  Kaigani  went  to  their  camp  on  shore.  In  the  morning  the  Stikine 
went  on  shore  with  great  ceremony  and  arranged  with  the  Kaigani  a 
combined  entertainment  for  the  benefit  of  Vancouver,  which  they  gave 
alongside  in  their  canoes.  '*It  consisted  in  singing  and  a  display  of 
the  most  rude  and  extravagant  gestures  that  can  be  imagined.  The 
principal  [larts  were  performed  by  the  chiefs,  each  in  succession  becom- 
ing the  leader  or  hero  of  the  song;  at  several  pa-'^ea  of  which  I  [Van- 
couver] was  presented  by  the  exhibiting  chief  with  a  sea-otter  skin."  t 

SCALPING  AND  OTHER  WAR  CUSTOMS. 

The  scalps  of  the  slain  were  usually  removed  by  the  medicine  men, 
or  shamans,  who  accompanied  the  war  party.  Poole  (1864)  says  that  he 
saw  "  at  least  a  hundred  scalps  in  Chief  Klue's  lodge,  on  a  pole."f  Dall 
states  that,  amongst  the  Tiingit,  the  scalps  were  woven  into  a  kind  of 
garter  by  the  victor.  §  On  the  death  of  a  chief  of  great  prowess,  the 
scalps  which  he  had  taken  were  sometimes  used  to  decorate  his  tomb.{| 

"  Once  I  saw  a  party  of  Kaiganys  of  about  two  hundred  meu  returning  from  war. 
The  paddles  of  the  warriors  killed  in  the  fight  were  lashed  upright  in  their  various 
seats,  so  that  from  a  lu  j^  tM^taiice  the  number  of  the  fallen  could  be  ascertained ; 
and  on  each  mast  of  ^he  canoes — and  some  had  three — was  stuck  the  head  of  a  slain 
foe."  f 

Simpson  thus  describes  a  feud  at  Sitka  (1841),  growing  out  of  a 

drunken  quarrel  between  a  chief  and  a  man  of  rank,  in  which  the 

former  stabbed  the  latter  to  death : 

The  party  of  the  deceased,  to  the  number  of  about  a  thousand  men,  immediately 
turned  out,  with  horrible  yells,  to  revenge  his  death,  painted  in  the  most  hideous 


•  Lisiansky,  Voyage,  pp.  158  and  162-    ,, 
t  Vaucouvei,  Voyage,  Vol.  ii,  p.  393-4.  ^ 
t  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  116. 
$  Dall,  Alaska,  p.  417. 


II  Whymper,  Alaska,  p.  79. 
'H  Bondel's  Aleutian  Archipelago,  p.  30, 
quoted  by  Bancroft,  Vol.  i,  p.  164. 


.' f 


f 


If 


342 


REPORT  OF   NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


I 


manner  and  armed  with  all  aorta  of  weapons,  anch  as  spears,  bludgeons,  dirks,  and 
tire-arms;  while  the  women,  more  ferocious,  if  posttiblo,  than  the  warriors  thembelvea, 
were  exciting  the  tumnltnary  band  to  actual  violence  by  the  most  fiendish  screanm 
and  gestures  *  *  *  The  chief 's  life  was  demanded  in  atonement,  but  refused  by 
his  party  as  being  of  more  value  than  that  of  the  person  slain.  *  *  *  The  parties 
met  with  a  loud  war-whoop ;  for  a  minute  or  two  a  clashing  of  arms  was  heard ;  and 
when  both  sides  simultaneously  receded  ftom  the  spot,  we  beheld  the  bodies  of  two 
slaves  that  had  been  sacrificed  in  lieu  of  the  chief.  * 

This  atoned  for  the  outrage  and  eatisfled  the  requirements  of  blood 
revenge. 

Dunn  (1835)  mentions  a  feud  between  the  Port  Stewart  and  Tongass 
Indians,  in  the  course  of  which  the  latter  cut  off  a  war  party  of  thirty 
of  the  former  and  massacred  them,  t  In  the  Port  "^^tewart  region, 
Vancouver  (1793)  has  left  a  record  for  all  time  of  the  character  of  this 
tribe  in  the  names  given  to  Traitor's  Cove  and  Escape  Point,  commem- 
orative of  his  hostile  encounter  with  them,  and  his  narrative  makes 
them  out  to  have  been  the  most  villainous  Indians  on  the  coast.:]: 
Simpson  (1841)  says  that  between  the  Haida  of  Queen  Charlotte  Isl- 
ands, and  the  Bella  Bella,  a  deadly  feud  had  long  subsisted : 

About  six  weeks  before  our  arrival,  the  latter,  to  the  number  of  three  hundred, 
had  attacked  a  village  of  the  former,  butchering  all  the  inhabitants  but  one  man 
and  one  woman.  These  two  the  victorious  chief  was  carrying  away  as  living  tro- 
phies of  his  triumph ;  *  •  *  while  standing  in  a  boastful  manner  on  the  gurwalu 
of  his  canoe,  and  vowing  all  sorts  of  vengeance  against  his  victims,  he  was  shot 
down  by  a  desperate  effort  of  his  male  prisoner.  The  Bella  Bellas,  their  joy  being 
now  turned  into  grief,  cut  the  throats  of  the  prisoners,  threw  their  spoils  overboard, 
and  returned  home  rather  as  fugitives  than  as  conquerors.  $ 

Poole  ( 1863 ),  speaking  of  the  ravages  of  small-pox  on  the  coast,  says : 

The  Bella-Bella  tribe,  though  not  to  be  despised,  were  formerly  by  no  means  a 
match  for  their  born  foes  the  Bella  Coolas,  who  used  always  to  cut  ofif  a  great  num- 
ber of  the  Bella-Bella  whenever  these  ventured  from  their  own  territory.  But  now 
the  Bella-Bella,  though  deplorably  reduced  in  their  own  tribe,  found  themselves  in 
numbers  and  force  far  ahead  of  the  Bella  Coolas,  and  were  accordingly  preparing, 
might  and  main,  to  administer  condign  punishment  to  their  ancient  enemies.  || 

DUELS. 

Duels  or  trials  by  combat  were  sometimes  resorted  to  not  only  in  case 
of  dispute  between  indivduals,  but  to  settle  feuds  between  families  or 
gentes.  The  combatants  protected  their  bodies  with  thick  leather 
shirts  and  wooden  armor  outside ;  wore  masks  and  helmets  of  wood ; 
and,  armed  with  daggers,  stepped  forth  to  the  encounter,  encouraged 
by  the  songs  and  cries  of  their  friends. 

PEACE  CUSTOMS. 

On  the  approach  of  a  canoe  or  party  the  intention  of  which  is  at  first 
doubtful,  the  token  of  peace  was  the  blowing  in  the  air  of  white  feath- 


*  Simpson,  Journey,  Vol.  il,  p.  JJCV-G. 

t  Dnnn,  Oregon,  p.  290. 

t  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  il,  pp.  358  to  3GG. 


f  Simpson,  Journey,  Vol.  i,  p.  203. 

II  Poole,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  18.''>. 


n 


jly  iu  case 
auiilies  or 
ck  leather 
1  of  wood ; 
ucouraged 


h  is  at  first 
bite  feath- 

p.  203. 
iands,  p.  ISri. 


The  INDIANS   OP  THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


345 


dirks,  and 
bemoelveH, 
ih  screams 
refused  by 
The  parties 
leard;  and 
dies  of  two 

of  blood 

ToDgaHs 
of  thirty 
?t  rcgiou, 
er  of  this 
commein- 
ve  makes 
e  coast.  I 
rlotte  Isl- 

)e  hundred, 
ut  one  man 
living  tro- 
;he  giip  wale 
le  was  shot 
r  joy  being 
9  overboard, 


ers  placked  from  au  eagle's  skiu,  or  by  the  display  of  a  tuft  of  white 
feathers  on  the  eud  of  a  pole  or  at  the  mast  head  of  the  cauoe.*  In  the 
friendly  dances  and  ceremonies  of  welcome  a  fan  or  tuft  of  white 
eagle  feathers  was  carried  in  token  of  friendship  and  peace. 

TREATIES  OF  PEACE. 

At  a  conclusion  of  peace  it  was  the  custom  to  exchange  hostages  in 
token  of  good  faith.    Dall  says  of  them : 

These  are  obliged  to  eat  with  their  left  hands  for  a  certain  period,  as  they  carried 
weapons  in  the  right  hand  during  combat.  Each  hostage  has  two  companions  of 
equal  rank  assigned  to  him  by  the  tribe  which  holds  bim.t 

Lisiansky  (1804)  says  of  the  hostages  sent  by  the  Sitka  to  the  Russian 
forces : 

Tliey  were  in  one  canoe,  and  snng  as  they  approached  a  sort  of  song  of  a  melan- 
choly strain.  On  landing,  the  hostage  threw  himself  flat  on  his  back  in  the  shallow 
water,  according  to  the  custom  of  the  country,  and  continued  in  this  posture  till 
some  of  our  people  arrived  who  were  sent  to  lift  him  up  and  conduct  him.  t 

In  general  the  treaties  of  peace  were  ratified  by  feasts  and  elaborate 
ceremonies  often  lasting  many  days. 


•Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  II,  p.  389 ;  and  Dixon,  Voyage,  p.  IdO. 

t  Dall,  Alaska,  p.  417. 

t  Lisiansky,  Voyage,  p.  156. 


'•  n 


If 


)ast,  says : 

no  means  a 
great  num- 
f.  But  now 
lemselves  in 
'  preparing, 
iiies.  II 


'  1  f 


X. 


riCES  AND  DEMORALIZATION  OF  THE  INDIANS— O AMBLING  — RUM— 

TOBA  CCO—IMMORA  LITY. 

Before  the  advent  of  the  whites  gambling,  immorality,  and  the  use  of 
tobacco,  although  not  unknown,  were  at  least  not  such  pronounced 
vices  as  they  have  come  to  be  under  the  stimulus  of  contact  with  civil- 
ization. The  use  of  liquor  was,  however,  quite  unknown.  Langsdorti', 
who  was  at  Sitka  in  1805,  says  of  the  Tlingit :  "  Brandy,  which  is  some- 
times offered  them  by  the  Russians,  they  reject  as  a  scandalous  liquor, 
depriving  them  of  their  senses."  •  It  would  have  been  of  great  advan- 
tage to  them  if  they  had  continued  to  so  regard  it.  Unfortunately  the 
example  of  the  whites  and  the  deliberate  corruption  of  the  Indians  by 
unscrupulous  traders  have  made  them  in  recent  years  only  too  well 
acquainted  with  the  evils  of  rum  drinking.  Just  now  they  are  begin- 
ning to  rally  from  the  demoralization  due  to  contact  with  the  whites 
and  to  adjust  themselves  philosophically  to  their  changed  environ- 
ment. The  former  custom  of  chewing  tobacco,  in  vogue  from  the  earliest 
times,  has  now  given  way  almost  entirely  to  that  of  smoking  the  weed 
which  they  buy  from  the  traders.  In  Chapter  viii,  "  Rearing  and  Cul- 
tivation." the  production  and  preparation  of  the  native  tobacco  has 
been  fully  described.  Although  in  one  sense  a  vice,  the  use  of  tobacco 
Cc'in  hardly  be  said  to  have  contributed  much  to  the  real  demoralization 
of  the  Indians. 

GAMBLING. 

The  Haida,  Tsimshian,  and  Tlingit  are  inveterate  gamblers.  Dnr- 
ing  the  winter  leisure  or  whenever,  for  any  reason,  they  are  gathered 
together  in  considerable  numbers,  gambling  is  the  invariable  and  con- 
stant amusement,  often  continuing  for  several  days  on  a  stretch  with- 
out rest  or  intermission.  These  bonts  are  usually  conducted  on  the 
platform  in  front  of  the  houses  in  good  weather,  but  indoors  In  bad. 
The  gamblers  sit  on  the  ground  or  squat  about  the  platform  in  a  circle, 
in  the  centre  of  which  a  clean  mat  of  the  inner  bark  of  the  cedar  is 
spread.  Each  man  produces  a  bag  containing  from  thirty  to  fifty  round 
sticks  or  pins  about  5  inches  long  by  three-eighths  or  one-half  of  an 
inch  in  diameter,  and  beautifully  polished  and  carved  in  totemic  design 
or  painted  in  black,  blue,  and  red  rings.  One  of  the  players,  selecting 
a  number  of  these  pins  from  his  bag,  covers  them  up  in  a  heap  of  finely 


344 


*  Langsdoi-ff,  Voyages,  pt.  ii,  p.  131. 


m 


G  —  nUM- 

l  the  use  of 
iroiionuced 
with  civil- 
jangsdortf, 
ch  is  sotnc- 
ous  liquor, 
■eat  advan- 
inately  the 
Indians  by 
ly  too  well 
are  begin- 
the  whites 
>d  environ- 
the  earliest 
g  the  weed 
ig  and  Cul- 
obacco  has 
I  of  tobacco 
oralization 


lers.  Dnr- 
e  gathered 
le  and  con- 
retch  with- 
ted  on  the 
)0r8  In  bad. 
in  a  circle, 
the  cedar  is 
>  fifty  round 
)-haIf  of  an 
amic  design 
s,  selecting 
lap  of  finely 


m 


:Mi 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXIII. 


Gambling  Sticks;  Mortars  and  carved  Pestle  for  preparing  Native  Tobacco. 


Fig.  335.  Gamblino   Sticks.     Of  wood;  twenty-four  in  number,  with  (Jeer-skin 

baj?.     Eacli  stick  is  carved  with  a  toteinic  design.     Cat.  No.  Oo.oC,  U.  S. 

N.  M.     THiiKit.  Sitka.     Collected  l)y  Dr.  T.  T.  Minor,  U.  S.  Army. 
Fig.  330.  Gambijn(j  Sticks.     Of  woo'I:  thirty-four  in  number;  polished  and  inlaid 

with  abalone.     Cat.  No.  2(»TH9,    U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit,  Sitka.    Collected 

by  tJaincs  (J.  Swan. 
Fig.  337.  Stonk  Mortak.     Ancient  ))attern;  for  grinding  native  tobacco  for  chew- 
ing.    Cat.  No.  45901,  U.  S.  N.  M.     Tlingit.  Sitka.     Collected  by  Jolin  J. 

McLean. 
Fig.  338.  Stonk  Pestlk,     In  sha]ie  (^f  the  raven;   for  pre|)ariiig  native  tobacco. 

Cat.  No.  07849,  U.  S.N.  M.     Tlingit.  Hoodsinoo,  Alaska.     Collected  by 

John  J.  MiLean. 
Fig.  339.  Stonk   Mortar.     Of  calcite,  with  totemic  designs  on  the  exterior;  for 

l)rei)aring  native  tobacco.     Smaller  examples  used  in  grinding  ))aint. 

Cat.  No.  88823.  U.  S.  N.  M.     Masset.  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  British 

Columbia.    Collected  by  James  CJ.  Swan. 


> 


Rtpoitot  Nstionil  Mutium,  1888 — Niblick. 


Plate  LXIII. 


Tobacco. 

ith  (leer-skin 
0.0556,  U.S. 
i5.  Army, 
ed  and  inlaid 
a.    Collected 

'CO  for  chew- 
ed by  John  J. 

tive  tobacco. 
Collected  by 

exterior;  for 
indinK  paint, 
landn,  British 


Gambling  Sticks;  Mortars  and  carved  Pestle  for  preparing  Native  Tobacco. 


m 


m 

'      -1        -!            i 

w 

1 

:   ■ 

1 

Hi 

■ 


m 


> 


^rf-^L-i^i^'jfi  ^wsStSfmi'Hi.iiAiiSiiiii'aA, 


TnT3   INDIANS   OF   THE   NORTHWKST    COAST. 


345 


cut  bark  tow.  The  workings  and  significances  of  these  Sticks  is  per- 
fectly iinilevstood,  and  the  game  is  either  odd  or  even,  or  to  gness  in 
which  of  two  piles  a  certain  stick  is  hidden.  Poole  tiius  describes  the 
game  among  the  Haida : 

One  of  the  players,  selecting  a  number  of  these  pins,  covers  tlien\  np  in  a  heap  of 
bark  cut  into  tibre-likc  !  .-v.  Under  cover  of  the  bfvrk  he  then  divides  tlio  pins  into 
two  parcels  and  having  taken  them  out  passes  them  several  times  from  his  right 
Land  to  his  left,  or  the  contrary.  While  tlio  player  shntlhis  lu!  repeats  tlie  word 
1-E-Ly-Yah  to  a  low  monotonous  chant  or  moan.  Tlie  moment  lie  finishes  tlie  in- 
cantation, his  opponent,  '.vho  has  been  silently  watching  him,  chooses  tlie  piircel 
where  he  thinks  the  luck  lies  for  odd  or  even.  After  whicli  tiie  secouil  player  takes 
his  innings,  with  his  own  pins  and  the  same  ceremonies.  This  goes  on  till  one  or  the 
other  loses  all  his  pins.    That  decides  the  game.  * 

Another  form  of  this  is  for  the  player  to  shuffle  together  all  the  pins 
and  count  out  seven.  The  game  is  to  guess  in  which  jiile  a  certain  pin 
is,  say  tb.e  one  carved  like  a  beaver,  or  whale,  or  eagle.  The  fortunate 
guesser  gets  one  or  more  pins  according  to  rule,  or,  if  he  fails,  pays  a 
forfeit  of  so  many  pins.  The  Indians  stoically  sit  for  hours  conning  over 
the  melancholy  chant,  apparently  indifterent  to  loss,  gain,  time,  or  hun- 
ger, often  losing  everything  he  owns  in  the  world  without  the  slightest 
expression  of  emotion.  Poole  mentions  the  case  of  a  Haida  chief  who 
continued  playing  for  three  days  without  eating  a  mouthful  of  food,  but 
perpetually  losing.  By  the  fourth  day  he  had  even  parted  with  the 
blanket  on  his  back,  when  a  woman  of  his  tribe,  taking  pity  ou  him, 
loaned  him  her  only  blanket,  and  he  renewed  the  contest,  this  time  suc- 
cessfully, not  only  winning  back  what  he  had  lost,  but  finally  getting 
all  his  opponent's  property,  consisting  of  powder  and  shot,  muskets, 
revolvers,  blankets,  skins,  paints,  tobacco,  fish,  etc.  • 

Two  sets  of  gambling  sticks  are  shown  in  Plate  lxiii,  Figs.  335  and 
336.  For  convenience  of  illustration  they  are  laid  out  on  the  wrapper 
of  the  wallet  in  which  they  are  usually  kept.  The  carving  on  some  of 
the  more  expensive  sets  is  of  the  very  highest  order. 

Rum. — Impure,  monstrously  vile  liquor  has  been  the  greatest  curse 
to  the  Indians  of  this  region.  Having  furs  and  other  valuable  products 
sought  by  the  traders,  the  latter  have  been  only  too  ready  to  debauch 
and  despoil  them.  In  all  the  criminal  record  of  shameless  commercial 
conquest  of  a  rich  and  prosperous  territory,  no  region  has  suffered  more 
unless  it  be  the  Aleutian  Islands  in  eailier  days.  This  can  not  be  laid 
at  the  door  of  any  of  the  large  commercial  companies,  for  in  the  main 
such  a  policy  is  suicidal  to  their  own  interests.  With  the  small  dealers, 
the  owners  of  small  trading  craft,  those  whose  only  thought  ami  inter- 
est has  been  the  business  in  hand,  the  policy  has  been  one  of  unscru- 
pulous rum  selling.    Poole  (1803)  ssiys : 

The  so-called  whiskey  which  is  shivmolossly  sold  to  the  Indians  by  traders  along 
the  coast  or  even  by  certain  unprincipled  merohauts  of  Victoria,  contaiiis  very  little 
of  what  is  wholesome  or  genuine  liquor.    What  it  really  does  contain  is  not  generally 


I' 


i 


*  Poole,  Queeu  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  319. 


346 


RliPORf   OF*   NATIONAL   MUSEllM,  1888. 


kuowD,  but  I  hear  on  good  authority  that  the  bulk  consiHts  of  water  flavored  and 
colored  with  grain  whittkey  iu  the  smallest  possible  (]iiuiitilie8.  Itts  strength  proceeds 
wholly  from  the  bltie-stoue,  vitriol,  aud  nitric  acid  which  the  manufacturers  largely 
infuse  iuio  it.  The  consequence  is  that  when  the  Indians  imbibe  this  drink  freelj  — 
and  they  alw.ays  do  so  whenever  they  can  get  it — their  naturally  fiery  temperaments 
are  wrought  up  into  a  state  of  savagery  so  intense  as  to  leave  no  white  man's  life  safe 
in  their  presence  while  they  remain  under  its  inlluente.  ■■ 

The  orjjies  and  debauchery  of  the  Indians  up  to  recent  years  have 
been  something  to  shock  even  the  most  hardened  trader.  Liquor  being 
obtained  in  quantities,  either  by  the  distillation  of  sugar  or  molasses  or 
purchased  from  the  traders,  a  systematic  plan  of  getting  drank,  in  de- 
tachments was  practised  and  is  to-day  in  certain  regions  wiien  they  can 
get  the  liquor.  It  is  the  duty  of  those  sober  about  the  village  to  look 
out  for  the  drunk  and  tend  to  the  various  household  duties,  look  after 
the  canoes,  children,  etc.  When  the  first  detachment  •  -  >bered  up 
the  others  sometimes  taiie  their  turn.  Pandemonium  reigns,  lud  it  often 
takes  the  intervention  of  the  whites  to  get  things  going  smoothly  again. 
Unfortunately  the  women  are  worse  drunkards  than  the  men,  and  it 
is  in  their  demoralization  that  the  Indians  have  suffered  most.  The 
hoochinon,  which  they  make  themselves,  isnot  a  native  invention,  as  the 
process  has  been  picked  up  from  the  whites.  It  has  flourished  amongst 
the  Tlingit  since  our  acquisition  of  Alaska  in  1867,  aud  common  report 
credits  its  introduction  to  American  oflQcials.  Hoochinoo  is  simply  a 
distillation  from  potatoes.  The  still  generally  consists  of  a  square  tin 
kerosene  can,  with  a  worm,  made  either  of  tin  pipe  or  the  stems  of  the 
giant  kelp.  The  worm  is  either  packed  with  snow  or  placed  in  a  stream 
of  fresh  water.  The  mash  is  made  from  potatoes,  which  are  cooked, 
dumped  into  a  tub,  and  allowed  to  ferment,  a  little  sugar  or  very  cheap 
molasses  being  added  to  produce  the  alcohol.  It  suflers  only  one  dis- 
tillation, and  the  horrible  product  is  taken  in  its  raw  state,  the  effect 
being  to  almost  instantly  rob  an  Indian  of  his  senses.  Largely  through 
the  influence  and  authority  exerted  by  the  commanding  officers  of  our 
men-of-war  before  the  establishment  of  the  civil  government  in  Alaska 
the  practice  of  distilling  hoocliinoo  has  been  greatly  broken  up  aud  de- 
cidedly discournged.  t 

Immorality. — The  chief  demoralization  in  this  region  has  been  amongst 
the  women,  brought  about  by  the  independent  position  they  occupy  in 
the  social  organization  of  the  tribe,  by  the  peculiar  laws  or  customs  re- 
lating to  marriage  by  purchase,  and  by  the  right  to  return  a  female  to 
ber  people  in  case  she  proves  unsatisfactory  or  undesirable.  Through 
the  influx  of  whites,  due  to  the  establishment  of  industries,  the  pros- 
ecution of  trade,  and  the  development  of  mineral  resources,  the  Indians 
have  been  brought  in  close  contact  with  most  unrefined  elements  of  our 
civilization.    Money  earned  in  the  summer  months  by  these  adventurous 


*  Poole,  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  p.  313. 

t  Notes  on  the  distillation  of  hoochinoo  were  kindly  furnished  the  writer  by  Lieut. 
N.  K.  Usher,  U.  S.  Navy. 


' 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    NORTHWEST   COAST. 


347 


llavored  aixl 
iirers  largfly 

ink  flt!0l\— . 

iiipBiuments 
aa'a  life  sate. 

eai'8  have 
qiior  being 
n classes  or 
nii  iti  de- 
ll they  can 
ge  to  look 
ook  after 
>beretl  ni) 
iud  it  often 
thly  again, 
en,  and  it 
iost.    The 
tion,asthe 
<1  amongst 
luou  report 
3  simply  a 
square  tin 
ems  of  the 
in  a  stream 
ro  cooked, 
very  cheap 
ly  one  dis- 
,  the  eflfect 
ly  through 
iors  of  our 
in  Alaska 
ip  aud  de- 

n  amongst 

occupy  in 

Jstoms  re- 

fomale  to 

Through 

the  pros- 

0  Indians 

II  ts  of  our 

^'enturous 


spirits  is  squandered  in  the  most  reckless  dissipation  about  the  various 
settlements  in  the  winter  months.  Jealousy  being  unknown  amongst 
the  Indians,  and  sanctioned  prostitution  a  common  evil,  the  woman  who 
can  earn  the  greatest  number  of  blankets  or  the  largest  sums  of  money 
wins  the  admiration  of  others  for  herself,  and  a  high  position  for  her 
husband  by  reason  of  her  wealth.  It  is  not  an  uncommon  thing  for 
whole  families  to  vH^ort  to  the  settlements  for  the  winter,  and  return  to 
their  villages  in  the  spring  to  give  grand  i)otlatches  with  their  ill  gotten 
gains.  The  influence  of  the  missionaries  and  of  the  respectable  element 
in  the  settlements  has,  from  the  first,  been  used  against  the  extension 
and  growth  of  this  evil,  but  it  can  not  be  said  that,  until  in  the  last  few 
yeaiM,  much  luogress  has  been  made  in  stemming  this  tide  of  reckless 
physical  and  moral  debasement.  Its  effects  are  seen  in  the  alarming 
number  of  ileaths  due  to  dissipation,  and  the  great  decrease  in  the  ralio 
of  births  to  deaths  throughout  this  whole  nortiiern  region.  Tlie  part 
which  rum  has  played  in  causing  this  havoc  is  not  to  be  underestimated, 
and  it  is  fortunate  that  a  steadily  growing  sentiment  is  making  itself 
felt  towards  the  suppression  of  these  two  alarming  evils. 

SUMMARY. 

The  native  vices  of  these  Indians  are  simply  those  due  to  savagism. 
Contact  with  the  whites  has,  through  the  greed  for  wealth  operating  on 
both  sides,  produced  an  abnormal  departure  Ixom  primitive  ways. 
Gambling  is  found  almost  univer.sally  amongst  savage  tribes,  and  with 
progress  in  civilization,  the  first  .steps  are  always  in  the  direction  of  the 
aggravation  of  primitive  and  the  adoption  of  foreign  vices.  Hum  drink- 
ing has  been  nowhere  so  disastrous  as  in  this  region.  With  the  smok- 
ing of  tobacco  by  the  Indians  of  the  Atlantic  coast  region,  and  the 
chewing  of  it  by  thosii  on  the  northwest  coast,  it  ha.^  remained  for  our 
civilization  only  to  invent  the  snuflBng  of  it.  Peculiar  marriage  cus- 
toms and  the  greed  of  wealth  have  here  contributed  more  to  the  alarm- 
ing increase  of  immorality  than  any  inherent  love  of  vice  on  the  part  of 
the  Indians. 


i   . 


:;ii 


'I 


'  fs! 
i 

1 


>' 


H 


P  by  Lieut. 


-^~- 


XI. 


WITCHCRAFT— SUPERSTITION— SICKNESS    AND    ITEATH— MEDICINES- 
TREATMENT  OF  THE  SICK. 

WITCHCRAFT. 

All  severe  diseases  or  illnesses  are  ascribed  to  the  evil  influence  of 
«nemies,  and,  in  case  of  tbe  death  of  an  important  personage,  a  victim 
is  nsnally  found  who  has  presumably  charmed  away  the  life  of  the  de- 
ceased. The  Indians  are  intensely  superstitious  and  have  naturally 
been  encouraged  in  ideas  of  this  kind  by  both  the  chiefs  and  the 
shamans,  whose  sway  over  the  tribe  depends  largely  upon  the  fear  and 
respect  excited  by  belief  in  their  influence  and  power  over  good  and 
evil  spirits.  Largely  through  the  action  of  the  commanding  officers 
of  our  men-of-war  stationed  in  Alaska,  this  hold  of  the  chiefs  and 
sha:nan8  on  the  people  has  been  broken.  By  the  bombardment  and  de- 
struction of  several  villages  the  Indians  have  been  compelled  to 
abandon  the  punishment  of  victims  accused  of  witchcraft,  but  the  chief 
stumbling  block  has  been  the  surprising  admission  of  guilt  which  nearly 
all  of  the  accused  Indians  make  when  charged  with  charming  away 
life,  and  this,  too,  in  the  face  of  the  death  pen  alty.  Such  is  their  credu- 
lity that  when  accused  they  believe  they  must  be  guilty.  Amongst  the 
Haida  the  guilty  Indian,  according  to  Judge  Swan,  is  discovered  as 
follows: 

The  mouse  is  Ihe  jndge  by  irhioh  the  Haida  detect  the  persons  who  work  bad 
magic  and  cause  sickuess  and  death.  '^Vhen  a  fvrwn  is  takon  sick  or  dies,  three  men 
are  8elecle<l  who  orepare  thf-mselves  by  pn]^■^^^'  Uip;  a  dried  frog,  mixing  it  with  salt 
water  and  drinksag  it.     This  decoction  r  ^  vomitiu,<j  and  purging,  and  when 

their  systems  ar»  thoroughly  cleans.,'d   t''  n  t.  re  supposed  to  be  clear  and  bet- 

ter able  to  judge  of  tbe  merits  of  tlie  .mi**  aboMi  to  i»o  siibmlited  to  their  decision. 
They  next  catch  a  wood-moust.  m>4  f«t  it  iti  m  littla  cage,  t  hich  is  set.  on  a  raised 
platform  in  I'ront  of  the  judges.  The  Mttte  i.ioase,  sadly  frighteneti,  retires  to  a  cor- 
ner of  his  cage  and  eyes  the  ,ii»<*Jf*^  TTjf'y  then  comiience  naming  over  suspected 
persons,  and  presently  the  littk  iMvwtse  Mods  its  head.  Th^  victim  has  to  pay  money 
or  blankets  tr,  get  clear.     "•     *    '.  (West  Shore,  August,  It^Hi,) 

A  n.irration  of  the  superstitious  beliefs  of  these  In(i>an»  would  i« 
itself  exceed  the  limits  oV  this  pai>er.  Charms  ot'  all  )^iud»ii<r»  worn 
and  the  most  implicit  faith  is  ;>lafe«i  in  the  ?igniflcance  ^dnitiwis  signs, 
and  omens.  Certain  forms  a.r»"  gone  through  wjtli  to  pro(^ttaitthe  vari- 
ous spirits  and  invoke  their  aid  in  all  eatf  rprises.  A  considerMiMM  of 
this  subject  belongs  pro|H»r'y  to  a  stutty  of  th«i  retigious  belXf^  and 
practices  of  these  Indians,  which  must  come  iMor. 
348 


h 


THE  INDIANS   OP   THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


349 


It 


DICINES— 


fliience  of 
,  a  victim 
of  the  (le- 
iiaturally 
I  and  the 
5  fear  and 
good  and 
g  oflQcers 
ihiefs  and 
it  and  de- 
ipelled  to 
\  the  chief 
ich  nearly 
ing  away 
eir  credn- 
longst  the 
overed  as 

>  work  bad 
1,  three  men 
it  with  haIi 
,  i»u(l  when 
ar  and  bet- 
ir  decision, 
on  a  rainoil 
es  to  a  cor- 
p  snspocted 
pay  niuney 

would  te 
»n»  worn 
is  signs, 
the  vari- 
trtMXHi  of 
'h**!^  and 


SICKNESS. 

In  cases  of  serious  illness  chief  reliance  was,  up  to  reoont  years, 
placed  upon  the  incantations  of  the  medicine  men,  who  were  paid  liber- 
ally if  the  patient  lived,  or,  if  he  died,  were  compelled  to  restore  the 
goods  he  h  d  previously  received  on  account.  If  any  one  other  than 
a  shaman  attempted  to  do  anything  to  cure  a  sick  person  and  the  pa- 
tient died,  the  self  constituted  doctor  had  to  pay  a  heavy  indemnity  to 
the  person's  relatives.  In  out-of-the-way  villages  the  shamans  still  have 
a  hold  on  the  Indians,  and  in  case  of  sickness  one  is  called  in  by  the 
head  of  the  household.  If  the  latter  falls  sick  it  devolves  upon  his 
brother  or  nearest  male  relative  to  call  in  the  Indian  doctor.  On  all 
such  occasions  friends  are  invited  in  to  see  the  evil  spirits  exorcised. 
While  these  shamans  possess  some  knowledge  of  the  medicinal  proper- 
ties of  herbs  and  are  not  slow  to  avail  themselves  of  ihem,  their  duty 
is  to  drive  out  the  evil  spirit  which  haunts  lht»  sick  man.  Any  virtue 
that  mediciixes  may  in  themselves  have  are  ascribed  to  the  charm  su[)- 
posed  to  be  wrought  by  the  doctors  in  their  decoction  or  preparation. 
The  incantations  and  exorcising  ,  ')i»sist  in  beating  iliiims,  dancing, 
making  passes  with  subtle  charms,  blowing  in  the  patient's  mouth  and 
nostrils,  kneading  au»l  pounding  his  body,  chanting,  swinging  to  and 
fro,  frothing  at  the  mouth,  and  every  conceiviible  practice  foreign  to 
our  own  ideas  ot  the  ti"eatinont  oi  the  sick.  As  a  rule  the  t»»tient  that 
survives  the  dm,  foul  air,  ^ud  excitement  of  such  a  visit  must  ihmhIs 
have  been  on  the  higli  road  to  recovery,  for  tlh?  shaman  usually  con- 
tinues this  performuaue  until  the  patient  declares  himself  better  or 
well. 

The  initiation,  practices,  liMi^  tKhibitions,  dances,  anf!  incantations 
of  these  medicine  I'teu  desert*  8et«»rate  coosideratioii  as  connected  in- 
timately with  their  religious  beliefs  and  enstoms.  lu  (jonnection  with 
witchcraft,  it  may  be  said  that  the  shamans  are  supi  )sed  to  possess 
the  power  of  charming  away  life  by  incantations  and  f  f  Jise  of  certain 
charms.  In  such  cases,  where  the  cha-rge  ca.n  he  reasonably  laid  at 
their  door,  they  are  not  beyond  the  reaek  of  a  kinsman's  revenge, 

MEDICINES. 

The  internal  administration  of  lUtLive  mediciaM  w  iaM%  practiced. 
Wounds  and  iiiiuries  are  treated  locally  with  m^mnt  specifics  known 
to  them,  and  scarilicatiou  is  sometimes  resorted  »».  Hemorrhages  are 
stopped  by  the  application  of  bird's  down  to  tke  wwanded  parts.  Tiw 
healing  qualities  ol  pine  and  cedar  are  recognized,  and  pine-tree  gum 
is  applied  as  a,  poultice  to  wouikI.n  bv  some  tribes.  Salt-water  taken  as 
an  emetic  is  a  favorite  remtniy  i-r  tiu«*  not  leeli^  w*IL  This  is  also 
taken  when  they  wish  to  pnwluc^-  quickly  that  prolound  iini)re8sion  on 
btxly  and  mind  wmcti  fmtmgi  ktr  •  bout  in  preparation  for  soiae  «•- 
deal  or  ceremony     As  sMMMl,  U*    .  .iiue  ol  any  medi<;inc  adminisiberoA 


!i,i 


350 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


is  supposed  to  be  due  to  the  charm  wrought  in  it  by  the  shaman  or 
other  person  in  its  preparation  or  decoction.  Preparations  of  bark  are 
the  principal  specifics,  but  Langsdorff  (1804)  says  of  the  Tlingit,  'Hhe 
root  of  a  particular  species  of  valerian  is  con8idered  as  the  most  effectual 
remedy  that  can  be  administered.  *  ♦  •  The  wing  bones  [of  the 
eagle],  particularly  the  radius  aud  ulna,  are  used  in  illness  as  tubes  for 
sucking  up  fluids."*  Around  Sitka,  the  virtues  of  hot  sulphur  baths 
were  recognized  by  the  Tndians  long  before  the  atlvent  of  the  whites. 
Near  that  settlement  are  some  natural  hot  springs  impregnated  with 
sulphur,  salt,  and  magnesia.  In  addition  to  these,  however,  the  In- 
dians take  steam  baths  by  pouring  water  ou  red  hot  stones  in  an  in- 
closed tent  or  shed.  In  bathing  and  in  some  attempt  at  personal 
cleanliness,  the  Indians  of  the  northern  region  of  the  northwest  coast 
compare  favorably  with  any  of  those  in  the  world  living  in  the  temper- 
ate zone,  but  their  ignorance  of  the  simplest  laws  of  health  is  child- 
like and  lamentable. 


•  Laugsdorif,  Voyages,  Pt.  ii,  pp.  107  nud  134. 


m 


",- 


■  Xf*^« 


iilHiiii 


T 


shaman  or 
f  bark  are 
ngiJ.,  "the 
}t  effectual 
les  [of  the 
8  tubes  for 
)hur  baths 
he  whites, 
lated  with 
er,  the  In- 
8  iu  an  in- 
personal 
west  coast 
he  tenipcr- 
h  is  child- 


' 


XII. 


MORTUARY  CUSTOMS— ANCIENT  SEPULTURE— DEPOSITORIES  OF 
ASHES-MORTUARY  COLUMNS— CUSTOMS  OF  THE  TLINGIT,  HAIDA, 
AND  TSIMSUIAN— MODERN  CUSTOMS— CHRISTAN  BURIAL— SHAMAN 
B  URIAL, 

ANCIENT  SEPUI-TURE. 

The  earliest  historical  accounts  are  those  of  the  early  voyagers,  and 
it  is  from  these  that  we  must  get  our  descriptious  of  primitive  methods 
of  sepulture. 

Dixon,  who  was  amongst  the  Yakutat  in  June,  1787,  says: 

The  manner  in  which  they  dispose  of  their  dead  is  very  remarkable.  They  sepa- 
rate the  head  from  the  body  and  wr>a})ping  them  in  furs,  the  head  is  pat  into  a  square 
box ;  the  body  in  a  kind  of  oblong  cbuHt.  At  each  end  of  the  chest  which  coDtains 
the  body  a  thick  pole,  about  10  feet  long,  i.s  drove  into  the  earth  iu  a  slanting  posi- 
ion,  so  that  the  upper  ends  meet  together,  and  are  very  iirmly  lashed  with  a  kind  of 
rope  prepared  for  the  purpose.  About  2  feet  fiom  the  top  of  this  arch  a  small  piece 
of  timber  goes  across,  and  is  very  neatly  fitted  to  each  pole ;  on  this  piece  of  timber 
the  box  which  contains  the  head  is  tixed,  .and  very  strongly  secured  with  rope ;  the 
box  is  frequently  decorated  with  two  or  three  rows  of  soiall  shells,  and  sometimes 
teeth,  which  are  let  into  the  wood  with  great  neatness  and  lugenuity  ;  and,  as  an  ad- 
ditional ornament,  is  painted  with  a  variety  of  colors,  but  tbe  poles  are  uniformly 
painted  white.  Souietimes  tbes"  poles  are  tixed  npriglit  in  the  earth  and  on  each 
side  the  body,  but  the  bead  is  always  secured  in  the  position  described.* 

Dixon  also  describes  a  grave  discovered  by  one  of  his  oflBcers  near 
Sitka:  In  a  cave  "he  found  the  object  which  attracted  his  attention 
to  be  a  square  box  with  a  human  head  in  it,"  etc.,  beautifully  orna- 
mented with  small  shells  somewhat  like  those  at  Yakutat.* 

Portlock,  who  was  also  in  this  region  iu  1787,  describes  a  grave  just 
above  Sitka  as  follows : 

This  edifice  was  composed  of  four  posts,  each  about  20  feet  long,  stuck  iu  the 
ground  6  feet  distant  from  each  other,  and  in  a  quadrangular  form.  About  12  or  1.5 
feet  from  tbe  ground  there  was  a  rough-boarded  lloor,  and  two  of  the  sides  were 
boarded  4  feet  higher  up;  the  other  sides  were  left  open.  In  the  middle  of  this  lloor 
an  Indian  chest  was  deposited,  which  most  likely  contaimul  the  remains  of  stune 
person  of  consequence;  and  on  that  side  of  the  edifice  to  the  westward,  and  which 
pointed  up  the  sound,  there  was  painted  the  semblance  of  a  liumiin  face. 

It  is  further  described  as  showing  evidence  of  having  been  recently 
repaired  and  the  painting  touched  up.* 


H  IL 


f' 


I 


'Dixon,  Voyage,  pp.  175,  176.  \ Ihid.,  p.  181. 


{ Portlock,  Voyage,  p.  280. 
351 


352 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


Vancouver  describes  a  KootzDahoo  grave  (Tliugit)  which  they  saw 
on  Admiralty  Island,  near  Point  Caution,  in  1794,  as  follows : 

They  rested  for  the  night  in  a  small  cove  under  a  high  hill,  where  a  box  was  found 
about  4  feet  square,  placed  on  wooden  pillars  about  G  feet  from  the  ground.  This 
box  coutained  the  remains  of  a  human  body  very  carefully  wrapped  up,  and  by  its 
side  was  erected  a  pole  about  20  feet  high,  painted  in  horizontal  streaks  red  and 
white ;  the  colors  were  fresh  and  lively.* 

Vancouver  also  describes  as  follows  Kake  Indian  graves  on  Keku 
Strait,  Kupreanoff  Island,  which  he  saw  in  1794 : 

In  the  vicinity  of  these  ruins  were  many  sepulchres  or  tombs,  in  which  dead  bodies 
were  deposited.  These  were  made  with  a  degree  of  neatness  seldom  exhibited  in  the 
building  of  their  habitations.  A  wooden  frame  was  raised  about  10  feet  from  tliu 
ground,  the  upper  half  of  which  was  inclosed,  and  in  the  open  part  below  in  many, 
though  not  in  all,  of  them  was  placed  a  canoe.  The  flooring  of  the  upper  part  was 
about  5  feet  from  the  ground,  and  above  that  the  sides  and  top  were  eutirely  closed 
in  with  boards,  within  which  were  human  bodies  in  boxes  wrapped  up  in  skins  or  in 
mattiug.  These  repositories  of  the  dead  were  of  different  sizes,  and  some  of  them 
coutained  more  bodies  than  the  others ;  in  the  largest  there  were  not  more  than  four 
or  five,  lying  by  the  side  of  each  other,  not  one  appearing  to  be  placed  above  the 
rest;  they  were  generally  found  near  the  water  side,  and  very  frequently  on  some 
conspicuous  point.  Many  of  these  sacred  monuments  seemed  to  have  been  erected  a 
great  length  of  time,  and  the  most  ancient  of  them  had  evidently  been  repaired  aud 
strengthened  by  additional  supporters  of  more  moderu  workmanship.  Hence  it 
would  appear  that  whatever  might  be  the  enmity  that  existed  between  the  several 
tribes  when  living,  their  remains  when  dead  were  respected  aud  suffered  to  rest 
quietly  ai^d  u:<molested.t 

An  earlier  description  (1793)  by  Vancouver  of  some  graves  up  Behm 
caniil,  near  Point  Kelson,  is  as  follows : 

Near  the  ruins  of  a  few  temporary  huts  of  the  natives  we  found  a  box  about  3  feet 
square  and  1|  feet  deep,  in  which  were  the  remains  of  a  humau  skeleton,  which 
appeared  from  the  confused  situation  of  the  bones,  either  to  have  been  cut  to  pieces, 
or  thrust  with  great  violence  into  this  small  space. 

These  were  not  numerous,  and  from  the  circumstances  they  con- 
cluded that  only  "certain  persons"  were  thus  eutombed.f 

Another  description  by  the  same  author  (August,  1793)  of  a  grave  at 
cape  Northumberland,  Graving  group.  South  Alaska,  is  as  follows : 

On  a  high  detached  rock  were  the  reuiains  of  a  large  village,  much  more  exposed 
to  the  inclemency  of  the  weiither  than  any  resideuco  of  the  natives  I  have  before 
seen.  Here  we  found  a  sepulchre  of  a  peculiar  character.  It  was  a  kind  of  vault, 
formed  partly  by  the  natural  cavity  of  the  rocks  and  partly  by  the  rude  artists  of  the 
CO  nutry.  It  was  lined  with  boards,  and  contained  some  fragments  of  warlike  in\ple- 
meuts,  lying  near  a  square  box  covered  with  mats,  aud  very  curiously  corded  down.ij 

This  description  is  similar  to  one  given  to  the  writer  by  Judge  J.  G. 
Swan,  of  Port  Towusend,  Washington  Territory,  as  found  by  him  in 
1883,  in  a  cave  on  North  Island  of  the  Queen  Charlotte  grotip. 

From  the  descriptions  that  have  been  given  it  would  appear  that  the 
primitive  methods  of  sepulture  in  this  region  were  far  ftom  uniform  iu 
their  character.    However,  amongst  those  tribes  which  practiced!  cre^ 


*  Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  2C0- 
ilbid.y   p.  290. 


t  md:,  Vol.  11,  p.  351. 

4  Z6ii.'..  p.  370.. 


ih  tbey  saw 

rs: 

ox  waH  found 
jiound.  TbiH 
ip,  and  by  its 
oaks  red  and 

B8  ou  Keku 


i  i .' 

if 


ii 


li  dead  bodies 
libited  iu  tlio 
eet  fronj  tbo 
low  in  many, 
per  part  was 
itirely  closed 
iu  skins  or  in 
ome  of  tbeni 
>ro  than  four 
)d  above  the 
itly  on  some 
ieu  erected  a 
repaired  and 
>.  Hence  it 
t  tbo  several 
ered  to  rest 


liH. 


J  up  Behm 

about  3  feet 
eton,  which 
ut  to  pieces, 

tbey  con- 


a  pjravo  at 
)llow8 : 

ore  exposed 
have  before 
id  of  vault, 
irtistsof  the 
rliko  imple- 
•ded  down.^l 

idjje  J.  G. 
)y  him  in 

r  that  the 
tnirurui  iu 
ti«o(l)  cre^ 

J51. 


iM« 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXIV. 


3¥0 


3V/      3V3 


3^3        J4^//      3^S 


Haida  Mortuary  and  Commemorative  Columns. 

From  photographs  by  the  author  and  from  sketches  in  the  U.  S.  Nat'onal  Museum. 

Fig.  340.  Kaioani  Mortuary  Column,  containing  a  box  holciipg  the  aslies  of  the 
dead,  at  the  ruins  of  tlie  abandoned  Kaigani  village  of  Chasina,  at  the 
entrance  to  ( 'liolniondeley  Sound,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska. 

Fig.  341.  Kaioani  Mortuary  Column,  with  conipartment  boarded  up.  This  con- 
tains the  remains  of  the  dead  in  a  box,  and  represents  a  departure  from 
cremation  to  inhumation,  or  aerial  .sepultiA-e,  in  imitation  of  the  former 
custom  of  thus  depositing  the  cremated  remains.  At  Kasa-an,  Prince 
of  AVales  Island.  Alaska. 

Fig.  342.  Kaigani  Mortuary  Columns  (aerial  sepulture),  supporting  a  box  con- 
taining the  body  of  the  dead.  At  the  partially  abandoned  village  of 
Kaigani,  Dall  Island,  Alaska. 

Fig.  343.  Same  as  Fig.  340,  but  slightly  different  in  form. 

Fig.  344.  Haida  Commemorative  Column,  with  sign-lmard-like  attachment  at  the 
top.  This  is  iniitation  of  the  style  of  jiost  shown  in  Fig.  341,  and  as 
such  is  a  survival  of.  or  emblematic  of.  the  former  custom  of  crema- 
tion. This  style  of  post  is  erected  in  front  of  tlie  ho'i.se  of  the  deceased, 
while  the  body  is  de])osited  at  some  distance  from  it.  It  is  erected  to 
cominemorate  the  dead,  as  explained  in  Cliapter  VII. 

Fig.  34.').  Haida  Commemorative  C'olumx.  of  S4ime  type  as  Fig.  344,  but  with  two 
columns,  in  imitation  of  the  type  shown  in  Fig.  342. 


^""-"^•''^-^°^' 


ii 


ishes  of  the 
^ina,  at  the 
\laska. 

Tliis  coii- 
irture  from 
the  former 
-an.  Prince 

a  box  con- 
1  village  of 


nent  at  the 
J41,  and  an 

of  ere  ma 
e<lceease(l. 

erected  to 

t  with  two 


fiepoit  of  National  Muieum,  1888.- Niblack. 


Plate  LXIV. 


Haida  Mortuary  and  Commemorative  Columns. 


ilPI 


'^:^ 


>»)' 


i; 


* 


jfi-^ ;  1 


111 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0    If:'^  I 


I.I 


25 


iM     11112.0 


12.2 


IM 


1.25      1.4      1.6 

==     —    =— 

U 6" 

► 

i 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


li 


. 


'  i 


w 


::h. 


^  'll 


^'i^s 


R« 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXV. 


Modern  Tlingit  Graves,  Alaska. 

From  photograph!  and  sketches  by  the  author. 

Fig.  846.  Shaman's  Grave.    Of  the  general  type  found  auiongist  the  Tlingit. 

Fig.  347.  Grave  op  Chief  Shustocks.  On  Shustocka  Point,  opposite  the  village 
of  Wrangell.  The  pole  is  surmounted  by  the  carved  figure  of  a  black 
bear. 

Fig.  348.  Northern  Tungit  Dead-hocse.  Containing  the  carved  and  orna- 
mented boxes  in  vhich  are  deposited  the  cremated  ashes  of  the  dead. 
From  a  sketch  miule  by  the  writer,  Sitka,  Alaska. 

Fig.  849.  Grave  of  Indian  Chief.  Surmounted  by  the  carved  wooden  figure  of 
a  wolf,  indicating  the  totem  of  the  deceased.    Fort  Wrangell,  Alaska. 


Rtport  of  Nitional  Museum,  1888.— Niblick. 


PLATE  LXV. 


-^■•--^^ 


^^  -  ■■■* 


■  .__:^-s^*l*:>, 


Hl^^^rjf'i^S^^'T 


:ilin  'WW^frFv^  '^uTt 


Modern  Tlinqit  Graves,  Alaska. 


• 


f 


;    ;• 


li 


iiil 

'  k 


' 


i    1 


I 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXVI. 


Modern  Tlinsit  Graves,  Alaska. 

Drawn  from  photographs  in  the  U.  S.  National  Museum. 

Fig.  350.  Group  ov  Modern  Tijnoit  Graves.  Naha  Bay.  Method  of  sepulture 
under  missionary  influence.  Tlie  body  is  inclosed  in  a  casket  and 
buried  in  the  ground.  Over  it  is  temporarily  erected  a  cotton  slu<.>tin>,' 
tent,  as  shown  on  the  left  of  the  view.  Later  on  a  wooilen  monument, 
surmounted  by  a  cross,  is  erected,  or  a  picket  fence  built  around  the 
grave  site. 

Fig.  Sni.  Group  of  Tlingit  Graves.  On  a  small  high-water  island  off  the  village 
of  Tongass,  Aliuska.  A  curious  combination  of  customs  is  shown  in 
the  left  center  of  the  view,  where  the  grave  is  incloseil  by  a  picket 
fence,  but  marked  by  a  carved  figure  of  an  eagle,  the  totem  of  the  de- 
ceased. 

Fig.  352.  Group  of  Tlinoit  Graves  and  dead-houses  at  Sitka.  Alaska.  The 
graves  ar(>  of  the  general  tyi)e  where  Imrial  is  practiced,  but  in  the 
dea<l-liousi's  are  dejMisitetl  the  remains  of  those  cremated,  as  in  Fig.  34S, 
Plate  LXV. 


\ 


Rtportof  Nitional  Uuieum,  I8B8  — Niblack. 


PLATE  LXVI. 


i!r 


■  '  \: 


Modern  Tlingit  Graves,  Alaska. 


THE   INDIANS   OF  THE   NORTHWEST  COAST. 


353 


matioo,  the  cnstom  very  generally  obtnined  of  depositiu^  the  uahes  iu 
boxes  moanted  on  colnmns  or  ou  shelves  or  conipartnients  in  the  col- 
umns themselves. 

DEPOSITOUY  OF  ASHES. 

Vancouver  describes  a  method  which  he  saw  at  Cross  Sound,  in  1793, 

as  follows : 

Here  were  erected  two  pillars,  15  feet  liigli  and  4  feet  in  circumference,  painted 
white ;  on  the  top  of  each  was  placed  a  lar^e  square  box ;  on  exaniiuinK  one  of  thoni 
it  was  found  to  contain  many  ashes  and  pieces  of  bi, rut  bones,  whivh  were  consi<l<>red  to 
he  human.  These  relics  were  carefully  wrapped  up  in  skins  and  old  mats,  and  at  the 
base  of  the  pillars  was  placed  an  old  canoe  in  wliicli  were  some  paddles.* 

Plate  LXiY.,  Figs.  340  and  343,  show  two  types  of  primitive  Haida 
sepulture  of  cremated  ashes,  on  the  site  of  the  ancient  and  abandoned 
Kaigani  village  of  Chasinn,  at  the  entrance  of  the  CLolmondeley  Sound, 
Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska.  Tlie  boxes  containing  the  ashes  have 
somewhat  fallen  into  decay,  but  are  seen  on  tlie  shelves.  This  is  the 
most  primitive  form  of  the  sepulture  of  asheK.  Fig.  341  is  the  sketch 
of  a  column  at  Kasa-an,  Prince  of  Wales  Island  (Kaigani)  in  which 
the  shelf  and  compartment  containing  the  ashes  are  boarded  up.  This 
was  generally  the  custom,  and  a  curious  survival  of  it  is  showu  in  Fig. 
344,  from  Masset  (Queen  Charlotte  Islands),  iu  which  the  boards  are 
simply  nailed  across  the  top  of  the  post  or  column  in  the  semblance 
of  a  box,  while  the  body  itself  is  deposited  elsewhere  iu  some  other 
form  of  sepulture.  In  this  we  have  both  a  commemorative  column  and 
an  imitation  of  the  ancient  or  former  method  of  depositing  the  ashes, 
very  much  as  to-day  the  funeral  urn  in  marble  marks  with  us,  in  some 
instances,  the  site  of  a  grave  in  which  the  body  is  inhumed.  The  form 
given  to  the  cross  boards  is  that  of  an  end  or  one  side  of  n  funeral  box 
carved  with  the  totem  of  the  deceased.  Fig.  342  of  the  same  plate 
represents  another  form  of  depositing,  in  which  the  compartment  con- 
taining the  bo<ly  of  the  dead  or  the  boxes  of  ashes  is  borne  between  two 
plain  columns  or  posts  from  about  6  to  10  feet  apart,  there  being 
room  for  the  body  or  two  or  more  boxes  on  the  shelf.  This  is  also 
boarded  up.  The  sketch  is  from  one  by  the  writer,  made  at  the  village 
of  Kaigani,  near  Cape  Muzon  (latitude  54°,  38'  N.).  the  southernmost 
village  of  Alaska.  There  is  every  reason  to  believa  that  at  this  now 
almost  abandoned  village  we  tind  the  most  ]>rimitive  form  in  which 
these  depositories  existed.  Marchand,  who  visited  the  (iueen  Char- 
lotte Islands  in  1701,  says: 

These  monuments  are  of  two  kinds;  tlfo  first  and  uMmt  simple  are  composed  only 
of  a  wooden  colnmn  about  10  feet  high  and  1  foot  in  diiimoter,  ou  the  summit  of 
which  planks  are  secured,  forming  a  platform.  In  some  this  ]>latform  is  supported  by 
two  columns.  The  corpse,  deposited  on  this  platform,  is  covered  with  mosHand  large 
stones.  The  graves  of  the  second  kind  are  more  elaborate :  four  posts  pi.'iiited  in  the 
ground,  and  supporting,  only  2  feet  above  the  ground,  a  sarcophagus  artistically  or- 
namented and  hermetically  scaled. t 

•Vancouver,  Voyage,  Vol.  iii,  p.  242.      tMarcbauil,  Voyage,  Tome  li,  pp.  1:15,  i:J6. 
H.  Mis.  142,  pt.  2 23 


tl, 


iii 


354 


REPORT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  188K. 


As  cremation  preceded  aerial  deposit  with  tlie  Hnida,  it  is  to  be  inu- 
sumed  that  the  forms  of  sepulture  illustrnted  iu  Fi^s.  340  to  343  in- 
clusive, from  the  Kaigani  villages,  antedate  in  ty|H)  those  describiMl  liy 
Marchand.  According  to Lisiansky  (I8f>5)  the  same  foriiiH  as duscrilxd 
by  the  latter  were  found  aniougHt  the  Tliugit  at  Sitka,  excepting  that 
the  ashes  were  deposited  instead  of  the  corpse: 

The  bodies  here  are bunied,  anil  the  asheB,  together  with  the  houeH  thutreninin  iin- 
ooDBunied,  deposited  in  wooden  boxes,  which  are  placed  on  pillara,  that  have  ditlxr- 
ent  figures  painted  and  carved  on  them,  according  to  the  wealth  of  tlie  decendiil, 
On  taking  possession  of  our  new  settlement  [8itka]  we  destroyed  a  liuii'.lred  at  Inait 
of  these,  and  I  examined  many  of  the  boxes.* 

Fig.  345  represents  a  survival  of  the  form  of  deposit  in  which  the  box 
fs  supported  by  two  i)Oi$t.s  from  the  village  of  Skidegate,  Queen  CMiai- 
lotte  Idauds,  thfi  boards  from  post  to  post  having  the  Kemblanco  of  the 
end  of  a  huge  box,  in  which  the  ashes  or  remains  were  formerly  de 
posited.  This  is  similar  in  signiBcance  to  the  one  shown  in  Fig.  344, 
being  a  survival  of  the  semblance  of  a  former  custom.  Wherever  cri'< 
mation  was  practised  in  this  region,  it  seems  to  have  been  the  earlier 
custom  to  deposit  the  ashes  in  boxes  on  columns.  These  latter  must 
however  be  distinguished  from  the  strictly  commemorative  columns 
erected  to  *^  glorify  the  dead."  The  carved  columns,  erected  at  the  end 
of  the  village,  as  in  Plate  iii,  stand  somewhat  between  the  two,  having; 
the  double  purpose  of  "glorifying  the  dead"  and  serving  as  mortuary  col 
umns,  to  symbolize  the  old  and  mark  the  new  form  of  the  interment 
of  the  remaiuB.  While  they  do  not  in  themselves  servo  as  a  sepulchre 
or  receptacle,  they  seem  in  a  vague  way  to  have  had  their  origin  iu  tlif 
ancient  custom  of  depositing  the  dead  in  boxes  on  or  shelves  in  these 
carved  columns.  The  origin  of  the  custom  of  cremation  amougst  tlic 
northern  tribes  of  this  region  seems  traceable  to  the  belief  that  a  piece 
of  the  flesh  in  the  possession  of  an  enemy  gave  him  the  power  to  woi  k 
evil  to  his  spirit  and  to  his  kin.  Tb^s  belief  in  witchcraft  is  general 
throughout  the  coast.  Dunn  gives  a  curious  illustration  of  this  amongst 
the  Ewakiutl.    fie  says  of  his  dealings  with  them  : 

This  exasperated  the  Indians  against  nio ;  an<l  tbey  gave  nie  the  name  of  ghloaixH, 
i.  e.,  "  stingy ;"  and  when  near  them,  if  I  should  spit,  tbey  would  ran  i>nd  try  to  tukt' 
np  the  spittle  in  something;  for,  acconling,  as  they  afterwards  informed  mo,  tlxy 
intended  to  give  it  to  their  doctor  or  magician;  and  he  would  charm  my  life  awiiv.t 

The  bodies  of  warriors  killed  in  battle  were  formerly  cremated,  tlu- 
head  being  severed  from  the  body  and  preserved  in  a  box,  supported 
by  two  poles  over  the  box  holding  his  ashes.  This  was  the  form  ol' 
sepulchre  described  by  Dixon  amongst  the  Yakutat,  as  previously 
quoted  in  this  chapter,  the  idea  of  cremation  being  to  prevent  an  enemy 
from  mutilating  the  body.  It  is  believed  also  amougst  the  Tliugit  that 
the  souls  or  spirits  of  those  whose  bodies  are  cremated  will  be  very 
comfortable  in  the  spirit  world.     Whatever  may  have  been  the  origin 


'Lisiansky,  Voyage,  pp.  240,  241. 


t  Dunn,  Oregon,  pp.  246-247. 


THK    INDIANS   OF   THE   NOKTHWKHT    COAWT. 


355 


of  oreuiatioD,  with  them  it  would  Heem  thatth<)  reaHoiiH  for  it  were  not 
convincing  to  the  larger  portion  of  the  Houtheru  Tlingit,  Uaida,  and 
TnimHhian,  where  He(>uUnre  by  intenuent  is  praetised  similar  to  our 
method  of  burial. 

Amongst  the  northern  Tlingit,  where  cremation  is  still  practised  to 
a  considerable  extent,  the  present  form  of  sepulture  is  that  shown  in 
Fig.  352,  Plate  Lxvi,  which  represents  a  group  of  graves  near  Sitka 
similar  to  the  type  found  in  other  northern  Tlingil  vilKges.  They  are 
simply  frame  houses,  with  a  small  window  or  opei  '  '  in  the  side, 
through  which  the  boxes  containing  the  cremated  hhIu's  of  the  dead 
are  introduced.  The  funeral  boxes  containing  tb  "  ashes  of  the  differ- 
ent meml)ers  of  a  family  rest  side  by  side  on  j  floor,  raised  a  tew 
fi^et  ab(  t  le  ground,  and  are  generally  visible  through  the  window. 
The  form  of  construction  and  interior  arrangement  i  illustrated  in  B'ig. 
tl4»,  Plate  Lxv.  The  window  is  sometimes  covered  with  a  Ohilkat 
blanket,  as  in  the  illustration,  serving  to  adorn  the  outside,  and  to  in- 
dicate that  the  remains  of  persons  of  wealth  repose  within.  The 
wooden  knob  or  ball  on  top  is  frequently  replaced  by  a  carved  totemic 
figure.  The  dead  houses  are  often  painted  with  totemic  designs  on  the 
outer  walls,  and  ornamented  with  scalp  locks  and  other  trophies  of  the 
deceaaed. 

Cremation  is  not  the  universal  practice  even  amongst  the  northern 
Tlingit,  a  large  proportion  of  sepulture  being  by  inhumation.  Langs- 
dortt'  (1805)  says  that  sometimes  ar  Sitka,  ^'  The  corpse  is  laid  out  in  a 
new  chest,  and  interred  in  a  remote  part  of  the  forest,  commonly  be- 
tween four  trees  forming  a  square."  Fics.  347  and  •}49,  Plate  lxv, 
illustrate  modifled  forms  of  sepulture  at  Fort  Wrangell  (Sfikine) 
Alaska.  The  former  is  the  grave  of  Ohief  Shustack,  on  Sbustack 
Point,  at  the  south  entrance  to  Wrangell  Anchorage,  directly  opposite 
the  town.  It  represents  a  form  of  aerial  sepulture,  in  that  the  remains 
are  not  actually  buried  in  the  ground,  but  remain  above  the  surface  en- 
closed in  a  box.  Fig.  349  is  that  of  an  Indian  chief  of  the  Wolf  totem, 
the  form  of  construction  being  similar  to  that  of  Fig.  340,  the  grave  of 
•a  shaman  or  medicine  man. 


I, 


t  Ml 


SHAMAN  GUAV£S. 


These  are  uniform  in  type  amongst  all  the  Tlii  ./it,  and  Lave  been  the 
same  from  time  immemorial,  as  their  bodies  have  never  been  burned,  for 
the  reason  that  it  is  a  common  superstition  that  lire  will  not  touch  them. 
The  bodies  are  doubled  up  with  the  chin  near  the  knees  and  the  upper 
part  covered  with  a  bark  or  basket-work  mat.  The  graves  are  of  the 
type  shown  in  Fig.  346,  Plate  lxv,  and  are  invariably  located  at  some 
little  distance  from  the  village  on  a  small  island,  conspicuous  point,  or 
high  promontory,  sometimes  selected  by  themselves  before  death.  The 
sepulchre  itself  consists  of  a  small  ]>en  or  enclosure  of  logs,  usually  ele- 
vated above  the  ground  on  four  short  posts,  and  facing  towards  the 


t 


356 


BEPOKT   OF   NATIONAL.   MUSEUM,  1888. 


water,  the  roof  slopiug  back  in  the  other  direction.  The  body  is  borne 
to  the  grave  in  the  canoe  he  used  iu  life ;  is  lowered  into  the  sepulchre 
through  an  opening  in  the  roof,  and  deposited  on  its  side  on  the  tloor. 
With  it  are  placed  the  talisman,  charms,  and  paraphernalia  which  served 
in  lite  to  give  the  power  of  evil  to  their  possessor.  The  canoe  is  hauled 
up  on  the  beach  near  the  grave  with  the  paddles  in  it,  in  preparatiou 
for  launching,  and  sometimes  placed  on  rollers  or  skids.  *  These 
graves  are  usually  along  some  frequented  water  course,  and  are  very 
conspicuous.  Whenever  an  Indian  passes  one  of  them  iu  his  canoe  he 
drops  an  offering  of  some  value  (usually  a  piece  of  tobacco)  into  the 
water  to  propitiate  the  yake  of  the  deceased  and  bring  fair  winds  aud 
good  luck  to  the  superstitious  donor. 

Amongst  the  Haida  and  Tsimshian,  the  shaman  graves  are  usually 
small  and  made  of  split  boards  instead  of  logs,  but  are  substantially 
the  same  in  form  as  the  Tlingit  ones  here  described.  The  body  is,  how- 
ever, more  usually  deposited  in  a  sitting  i)08ture.  The  only  ones  who 
have  the  privilege  of  looking  into  these  graves  are  the  other  shaman, 
who  sometimes,  under  the  inspiration  of  a  dream,  can  go  to  them  and 
remove  certain  charms  of  the  deceased  for  their  own  use.  The  ordinary 
Indian,  however,  has  a  most  wholesome  dread  of  these  graves,  and  be- 
lieves that  if  in  passing  one  he  sees  any  part  of  the  boups  protruding 
through  the  flesh  either  himself  or  some  member  of  his  family  will  soon 
die. 

SLAVES. 

The  custom  with  regard  to  slaves  that  died  a  natural  death  was  to 
throw  the  bodies  into  the  sea  or  otherwise  cast  them  aside.  Certain 
slaves,  however,  were  selected  by  a  master  to  be  killed  or  sacrificed  at 
his  funeral  ceremonies,  in  order  that  their  spirits  might  accompany  his 
ill  the  next  world  aud  minister  to  it  as  they  did  to  him  in  life.  Those 
so  selected  esteemed  it  a  great  houor,  as  their  bodies  were  accorded  the 
same  sepulture  as  their  master^s.  In  case  of  cremation  the  bodies  ot 
the  slaves  were  cremated  with  that  of  their  master,  or  in  case  of  inter- 
ment were  buried  with  it,  thus  securing  to  their  spirits  a  comfortable 
time  in  the  next  world.  Slaves  killed  on  the  occasion  of  a  person  of 
consequence  building  a  house  or  giving  a  great  feast  were  accorded  also 
the  right  of  burial  of  a  freeman.  There  is,  therefore,  no  special  form 
of  sepulture  for  slaves.  ; 


CHRISTIAN  BUKIAL. 


Under  the  religious  influence  of  missionaries  the  Indians  have  been 
led  to  give  up  many  of  their  former  customs,  aud  inhumation  or  inter- 
ment  is  gradually  supplanting'  all  other  forms  of  sepulture.  Fig.  .'i.lO, 
Plate  Lxvi,  is  a  characteristic  group  of  modern  Tlingit  graves  at  Na 

*  This  is  (be  cuMt*  at  a  f<;rav«  near  Point  Netibitt,  Zarembo  Island,  described  for  Mio 
writer  by  Lieut.  1>.  W.  Cofi'iuan,  LI.  S.  Navy. 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


357 


body  is  borne 
the  sepulchre 
le  on  the  tloor. 
la  which  served 
lanoe  is  hauled  | 
]n  preparatiou 
|i(ls.  •      These 
i,  uud  are  very  j 
In  his  canoe  be 
facco)  into  the 
(air  winds  aud 

!8  are  usually 
substantially 
e  body  is,  how- 
only  ones  who 
other  shaman, 
)to  them  and 
The  ordinary 
[raves,  and  be- 
p«  protruding 
imily  will  soon 


death  was  to 
side.  Certain 
r  sacrificed  at 
iccouipany  his 
u  life.  Those 
e  accorded  the 
the  bodies  of 
case  of  inter- 
i  comfortable 
'  a  person  of 
accorded  also 
'  special  form 


ns  have  been 
;iou  or  inter 
ce.  Pig.  ;j.j(), 
rraves  at  Na 

58crib©a  for  tlio 


ah  Bay  (Tlingit),  in  southern  Alaska.  The  body  is  enclosed  in  a  rough 
casket  aud  buried,  a  temporary  lent  of  white  sheeting  being  erected 
over  the  grave.  Later  this  is  replaced  by  either  a  fence,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  352,  or  a  pyramidal  structure  surmounted  by  a  cross,  as  in  Fig. 
350,  or  an  eagle  or  other  t^otemic  carving,  as  in  Fig.  351.  This  fencing 
in  of  the  grave  is  now  quite  generally  practised  throughout  the  region 
of  the  Tsiiushiau,  Kaigani,  and  southern  Tlingit.  Fig.  351  is  a  group  of 
graves  near  the  village  of  Tongass  (Tlingit).  Plate  iii  presents  a  view 
in  two  sections  of  the  graveyard  at  the  Kaigani  village  of  Kasa-au, 
Prince  of  Wales  Island,  and,  with  Plates  i.xv  and  i.xvi,  gives  a  general 
ideaof  the  graves  seen  to-day  in  this  region,  being  sketches,  or  sketches 
from  photographs,  with  one  exception,  taken  by  the  writer  in  lisSo-'ST. 

IN  GENERAL. 

As  a  summary,  it  may  be  stated  that  Christian  burial  is  rapidly  sup- 
planting all  other  forms.  Cre  mation  is  still  in  vogue  amongst  the  north- 
ern Tlingit,  the  ashes  either  being  deposited  in  boxes  in  a  small  house, 
or,  according  to  Dunn,  in  boxes  in  a  secluded  spot,  in  the  woods.  * 

Amongst  the  other  tribesintennent  is  now  pretty  generally  practised, 
the  spot  being  marked  either  by  a  carved  column,  or  by  an  enclosure  in 
the  form  of  a  fence. 

MORTUARY  CEREMONIES. 

Although  the  methods  of  sepulture  have  changed  in  recent  years,  the 
attendant  ceremonies  have  not  altered  much.  On  the  demise  of  an  im- 
portant personage  in  this  region,  it  is  customary  to  array  the  body  in 
ceremonial  apparel  and  surround  it  with  the  tokens  of  his  or  her  wealth. 
Thus  laid  out  in  state,  the  relatives  and  friends  of  the  deceased  view  the 
remains.  In  the  case  of  the  death  of  a  great  and  well-known  chief,  In- 
dians come  from  other  villages,  and  the  body  is  thus  displayed  until  in 
an  advance*)  stage  of  decomposition,  when  the  liual  rites  take  place. 
Dunn  (1835)  nays  of  the  Tsimsliian,  "  When  a  chief  dies,  he  is,  before  in- 
terment, dressed  up,  his  face  painted,  and  jdaced,  sitting  up,  in  a  canoe, 
and  paddled  round  the  maritime  village,  looking  .almost  life-like."  * 
Amongst  the  H  .ida,  Tslmshian,  Kaigani,  and  southern  Tlingit,  wl.en 
cremation  was  practised,  the  attendant  ceremonies  were  about  as  fol- 
lows : 

The  members  of  families  belonging  to  the  wife's  totem,  and  to  totems 
other  than  that  of  the  deceased,  were  invited  to  a  mourning  feast,  last- 
ing usually  four  days.  The  feasting  and  display  of  the  body  in  state  were 
accompanied  by  the  dismal  lamentations  aud  wailing  of  the  mourners, 
who,  after  the  guests  had  entered  and  were  seated,  came  in  dressed  in 
mourning  costume  and  leaning. on  long  staves  or  carved  ceremonial 
sticks.    Arriving  in  the  middle  of  the  floor,  they  wept,  moanud,  wailed. 


", 


'i 


I 


!  f  I 


•Dunu  (1835),  On-gou,  \i.  '280. 


358 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


and  sang  in  a  most  dismal  manner.  In  the  intervals  of  mourning  the 
feasting  took  place,  and  it  was  then  also  that  the  slaves  were  sacriticetl. 
The  nearest  relative  or  leading  man  who  gave  the  feast  despatched  the 
slaves  by  a  sharp  blow  on  the  head  with  a  "  slave-killer,"  a  variety  of 
which  instrnments  is  shown  in  Plate  XLVI.  The  most  elaborate  kinds 
were  carved  from  deer  antlers,  but  the  points  were  sometimes  of  copper 
or  stone. 

Usually  the  body  of  the  deceased  was  borne  to  the  pyre  and  burned 
at  the  begiuuing  or  on  the  first  day  of  the  ceremonies,  the  feasting  and 
mourning  following  that  evet  t.  In  any  case,  the  bearers  of  the  body 
are  the  invited  guests.  The  funeral  pile  is  usually  built  just  back  of  the 
house  of  the  deceased.  The  mourners  range  themselves  around  tlie 
funeral  pyre,  their  faces  painted  black,  their  hair  cut  short,  and  some- 
times their  heads  covered  with  eagle's  down.  It  was  the  early  custom 
amongst  the  Tlingit  to  disjoint  the  body  before  burning  it.  Sometimes 
the  pipe  was  passed  around  before  the  fire  was  lighted,  which  last  was 
done  at  a  signal  from  the  master  of  ceremonies.  As  the  fire  was  lighted, 
drums  were  beaten,  and  the  mourners  wailed  and  cried  until  the  pyre 
was  consumed.  The  ^shes  and  burnt  bones  were  collected  in  an  elabo- 
rately carved  wooden  box,  which  was  deposited  in  ihe  mortuary  houses, 
or  on  the  columns  described.  The  relatives  washed  and  repainted  their 
faces,  presents  were  made  to  the  guests  who  had  assisted,  and  a  feast 
took  place,  terminating  the  ceiemonies.* 

An  anonymous  writer  in  the  American  Naturalist  thus  describes  a 
Tlingit  funeral  which  he  witnessed  : 

In  one  corner  of  the  room  we  found  the  corpftu,  completely  encnsed  in  blankets, 
which  in  turn  were  enveloped  by  a  large  woven  scn-graBS  mat,  aud  tied  up  in  mich  a 
manner  as  to  bring  the  knees  nearly  to  the  chin,  and,  tlina  enshrouded,  it  was  placed 
in  a  sitting  posture.  The  house  was  about  half  tilled  with  Indians— men,  women, 
aud  children. 

On  one  side  of  the  room  a  young  brave  was  busily  engaged  with  a  pair  of  scissorH 
in  cutting  oft'  the  long  black  hair  of  all  the  near  rulativea,  male  aud  female.  TIiih 
seems  to  be  one  of  the  usual  mourning  customs  among  these  Indians.  After  he  bad 
completed  this  tonsorial  duty,  during  which  he  had  been  iVe()nently  interrupted  by 
tbeir  sudden  outburstsof  grief,  a  procession  of  about  twenty  Indian  warriors,  headed  by 
old  Au-a  hoots,  the  war  chief  of  the  tribe,  filed  through  the  small  porial.  Each  carried 
in  his  hand  a  long  slender  staft'  made  of  a  hard  wood  aud  carved  all  over  with  fautastic 
figures,  while  bright-colored  Hudson  Bay  blankets  fell  in  not  ungraceful  folds  from 
their  broa«l,  square  shoulders.  These  staves  bore  evidence  of  their  great  age  by  tlu' 
high  polish  which  they  possessed,  as  well  as  by  their  smoky  color  and  pungent  odor.  Tlic 
warriors  ranged  themselves  in  line  along  one  side  of  the  house,  facing  the  center,  and 
immediately  began  a  lugubrious  death  chant,  keeping  time  by  raising  their  staves 
about  three  inches  from  the  floor  and  lotting  then  di'op  together.  This' dolef  ill  air 
was  ranch  more  monotonous  than  musical. 

All  this  time  the  relatives  '..f  the  deceased  were  rending  the  nir  with  their  lamenta- 


*  Simpson,  Jonrney,  Vol.  II,  p.  20d ;  Dull,  Alaska,  p.  417 ;  Portlock,  Voyage,  p.  2SK); 
Frazer,  Totemism,  pp.  81  aud  ti'i,  quoting  Holeuberg,  p.  3ii4,  and  Krause,  Dio  Tlinkit- 
Indianer,  p.  'J23. 


THE   INDIANS   OF   THE   NOPTHWEST   COAST, 


359 


mg  the 
Ijriflced. 
Ihed  tlic 
(rietv  of 
kinds 

copper 


tioDH.    Every  Tndian  present  bad  his  face  thickly  smeared  with  a  fresh  coat  of  seal 
nil  and  black  paint,  thus  rendering  himself  inconceivably  hideous. 

At  the  close  of  the  death  song  two  stalwart  youne  braves  luounted  to  the  roof  and 
lowered  bark  ropes  through  the  aperture,  which  were  made  fast  to  the  matting  that 
I'liveloped  the  corpse.  An-a-hoots  made  a  sign  to  the  young  men,  and  they  began 
raising  the  body  toward  the  opening  in  the  roof.  They  always  remove  their  dead 
from  their  houses  in  this  manner,  instead  of  through  the  door,  on  account  of  a  super- 
stition they  have  that  the  spirit  of  the  defunct  made  its  exit  in  this  way.  But  just  as 
it  arrived  at  the  roof  one  of  the  ropes  broke,  precipitating  the  lifeless  bundle  upon  the 
tire  below,  scattering  the  burning  coals  in  every  direction.  For  a  moment  all  was  ter- 
ror, confusion,  and  dismay.  The  shrieks  and  yells  of  superstitious  horror  that  went  up 
from  the  women  and  children  baffle  description.  The  body  was  hastily  snatched  from 
the  fire  and  hurriedly  carried  out  through  the  door  to  the  funeral  pyre,  which  was 
about  40  yards  in  rear  of  the  house.* 

The  following  is  a  description  of  an  Indian  cremation  witnessed  at 
Sitka,  Alaska,  during  tlie  winter  of  188ft-'87,  as  described  for  the  writer 
by  Lieut.  George  Barnett,  U.  S.  Marine  Corps : 

For  several  days  after  death  the  body  was  lying  in  state,  surrounded  by  all  articles 
of  value  which  had  been  the  property  of  the  deceased.  The  face  was  covered  with  a 
mask,  and  on  the  head  was  a  handsome  head-dress  trimmed  with  ermine  skins  which 
hung  down  the  back;  the  body,  which  was  in  a  sitting  posture,  was  covered  with 
Chilkat  blankets. 

During  the  time  the  body  was  lying  in  state  some  of  the  friends  of  the  deceased 
kept  up  a  doleful  chant,  keeping  time  with  carved  mourning  sticks,  wliile  others  pre- 
pared the  funeral  pile  in  rear  of  tlie  house ;  this  pile  was  made  of  yellow  cedar  logs 
so  arranged  that  a  solid  muss  was  formed  about  3  feet  high  and  then  the  sides  and 
one  end  were  continued  for  about  12  or  3  feet  more,  thus  forming  a  box  open  at  one 
end  and  on  top,  extra  logs  being  on  hand  to  cover  the  top  and  fill  the  open  end  after 
the  body  was  in  platro. 

When  all  was  ready  four  men  took  bold  of  the  corners  of  the  blanket,  which  had 
been  placed  on  the  floor  under  the  corpse,  aiid  carried  all  ta  the  window,  resting  it 
on  the  window-sill,  where  it  was  held  by  four  women,  while  the  men  went  out  through 
the  door  and  again  took  hold  outside  of  the  window;  they  then  carried  the  body 
toward  the  pile,  while  an  old  woman,  who  was  left  in  the  house,  took  a  tin  pan  and 
gathered  up  some  coals  and  ashes  from  the  tiro  in  the  center  of  the  house;  she  car- 
ried the  fire  to  the  window  and  threw  it  out  after  the  body,  as  she  said,  to  purify  the 
house;  she  then  took  np  a  small  dog  and  likewise  threw  it  out  of  the  window  to  ac- 
company the  departed. 

Under  no  circumstances  will  tiie  Indians  take  a  corpse  out  through  the  door;  if 
there  is  no  window,  they  will  make  a  hohi  in  the  side  of  the  house  or  take  it  out  through 
tbe  smoke-hole  in  the  roof. 

The  body  was  then  placed  in  the  hollow  part  of  the  pile  and  the  top  and  end  logs 
put  in  place,  aft«r  which  all  was  covered  with  seal  oil  and  the  fire  started. 

During  the  burning  two  men  used  long  poles  to  stir  the  fire,  so  that  all  would  be 
burned;  at  tbe  same  time  about  a  do/.en  mourners  with  their  faces  blackened  kept 
u))  a  funeral  chant,  keeping  time  by  beating  on  the  ground  with  their  funeral  sticks. 

About  30  or  40  feet  from  the  fire  a  hole  had  been  dug  in  the  ground  and  partially 
covered  with  brush,  and  here  the  widow  was  attended  by  several  female  friends,  who 
combed  her  hair  and  changed  her  olothes,  as  they  said,  to  cleanse  her  and  make  her 
eligible  for  matrimony  again. 

After  tV  ^  corpse  was  consumed  the  bones  and  ashes  were  collected  and  placed  in 


u 


!l 


Quoted  in  Standard  Natural  History,  Vol.  vi,  Man.,  pp.  134,  135. 


360 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  188H. 


lufliaii  boxes,  wliieh  were  ilcpositeil  in  the  dead  lioiise  iu  rear  of  tbe  former  house  of 
the  decensod. 

Althou(];li  largo  quantities  of  unUnrned  wood  reiiiaiiiHafter  a  cremation,  Mm  IndianN 
will  not  1180  it,  but  will  go  miles  for  their  fuel  rather  thuti  act  contrary  to  custom 
founded  on  superstition. 

The  tribeH  that  now  do  not  practice  cremation,  snch  as  the  Haida, 
Kaigaiii,  and  Nouthern  Tlingit,  enclose  the  corpse  in  a  sitting  posture 
in  a  large  covered  box,  similar  fo  those  ordinarily  used,  and  stow  it 
away  in  the  d.'swi  bouse,  which  is  usually  a  shed  or  small  house  behind 
the  lodge  of  the  deceased  or  at  one  end  of  the  village.  Some  of  these 
dead  houses  contain  three  or  four  bodies.  After  the  ceremony  of  de- 
positing the  box,  tbe  brother,  or  other  ne.ar  relative,  gives  a  potlatch 
aud  a  feast  to  repay  those  who  have  contributed  to  the  ceremony, 
either  in  helping  construct  the  box,  or  the  dead  house,  or  in  carrying 
the  body.  This  practice  is  not  very  different  where  the  body  is  interred 
sMJCording  to  the  rites  of  Christian  burial  or  in  imitation  of  it.  The 
mourning,  feasting,  and  ] tainting  of  the  face  is  still  generally  practised 
with  any  form  of  burial,  save  that  directly  under  the  supervision  of  the 
missionaries. 

it  is  the  present  custom,  however,  amongst  the  Kaigani,  Haida,  and 
southern  Tlingit  when  a  chief  or  very  wealthy  person  dies,  to  display 
the  body  in  state  for  awhile  and  then  enclose  it  in  a  casket,  which  re- 
mains in  the  house  in  which  the  deceaf  d  lived,  the  other  occupants 
moving  out  and  finding  quarters  elsewhere.  The  casket  is  surrounded 
by  the  boxes  containing  the  ceremonial  apparel  of  the  deceased,  his 
household  utensils,  personal  property,  and  tokens  of  wealth  in  general, 
and  thus  left  for  several  years,  admission  being  given  from  time  to 
time  to  visitors  to  view  the  spectacle.  Plate  lxvit  is  a  view  of  such  a 
disposition  of  the  body  of  the  famous  chief  Skowl,  at  Easaan  village, 
Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Alaska,  from  a  photograph  by  the  writer. 
Plate  Lxviii,  Fig.  353,  is  a  view  of  chief  Shakes  lying  in  state  at  Fort 
Wrangell,  Alaska. 

The  grandest  feasts  and  ceremonies  in  this  region  are  in  honor  of  the 
dead,  and  in  celebration  and  (Htmmemoration  of  the  jtrowess,  good 
birth,  and  wealtii  of  the  decejised. 

SHAMAN  BURIAL. 


Dall,  speaking  of  the  customs  at  the  death  of  a  shaman,  say?.: 

For  the  tirst  night  he  remains  lying  in  the  corner  where  he  died  ;  but  on  the  fol- 
lowing day  he  is  removed  to  the  opposite  corner,  aud  this  is  continued  until  the  body 
has  visited  each  of  the  four  corners  of  the  house.  All  the  inmates  of  the  house  fast 
meanwhile.  On  the  Hfth  day  the  body,  dressed  in  the  garb  of  his  profession,  is  bound 
to  a  board.  Two  ivory  or  bono  wands,  which  the  shaniau  used  in  his  pi-rformnnces. 
are  placed,  the  one  in  the  cartilage  of  the  nose,  and  the  other  in  the  hair,  which  is  tied 
together.  The  head  is  covered  with  a  piece  of  basket-work,  and  the  body  is  carried 
to  its  floal  resting  place.* 


*PaP,  Alaska,  p.  4-2tt. 


"I  J, 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXVII. 

Mortuary  Display  of  the  Body  of  Chief  Skowl,  lying  in  State  in  his  House  at 
Kasa-an,  surrounded  by  his  Personal  Effects  and  the  Tokens  of  his  Wealth. 

From  a  photograph  by  the  author. 

Chief  Skovvl  died  in  the  winter  of  1882-'83,  and,  according  to  the  custom  of  the 
region,  Ins  body  was  first  displayed  in  state  dressed  in  the  ceremonial  robes  of  a 
chief.  Later  it  was  inclosed  in  a  casket  and  deposited,  as  shown,  on  a  pile  of  boxes 
containing  his  clothing  and  ceremonial  dance  paraphernalia.  The  group  is  at  the 
end  of  the  building,  opposite  the  entrance,  between  the  two  carved  posts  holding 
the  rafters  of  the  house.  The  piles  of  boxes,  all  fidl  of  valuables,  the  row  of  cop- 
pers, the  bronze  howitzer,  etc.,  all  indicate  the  rank  and  wealth  of  the  deceased. 
Just  beiow  the  casket  are  grouiied  his  personal  household  utensils,  consisting  of 
porcelain  bowls,  platters,  wooden  buckets,  spoons,  etc.,  which  are  cared  for  as  i>er- 
sonal  relics  of  the  deceased.  The  figure  on  the  left  is  that  of  a  former  slave  of  the 
chief;  that  on  the  right  a  Kaigani  in  full  dance  regalia,  with  painted  body  and  hair 
bedecked  with  eagle's  down. 


tea 


Report  of  National  Muiaum,  1888— Niblack. 


Plate  LXVII. 


Q 

UJ 

a 

z 

3 

o 
a 

(T 
D 
OJ 

2" 
< 


< 

U] 

O 

X 

CO 

I 

?  I 

";!: 

to? 

z  CO 
»^ 

>  o 

-I    (0 

05 

<g 
1-t- 

Ul 

I 


<0 

< 

< 

z 

o 
u 

o 


Z    J 

~  < 

Is 

:£  ui 
COO. 

U.   «) 

OS 


Q 

o 
m 

ul 

I 
I- 


>- 
< 


> 
a: 

< 

O 

S 


f 


I 


it 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXVIII. 


The  Body  of  Chief  Shakes  lying  in  State,  and  a  Scene  from  a  THEATBirAi   pntpo 

beaT  fIiS:'"'"^''''^'''  °'  ^"^  '-^^^~''  °^  '^^  ^^-"^^°^  o^sH:^Ts"^n:\T. 

From  a  sketch  in  the  U.  S.  National  Musoum  and  a  photograph  by  the  author. 

Fig.  353.  Tlingit  and  Haida  custom  on  the  death  of  a  cliief.  Tlie  l)o,ly  is  dressed  in 
ceremonial  attire  and  surrounded  by  tlie  emblems  of  the  wealth  of  the 
deceased;  is  displayed  in  state  as  lonj-  us  ,,ossible.  Intlians  from  far 
and  near  gather  to  view  the  remains.  When  decomposition  sets  in  the 
body  IS  inclosed  in  a  casket  and  either  interre.1  with  great  pt.mp  or 
cremated,  or  else  displayed,  as  in  the  case  of  Chief  Skowl.  This  view 
represents  the  bcKly  of  the  head  chief,  Shakes,  lying  in  state  at  Fort 
Wrangell,  Alaska. 

Fig.  354,  Tlingit  tlieatrical  entertainment,  as  explained  in  the  text.    Chanter  XIII 


Report  of  National  Museum.  1888    -  Niblack. 


Plate  LXVIII. 


The  Body  of  Chief  Shakes  lying  in  State,  and  a  Scene  from  a  Theatrical  Enter- 
tainment Commemorative  of  the  Legend  of  the  Alliance  of  Shakes  with  the 
Bear  Family. 


11 : 


I 


r 


ReF 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXIX. 


855        356        357 


358        359        360 


Wooden  Commemorative  or  Mortuary  Columns  of  the  Tlinqit  and  Haida  Indians. 

From  photographs  and  sketches. 

Fig.  355.  Mortuary  or  Commemorative  Column  at  Masset,  Queen  Charlotte 
Islands.  Britisli  Columbia. 

Fig.  356.  Mortuary  or  Commemorative  Column  in  front  of  Chief  Shake's  house 
at  Fort  Wrangell.  Alaska. 

Figs.  357,  358,  and  859.  MORTUARY  Columns  near  Howkan,  Alask.;  Fig.  358, 
with  the  spruce  tree  growing  out  of  the  top,  illustrates  the  decay  of 
these  w(K)den  carvings  through  the  encroachment  of  the  vegetation, 
which  flourishes  wherever  it  can  get  the  least  foothold. 

Fig.  360.  Mortuary  or  Commemorative  Column  at  Fort  Tongaas,  Alaska. 


i^iammmfWWfra 


Report  of  National  Museum,  IBSS.-Niblack. 


PLATE  LXIX. 


1  ( 

11 


W0OD.M  Co™E»0«.T,VI  O.  M»TU.,V  C0UW«>  OF  THE  TUNG.T  .NO  H.IOA  NOI.NS. 


riH 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THK    NORTHWEST    COA^n^ 


361 


SUMMARY. 

It  is  impossible  to  generalize  with  regard  to  tbe  mortuary  customs  of 
the  Tliugit,  Haida,  a.id  Tsimsbiai..    Tbe  metbods  of  sepulture  difter 
iu  differeut  localities,  and  have  undergone  u.auy  changes  since  the  ad- 
vent of  tbe  whites.    Around  Sitka  tbe  custom  of  burning  the  dead  has 
obtained  from  the  earliest  times,  but  ffic  sepulture  of  tbe  ashes  has 
radically  changed;  whereas,  cremation  has  now  been  almost  entirely 
jriven  npby  tbe  Tsimshian,  Haida,  and  southern  Tlingit,  having  boen 
onginally  somewhat  tbe  prevailing  custom.    Witli  regard  to  tbe  burial  ot 
shamans  the  custom  seems  to  have  beep  from  tbe  earliest  times  tbe  same 
as  now,  and  quite  uniform  iu  cbanicter  tbrougbout  the  northern  region 
of  tbe  coast. 


if 


XIII. 

FEASTS,   DANCES,  CEREMONIES,    POTLATCRES,  THEATRICALS. 


I.  Initiatory  Ceremonies:  Marriage — childbirth — naming — 

PIERCING  THE  EARS  AND  NOSE— TATTOOING— PUBERTY— BRINGING 
OUT — SBLF-NAMING—CHIEFTAINCY— GLORIFICATION  OF  THE  DEAD. 

II.  Festive  Ceremonies:  Welcome— trade— housebuilding- 

POTLATCHES— CEREMONIAL  DANCES — "CULTUS"  DANCES — THEATRI- 
CALS. 

Festivities  in  general  in  this  region  consist  in  singing,  dancing,  feast- 
ing, and  in  the  distritmtion  of  presents ;  in  the  parade  of  ceremonial 
paraphernalia,  and  in  elaborate  cereiuonies,  accou]panie<l  by  all  the 
pomp  and  display  that  native  wealth,  iugennity,  and  resource  can  add 
to  make  them  effective.  Invitations  to  attend  are  sometimes  extended 
only  to  the  people  of  certain  totems  in  the  settlement;  sometimes  the 
whole  village  is  invited ;  often  all  from  distant  tribes  are  summoned. 
The  host  invites  according  to  the  significance  of  the  entertainment,  or 
to  his  resources  and  abilities  to  bear  the  expense.  People  of  small 
means  do  not  as  a  rule  go  ontside  of  tiieir  own  villfige,  while  a  chief, 
from  his  wealth  and  the  dignity  due  his  position,  extends  his  snmmous 
to  the  people  of  distant  villages.  Long  before  the  occasion  messen- 
gers are  sent  out  to  notify  the  guests,  the  invitation  being  general, 
to  men,  women,  and  children.  Some  of  the  ceremonies  are  initiatory 
in  their  nature,  celebrating  the  advance  of  children  towards  manhood 
or  womanhood;  some  mark  the  endeavor  of  men  to  attain  respect  and 
consideration  by  the  display  of  wealth,  by  the  giving  of  presents,  and 
by  lavish  entertainment;  while  others  are  obligatory  on  aspirants  for 
rank  or  authority.  Running  through  it  all  are  the  regard  for  wealth 
and  show;  the  petty  envies,  jealousies,  and  rivalries  of  ambitious  indi- 
viduals and  families;  the  trick)^,  fictions,  and  debasements  to  attain 
ends;  the  love  of  applause,  power,  and  advancement;  and,  above  all, 
a  nicety  in  the  gradation  of  presents  to  correspond  with  the  abilities 
of  the  recipients  to  return  in  kind.  This  marks  a  great  step  in  the 
evolution  of  the  sentiment  of  gratitude,  which  is  purely  a  product  or 
attribute  of  civilization.  In  fact,  in  this  curious  social  organization, 
based  on  wealth  and  family,  we  recognize  so  many  touches  of  nature, 
Mat  our  kinship  with  them  is  too  apparent  to  a«lmit  of  our  Judging 


THE    INDIANS    OF    THE    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


;u;3 


ti'em  harshly.  Time  aud  whitewash  liave  accomplished  wonders  for 
118,  but  the  coating  is  too  thin  in  phices  to  entirely  conceal  our  savage 
selves  of  yesterday. 

On  all  festive  occasions,  which  are  numerous,  singing  and  dancing 
are  indulged  in,  the  social  proclivities  being  strong  within  them.  The 
dancing  usually  takes  place  indoors,  and  is  accompanied  by  the  singing 
of  a  selected  few,  wiio  sit  apart  and  beat  on  a  drum  similar  to  that 
shown  in  Fig.  302,  Plate  LVir,  the  time  being  still  further  emphasized 
by  the  leader  or  others,  who  carry  rattles  or  tbump  on  the  floor  or  ground 
with  batons  similiar  to  those  shown  in  Plate  xvii. 

Dancinfi. — Some  of  the  dances  are  stately,  dignified,  and  formal ;  some 
are  wild,  passionate,  and  furious  ;  others  are  ludicrous;  but  in  general 
the  method  of  dancing  them  is  the  same,  the  movements  simply  being 
slow  or  exaggerated,  as  the  case  may  be.  It  consists  mainly  in  contor- 
tion of  the  body  and  hips,  with  the  feet  flrmly  planted  and  the  knees 
slightly  bent.  The  body  is  wiggled  and  swayed  from  side  to  side  or 
forward  and  backward,  the  legs  remaining  bent  at  about  the  same 
angle.  The  dancers  advance  ov  change  about,  by  a  spasmodic  hop 
or  shuftiing  of  the  feet,  but  the  movements  of  the  feet  play  only  a 
small  part  iu  the  so-called  dancing  itself.  Now  and  then,  wit'i  the  in- 
troduction of  a  new  figure  or  movement  by  the  leader,  or  the  interjec- 
tion of  a  witty  remark  by  one  of  the  dancers,  the  audience  will  laugh 
or  express  its  approval  by  grunts  and  cries.  As  the  dance  ])ro(!eeds  the 
movements  gradually  become  more  and  more  animated.  The  leader 
now  and  then  adtlresses  remarks  and  ejaculations  to  the  singers  and  to 
the  other  dancers,  aud  the  din  and  contortions  are  redoubled  iu  fury. 
Suddenl.y  the  music  stops  and  the  dancers  rest.  The  costumes*  worn  are 
various,  depending  upon  the  siguiflance  of  the  dance;  headdresses  of 
(jedar  bark,  and  the  tall  chief's  head  dresses  (Fig.  3.">)  filled  to  the  top 
with  birds'  down  ;  Chilcat  and  cedar  blankets  ;  nifisks  of  various  kinds 
and  devices;  cedar-bark  girdles;  ceremonial  coats  and  leggings  ;  rattles 
and  whistles ;  dance  wands  and  mechanically  workingsnappers ;  wooden 
helmets;  ceremonial  bows  and  arrows;  wooden  spears  aud  batons  of 
raTik ;  to  all  this  add  the  i)ainted  faces  and  bodies,  the  eagle's  down 
on  the  heads  and  over  the  paint,  and  the  clouds  of  birds'  down  blown 
from  tubes  and  scattered  by  the  dancers,  and  one  has  an  outline  of 
these  picturesque  and  interesting  gatherings.  Some  members  of  the 
trit)e  l^ecome  famous  as  dancers  aud  as  wits.  Their  anticsi  and  contor- 
tions an;  always  watched  with  interest,  and  their  sallies  greeted  with 
laughter  by  the  wonien  and  children.  This  individual  may  be  a  woman 
or  man,  or  formerly  might  have  been  a  favorite  slave,  who  \h-)f\ei\  a»  a 
clown  or  fool  to  amuse  the  multitude,  aud  who  was  granted  many  priv- 
ileges not  giveu  to  other  slaves.  Amongst  the  Tlingit  the  men  do  most 
of  the  dancing,  whereas  amongst  the  Haida  and  Tsimshians  both  sexes 
participate  alike,  sometimes  one  or  the  other,  or  both,  taking  part. 


N 


364 


REPORT    OP    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


Dawson,  in  a  recent  magazine  article,  thus  describes  a  daiicp  which  he 
saw  at  Skidegate,  Queen  Oliarlotte  Ishinds : 

The  performers,  about  twenty  in  number,  were  dreHsed  uceordiii);  to  iio  uniform 
plan.  •  »  •  Some  bad  rattles,  and  added  to  tbe  din  by  HbakinfT  these  furiously  at 
the  accentuated  parts  of  the  song.  Five  women  took  part  in  the  dauce,  standing  in 
front  iu  a  row,  and  were  dressed  with  some  uniformity,  several  having  the  peculiarly 
valuable  cedar  bark  or  goat's  wool  shawls  made  by  the  Tsimshiaus.  The  bend  dresses 
of  the  women  were  all  alike,  consisting  in  each  case  of  a  small  mask  or  semblance 
of  a  face  carved  neatly  iu  wood  and  inlaid  with  pearly  haliotis  shell.  *  •  *  » 
The  drum  was  beaten  very  regularly  with  double  knocks — thus,  turn  turn,  turn  turn, 
turn  <«»»— and  with  the  sound  the  dancers  kci)t  time  in  a  sort  of  chant  or  song  to 
which  words  are  set,  and  which  swells  into  a  full  chorus  or  dies  away  according  to 
the  notions  of  a  leader,  who  stood  anmng  the  dancers,  who,  besides  marking  time, 
now  and  then  gave  a  few  words  of  direction  or  exhortation.  •  »  •  To  the  drum- 
ming and  singing  the  dancing  also  keeps  time,  following  it  very  closely.  At  every 
1)eal.  a  spasmodic  twitch  passes  through  the  crowd  of  dancers,  who  scarcely  lift  t'ueir 
f(H>t  from  the  floor,  but  move  by  double  jerks,  shuflling  the  feet  a  little  at  the  same 
tiui<\  After  the  performance  has  continued  for  ten  miriutes  or  so  the  master  of  the 
ceremonies  gives  a  sign  and  all  stop  with  a  loud  hugh .'  The  dauce  is  resumed  by  the 
perspiring  crowd  at  the  signal  of  the  drum,  which  strikes  up  after  a  few  moments' 
rest  has  been  allowed. 

Langsdorff'  (1805)  thus  describes  a  dance  wliich  he  saw  at  Sitka : 

The  dance  itself  consists  chiefly  in  a  very  eager  spring,  in  executing  which  the 
dancers  scarcely  remove  at  all  from  one  spot.  They  are  all  barefooted,  and  wear  a 
Mingle  garment  only,  commonly  the  woolen  carter's  frock  mentioned  above.  One  of 
the  dancers  seems,  as  it  were,  to  lead  the  rest,  carrying  iu  his  hand  a  thick  sort  of  a 
stafV  ornamented  with  the  teeth  of  sea-otters;  with  this  he  strikes  upr  n  the  ground 
to  mark  the  measure.  All,  without  exception,  hold  in  their  hands  either  the  tail  or 
wing  of  the  white-headed  eagle  or  a  piece  of  ermine.  The  latter  is  valued  by  them 
very  highly  as' an  article  of  luxury.  They  not  only  orn amen i  their  heads  with  it, 
and  hold  it  in  their  bunds,  but  sew  it  about  their  garments.  The  women  sit  upon 
the  ground  at  the  distance  of  some  p.ices  from  the  dancers,  and  sing  a  not  inharmo- 
nious melody,  which  supplies  the  place  of  music* 

Tliis  description  of  a  dance  answers  very  much  to  one  seen  by  the 
writer  at  Fort  Wrangell,  in  September,  1887,  called  the  "stick"  dance, 
ill  imitation  of  the  Tiiine  Indians  of  tiie  interior,  up  the  Stikine  Uiver. 
It  consisted  in  raising  the  feet  alternately  in  quick  succession  as  high 
as  possible,  without  moving  the  body,  (o  the  sound  of  a  drum,  chorus, 
and  rattle.  It  differs  radically  from  the  usual  coiist  Judian  dancing. 
From  the  details  given  by  Langsdorff  it  would  appear  that  the  carry- 
ing of  white  plumes  indicates  that  the  ceremonials  wiiich  he  witnessed 
were  those  of  welcome  and  friendship  or  peace,  as  they  took  place  after 
strained  relations  between  the  Russians  and  Indians.  In  the  "stick" 
dance,  witnessed  at  Wrangell,  the  Indians  wore  the  buckskin  costume 
of  the  Tinne,  audit  was  given  only  for  the  amusement  of  the  guests. 
As  a  summary  it  may  be  stated  that  amongst  the  Tsimsbian,  Haida,  and 
Tlingit  the  form  of  most  dancing  ceremonies  is  as  follows: 

The  guests  sit  around  on  the  elevated  ledges  on  the  sides,  as  does 
also  the  chorus,  which  latter  keeps  time  to  the  beating  of  a  drum  or 


*  LnngKdorff,  Voyages,  Part  ii,  p.  114. 


/ 


y 


THE    INDIANS    OF    THE    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


3G5 


tambourine.  There  is  a  master  of  tbe  ceremonies,  who  leads  off  the 
cborus,  and  who  may  himself  participate  in  the  dance.  The  song  is 
usually  in  praise  of  the  strength,  riches,  and  prowess  of  the  host,  and 
to  this  the  dancers  keep  time  with  rattles,  grunts,  contortions  of  the 
body,  and  shuMing  of  the  feet,  ov  spasmodic  hoi)i>ing,  with  knees  con- 
stantly bent.  Dancing  is  an  invariable  accompaniment  of  potlatch 
ceremonies,  but  may  take  place  witbout  the  distribution  of  gifts. 

The  potlatch. — This  is  one  of  the  most  wide-spread  and  curious  cus-  ' 
toms  o«  the  northwest  coast.  It  has  its  origin  not  only  in  the  custom 
of  the  exchange  of  gifts,  but  in  securing  the  good-will  of  others  by 
presents.  To  procure  a  wife;  to  enter  the  ranks  or  obtain  the  influ- 
ence of  medicine  men  ;•  to  becom«»  a  great  chief;  to  give  social  standing 
to  one's  children;  to  take  on  on  jlf  the  name  of  a  paternal  ancestor; 
to  build  a  house ;  to  become  a  respected  member  of  the  community ;  to 
atone  for  a  wrong  done;  to  resent  an  insult — property  in  some  form  or 
other  must  be  sacrificed  either  by  destroying  it,  to  show  one's  rage, 
grief,  or  disregard  of  wealth,  or  by  giving  it  away  to  obtain  the  good- 
will of  others.  The  accumulation  of  property  is  a  necessity  in  these 
Indian  communities  iu  order  to  stand  well  in  them,  and  wealth  becomes 
primarily  the  basis  of  social  organization.  Under  the  head  of  wealth 
the  general  question  of  property  has  been  discussed.  In  a  potlatch  all 
kinds  of  personal  and  household  property — blankets,  dishes,  bowls, 
canoes,  guns,  ammunition,  money,  mirrors,  knives,  garmeuts,  spears, 
furs,  robes,  pots,  kettles,  spoons,  etc. — are  given  away.  Discrimination 
must,  however,  be  made  between  a  reward  for  services  rendered,  dam- 
ages mulcted,  or  the  d.it  paid  to  the  wife's  parents,  aiul  the  ceremonial 
distribution  of  gifts,  which  last  is  the  potlatch  proper.  The  custom  is 
a  very  widely-spread  one,  and  is  practised  by  some  tril)es  of  the  inte- 
rior, even  east  of  the  Kocky  Mountains,  particularly  amongst  those  of 
the  Dakotan  stock. 

Amongst  the  Tlingit,  Haida,  and  Tsimshian  the  potlatch  is  a  per- 
fectly systematized  distribution,  involving  much  more  thoughtful  con- 
sideration and  balancing  of  obligations  than  the  giving  of  a  select 
germau  or  limited  entertainment  by  a  well-recognized  leader  of  society 
in  any  of  our  large  cities.  The  occasions  on  which  they  are  given  will 
be  enumerated  later  on  in  the  description  of  the  different  ceremonies. 
In  general,  the  more  frequently  and  liberally  an  Indi.  .»  distributes 
property  the  better  his  standing  with  the  others,  the  greater  his  chances 
of  reaching  the  dignity  of  chief  in  his  village,  and  the  more  is  due  him 
when  some  other  member  performs  the  same  ceremony.  An  ordinary 
man  confines  his  potlatch  to  those  of  his  own  village,  while  a  chief  usu- 
ally sends  out  to  certain  individuals  of  distant  villages  by  name.  Often 
a  chief  is  assisted  by  his  people,  whom,  in  this  case,  he  invites  to  a 
feast,  and  from  whom  afterwards  he  receives  gifts  which,  with  those 
()f  his  own,  are  given  away  subsequently  at  the  grand  potlatch.  When- 
ever it  is  the  intention  of  an  individual,  other  than  the  head  (ihief. 


366 


REPOKT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


to  make  such  a  distribution,  he  calls  together  his  friends  aud  rela- 
tives, makes  an  inventory  of  his  property,  and,  with  their  help,  makes 
out  a  list  of  persons  to  'whom  he  intends  giving  presents  and  what 
articles  [io  to  each.  It  is  often  the  custom,  however,  previous  to  call- 
ing together  the  friends,  for  the  host  to  quietly  distribute  his  property 
amor.g  his  friends  and  the  principal  people  of  the  village,  who  by  eti- 
quetre  are  required  just  before  the  time  set  for  the  potlatch  to  return 
the  presents  with  interest  or  increase — that  is,  for  four  blankets  to  re- 
turn six,  or  in  some  such  ratio.  In  this  way  all  the  tribe  immediately 
concerned  know  what  they  are  to  get,  and  the  immediate  friends  and 
relatives  know  what  the  visitors  are  to  receive.  The  inventory  being 
made  out  and  the  council  of  atlvisers  assembled,  the  list  is  read  out 
name  by  name.  As  soon  as  a  name  is  read,  the  friends  present  ex- 
press their  approval  or  disapproval  of  the  intention  to  give  the  indi- 
vidual named  such  and  such  present.  The  list  being  finally  made 
out,  the  messengers  are  sent  out  to  announce  the  date  and  to  invite 
the  guests.  On  the  assembling  of  the  guests,  on  the  date  fixed,  feast- 
ing and  dancing  are  indulged  in.  If  the  occasion  is  for  the  purpose 
of  raising  a  house,  cutting  out  and  erecting  a  new  carved  column,  or 
undertaking  some  industrial  enterprise  requiring  the  combined  efibrt 
of  many,  the  feasting  and  dancing  alternate  with  the  work,  gambling 
being  indulged  in  during  spare  times,  and  the  distribution  takes  place 
when  the  work  in  hand  is  finished,  after  which  all  disperse.  In  this 
case,  however,  the  gifts  are  in  the  nature  somewhat  of  reward  for  serv- 
ices, and  go  to  the  guests  jmre  and  simple,  the  relatives  receiving  none ; 
but  in  case  of  a  grand  potlatch,  unconnected  with  the  industrial  idea, 
all  receive  presents  according  to  the  list  made  out.  In  any  case,  how- 
ever, the  distribution  is  the  final  ceremony,  and  is  conducted  as  follows : 
The  guef:*s  all  being  assembled,  the  goods  are  displayed  about  the 
walls  and  on  poles  and  cords  or  piled  up  on  the  floor  in  a  great  mouml. 
The  host  stands  or  sits  arrayed  in  cerenjonial  attire,  and  presides  over 
the  affair  with  the  (;erenionial  baton  in  his  hand.  The  herald  blows  a 
call  similar  to  that  shown  in  Fig.  334,  announces  the  opening  of  the 
ceremony  in  a  speech,  extolling  the  liberality  and  prowess  of  the  host, 
and  calls  a  name,  giving  the  present  he  is  to  receive.  An  attendant 
takes  the  present  and  <leposits  it  in  front  of  the  person  who  is  to  re- 
ceive it,  where  it  remains  until  all  are  thus  honored,  the  names  being 
called  out  one  by  one.  On  the  announcement  of  each  name,  the  host 
solemnly  nods  his  head  and  thumps  on  the  floor  with  his  baton.  The 
whole  ceremony  forcibly  reminds  one,  in  a  general  way,  of  a  Sunday- 
school  Christmas-tree  distribution.  Formerly  slaves  were  given  away 
to  the  rich  and  powerful  visitors,  but  to  the  poorer  guests  worn-out 
blankets,  or  even  pieces  or  strips  of  blankets  were  and  still  are  given, 
on  the  priiiciple  that  to  those  who  have  shall  be  given.  A  song  is  sung, 
a  dance  performed,  and  the  guests  disperse,  but  frequently  a  repetition 
of  the  whole  affair  occurs  in  the  next  lo<lge,  and  so  on  until  the  whole 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    NOKTHWEST    COAST, 


367 


community  has  contributed  to  make  the  i*i'i\\v  one  long  to  be  remem- 
bered, und  Latided  down  by  tradition  an  an  epoch  iu  the  history  of  the 
viMage, 

Femtx. — So  far  we  have  (uinsidered  in  general  dancing,  singing,  and 
the  distribution  ot  i>resents.  In  preparation  for  a  feast  the  northern 
Indians  (Tsimshian,  Plaida,  and  Tlingit),  if  not  now  at  least  formerly, 
washed  oil'  all  the  old  paint,  and,  after  smearing  their  bodies  with 
fresh  grease,  repainted  their  faces,  chests,  and  arms  red,  etching  on 
their  totemic  designs,  and  sprinkling  it  all  with  white  down  in  a  full- 
dress  but  polite  coating  of  tar  and  feathers.  The  feasts  consist  of  all 
kinds  of  food,  quantity  being  the  chief  requisite.  This,  however,  is 
served  on  large  feast  dishes  and  eaten  with  ceremonial  spoons,  both  of 
which  have  been  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  plates.  The  guests 
sit  around  on  the  ledges  or  surrounding  platforms,  ami  all  eat  out  of 
the  dishes  nearest  at  hand.  The  feasts  are  usually  kept  up  as  long  as 
there  is  anything  to  eat. 

1.— Initiatory  ceremonies. 

In  this  class  are  included  all  the  ceremonies  that  mark  the  diifereut 
steps  in  life  from  birth  to  death.  Funeral  ceremonies  have  been  de- 
scribed. The  most  iin]>ortant  voluntary  step  in  life,  and  one  that  has 
the  greatest  significance  iu  our  higher  civilization  at  least,  is  matri- 
mony. 

Marriage. — As  a  rule  the  Indians  marry  young.  Polygamy  is  the 
natural  result  of  the  custom  by  which  a  sister's  son  or  a  brother  falls 
heir  to  the  relict  of  the  uncle  or  brother,  in  addition  to  his  own  wife. 
While  the  custom  is  now  dying  out,  yet  it  is  in  the  relations  of  the 
sexes  that  the  Indians  most  tenaciously  cling  to  old-time  customs. 
Polygamy  is  rare,  but  the  number  of  wives  is  regulated  purely  by  the 
ability  or  desire  of  the  husband  to  maintain  them.  Dunu  (1834)  men- 
tions a  Sebassa  (Tsimshian)  chief  who  had  twenty  wives  and  hosts  of 
slaves.*  The  first  wife  has  precedence.  It  is  not  uncommon  amongst 
the  Tlingit  for  "  rich  and  substantial  men  to  have  two  wives,  an  old 
and  a  young  one.'' t  Sometimes  there  is  a  great  deal  of  sentiment  in 
the  selection  of  a  bride;  sometimes  a  match  is  arranged  or  schemed 
for  by  the  families;  but  more  often  it  is  a  commercial  transaction  of 
buying  and  selling.  A  man  desiring  to  marry  a  girl  sends  his  mother 
or  a  middle  man  to  her  parents  to  negotiate.  An  understanding  having 
been  arrived  at,  he  sends  as  many  presents  as  he  can  got  together  to 
her  father.  The  ceremony  is  about  the  same  throngiiout  the  northern 
region,  consisting  mainly  iu  the  assembling  of  frien<ls,  the  exchange  of 
presents,  feasting,  and  dancin^'.  The  father  invites  all  the  daughter's 
relations  to  the  ceremony.  On  the  day  appointed  the  man  invites  his 
friends  to  accom|)any  him,  and  going  to  the  house  of  the  bride-elect 

*  Dunn,  Oriiijon,  p.  '274. 

t Lun^^Hdoiff,  V<>yuf;es,  Purt  ii,  p.  133, 


I 


i 


368 


KEPOKT    OF   NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


they  enter  and  sit  down  at  one  end  of  the  room,  the  );iil  aud  ber  rela- 
tives being  at  the  other.  The  young  man's  friends  make  a  speech  in 
his  favor,  and  the  girl's  relatives  sing  a  song,  after  which  the  bride 
goes  over  and  sits  down  beside  liur  to-be-husband  and  takes  his  hand. 
Dall  thus  describes  the  further  custom  amongst  the  Tlingit: 

AH  the  KuestH  datice  nud  tiiug;  whoa  tired,  (Mversifyiiii;  the  entertainment  by  eat- 
ing. The  pair  do  not  join  in  any  of  the  ceronioiiieH.  Tha*;  their  fiitnre  life  may  ba 
happy  they  fast  for  two  days.  Then  taking  a  little  food  to  ,«intaiii  life,  they  fast  for 
two  days  more.  Fonr  weeks  afterwards  they  come  together  vn\  are  then  recognized 
an  uian  and  wife.* 

When  the  ceremony  is  complete  the  fat'ier  of  the  girl  gives  her  a 
dowry  e«iiial  in  value  to  that  received  from  the  husband,  and  she  goes 
to  live  with  her  father-in-law.  If  they  afterwards  separate  through 
dissatisfaction  the  presents  are  all  returned;  but  if  a  wife  is  unfaithful, 
the  husband  can  send  her  back  with  nothing  atul  get  his  own  property 
from  the  father.  In  any  case  the  children  go  with  the  mother.  The 
husband  may  claim  indemnity  from  his  wife's  seducer.  When  the  mar- 
riage festival  is  all  over,  the  fact  is  marked  by  the  removal  from  the 
bride's  lower  lip  of  the  button  or  pin,  and  the  substitution  of  the  plug 
or  labret. 

Child-birth. — It  appears  that  only  amongst  the  Tlingit  are  peculiar 
customs  in  vogue  in  tiie  treatment  of  women  at  child-birth.  Petroff 
says  in  his  report: 

The  Hpecial  sullering  imposed  njyou  all  womankind  by  nature  is  increased  hero  a 
liundrcd  fold  by  ancient  custom  and  superstition.  At  the  time  of  child-))irtli,  when 
women  more  than  at  any  other  time  are  in  need  of  assistance,  the  Tlingit  females 
are  driven  out  of  the  house  and  left  ic»  their  fate,  shunned  by  everybody  as  unclean- 
The  cliild  is  born  in  the  open  air,  no  nuitter  at  what  season,  aud  only  some  time  after 
the  birth  is  the  nu>ther  allowed  to  enter  a  rude  shed  erected  for  the  purpose,  where 
slu' is  con  lined  for  ten  days.  *  *  "  A  new-born  child  is  not  allowed  to  tnste  its 
natural  food  until  it  has  vomited,  unil  if  this  does  not  occur  naturally  its  little 
stomach  is  pressed  and  8(iueey.ed  until  the  desired  ett'ect  is  secured.  At  the  ago  of  a 
few  weeks  the  babe  is  wrapped  in  furs  and  strapped  upon  aboard,  and  is  always  car- 
ried about  by  the  mother.  The  infants  are  given  tin'  breast  from  ten  to  thirty  months, 
but  they  are  accustomed  to  other  food  after  they  are  a  year  old.  The  first  strong 
nourishment  given  them  is  generally  the  raw  blubber  of  nnirine  animals,  except 
that  of  the  whale.  As  soon  as  the  child  begins  to  walk  it  is  bathed  daily  in  'he  sea, 
without  regard  to  the  seas(m,  which  accounts  to  some  extent  for  the  robustnexs  of 
the  body  of  the  Tlingit  after  he  has  once  passed  the  tender  iige.t 

This  custom  relating  to  women  at  child-birth  is  much  less  rigorously 
carried  out  now  than  formerly,  aud  diligent  inquiry  by  the  writer  has 
failed  to  discover  that  such  prsictice  was  ever  in  vogue  amongst  the 
Haida  orTsimshian.  The  cradle-board  has  been  very  generally  aban- 
doned in  this  whole  region,  the  child  being  slung  in  a  blanket  or  carried 
in  the  arms,  as  with  us.  When  used  formerly  the  board  was  padded 
with  nu)ss,  which  was  renewed  daily.  Children  are  treated  with  great 
kindness  and  leniency  and  rarely  chastised. 

*  Dall,  Alaska,  p.  4T«. 
t  Petroft',  Report,  p.  169. 


I  rela- 

3b  in 

bride 

land. 

ly  eat- 
f&y  be 
Mt  for 
cnized 


THE    INDIANS    OF   Tilt:    NOKTIIWEST    COAST. 


369 


Naming. — Cbildrou  are  given  niyre  than  one  name,  bnt  the  enstoni 
varies  souiewbat  in  different  localities.  The  tirst  i.s  applied  soon  after 
birth  by  the  niotber,  and  is  usually  that  of  a  maternal  ancestor  or  near 
male  relative  of  the  tnothor.  Ancestral  names  are  preserved  with  the 
greatest  care,  this  being  tavored  by  the  custom  of  erecting  mortuary 
columnH  and  preserving  traditions  of  the  prowess  of  ancestors.  The 
first  uauie  is  conferred  without  any  ceremony.  An  exception  to  this 
bas  been  noted  in  the  adoption  of  a  son  as  an  heir  by  a  wealthy  chief, 
where  bis  sister  takes  the  child  and  figuratively  adopts  it,  the  name  of 
a  paternal  (or  adopted  maternal,  which  is  the  same)  ancestor  is  applied 
to  the  child.  The  chief  makes  her  a  present,  and  when  the  boy  grows 
up  it  becomes  bis  duty  to  also  suitably  remember  or  reward  her.  Where 
parents  are  too  poor  to  prepare  feasts  for  their  children  they  retain  their 
first  name;  but  with  families  of  wealth  there  are  several  ceremonies 
wbicb  must  be  complied  with  to  insure  social  standing  to  their  children. 
The  first  ceremony  is  a  very  expensive  one,  involving  in  lormer  times  for 
the  parents  an  enormous  outlay. 

Piercing  the  nose  and  ears. — This  most  important  ceremony  is  intended 
to  give  social  standing  to  the  children,  and  involves,  or  formerly  in- 
volved (for  the  practice  has  almost  gone  out  of  date),  the  following  de- 
tails: (1)  A  house-building  "bee";  (2)  a  potlatch  ;  (3)  the  bestowal  of 
a  second  name  on  the  child  or  children  ;  (4)  the  freeing  of  slaves,  and 
(5)  the  piercing  of  the  nose  and  ears,  al the  ugh  not  in  the  exact  order 
named.  A  new  house  is  first  built  for  its  express  celebration,  feasts 
being  given  during  tbe  progress,  and  dancing,  singing,  and  gambling 
being  indulged  in.  Tbe  relatives  and  guests  being  all  assembled,  the 
final  ceremonies  take  place  as  follows:  (During  the  period  when  slaves 
weve  held  a  nnmberofthem  equal  to  that  of  the  children  for  whom 
the  celebration  wRs  given  at  this  point  received  their  liberty.)  The 
children  are  brought  forward  according  to  their  nge,  and  the  incisions 
made  in  the  septum  of  the  nose  and  the  lobe  of  the  ear  with  a  sharp 
instrument  or  awl  of  copi>er,  bone,  shell,  or  iron.  A  second  name  is 
bestowed  on  each,  which  amongst  the  Haida  is  (accortling  to  Dawson) 
for  male  children  determined  as  follows  : 

With  the  HuidftH  »  lirst-lioni  noii  iiiay  1>o  called  by  the  name  of  the  mother's  eldest 
brother;  the  uecoiid  born  after  the  iiiotlit-r's  mocoihI  brother,  or  by  one  of  the  addi- 
tional uameH  of  the  tirsst.  Shotdtl  the  mother  have  no,l)rother  the  name  of  Mime  dead 
friend  is  chosen,  or  in  cascM  where  the  medicine  uiun  revealH  the  retnrn  of  Nome  ono 
formerly  dead  iu  the  new-born  child,  the  name  of  the  )ier.son  Hiipposed  to  be  thus  retnrn- 
iuj{  to  the  tribe  taken  precedence  of  all  others.  A  cljiei'.s  son  \»  named  by  its  mother  af- 
ter consultation  with  a  medicine  man,  whom  i^he  pays.  He  takes  a  ni<;ht  to  think,  and 
mayhaps  dream,  about  it.  Thereafter  he  gives  the  name  of  a  deceased  male  relative 
on  the  mother's  side,  whicdi  is  adopted.  The  ceremony  of  naming  in  witnessed  by 
many,  and  presents  are  given.  •  »  •  Four  times  in  all  a  youth  changes  his  name, 
always  taking  one  from  his  mother's  family." 

After  the  iniming  a  feast  takes  place,  followed  by  singing,  dancing, 
and  a  grand  potlatch,  when  all  disperse  and  the  fCvStival  (;onies  to  au 

•Dawson,  Report,  p.  131. 

H.  Mis.  42,  pt.  2 24 


i 


I*' 


ii 


870 


REPORT   OF   NATIONAL   MU8EUM,  HiB8. 


!   i 


end.  At  the  potlatch  it  may  be  well  to  uieutiou,  all  the  assembled  peo- 
ple, both  relatives  aud  guests,  receive  presents,  which  is  dift'ereiit  from 
a  simple  housebuilding  or  other  industrial  *^bee,"  where  only  the 
guests  are  rewarded. 

Tattooing. — Amongst  the  Tlingit  and  Tsimshian,  where  tattooing  is 
not  practiced,  the  child  receives  simply  the  birth  name,  the  second  name 
as  in  the  preceding,  and  either  one  or  two  other  names  later  on,  as  here- 
after explained.  With  the  Haida,  however,  the  ceremony  of  tattooing', 
which  occupies  three  separate  occasions  or  gatherings,  a  name  is  each 
time  bestowed  or  assumed.  According  to  Dawson  *  a  house-building 
bee  and  potlatch  is  given  by  the  parents  on  the  first  two  occasions  of 
the  tattooing  of  a  child  or  several  children,  and  on  the  last  occasion 
the  young  man,  aided  by  his  mother's  people,  makes  the  potlatch  from 
his  own  house  aud  adopts  formally  the  name  of  a  maternal  relative  or 
ancestor.  On  this  occasion  the  tattooing  is  finished ;  but  the  ceremony 
will  be  spoken  of  uud<)r  the  head  of  Lmt  naming.  The  process  of  tat- 
tooing has  been  described. 

Puberty. — The  ordeals  through  which  a  young  girl  wa.s  required  to 
pass  on  attaining  the  age  of  puberty  were  formerly  very  severe,  but  in 
recent  years  have  been  almost  entirely  relaxed.  Amongst  the  Tlingit 
they  were  peculiarly  trying,  but  the  custom  varied  in  different  localities. 
According"  to  Laugsdorii',  who  wa^  amongst  them  in  1804-05,  it  was 
not  "  uncommon  when  a  young  girl  is  grown  up  to  shut  her  up,  even  for 
a  whole  year,  in  a  small  house  by  herself  at  a  distance  from  her  family 
and  acquaintance,  where  she  is  kept  coustautly  employed;  the  idea 
is  that  by  this  means  she  a^^q^ores  habits  of  industry  and  diligence, 
reserve  and  modesty,  which  will  -ifford  the  better  chance  of  her  becom- 
ing a  good  wife,  aud  lay  h  )v\\(\  foundation  for  wedded  h»p{>ine8s."t 
This  exclusion,  however,  iiad  a  deeper  reason,  in  that  young  girls  were 
at  this  period  considered  unclean,  and  both  among  the  Uaida  and  Tlin- 
git were  compelled  to  wear  a  peculiar  cloak,  hood,  or  hat  as  a  badge  of 
seclusion,  and  to  protect  the  sky  from  pollution.  The  face  was  painted 
with  charred  fungus,  aud  the  girl  required  to  fast  more  or  less,  only  her 
mother  or  a  female  slave  being  allowed  to  carry  her  food.  Amongst 
the  Tlingit  she  was  confined  to  a  small  hut  for  six  months  or  so,  but 
amongst  the  Haida  it  was  customary  to  screen  off  a  corner  of  the  house 
and  give  her  a  separate  fire  and  a  separate  exit  out  of  a  small  back 
door  cut  for  the  purpose.  According  to  Dawson,  if  it  was  necessary 
for  her  to  pass  out  by  the  front  door,  preparations  were  made  by  remov- 
ing everything  with  which  there  might  be  danger  ot  her  coming  in  con- 
tact. In  meeting  men  she  was  required  to  avert  her  face  aud  cover  it 
with  a  corner  of  her  blanket.  The  hood  or  cloak  she  wore  was  made  of 
woven  cedar-bark,  nearly  conical  in  shape,  aud  reached  dowu  below  the 
breast,  though  open  before  the  face. 

*  Dawson,  Report,  p.  131. 

t  Laugsdorff,  Voyages,  Part  ii,  p.  1J3, 


THE    INDIANS   OF   THE   KOKTMWK.ST   C()A«T. 


871 


Tbeae  or  utber  Hituiliii'  uiisttoiua  wero  aIho  in  vo^ne  uiiiuti)^  tliti  TftiumhiauH,  wliime 
pruvtictiM  HO  cloHely  ruHumblo  the  Huidu'Hiii  niont  rvspuutH.  Auion^  tliHou  puuplu  groat 
varo  wuH  taken  to  teach  the  girlnHiibinixsion,  coutentmunt,  uiiil  iiidiiHtry.  At  certain 
times  tboy  were  not  allowed  to  lie  down  to  Hleop,  but  if  overcome  with  drowsinetw 
must  prop  tbeoiHelves  in  a  nittiuK  poatnnt  between  boxoH.  licfore  drinking  the  cup 
niuHt  be  turned  round  four  times  in  the  direction  of  movement  of  tlie  sun.  It  whh 
also  UHual  for  the  mother  to  save  all  hairH  combed  out  of  the  girl,  and  twist  them  into 
cords,  which  wore  then  tij^htly  tied  round  the  waist  and  ankles,  and  left  there  till  they 
fell  to  pieces  of  themselves.  This  was  supposed  to  give  a  fine  shape  to  the  body.  In 
eating,  the  girl  must  always  sit  down  to  jirovent  a  too  great  corpulence.  If  orphaned, 
tie  various  ceremonies  must  l>('  again  performed  by  the  girl,  even  though  already 
atleudod  to.* 

If  the  parents  were  rich  or  iiniwrtaut  people,  on  releasing  the  girl  a 
great  feast  was  given  by  the  relatives  in  her  honor  by  way  of  bringing 
her  out  or  making  her  tl6but. 

Bringing  out. — On  the  occasion  of  the  feast  or  ceremony  celebrating 
the  release  of  a  girl  from  her  seclusion,  she  was  richly  dressed  (formerly 
in  sea-otter  skins)  and  the  garments  worn  during  her  restriction  burned 
up  or  otherwise  destroyed.  As  a  rule  this  cereniony  was  accompanied 
with  more  or  less  theatrical  ettect,  in  that  the  girl  was  seated  on  a  divau 
surrounded  by  borrowed  wealth,  and  a  curtain  arranged  to  be  removed 
at  a  given  signal.    Dawson  says : 

Among  the  Tsimshiau  pec.tlinr  ceremonies  exist  in  connection  with  the  "  bringing 
out"  of  young  women,  and  it  is  the  occasion  of  public  feasting.  In  case  of  a  j'oiing 
woman,  the  people  being  all  collected,  a  curtain  is  raiseil,  and  she  is  seen  silting  with 
her  back  to  the  spectators,  p(!culiarly  dressed,  and  surrounded  by  a  circle  of  uitright 
"cojipers,"  if  enough  can  bo  mustered.  She  then  begins  to  sing,  or  if  she  does  not, 
an  old  woman  begins  to  sing  near  her,  and  she  becoming  encouraged  joins.  The  old 
woman  then  graduiilly  drops  her  voice  till  the  novice  is  singing  alone.  She  then 
eventually  makes  a  dance  before  all  the  people.  The  songs  and  dances  are  practised 
before  the  time  for  the  rite  arrives.  Similar  customs  probably  exist  among  the 
Haidas,  though  I  di<l  not  learn  any  detail  concerning  th(Mn.t 

A  girl  being  thus  launched  forth  into  the  social  life  of  the  commu- 
nity became  eligible  for  marriage.  In  the  genenil  idea  we  see  the  be- 
ginnings of  similar  customs  with  which  wc  are  familiar  in  our  own  more 
complex  social  organization. 

Self-naming — Among  the  Tlingit  and  Tsimshian  a  child  receives  (I) 
a  birth  name,  (2)  an  ancestral  name,  (3)  one  other  name  as  here  ex- 
plained, and  (4)  possibly  a  name  late  in  life  when  a  chief  has  a  son 
who  becomes  distinguished,  and  a  name  is  bestowed  on  the  former  im- 
plying that  he  is  the  father  of  this  distinguished  sou.  Among  the 
Haida  two  names  ai'e  bestowed  other  than  the  Urst  and  second  as  above, 
one  each  on  two  occasions  when  a  youth  undergoes  the  preliminary  tat- 
tooing. On  the  third  and  final  tattooing  the  youth  himself  assumes  a 
fifth  name  after  due  ceremonies. 

It  is  of  this  self  assumed  name,  the  third  amongst  the  Tlingit  and 
Tsimshian  and  fifth  amongst  the  Haida,  that  we  shall  here  speak.    As 


n 
I 


'ii 


I 


I' 


'  Dawson,  Report,  p.  130,  B. 


t/Wd.,  p.  131. 


372 


KEPORT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  18S«, 


a  yovubli  of  good  family  approaches  man's  estate  it  becomes  bis  duty  to 
accumulate  all  the  property  possible,  aud,  with  the  help  aud  material 
coQtribulioasof  his  mother's  people,  to  make  a  grand  feast  and  potlatch 
from  his  own  house.  Practically  it  is  simply  a  house  building  <'  bee,"  iu 
which  the  young  man  erects  his  carved  column  aud  the  rafters  of  his 
house,  takes  on  himself  the  name  oi  an  ancestor  (usually  maternal) ; 
aud  becomes  a  petty  chief  or  man  of  iutiuence  in  the  village.  It  is  on 
this  occasion  that  the  tattooing  of  the  young  Haida  is  finished  and 
when  the  aspirant  for  honors  drinks  down  the  oil  from  the  great  wooden 
spoon  as  '/nown  in  Fig  27  and  Plate  Li.  These  ceremonies  are  no- 
where accurately  described,  aud  the  writer  gathered  but  a  meagre  out- 
line of  them  at  Port  Simpson,  British  Columbia.  The  significance  of 
the  affair  is  similar  to  that  of  the  "bringing  out"  of  girls,  in  that  it 
marks  the  arrival  of  the  youth  at  man's  estate.  At  the  conclusion 'of 
the  grand  feast  and  potlatch,  the  young  man  is  known  by  his  newly 
adopted  name. 

-  Chieftaincy — Oh>  :,f.;aincy  is  to  a  certain  extent  hereditary,  but  as  it  de- 
pends upon  weatcl'.,  any  freeman  who  can  accumulate  property  may,  by 
erecting  a  house  aud  giving  potlatches  and  feasts  in  honor  of  his  ances- 
tors, come  finally  to  be  the  head  of  a  household  and  be  regarded  as  a 
petty  chief  or  one  of  the  priuciiial  men  of  the  village.  Good  birth  and 
wealthy  aud  influential  family  connections  are  the  first  requisites  of  an 
aspirant  for  the  highest  rank.  To  be  a  petty  chief  in  the  village  a  man 
must  practically  be  at  the  head  of  a  household,  heuce  the  necessity  for 
building  a  house  aud  for  marrying.  To  build  a  bouse  the  united  labor 
of  many  people  is  required,  hence  the  housebuilding  "bees."  To  re- 
ward those  who  participate  and  to  gain  the  good  will  of  others,  feasts 
must  be  given  and  presents  distriouted ;  hence  the  potlatch.  To  retain 
the  respect  and  esteem  of  others  these  feasts  and  potlatches  must  be  re- 
peated at  intervals.  By  an  alliance  with  medicine  men,  whose  influence 
is  purchasable,  various  deceits  aud  tricks  may  be  resorted  to  iu  order 
to  impose  on  the  credulity  of  the  vulgar  herd  and  increase  the  respect 
they  have  for  the  rank  and  power  of  tlie  aspirant  for  honors.  In  order 
to  strengthen  this  feeling  of  respect  it  is  necessary  to  brush  up  the  coat- 
of-arms,  so  to  8i)eak,  and  give  a  grand  feast  in  l»onor  of  some  departed 
ancestor.  This  is  called  "  glorifying  the  (lead,"  and  nu»  v  take  place  a 
tew  yeart:  after  the  decease  of  the  relatives  or  many  years  afterwards. 
Finally,  by  dint  of  giving  feasts,  potlatches,  and  "  bees;"  by  intrigue, 
display,  and  prowess ;  by  push,  energy,  and  enterprise,  tht  aspirant 
finds  himself  in  the  front  rank  of  the  chiefs,  a  respected  and  influential 
eider  in  the  village. 

Glorification  <./  the  dead.— In  Chapter  Xii  the  mortuary  customs  of 
the  different  tribes  of  this  region  were  discussed.  On  the  death  of  a 
chief,  or  other  very  important  personage,  the  body,  after  lying  in  slat/c 
for  a  year  or  more,  is  tiiii'Jlv  interred  with  great  cercrnoiiy,  or,  as  amongNt 
the  northern  Tlingit,  burne<l  on  a  funeral  pyre.    It  then  devolves  upou 


THE    INDIANS    OF    THE    NOUTHWKST    COAST. 


373 


the  brother  or  otlier  relati  ve  to  whom  the  estate  of  tlie  deceasad  has 
come  tlowii  to  erect  a  ca;  veil  mortuary  column  in  front  of  his  house, 
and  give  a  grand  feast  am  I  potlatch  to  glorify  the  dead.  This  is  by  far 
the  most  elaborate  and  important  ceremonial  of  these  Indians.  The 
carved  columns  are  showu  in  Plate  LXix,  and  in  Pigs.  1,  179,  294,  344, 
and  345,  as  well  as  in  Plates  i  and  ii  in  the  general  views  of  Kasa-an 
village.  These  are  carved  usually  by  one  of  the  experts  of  the  village, 
and,  although  less  costly  than  the  large  colunjns,  ate  quite  expensive. 
The  time  being  set  for  the  ceremony,  guests  are  invited  from  far  and 
near  and  entertained  by  the  host  and  his  relatives.  The  monumental 
column  is  erected,  and  at  the  feast  which  follows  speaches  are  made 
extolling  the  virtues  of  the  departed,  but  dwelling  particularly  upon 
those  of  the  giver  of  the  feast.  Although  the  latter  practically  squan- 
ders his  substance  in  thus  entertaining  his  visitors,  he  feels  well  repaid 
in  receiving  their  expressions  of  approval  and  high  esteem.  Gambling, 
feasting,  and  dancing  occupy,  as  in  all  such  gatherings,  the  leisure 
time  not  devoted  ^o  the  work  or  entertainmer.t  in  hand. 

Summary. — In  these  mitiatory  or  comnu  morative  ceremonies  we  see 
the  gradual  uleutification  of  the  individual  with  his  totem  arul  thecele- 
bration.of  the  different  steps  in  the  progress  of  the  child  from  birth  to 
womanhood  and  nmnhood  and  in  commemoration  after  death.  The 
initiatory  ceremonies  of  medicine  raenandof  the  four  religious  orders  of 
the  Tsimshian  are  reserved  for  a  special  chapter,  which  will  not  appear 
with  this  paper,  being  withheld,  with  several  others,  on  account  of  the 
incompleteness  of  the  data,  and  the  hope  on  the  part  of  the  writer  that 
the  task  will  be  nndertaken  by  some  organized  department  of  the  Gov- 
ernment.   (See  Synopsis  of  Contents.) 


I 


II.— Festive  ceremonies. 

In  the  exchange  of  "jcial  amenities  and  in  the  round  of  ceremonial 
gatherings  which  ^ake  place  as  just  described  there  are  many  forms  of 
etiquette  to  l>o  observed.  In  one  sense  these  are  not  rigid,  but  are, 
however,  sufficiently  uniform  in  their  character  to  admit  of  classitica- 
tion  and  description. 

Welcome. — These  Indians  welcomed  ll?  arrival  of  the  early  European 
navigators  and  traders  by  paddling  their  canoes  several  times  around 
tb"!  ship,  making  long  speeches,  scattering  bini's  down  and  singing. 
The  significance  of  bird's  down  has  been  alliuled  to  as  an  emblem  of 
friendship  and  p'>ace  in  Chapter  ix.  Two  parties  of  Indians  meeting 
in  canoes  exchange  civilities  very  impassively  by  talking  or  shouting 
out.  Poole  (1807)  describes  tiie  meeting  of  two  friendly  canoe  parties 
which  hi»d  been  separated  liy  stress  of  weather  and  each  believed  the 
others  to  have  been  lost.  They  danced  in  a  circle  together,  the  two 
chiefs  epr>eriug  about  madly  while  the  iiir  rang  with  shoots.*    The  cere- 

•  Poole,  Qtieen  Chariot  to  Islauils,  p.  279. 


I 


374 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL    MUSEUM,  1888. 


mony  ttf  welcome  at  a  village  is  reDdered  practically  iu  the  assistance 
which  they  lend  in  helping  to  unload  and  haul  up  the  canoe  of  the  vis- 
itors. Official  ceremonies  of  welcome  to  guests  by  a  chief  consists  in 
the  reception  of  the  visitors  in  state  in  his  house  or  lodge.  To  make  it 
impressive  lit>  sits  cross-legged  on  the  ledge  or  platform,  surrounded  by 
his  friends  and  relatives,  who  squat  about.  On  the  arrival  of  the  guests 
the  chief  delivers  a  long  speech,  interspersed  with  sudden  outbursts 
and  grunts  of  approval  by  his  people.  After  that  an  exchange  of  pres- 
ents takes  place  and  a  feast  or  dance  is  given  in  honor  of  the  visftc?-8 
When  a  party  of  friendly  Indians  arrive  at  a  villag>3  the  chief  rtic  -•• 
them  in  a  dance  ceremony  performed  by  himself.  Their  ca/cs  v. 
hauled  up  on  the  beach  by  the  villagers,  but  the  chief  does  not  come 
down  to  meet  thorn.  He  stinds  near  the  fire  in  the  back  of  the  house 
dressed  as  in  Plate  ix,  with  the  top  of  his  head-dress  tilled  with  swan's 
down.  As  the  visitors  enter,  the  ;"°ople  sitting  about  the  fire  break 
forth  into  a  song,  accompanied  by  a  drum,  and  the  chief  makes  his  pas 
seul,  scattering  the  down,  filling  the  air,  and  covering  the  spectators. 
In  the  case  of  an  Indian  arriving  at  a  strauge  village,  he  goes  co  the 
house  of  one  of  his  totem  as  indicated  by  its  totemic  column.  The 
owner  comes  our  to  welcome  him,  and  if  he  likes  makes  a  dance  and  a 
feast  in  honor  of  his  visitors.  Guests  arriving  to  take  part  in  some  gen- 
eral ceremony  are  entertained  by  the  relatives  of  the  host  and  of  his 
wife. 

Trade. — ^The  ceremonies  attending  trading  in  the  early  days  of  the 
intercourse  of  the  Europeans  and  Indians  have  been  described  in  Ohaj) 
ter  viir.  They  really  differed  little  from  the  general  ceremonies  or  t'p' 
come,  but  were  intended  to  impress  the  visitors  with  a  due  sense  ot  the 
rank  and  importance  of  the  head  of  the  household.  The  time  thus 
spent  by  the  Indians  in  dancing,  singing,  etc.,  was  a  source  of  gr^at  an- 
noyance to  the  traders,  who  were  generally  eager  to  transact  their  busi- 
ness and  seek  other  villages  while  the  gooil  season  lasted. 

Homebuilding. — In  Chapter  vi,  under  the  head  of  " Haida  perma- 
nent dwellings,"  the  i>roces8  of  erectiu"-  a  house  is  described  in  detail. 
Through  the  kindness  of  Mr,  Ilenry  Elliott  we  have  iu  Plate  LXX  a?» 
excellent  sketch,  made  at  Fort  Simpson,  British  Columbia,  in  Octoh'- 
1866,  illustrating  a  house-raising  by  a  party  of  Haida  who  had  securoti 
permission  from  the  Tsimshian  Indians  to  erect  it  near  their  village  for 
the  accommodation  of  visiting  Haida.  This  spirited  shetch  by  Mr.  El- 
liott has  remained  in  his  portfolio  for  fcweMt.v  t.vo  sours,  and  is  nov 
published  for  the  first  time.  The  immense  t:  ze  of  the  .  ins  and  planV.s 
used  necessitates  the  co-operufcion  of  many  individuals,  and  the  occa- 
sion of  their  gathering  from  other  villages  is  made  as  enjoyable  as  pos- 
sible. The  great  labor  and  expense  involved  requires  the  whole  proc- 
ess to  exten<l  over  a  periml  of  several  years.  The  cutting  and  rough- 
ing out  of  the  timbers  in  the  forest,  the  launching  of  these  and  towing 
to  the  village,  the  carving  of  the  totemic  column  and  supports  for  the 


iu 


stance 
he  vis- 
lists  in 
iiake  it 
(led  by 
I  guests 
tbursts 
af  pres- 
visiters, 
■?c.    '  ■  ■* 

3t  cume 
e  house 
I  swan's 
•e  bleak 
1  his  pas 
ictators. 
;s  CO  the 
lU.  The 
ce  and  a 
amegeu- 
d  of  his 

y»  of  the 
in  Chap 
s  01  "^e'- 
ise  ot  the 
ime  thus 
gr^iatan- 
lieir  busi- 

a  perma- 
in  detail. 
B  LXX  a!» 
I  Octof  ' ' 
d  secure! . 
pillage  for 
)y  Mr.  El- 
id  is  nov 
nd  planV.s 
the  occa- 
ble  as  p08- 
hole  prof- 
md  rough- 
,nd  towing 
irts  for  the 


Re 


EXPLANATION    OF    PLATE    LXX. 

A  Band  of  Haida  erecting  a  House  at  the  Tsimshian  Village  of  Port  Simpson, 
British  Columbia,  in  October,  1866. 

From  a  sketch  by  Mr.  Henry  W.  Elliott. 


The  scene  is  that  of  the  co-oi)erative  buiklins  of  a  liouse.  a  banil  of  howling,  yell- 
ing, half-naked  Haida  being  >igaged  in  hauling  up  a  huge  rafter  on  skids  by  means 
of  ropes  of  spruce-root  or  twisted  cedar-bark.  T!ie  canoes  on  the  beach,  and  the 
village  in  the  distance,  lend  to  it  the  characteristic  features  of  a  view  in  this  region. 


Report  of  National  Museum.  1888.— Niblack 


Plate  LXX. 


)N, 


yell- 
leans 
I  tlie 
Kum. 


ID 

00 


a: 
tu 
CO 
O 
h- 
o 
O 


< 
z 

3 
-I 

o 
o 

I 

U5 

H 
(£ 

CO 

z 

o 

U3 

a. 
S 

03 


O 
0. 


< 


z 
< 

X 
to 

oj 

H 
u 

I 
I- 

I- 
< 

o 

I 


o 

z 


< 

< 

I 


o 
z 
< 


■l!!liLLJ-.LUl!XU^- 


i-!- 


I   . 


% 


h 


THE   INDIANS   OF   THE   NOR'^PWEST  COAST. 


375 


^ 


huge  beain8  or  ratters,  aud  their  final  erection  into  the  frame  work  of  a 
house,  all  require  not  only  the  expenditute  of  much  time  aud  labor,  but 
a  very  extensive  outlay  of  wealth.  The  gathering  is  an  occasion  of 
much  ceremony,  but  the  work  in  hand,  conducted  always  with  dire  con- 
fusion, shouting,  and  yelling,  occupies  but  a  small  portion  of  the  time, 
tlie  remainder  being  filled  in  with  gambling,  feasting,  dancing,  speech- 
making,  and  dissipations  of  various  kinds.  Formerly  iue  custom  ob- 
tained of  killing  several  slaves  when  a  person  of  consequence  built  a 
house,  the  victims  being  selected  sometime  before  the  ceremony.  Tlie 
bodies  of  those  .slain  were  accorded  the  right  of  burial,  and  in  this  much 
were  deemed  very  fortunate.    Petroft"  says : 

If  an  intended  victim  managed  to  escape  or  to  conceal  himself  he  was  allowed  to 
live,  and  might  return  after  the  conclnsiou  of  the  festivities  at  the  house  of  his  m<iater 
without  incurring  punishment.  It  frequently  occurred  that  powerful  chiefs  assisted 
favorite  slaves  on  such  occasions  to  make  their  escape.'- 

After  the  house  has  been  finished  all  these  ceremonies  take  place 
therein.  The  dancers  paint  their  faces,  and,  attired  in  their  best,  go 
througii  with  a  dance  lasting  an  hour  or  so.  Amongst  the  Haida  the 
dancers  are  the  relatives  of  the  host's  "rife.  At  its  conclusion  speeches 
are  made  (and  formerly  the  shaves  sacrificed)  and  the  potlatch  takes 
l>lace,  the  host  presiding.    After  that  they  disperse. 

Potlatohes. — The  potlatch,  as  entering  into  other  ceremonies,  has  been 
described  in  the  first  part  of  this  chapter.  It  is  the  accompaniment  of 
every  gathering  designed  to  elevate  the  host  in  the  good  will  of  the 
community  and  advance  him  in  rank  by  increasing  the  respect  felt  for 
him  in  his  own  and  other  villages.  The  potlatch  in  itself  as  a  separate 
ceremony  is,  however,  practiced.  Invitations  to  it  are  sent  out  as  for 
other  gatherings.  Usually  they  are  given  by  chiefs  or  persons  of 
wealth  well-established  in  the  community.    According  to  Dawson, 

Kiich  chief  with  the  Tsinishians  had  also  [in  former  days]  his  jester,  who  is  sent  on 
errands  of  invitation,  announces  the  guests  on  their  arrival,  and  makes  jokes  and 
endeavors  to  amuse  the  company,  though  preserving  his  own  gravity.  The  jester  is 
not,  of  course,  always  in  attendance.  He  receives  nothing  for  his  trouble,  appar- 
ently looking  on  the  position  as  honorable,  and  inherits  nothing  on  the  chief's  death. t 

Tlie  object  of  the  potlatch  thus  given  as  a  separate  ceremony  is  to 
strengthen  the  giver's  position  in  the  community  and  to  increase  his 
reputation  at  home  and  abroad. 

(Jerenionial  dances. — Sufficient  data  is  not  at  hand  to  classify  the  vari- 
ous dances  of  the  northern  Indians  of  this  region.  The  weight  of  evi- 
dence seems  to  be  that  amongst  the  Haida  the  Tsimshian  language  is 
used  in  the  songs  jiccompanying  their  dances,  and  that  in  all  probability 
most  of  the  religious  and  winter-dance  ceremonials  of  the  Haida  were 
originally  borrowed  from  their  Tsimshian  neighbors.  Little  is  known 
on  this  subject,  and  it  presents  a  most  interesting  field  for  future 
investigation,  particularly  in  the  relation  of  these  to  the  winter  dances 
of  the  Kwakiutl  and  other  southern  tribes. 


Petroff,  Report,  p.  172. 


t  Dawson,  Report,  B,  p.  120. 


376 


REPORT   OF    NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


It; 


Vultm  fiances. — This  is  a  term  usually  applied  to  dances  carried  on 
without  any  apparent  motive  other  than  amusement  in  imitation  of  the 
actions  during  the  greater  festivities,  possibly,  however,  as  much  for 
l)ractice  as  anything  else. 

Theatricals. — Portlock  (1787)  gives  an  interesting  account  of  the  cere- 
monies of  the  Tlingit  with  whom  he  traded.  After  an  elaborate  enter- 
tainment of  welcome  by  singing  and  dancing  in  the  cauoes  alongside 
the  Indians  adjourned  ashore,  and  returning  again  began  their  song. 

This  tiino.  by  wiiy  of  varying  our  ainuHemeiit,  the  chief  appeared  iu  different 
charncterN  during  the  time  his  people  were  Hinging,  and  always  changed  his  dress 
when  he  A'aried  his  character,  in  doing  of  which  some  of  his  companiuns  held  np  a 
a  large  mat,  by  way  of  a  screen,  to  prevent  us  from  seeing  what  was  going  on  behind 
the  curtain.  At  one  time  he  appeared  in  the  character  of  a  warrior,  and  seemed  to 
have  all  the  savage  ferocity  of  the  Indian  conqueror  about  him.  He  showed  us  the 
manner  in  which  they  attacked  their  enemies,  their  method  of  lighting,  and  their  be- 
haviour to  the  vanquished  enemy.  He  next  assumed  the  character  of  a  womap,  and 
to  make  his  imitation  more  complete  he  wore  a  uiiisk,  which  represented  a  woman's 
face  with  their  usual  ornamentn;  and  indeed  it  so  exactly  resembled  a  woman's  face 
that  I  am  pretty  certain  it  was  beyond  the  reach  of  Indian  art,  and  must  certainly 
have  been  left  by  the  Spaniards  iu  their  last  visit  to  this  part  of  the  coast.* 

The  type  of  mask  referred  to  is  shown  in  Fig.  5G,  Plate  xvi,  and  in 
spite  of  Portlock's  doubts  is  a  veritable  product  of  Indian  art. 
Dunn  says  of  thb  KwakiutI : 

In  the  winter  months  these,  as  well  as  the  neighbouring  tribes,  assemble  in  great 
numbers  in  the  chief's  house  for  the  purpose  of  witnessing  the  chief  imitate  different 
spirits,  whom  they  are  supposed  to  worship.  He  puts  on  at  intervals  different 
dresses  and  large  masks  of  different  kinds,  entirely  covering  his  head  and  neck. 
The  masks  are  made  to  open  at  the  mouth  and  eyes  by  means  of  secret  springs,  invisi- 
ble to  the  spectators  and  different  noises  are  seat  forth.  He  dresses  for  each  char- 
acter behind  a  large  curtain,  drawn  quite  across  the  room,  like  the  drop  curtain  iu  a 
theatre,  and  then  comes  forth  aad  stands  on  a  sort  of  stage  in  front  of  it,  while  the 
spectators  are  ranged  on  beaches  placed  along  the  side  walls.  In  one  of  the  charac- 
ters he  imitates  the  risin'/  sun,  which  they  believe  to  be  a  shining  man,  wearing  a 
radiated  crown,  and  coi.tiuually  walking  round  the  earth,  which  is  stationary.  He 
wears  on  this  occasion  a  most  splendid  dress  of  ermine  and  other  valuable  furs,  and 
a  curiously  constructed  mask,  set  round  with  seals'  whiskers,  and  feathers  which 
gradually  expand  like  a  fan,  and  from  the  top  of  the  mask  swan-down  is  shaken  out 
in  great  quantities,  according  as  he  moves  his  head.  The  expanding  seals'  bristles 
and  feathers  represent  the  sun's  rays,  and  the  showers  of  down,  rain  and  snow;  the 
Indians  chanting  at  the  same  time  in  regular  order  and  in  a  low  key  showing  rev- 
erence, devotion,  and  awe.  •  •  *  Sometimes  the  various  divine  personages  are 
represented  by  one  man;  sometimes  there  are  two  or  three  personatoi-s  on  the  stage 
all  at  once,  representing  different  divinities.! 

In  Plate  Lxvii  are  shown  some  of  the  masks  belonging  as  personal 
properties  to  the  late  Kaigaui  chief  Skowl.  In  the  boxes  are  the  cere- 
monial vestments  worn  on  occasions.  In  Plate  Lxviii  are  two  views  of 
the  paraphernalia  belonging  to  Chief  Shakes  of  Fort  Wrangell  (Tlingit), 
the  upper  one,  Fig.  353,  reprtsenting  the  body  of  the  late  chief  lying 
in  state,  and  the  lower.  Fig.  354,  a  theatrical  group  repr-'  juting  a  legend 

*  Portlock,  Voyage,  p.  283. 
tDunn,  Oregon  (1842),  pp.  253,  254. 


\ 


i 


THE   INDIANS   OP    THE   NORTHWEST   COAST. 


377 


tracing  the  «leaceiit  of  Chief  Shakes  from  the  b-ar.  AmougHt  the 
Tliiigit,  Haidn,  anil  Tsiiushian  tlieso  theatrical  e.utertaiiinieiits  ar<^  alstt 
given  by  the  chiefs,  but  liave  more  of  a  toteiiiic  than  a  religious  sig- 
nificance, as  in  tlie  soutli.  It  was  formerly  and  is  now  somewhat  the 
custom  in  the  more  out  of  the  way  villages  for  each  chief  to  have  a 
helper  or  principal  man,  who  enjoys  the  contidenco  of  the  chief,  has 
considerable  iiuthority,  gives  advice  and  instruction  to  the  chief's 
successor,  and  has  the  care  and  keeping  of  certain  secrets  and  prop- 
erties belonging  to  the  chief.  These  last  iluties  pertain  largely  to 
assistance  rendered  in  the  production  of  the  theatrical  representations 
of  tl?e  traditions  and  legends  relating  to  the  chief's  totem.  On  such 
occasions,  the  guests  being  assembled,  the  chief  presides,  while  the  prin- 
cipal man  directs  the  entertainment.  Fig.  354  represents  a  scene  taken 
from  a  representation  witnessed  by  the  writer  at  (Jhief  Shakes's,  Fort 
Wrangell,  Alaska.  The  tigure  of  the  bear  is  a  mannikin  of  a  grizzly 
with  a  man  inside  of  it.  The  skin  was  obtained  up  the  Stikine  Biver, 
in  the  mountains  of  the  interior,  and  has  been  an  heirloom  in  Shakes's 
family  for  several  generations.  The  eyes,  li|)s,  ear  lining,  and  paws  are 
of  copper,  and  the  jaws  are  capable  of  being  worked.  A  curtain  screen 
in  one  corner  being  dropped,  the  singing  of  a  chorus  suddenly  ceased, 
and  the  principal  man,  dressed  as  shown,  with  baton  in  his  hand,  nar- 
rated in  a  set  speech  the  story  of  how  an  ancestor  of  Shakes's  rescued 
the  bear  from  drowning  in  the  great  Hood  of  years  ago,  and  how  ever 
since  there  had  been  an  alliance  between  Shakes's  descendants  and  the 
bear.  This  narration,  lasting  some  ten  minutes,  was  interrupted  by 
frequent  nods  of  approval  by  the  bear  when  appealed  to,  and  by  the 
murmurs  and  applause  of  the  audience. 

In  these  various  representations  all  sorts  of  tricks  are  practised 
to  impose  on  the  credulous  and  to  lend  solemnity  and  reality  to  the 
narration  of  the  toteraicj  legends.  The  masks  shown  in  Plate  Lxvii  are 
those  worn  by  the  ditt'ereut  characters  in  the  entertainments  offered  by 
Chief  Skowl. 


\ 


a 


!:i 


XTV. 

GENERAL  CHARACTER  OF  TRADITIONS,  MTTHS,  AND  FOLKLORE- 
BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

The  traditions  and  myths  of  the  northern  ^roup  of  tue  northwest 
coast  (Tlingit,  Haida,  and  Tsiinshian)  are  very  similar,  but  witli  pecul- 
iar local  variations.  No  attempt  can  be  made  here  other  than  to  out- 
line the  principal  tradition  of  the  creation  and  of  the  origin  of  man, 
and  that  only  to  illustrate  the  general  character  of  their  beliefs  and 
ideas.  In  their  legends  and  traditions  we  have  the  unconscious  ex- 
pression of  their  religious,  moral,  and  testhetic  ideas,  their  views  of  life 
and  death,  their  cosmogony  and  astrology,  their  fanciful  biv'^raphies 
and  history,  and  their  explanations  of  all  the  phenomena  of  nature. 
Kelated  around  the  log  tire  in  the  family  circle,  with  loud  and  confident 
voice,  with  labored  and  dramatic  imitations  and  gestures,  and  listened 
to  with  wrapt  attention  by  the  inmates  cf  the  lodge,  they  represent  the 
history  of  human  thought — the  blind  gropings  of  the  mind  to  know — 
in  this  narrow  pocket  of  the  world,  and  as  such  are  as  worthy  of  care- 
ful compilation  and  study  as  if  they  were  facts  of  veritable  history. 

The  creator  of  all  things  and  the  benefactor  of  man  was  the  great 
raven  called  by  the  Tlingit  Yetl,  YeshI,  or  Yeatl,  and  by  the  Haida  Ne- 
kilfitla^.  He  was  not  exactly  an  ordinary  bird,  but,  like  all  old  Indian 
mythical  characters,  hjid  many  human  attributes,  and  the  power  of 
transforming  himself  into  anything  in  the  world.  His  coat  of  feathers 
could  be  put  on  or  taken  ott"  at  will  like  a  garment,  and  he  could  as- 
sume any  character  whatever.  He  existed  before  his  birth,  never 
grows  ohl,  will  never  die.  Numerous  are  the  stories  of  his  adventures 
in  peopling  the  world  and  giving  to  man  the  earth,  lire,  fresh  water,  life, 
lish,  game,  etc.  According  to  the  Haida  and  Kaigani  the  first  people 
sprung  from  a  cockleshell  {Cardium  corbis,  Mart).  Nckil-sflas  became 
very  lonely  and  began  to  look  about  him  for  a  mate,  but  could  lind 
none.  At  last  he  took  a  cockle  shell  from  the  beach,  and  marrying  it, 
he  still  continued  to  brood  and  think  earnestly  of  his  wish  for  a  com- 
])anion.  By  and  by  he  heard  a  faint  cry  in  the  shell,  which  gradually 
became  louder  till  at  last  a  little  female  child  was  seen,  which  by  de- 
grees grew  to  be  a  woman  and  married  the  raven.  From  this  union 
came  all  the  Indians  of  this  region,  wiio  at  first  lived  in  darkness  and 
want.  As  they  multiplied  Yetl  or  Ne-Jcilstlas  endowed  them  with  the 
various  gifts  of  light,  fresh  water,  fire,  etc.  All  these  were  in  the  pos- 
378 


THE    INDIANS   OP   THE   NORTHWEST    rOAST, 


379 


session  of  tbe  chief  evil  spirit,  a  great  chief,  tiie  uncle  of  Yetl,  who 
lived  on  the  mainland  where  the  Nass  river  now  is.    He  was  master  of 
the  tides  and  had  great  power,  and  the  stories  of  how  Yefl  circnmvented 
him  are  nnmerous  and  interesting.    The  Haida  name  for  this  nncle  is 
Setlm-ki-jash,  the  Tlingit  designation   being  Kees-dujealittf  Kali  or 
Keennhusaah  Anicow.     Ue  had  a  wife  and  sister,  or  according  to  some 
versions  a  wife  and  daughter.    Of  his  wife  he  was  very  jealous,  and 
whenever  for  any  reason  ho  was  away  from  home,  hunting,  fishing,  or 
working,  he  imprisoned  her  in  a  box  or  basket,  and  tied  her  up  to  the 
rafters  in  the  lodge,  setting  a  number  of  little  red  birds  to  watch  her. 
If  by  any  chance  the  box  were  opened  the  birds  would  fly  to  him  and 
warn  him.    He  was  also  very  jealous  of  the  posterity  of  his  sister  (or 
daughter),  whose  children  ho  killed  for  fear  that  when  they  grew  up 
they  would  prove  rivals  to  him  in  his  wife's  att'ectlous.*     According  to 
the  Haida  tradition,  he  threw  her  progeny  into  the  tire;  according  to 
the  -Tlingit,  he  drowned  them.    This  sister  (or  daughter)  was  not  al- 
lowed to  eat  or  drink  anything  until  the  chief  had  examined  it,  as  she 
had  become  pregnant  from  eating  certain  things  many  times  before. 
As  every  part  of  the  house  was  so  jealously  guarded,  Yetl  or  Ne  kil- 
atlas  did  not  know  how  to    get  in    to  steal    the  various   things  he 
wanted  for  the  good  of  man,  but  finally  he  hit  upon   the  plan  of 
being    born    into    the    fiimilj'.     One   day    he   saw    the    sister   (or 
daughter)  go  to  the  brook  to  get  a  drink,  so  transforming  himself 
into  a  drop  of  water  (or  spear  of  cedar  or  blade  of  grass),  he  eluded 
the    vigilance    of   the  chief  and   was   swallowed  by   the   girl,   and 
in  due  time  Yetl  was  born  to  her  as  a  sou.t    She  concealed  the  fact  of 
his  birth  from  the  chief  for  some  little  time.     In  ten  days'  time  he  grew 
to  almost  man's  size.    His  mother  taaght  him  many  things,  amongst 
others  the  use  of  the  bow  and  arrow,  and  he  became  an  expert  shot. 
With  his  arrow  he  killed  the  magical  crane  whose  skin  «nabled  the 
wearer  to  fly,  and  the  diver  with  whose  skin  he  could  fl    /.     One  day 
the  chief  discovered  Yetl  and  pretended  to  be  i)lea8ed  witti  him,  but  ho 
took  him  out  in  a  canoe  and  throw  him  overl)oard.     Yetl,  having  on 
"his  diver's  skin,  walked  along  the  bottom  and  met  his  uncle  on  shore. 
Xext  the  chief  threw  him  into  the  fire  and  piled  logs  on  him,  but  hav- 
ing on  a  magic  cloak  he  came  out  of  the  fire  unharmed.    One  day  when 
the  chief  was  away,  he  opened  the  box  in  which  his  wife  was  confined 
and  released  her,  but  the  little  birds  ttew  to  him  and  informed  him. 
The  chief  returned  in  a  great  rage,  but  Yetl  sat  calmly  without  noticing 
him.    This  was  too  much  for  the  master  of  the  tides,  so  he  co:»imanded 
the  floods  to  rise  and  destroy  this  impudent  meddler,  but  Yetl,  giving 


*  This  is  on  a  parallel  with  the  habits  and  morals  of  these  Indians.  We  have  here, 
as  iu  all  traditions,  an  oxpres-sioii  of  the  moral  ideas  of  tbe  people. 

t  It  is  interestiug  to  note  in  this  conaoctiou  tbe  widespread  belief  both  amoiifj  sav- 
age ami  civilized  peoples  in  the  possibility  of  pre<rnancy  throngh  indiscretion  in 
eating. 


u 


380 


RKPORT   OK   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


his  mother  the  8kin  of  the  diver  to  enable  her  to  swim,  himself  put  on 
the  skin  of  tlie  crane.  The  salt  water  rose  until  it  began  to  come  in  the 
door,  when  the  uhief  put  on  his  tall  dance  hat  which  ma<le  him  amphib- 
ious, and  Yetl  flew  ont  through  the  smoke-hole.  As  he  flew,  he  began 
t^i  tire,  and  was  compelled  to  come  back  from  time  to  time  to  rest  on  the 
chief's  dance  hat,  which  was  the  only  thing  visible,  till  finally  he  gained 
strength  enough  to  fly  to  the  sky,  which  he  pierced  witli  his  beak  and 
hung  to  until  the  tide  reached  to  his  wings,  when  it  began  to  subside. 
Finally  he  let  go  of  bis  hold  and,  flying  for  some  days,  he  lit  on  a  bunch 
of  kelp  .to  rest.  At  this  point  the  story  varies  so  much  in  different 
localities  that  it  is  difficult  to  make  it  at  all  general.  According  to  the 
Kaigani  Yetl  descended  into  the  sea  and  rescued  his  mother  from  the 
lord  of  the  tides ;  according  to  the  Tlingit  a  sea  otter  carried  him  ashore 
from  the  kelp;  according  to  the  Stikine  Indians  he  lit  originally  on  the 
Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  and  picking  up  pieces  of  the  wood  of  t' "i 
Douglas  pine  in  his  bill  he  flew  all  over  the  other  islands,  a,iA  wl 
ever  he  let  fall  a  piece  of  this  wood,  the  Douglas  pine  is  now  fo 
Fresh  water  he  stole  from  the  lord  of  the  tides  by  strategy ;  also  the 
new  moon.  In  the  carved  column  shown  in  Fig.  179,  Plate  xxxv,  one 
of  the  figures  represents  Yetl  with  the  new  moon  in  his  bill  and  tlie  disli 
of  fresh  water  in  his  claws,  in  illustration  of  this  part  of  the  legend. 
He  also  stole  the  sun  and  the  stars  from  the  boxes  in  which  they  were 
imprisoned  by  the  lord  of  the  tides.*  When  the  sun  shone  forth  for 
the  first  time  all  the  people  were  frightened  and  ran  in  all  directions ; 
some  of  them  into  the  mountains,  some  into  the  woods,  and  some  into 
the  water,  and  all  of  these  were  transformed  into  animals  according  to 
their  hiding  place.  Fire  he  obtained  from  an  island  in  the  sea.  He 
reached  there  by  the  help  of  his  magic  bird  skin,  and  seizing  a  burning 
brind  in  his  beak  he  started  back,  but  the  journey  was  so  long  that 
:near!y  all  the  wood  burned  up,  and  even  the  point  of  his  bill  was 
scorched  black  and  he  had  to  let  it  drop.  The  sparks  flew  over  the 
ground  in  all  directions.  From  this  time  both  the  wood  and  stone  con- 
tain fire,  which  can  be  obtained  from  the  one  by  striking  it  and  from 
the  other  by  rubbing.  Endless  are  the  details  of  the  adventures  of 
Yetl,  not  to  mention  the  other  traditions  and  myths  which  no  one  In- 
dian can  ever  learn.  Many  of  them  are  remembered  simply  as  bearing 
on  or  relating  to  the  totem  of  the  individual.  In  general  their  belief 
is  ill  indwelling  spirits.  The  sea,  the  woods,  and  the  air  are  peopled 
with  theni.  All  the  phenomena  of  the  universe  are  attributed  to  their 
action  and  motit  of  the  rites  of  these  Indians  of  a  religious  nature  are  in 
the  direction  of  propitiating  them.  It  is  not  the  purpose  here  to  treat 
of  the  traditions,  mytiis,  and  beliefs  of  the  Indians.  The  subject  is 
worthy  of  special  study  and  :vill  undoubtedly  receive  the  attention  it 
merits. 


*  ThJR  idea  of  different  valuables  being  stored  in  boxes  naturally  arises  from  tUeir 
owu  time-honored  custom  of  storing  things  in  this  way. 


»»* 


THE    INDIANS    OF   THE    N0KTHWE8T   COAST. 


381 


t  on 
the 
bib- 
Kau 
tliu 
ued 
and 
lide. 


The  writer  appends  here  a  bibliography  of  tlie  luythn,  traditions, 
folklore,  and  vocabularies  of  the  Indians  about  Dixon  Entrance,  soutli- 
eru  Alaska  and  northern  British  Columbia.  It  is  iiowevei-  very  in- 
complete, and  only  illustrates  the  poverty  of  {he  literature  ou  these 
snbjects. 

Dall  ( W.  H.),  Alaska  and  itH  Kesonrces,  pp.  421-427.     HoHton,  H7(). 

Petrotr(Tvan),  Report  on  the  Popul.ition,  IndiiHtriuN,  and  Kexoiircos  of  Alaska,  pp. 
172-176.     Washington,  1884. 

The  Glacier,  a  monthly  paper  publishoil  at  the  Tlingit  Training  Academy,  Furt 
Wrangell,  Ahisku. 

The  North  Star,  a  paper  pnbli.shed  at  Sitka,  Alaska,  under  the  editorship  of  Mrs. 
Lily  Paul. 

Dawson  (G.  M.),  Keport  on  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands.  Report  B.  Geological 
Survey  of  Canada  (1878). 

Comparative  Vocabularies  of  the  Indian  Tribes  of  Itrirish  Columbia,  by  W.  Frazer 
Tolmie  and  George  M.  Dawson.    Montreal,  1884. 

Papers  by  Dr.  Franz  Boas  in  Globus,  1888  (a  serie.n  ol"  seven  articles). 

Zeitschrift  fUr  Ethnologie,  188i),  p.  231,  by  Dr.  Frauz  Boas. 


., 


i' 


XV. 

GENERAL  NOTES. 

KELATIONS  AND  AFFINITIES  OP  THE  TLINGIT,  HAIDA,  T8IMSHIAN, 
A.ND  KWAKIUTL— THE  HAIDA.  REMARKS  ON  THE  MAOPI  OF  NEW 
ZEALAND— THE   KAIGANI.      ETHNOLOGICAL   WORK   TO   BE   DONE. 

A.  thorough  study  of  the  ethuical  affinities  aud  mutual  iudueiices  of 
the  various  ludiau  stocks  of  the  northwefeo  coast  is  out  of  th?  questiou 
with  the  data  at  haud,  yet  inauy  attempts  have  beeu  made  to  isolate 
the  Ilaida  aud  to  ffive  them  au  origin  ditfereut  from  tlie  others.  It  is 
held  by  some  that  this  stoclc  is  an  offshoot  of  the  Asiatic  Mongoloid 
group,  particularly  of  the  Japauese  branch,  and  by  others  that  they 
are  of  Aztec  origin.  The  supporter  of  this  latter  theory  is  Mr.  J.  G. 
Swan,  of  Port  Townsend,  Washington  Territory.  A  comparative  study 
of  the  languages,  customs,  habits,  and  traditions  of  the  diflerent  In- 
dian stocks  of  this  region  even  with  the  meagre  data  at  h;>nd,  would, 
however,  seem  to  locate  the  Haida  as  cf  near  kin  to  tlio  Tsimshian  and 
Tliugit.  Difference  in  environment  would  seem  to  account  8ufl3cientl."v 
for  the  physical  aud  linguistic  differences.  Along  with  much  «)rigiuality, 
the  ii'habitants  of  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  have  shown  so  ninch 
genius  aud  receptiveness  in  adapting  aud  adopting  the  customs  of  others, 
that  they  present  some  very  puzzling  affinities  with  distant  stocks,  giving 
color  to  these  various  theories  as  to  thtnr  origin.  In  their  legends  the 
Haida  are  at  one  with  the  Tlingit.  aud  the  totemic  organization  of  tlie 
two  stocks  do  not  differ  very  materially,  although  this  needs  further 
htudy.  Their  languages  are,  according  to  Dr.  Franz  Boas,  very  much 
alike  in  structure,  while  their  vo»;abularies  show  great  differences.  In 
their  arts  the  Haida  have  bornMvod  so  largely  from  so  many  sources, 
that  they  arc  considerably  in  advance  of  the  Tlingit.  All  things  con- 
sidered, the  Tliugit  and  Haida  show  evidences  of  near  relationship  aud 
of  intercourse  at  a  remote  period.  A  consideration  of  the  mutual  influ- 
ences of  the  Tsimshian  stock  and  the  northern  Kwakiutl  tribes  of  the 
Haeltzukan  stock  will  throw  much  light  on  the  origin  of  certain  cus- 
toms amongst  the  Haida,  for  the  last  named  have  been  consideiably 
influenced  by  the  Tsimshian.  Indeed,  the  Tsimshian  seeru  to  have  been 
ilie  middle  men  or  center  of  distribution  in  this  region. 

The  Tlingit  i)re8pnt  the  sin(|)lest  problem.  Contincd  to  tlie  northern 
V)W\  of  this  region  an<l  only  slightly  iuliuenced  by  adjacent  tribew,  their 


< 


k\ 


THE   INDIANS   OF   THE    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


383 


IIAN, 


^1 


Ai 


totemic  organization  into  phratries,  totems,  and  subtoteius,  their 
legends  and  their  matriarchal  orgauizatiou,  all  bear  a  distinct  and  orig- 
inal stamp.  The  Tsimshian,  on  the  other  hand,  have  been  greatly  influ- 
enced by  the  northern  K'vakiutl  tribes,  who  have  been,  by  the  reciproci»l 
influence  of  the  former,  in  turn  drawn  away  from  the  southern  tribes 
of  their  own  stock.  In  the  legends  of  the  Tsimshiau  we  find  much  that 
is  peculiar  to  themselves,  much  in  common  with  those  of  the  Tlingit  and 
Haida,  and  a  good  deal  borrowed  from  the  northern  Kwakiutl.  On  the 
other  hand,  their  totenuc  organization  is  according  to  Boas  a  modifica- 
tion of  that  of  the  Kwakiutl,  and  radici'lly  ditterent  from  that  of  the 
Haida  and  Tlingit.*  The  totems  of  the  Tsimshian  are  the  wolf,  raven, 
eagle,  antl  the  bear,  with  no  phratries ;  those  of  the  Kwakiutl  the  raven, 
eagle,  and  the  bear,  with  no  phratries.  It  may  {wssibly  be  that  the  Haida 
have  been  the  cenii'iJ  of  impulse  on  the  nortiiwest  coast  and  that  ir» 
their  development  they  :nay  have  influenced  the  adjacent  tribes  to  a 
great  degree,  but  the  weight  ol  evidence  is  that,  with  no  great  origi- 
nality in  themselves,  til ey  yet  ]'/resei  t  the  curious  and  puzzling  circum- 
stance that  they  extensively  borrowed  their  ideas  from  the  other  stocks 
but  developed  what  they  lavo  borrowed  with  a  marvelous  skill  and 
independence.  They  seem  ui  themaelves  to  have  typified  or  intensitted 
the  representative  characteristics  of  the  Indian  stocks  of  the  northwest 
coast.  Whether  they  have  originated  or  borrow  cv'  their  ideas  can  not 
be  made  apparent  with  the  data  at  hand,  but  it  may  be  well  to  here 
state  briefly  the  peculiariaes  of  the  Haida  as  they  have  struck  the  writer 
in  their  relation  to  the  otber  Indians  of  the  region. 

Tattooing,  found  hardly  dt  all  amongst  the  <  ther  tribes  and  then 
without  much  importance  attached  to  it,  is  with  them  a  fine  art,  and 
has  both  a  bearing  on  their  totemic  system  and  the  deepest  signifi- 
cance in  their  ceremonies.  The  Tlingit  and  Tsimshian  only  occasion- 
ally etch  the  totemic  figures  on  their  paintei!  'odies  on  ceremonial  occa- 
sions, while  their  neighbors  of  whom  we  i\v~i  speaking  take  every  possi- 
ble occasion  to  display  their  family  cresti*.  The  carved  totemic  columns, 
stuut/cd  and  dwarfed  in  the  south  amongst  the  Kwakiut'  and  also  in 
the  north  amongst  the  Tlingit,  here  become  the  most  elaborate  and 
striking  characteristic  of  the  Indian  village,  so  much  so  that  a  Haida 
settlement  looks  at  a  disf.iuice  like  a  forest  of  stripped,  bare  tree 
trunks.!  The  mortuary  and  «.'ommemorative  columns  are  also  more 
elaborate  here  than  elsewhere,  and  the  memory  of  the  dead  is  celebrated 
in  feast,  legend,  and  carving  with  the  greatest  pomp  and  ostentation. 
The  Cliilkut  l)lankets  pictured  in  Plates  ix  and  x,  and  the  cojiper 
shields  from  the  Chilkat  region  are  nowhere  so  numerouisand  elaborate 
as  in  the  Queen  Oharlotte  Islands.     The  art  of  basket-making,  first 


*  8oi«nce,  vol.  Xil,  No.  im,  p.  195. 

t  HortH  Ih  of  tlip  o|)ini(in  that/  tliM  oarvfid  horaWio  coliiiiiiis  ori)rinatod  nuion^st  the 
Kwiikiutl,  aiul  wert*  inioptoil  ,iu(l  il<iveiop(!il  )im(>Mi;(iV  tlio  Hiviila.  Soieuce,  Vol.  XH, 
(..  UK), 


384 


REPoIlT  OF  NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  1888. 


developed  amongst  the  northern  Tliugit,  has  been  taken  up  by  the 
llaida  with  marked  success.  This  is  true  also  of  metal-working.  The 
conical-shaped  basket-work  hats  so  common  about  Dixon  Entrance  are 
particularly  abundant  in  this  group.  The  primitive  copper  and  shell 
ornaments  were  nowhere  in  such  demand  as  amongst  the  Haida. 
Labrets  of  the  largest  size  are  worn  by  the  Haida  women,  who  are  the 
last  on  the  coast  to  cling  to  this  custom.  The  origin  of  the  tobacco 
plant  in  this  region  is  credited  to  the  Queen  Charlotte  Islands,  ^rhere 
the  first  potatoes  were  also  raised.  While  the  Haida  are  the  most  ex- 
pert canoe  builders  on  the  coast,  they  have  sensibly  adopted  the  Sa- 
lishan  or  Wakashan  type  for  certain  purposes  where  strength  has  been 
the  prime  consideration.  Cedar-bark  mat-making  developed  amongst 
the  Kwakiutl  and  practised  by  the  Tsimshian  is  here  also  successfully 
imitated.  Nowhere  is  the  art  of  carving  and  painting  amongst  savage 
tribes  so  highly  developed.  Their  houses  are  exceptionally  well  con- 
structed, and  the  custom  of  erecting  the  carved  column  in  contact  with 
the  front  of  the  liouse  and  cutting  a  circular  door-way  through  both, 
seems  to  be  nowhere  so  universally  practised.  It  is  in  their  elaborate 
ceremonials  that  the  most  puzzling  instances  of  foreign  influence  occurs. 
The  cedar  bark  rope  head-dresses,  sashes,  and  girdles  amongst  the 
Kwakiutl  play  the  most  important  part  in  their  winter  ceremonial 
dances,  and  are  only  worn  by  certain  people  on  special  occasions  and 
with  special  signiticance.  Amongst  the  Haida  the  cedar-bark  para- 
phernalia is  just  as  elaborate  and  worn  without  any  special  significance. 
The  whistles,  trumpets,  and  other  so-called  musical  instruments  have 
more  of  a  Tsimshian  than  a  Haidaorigin,  bt^iare  found  in  equal  abundance 
and  variety  amongst  both.  The  wearing  of  masks  peculiarly  enough 
has  no  especially  deep  significance  amongst  the  Haida  other  than  re- 
ferring to  and  illustrating  their  totemic  legends,  yet  nowhere  in  the 
world  are  such  elaborate  ones  made  and  worn.  Wooden  masks  are 
worn  by  the  Eskimo  of  southern  Alaska  on  ceremonial  occasions,  but  it 
would  seem  that  the  custom  of  wearing  masks  in  ceremonies  amongst 
the  Haida  and  Tliugit  really  originated  in  the  wearing  of  them  for  pro- 
tection in  war,  and  that  this  custom  was  in  no  way  borrowed  or  derived 
from  the  Eskimo. 

The  number  of  masks  in  the  collections  of  the  U.  S.  National  Museum 
is  out  of  all  proportion  to  their  importance  or  their  use  by  the  Indians. 
There  are  only  one  or  two  ceremonial  dances  in  which  they  are  worn, 
which  is  quite  contrary  to  the  accepted  opinion.  In  most  of  the  songs 
accompanying  the  Haida  dances  the  Tsimshian  language  is  used  and 
many  customs  of  the  Tsimshian  are  avowedly  followed.  In  this  way, 
throngii  the  latter,  probably  some  of  the  practices  of  the  Kwakiutl 
reached  the  Haida.  From  all  this  it  wimld  appear  that  the  latter  have 
been  inttueiu;ed  in  a  not  remote  period  largely  by  others  throngii  the 
Tsimshian,  but  that  the  original  atfinities  and  relationship  of  the  Haida 
were  with  the  Tiingit. 


THE    INDIANS   OF   THP]    NORTHWEST    COAST. 


385 


Many  resemblauces  of  the  Haida  to  widely  remote  stocks  have  been 
pointed  out  by  writers,  but  to  illustrate  how  futile  sucih  clues  are  in 
tracing  the  origin  and  relationship  of  the  tribes  of  the  world,  aparal: 
lei  is  here  briefly  drawn  between  the  Maori  of  Now  Zealand  and  tite 
Haida.  In  point  of  physical  resemblance  both  are  of  the  Mongoloid 
type  and  both  live  on  groups  of  islands  whose  climates  are  remarkably 
similar.  Poole  says  of  the  climate  of  tlie  Queen  Charlotte  Islands  that 
the  most  graphic  comparison  he  could  draw  was  with  that  of  the  north- 
ern island  of  New  Zealand.*  Their  political  organization  of  the  tribe, 
their  ownership  of  land,  and  their  laws  of  blood-revenge  are  similar. 
The  men  tattoo  with  designs  intended  to  identify  them  with  their  sub-tribe 
or  household,  and  they  ornament  their  canoes,  paddles,  house  fronts, 
etc.,  iu  somewhat  the  same  manner  as  on  the  northwest  coast.  In 
Chapter  iv,  p.  267,  under  the  head  of  "Rain  Cloaks,"  Dixon  (1787)  is 
quoted  as  saying  that  the  cloaks  of  the  Haida  and  Tlingit  were  the  same 
as  those  worn  by  the  New  Zealanders.  In  Chapter  vi,  p.  303,  is  also 
quoted  from  Dixon  a  statement  that  a  Haida  fortified  house  on  an  isl- 
and of  the  Queen  Charlotte  group  was  "  built  eMictly  on  the  ])lan  of 
the  hippah  of  the  savages  of  New  Zealand  ;"  and  in  Chapter  \ ,  p.  279, 
that  the  adzes  of  the  Tlingit  and  Haida,  do  of  jasper,  were  "the 
same  as  those  used  by  the  New  Zealanders.  riic  cloaks  of  shredded 
inner  bark  in  the  National  Museum  from  New  Zeiihind  and  the  Queen 
Charlotte  Islands  are  so  much  alike,  that  it  takes  a  dose  inspection  to 
distinguish  them.  In  Plate  xxxii.  Pig.  167,  a  New  Zeahnil  paddle 
reproduced,  with  a  few  from  the  northwest  coast.  The  resemblance 
is  marked  and  interesting.  In  Plate  LV,  Fig.  295,  a  Maori  tikiia  illus- 
trated along  with  several  Haida  carved  wooden  columns.  The  carved 
wooden  mortuary  columns  erected  iu  front  of  the  Maori  houses  ai  o  also 
suggestive,  but  it  is  safe  to  say  that  while  all  this  is  not  in  one  sense 
accidental,  yet  the  resemblances  and  similarities  are  as  likely  to  have 
arisen  from  the  like  tendencies  of  the  human  mind  under  the  same  ev 
ternal  conditions,  or  environment  to  develop  along  parallel  line  as 
through  contact  of  these  tribes  or  through  a  common  origin. 

The  Kaigani. — The  Kaigani  are  a  branch  of  the  Haida  of  Queen  Char- 
lotte Islands,  having  for  some  cause  or  other  split  off  from  their  breth- 
ren and  settletl  across  Dixon  Entrance  on  the  southern  end  of  PrincB 
of  Wales  Island  and  adjacent  archipelago.  As  near  as  can  be  figured 
from  the  Indian  accounts,  this  must  have  happened  at  the  least  one- 
hundred  and  fifty  years  ago.  Their  three  principal  villages  now  are 
llowkan,  Kliu(iuan  and  Kasaan.  Howkan  is  a  thriving  village,  with 
a  winter  population  of  about  three  hundred.  Under  the  ministration 
of  the  Itev.  J.  L.  Gould,  of  the  Presbyterian  Board  of  Missions,  it  is 
fast  losing  its  native  characteristics.  A  saw-mill  is  run  in  connection 
with  the  mission,  and  the  Indians  are  gradually  building  an  American 
village  in  rear  of  the  old  time  lodges.  Many  of  the  totemic  columns 
have  been  cut  down,  and  the  native  chj'.'acteristics.  are  fast  disap- 


'  Poole,  Queen  {llmrlotte  Islumls,  p.  !i37. 

H.  Mis.  U2,  pt.  2 2") 


386 


REPOKT   OP   NATIONAL   MUSEUM,  1888. 


bearing.  It  is  to  bo  said  iu  favor  of  tl  •?  new  order  of  things  that  Mr. 
Gould  has  fortunately  impressed  upon  this  village  the  stamp  of  his 
own  personal  qualities,  thriftiuess,  industrionsness,  fair  dealing,  sobri- 
ety, and  enterprise,  Just  below  Howkau  is  the  village  of  Koiangla^, 
consisting  of  three  houses  and  several  interesting  totemic  columns. 
The  population,  made  up  of  a  few  families,  will  soon  be  absorbed 
in  that  of  Howkan.  Nearly  opposite  Koianglas,  on  Dall  Island,  and 
also  situated  on  Eaigani  strait  is  the  site  of  the  old  time  ^illr^ge  of 
Dat-ghaya.  On  the  southern  end  of  Dall  Island,  just  north  of  Cape 
Muzon  (the  extreme  southern  r-oint  of  Alaska)  is  the  small  village  of 
Kaigani.  The  winter  residence  of  the  former  population  is  now  at 
Howkan.  There  are  seven  or  eight  houses,  which  are  occupied  only  at 
certain  seasons  of  the  year,  but  there  are  no  tCemic  columns.  Klieu- 
quau  or  Kliuquan  is  said  to  be  about  half  as  large  as  Howkan,  but  to 
have  retained  its  native  characteristics  almost  intact.  At  the  south- 
ern entrance  to  (3holmondeIey  sound  is  the  Bite  of  the  abandoned  vil- 
lage of  Ghasina  or  Chachina.  There  is  ouly  one  house  there  now  and 
the  stumps  and  remains  of  mortuary  columns.  Early  voyagers  de- 
scribe it  as  a  populous  village  in  the  early  part  of  this  century.  At  the 
head  of  Easa-an  Bay,  at  what  is  called  Karbo  Bay,  is  a  small  village, 
called  by  some  authorities  Kasaan.  Kasa-aii  proper  is,  however,  on 
Skowl  Arm,  a  branch  of  the  bay.  Being  somewhat  oif  the  steamer 
route,  and  the  missionaries  never  having  settled  there,  Easa-an  has 
preserved  its  native  characteristics  more  markedly  than  any  other  vil- 
lage in  Alaska.  Just  above  Kasaan  Bay,  at  Tolstoj  Bay,  is  the  north- 
ern limit  of  the  Kaigani  territory  on  Prince  of  V^^iles  Island,  as  the 
adjoining  arm,  Thome  Bay,  is  in  dispute  between  the  Stikines  and 
Kaigani.  Tlevak  straits,  on  the  other  side  of  the  island,  is  the  northern 
limit  on  the  west  shore.  The  hunting  and  fishing  grounds,  as  claimed 
by  the  different  tribes  in  Alaska,  are  as  accurately  plotted  in  Chart  II 
as  the  data  at  hand  will  admit.  From  Admiralty  Island  south  the 
writer  has  relied  on  his  personal  knowledge,  based  on  inquiry  in  that 
region.  The  duty  of  the  government  iu  recognizing  the  Indian  titles 
to  these  lands  held  by  them  for  generations  in  the  different  families  seems 
very  clear,  and  an  inquiry  into  the  subject  wo'  Ul  not  be  amiss  in  con- 
nection with  all  governmental  investigations  and  reports  on  this  region. 

As  outlined  in  the  synopsis  of  this  paper,  there  are  several  chapters 
which  ought  to  be  added,  to  complete  the  study  of  the  ethnology  of 
this  region.  The  character  of  the  work  y«'t  to  be  done  is  such  as  to 
call  for  action  by  the  government  in  undertaking  it  on  a  large  scale. 
Linguistically,  considerable  has  been  accomplished.  But  with  regard 
to  the  traditions,  religious  beliefs  and  practices,  folklore  myths,  totemic 
subdivisions,  shamanistic  practices,  fetishism,  particularly  all  the  local 
or  tribal  variations  of  each,  there  is  a  vast  deal  to  be  done. 

If  what  is  here  submitted  will  accomplish  no  more  than  to  call  atten- 
tion to  the  little  known  concerning  the  Indians  about  Dixon  Entrance, 
the  author's  effort  will  not  have  been  in  vain. 


■iiiiili 


Cape 


Chart  I. 


BASED  ON 

U.  S.  Coast  Survey  Sheet  No.  701. 
lORTHWEST    COAST   OF   AMERICA, 

DIXON  ENTRANCE  TO  CAPE  ST.  ELIAS. 


CompiledLfhonv 

Sanorotti  Hbrka,fkitit'c7iaces,  Xol.l. 
nOvffs  Report.  Cefisus  of  1880. 
Holts  by  the  Author,  t885.  '86  and.  '87. 


I.  Tlingit,  (Koloshan). 


I.moud. 

^.rdhxjua:. 

S.Lituya-. 

V  ChdhoiC. 

S.Takoo. 

G.Auk. 

I.Uoonya . 

e.SiOui. 

9.  Kootmilioo. 

lO.Hake. 

H.SUkine. 

IZJfanga.. 

li.Port  SlcnaH . 

ii.Ton^assI^'^"' 

KHaJbdaJHaidwi) 

iS.  Kaiganl.  'il.  H<xida.  (profxr.) 

M.  Tsinislnait 


16.  Naase. 
m.Skoenn. 


n.  Tsimshian  (promr). 
W.  Scbassu . 


MM 


■MMMMM 


MHHM 


mmeam 


Report  of  National  Muteum,  18S8.— Niblack. 


mm 


tm- 


\ 


i^Oi 


^OmMmmmm^uaiMiMtlllifMt^ 


m 


mmM 


Ktem^-'w  ' 


J 


-t ^ — 

Chart  II. 

BASED  ON 

U.  S.  Coast  Survey  Sheet  No.  700. 

?THWEST    COAST    OF   AMERICA, 

i 

CAPE  FLATTERY  TO  DIXON  ENTRANCE. 


Compiledfhom, 
I.  QeologUalandNahaalHUtXiryS'jrvey^ 

COMuta. Maf>  by  Wr.ToUnie  •  OM Q<wsofu 
n.  lialnduuwrsta/n/ne.  wn  livtcoiwer  Id  und. 

an/derliustc  nn.SrUisK.Columbixi,J>r  F 

Boaa. 
M.CfuvC  of  Department  oftthnolo^f  V  S  Nat 
wnalMuseu/>i.  Pnf.  0  T Mason. Curator. 

Shorymg  lacatton-  oflndtm  Stocks. 

I.  Coast  SaJisfuui. 
K.  WaJtas/ian  (Hutkaii). 
^  lITKtraJuuCl.iffaeltiuiuin). 

irBiltfidoL ,  fSahshan). 
V.TiUnshUuv* 
Vl.Kauianr 
Iff,  TUnffit.'  (Koloshan/).  _ 

» .Sec  Chart  I- 
^  Jaruuuyl^/88S. 


..tmt^^mmm^ritMV^t^^^''^ 


r  J 


Rtport  of  Nitional  MuMum,  1888.— Niblick. 


Chart  II. 

BASED  ON 

U.  S.  Coast  Survey  Sheet  No.  700. 


